THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


ft  0.  Bk««* 

sr   - Vva*8 


J  J    •- 


ISAAC    PITMAN'S 

COMPLETE    PHONOGRAPHIC 

INSTRUCTOR. 


ISAAC    PITMAN'S 

COiAf PLET E  P HONOG IUPH1C 

INSTRUCTOR. 

DESIGNED    FOR   CLASS   oil   SELF-INSTRUCTION. 


ISAAC!     PITMAN, 

(Till:    INVENTOR  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.) 
AUTHOR  OP  "THE    PHONOGRAPHIC  DICTIONARY,"    "REPORTER'S 
ASSISTANT,"      "PHONOGRAPHIC    PHRASE    BOOK,"     ETC.; 
AND    EDITOR   OP  "THE  PHONETIC  JOURNAL." 


REVISED    EDITION. 


x  i:  \v    fork  : 

ISAAC    PITMAN    &    SONS.   Tm:   Phonographic  Depot, 

33  Union  Square. 

Boston  :   W.  E.  Hickox,  Pierce  Building. 

Canada  :  Tub  Copp,  Clare  Co.,  Limited,  Toronto. 

1894. 


Copyright,  1894, 
By    ISAAC    PITMAN. 


Entered  according  to  Act  op  Congress,  in  the  year  1893, 

By    ISAAC   PITMAN, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress  at  Washington 


All  tights  reserved. 


Copyright  in  England. 


Press  of  .T.  J.  Little  &  Co 
Astor  Pll  it,  New  Sorb 


i 

►"  "  Phonography  is  so  exceedingly  simple  as  to  be  easily  learned  by  :iny- 
•>•'!  one  of  ordinary  capacity;  and  if  it  be  learned  by  a  very  large  number  of 
tr»  the  people,  the  public  benefits  to  be  derived  from  it  are  entirely  incal- 
Z3  culable.  This  art  appears  to  me  likely  to  tend  to  increase  the  love  of 
reading  and  writing  and  of  education  generally;  and  it  seems  to  have 
sprung  up  at  a  time  when  it  wasmost  needed."—  Bight  Hon.  John  Bright. 

iil 


449486 


KEY   TO   ISAAC   PITMAN'S   COMPLETE   PHONOGRAPHIC 
INSTRUCTOR. 

This  work,  contains  a  Key  to  all  the  Exercises,  and  Answers  to  the 
Review  Questions.     Uniform  with  the  "  Instructor.''    68  pp..  cloth. 

Price,  50  cents. 


INTRODUCTION. 

THE  system  of  shorthand  writing  presented  in  this 
work,  was  first  published  by  the  Inventor  on  t lie 
15th  November,  ISoT,  under  the  title  of  "Stenographic 
Sound-hand."  The  second  edition  appeared  on  the  10th 
January,  1840,  in  the  form  of  an  engraved  plate  with  the 
title  of  "Phonography,  or  Writing  by  Sound,  being  also 
A  New  and  Natural  System  of  Shorthand,  invented 
and  drawn  by  Isaac  Pitman."  In  the  succeeding  half- 
century,  the  Inventor  lias  published  a  large  number  of 
works  containing  presentations  of  Phonography,  from 
leaflets  and  primers  to  comprehensive  treatises  dealing 
with  the  entire  system. 

This  work  belongs  to  the  latter  category,  and  is 
designed  to  furnish,  within  the  compass  of  a  volume  of 
handy  size,  a  complete  presentation  of  Phonography, 
including  all  those  principles  of  abbreviation  which 
have  caused  Pitman's  Shorthand  to  be  universally  adopted 
wherever  tin-  English  language  prevails,  on  account  of  its 
extreme  brevity  and  legibility.  There  are  also  embodied 
in  this  volume  all  those  valuable  improvements  in  the 
system,  the  results  of  practical  experience  in  the  use  of 
the  art.  and  of  careful  experiments  conducted  by  the 
Inventor  during  the  past  fifty-five  years.  The  general 
plan  of  the  "Instructor "  makes  it  equally  serviceable 
for  self-tuition  and  for  use  under  a  teacher.  Every  part 
of  the    system    is    explained  in    the    simplest    and    clearest 


Vlll  INTRODUCTION. 

manner  possible;  each  principle  is  illustrated  by  exer- 
cises, and  the  student's  knowledge  is  tested  at  succeed- 
ing stages  by  questions.  In  addition  to  leading  the 
learner  by  easy  steps  to  the  briefest  style  of  Phonography, 
a  large  amount  of  information  is  included  which  will 
familiarize  him  with  a  wide  range  of  shorthand  work. 

Phonography,  as  its  name  implies,  is  a  method  of 
writing  by  sound,  as  distinguished  from  the  established 
orthography  of  the  English  language.  The  accepted 
mode  of  spelling  is  so  far  removed  from  any  apparent 
attempt  to  represent  the  sounds  of  speech,  that  this,  its 
original  purpose,  has  almost  ceased  to  be  evident.  The 
common  orthography  is  defective  in  means  for  represent- 
ing several  sounds,  and  the  symbols  it  does  employ  are 
used  in  many  contradictory  senses.  It  must  be  obvious, 
therefore,  that  a  system  of  shorthand  based  on  the  Eng- 
lish alphabet  must  exhibit  these  imperfections  in  a 
marked  degree.  Phonography  (from  cpoov?},  phone,  voice, 
and  ypaq)?},  gnqihe,  writing)  is,  however,  founded  on  a 
scientific  analysis  of  vocal  sounds,  and  with  its  "alpha- 
bet of  nature,"  the  writer  is  able  to  record  on  paper  an 
accurate  representation  of  spoken  language.  While  Isaac 
Pitman's  Shorthand,  by  its  phonetic  accuracy  and  its 
practical  principles  of  abbreviation,  is  eminently  suited 
for  the  professional  shorthand  writer,  it  is  also  especially 
useful  for  every  description  of  written  communication. 
It  is,  indeed,  in  general  employment  for  the  various  pur- 
poses of  every-day  life,  for  correspondence,  for  making 
notes  and  extracts,  and  for  composition  of  all  kinds. 
That,  Phonography  is  admirably  adapted  for  this  purpose 
is  apparent  from  the  fact  that  its  simple  geometrical 
forms  can,  :il  the  lowest  computation,  be  written  with 
one-sixth  of  the  trouble,  and  in  one-third  of  the  time, 
Longhand  requires. 

The  present  "uncertain  and  unscientific  mode  of 
\  riling,"   to   quote    Professor  Max   Midler's   designation 


INTRODUCTION.  IX 

of  the  common  spelling,  is  not  the  only  hindrance  to 
facility  in  written  communication.  The  characters  em- 
ployed in  ordinary  writing  arc  too  long  and  complicated 

to  admit  of  their  being  written  with  expedition.  In 
Pitman's  Shorthand,  the  sounds  of  the  English  language 
are  represented  by  the  briefest  possible  signs,  and  Pho- 
nography, therefore,  furnishes  a  system  of  writing  by 
which  the  operations  of  the  mind  and  of  the  hand  are 
brought  into  close  correspondence,  and,  while  capable  of 
being  written  with  the  speed  of  the  most  rapid  distinct 
articulation,  it  can  be  read  with  the  certainty  and  ease 
of  common  longhand.  In  addition,  phonographic  manu- 
script-, are  easily  read  by  any  person  acquainted  with 
the  system,  and  hence  the  art  is  extensively  employed 
for  letter  writing. 

In   the   United    States,   where  a  number  of  publishers    ' 
have   issued    the   system  with   slight   alterations,   97  per   j 
cent,  of  the  shorthand  writers  use  either  Isaac  Pitman's 
Phonography    or    an    American    presentation    of   it.      In 
Great   Britain,    Pitman's    Shorthand    is   every  year   more   \ 
extensively  taught  and  practised;    it   is  used  by  93  per 
cent,  of  newspaper  reporters  and  98  per  cent,   of  short- 
hand clerks.     The  percentage  of  phonographers  in  Aus- 
tralia is  96.      Phonography  has   been    adapted  to  eleven 
foreign  languages. 

The  Publishers  desire  to  take  this  opportunity  to  ten- 
der their  hearty  thanks  to  the  large  number  of  expert 
writers  and  teachers  of  Phonography,  who  have  offered 
valuable  suggestions  for  the  improvement  of  this  work, 
during  its  passage  through  the  press. 


CONTENTS. 

Part  I.  taoe 

Directions  to  the  Student 1 

The  Alphabet 3 

Table  of  Consonants 4 

Joined  Consonants ....  10 

< It  and  upward  R 12 

Long  Vowels 1-1 

Short  Vowels 19 

Diphthongs 23 

Grammalogues 25 

Additional  Signs  for  Sand  Z 28 

St  and  St i'  loops  and  Sic  circle 34 

7i'  and  L  hooks 38 

Irregular  Double  Consonants 45 

N  and  F  hooks 49 

-  Tioti  hook 54 

The  Aspirate     58 

Upward  and  Downward  R  and  L 02 

The  Halving  Principle     66 

Table  of  Single  and  Double  Consonants 72 

W  and  T  Series  of  Diphthongs 73 

Vocalization  of  PI  and  Pr  Series  of  Consonants.  .  77 

Double-Length  Principle 80 

Prefixes 83 

Affixes 8(5 

Additional  Methods  of  Vocalization 89 

List  of  Grammalogues 92 

Contractions 99 

Phraseography 104 

Punctuat  ion 107 

Method  of  Practice 108 

Shorthand  Exercises 110 


"art  II.  page 

Speed  Practice 115 

Writing  Materials 119 

Phraseography 1 22 

Writing  in  Position 124 

Reporting  Grammalognes  127 

Significant  Remarks 132 

Transcription 1 33 

Positive  and  Negative  Words 134 

Omission  of  Con  and  Com  Prefixes 136 

Intersected  Words 138 

The  Representation  of  Figures 140 

List  of  Reporting  Contractions 142 

Compounds  of  Here,  There,  and  Where 149 

List  of  General  Phraseograms 150 

Business  Phrases  and  Contractions 163 

Business  Letters 166 

Law  Phrases 170 

Legal  Correspondence 174 

Practical  Hints  in  Legal  Work 176 

Theological  Phrases 193 

Latin  Quotations 202 

French  Words  and  Phrases 206 

Words  requiring  insertion  of  Vowel 208 

List  of  Similar  Words 209 

Reporting  Exercises 214 

Applied  Phonography 246 

Typewriting  and  Shorthand 249 

Index 251 


[saac   pitman's 

Complete   Phonographic 

Instructor. 


part  i. 


CHAPTER   I. 
DIRECTIONS    TO    THE    STUDENT. 

1.  The  art  of  Phonography  may  be  easily  acquired. 
Experience  has  shown  that  its  principles  are  mastered  by 
most  learners  in  a  short  time,  and  that  an  hour's  daily 
practice  in  reading  and  writing,  for  two  or  three  months, 
will  enable  the  student  to  write  it  with  some  degree  of 
facility.      Speed  in  writing  comes  only  by  practice. 

2.  Phonography  can  be  learned,  and  is  learned  by  thou- 
sands, from  the  Instruction  Books  without  the  aid  of  a 
teacher,  and  the  Text-Books  are  compiled  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  those  who  cannot  obtain  the  services  of 
a  shorthand  instructor.  But  if  the  student  can  obtain 
personal  instruction  or  attend  the  classes  of  an  efficient 
teacher,  he  will  acquire  a  knowledge  of  the  system  more 
rapidly.  If  any  difficulty  is  experienced  in  finding  a 
teacher  or  school,  the  publishers  will   be  pleased   to  put 


2  DIRECTIONS    TO    THE    STUDENT.  3-4 

the  student  in  communication  with  one  on  receipt  of  a 

stamped  and  addressed  envelope. 

3.  Phonography  is  best  written  upon  ruled  paper,  and 
either  a  pen  or  a  pencil  may  be  used,  but  in  reporting-  a 
pen  will  be  found  the  most  convenient.  As,  however, 
the  shorthand  writer  is  sometimes  so  situated  that  he  can- 
not use  a  pen,  he  should  accustom  himself,  at  times,  to  re- 
port with  a  pencil.  The  pen  or  pencil  should  be  held  as 
for  longhand  writing,  the  elbow  being  turned  out,  so  that 
the  letter  \  J>  can  be  struck  with  ease.  The  writer  must 
uot  let  the  wrist  rest  upon  the  desk  or  note-book.  The 
bearing  of  the  arm  on  the  edge  of  the  desk  should  be  at 
the  middle  of  the  fore-arm  ;  this  gives  the  greatest  free- 
dom of  movement.  The  penholder  should  be  held  lightly, 
and  the  writer  should  sit  in  front  of  the  desk,  with  the 
paper  parallel  with  the  edge  of  the  table.  Select  a  good 
and  suitable  pen,  smooth  paper,  and  be  accurate  in  1  lie 
length  and  direction  of  the  shorthand  letters  :  the  result 
will  be  a  neat  and  legible  style  of  writing.  The  learner 
should  bear  in  mind  that  it  is  not  sufficient  to  know  a 
particular  sign  or  rule,  but  that  the  knowledge  must  be 
so  wrought  into  the  mental  constitution  by  writing  the 
sign,  or  the  shorthand  outline,  that  it  can  be  repeated  at 
any  moment.  Till  a  word  at  once  suggests  the  shorthand 
form,  some  delay  must  necessarily  arise  before  its  outline 
can  be  placed  on  the  paper  ;  therefore,  no  opportunity 
should  he  lost  of  practising  Phonography. 

4.  The  student  should  bo  very  careful  not  to  write  the 
shorthand  characters  rapidly  at  the  outset.  When  his 
hand  has  become  accustomed  to  trace  with  correctness 
and  elegance  the  simple  geometric  forms  of  the  letters, 
he  will  find  no  difficulty  in  writing  them  quickly  ;  but  if 
he  lets  his  anxiety  to  write  FAST  overcome  his  resolution 
to  write  WELL,  In1  will  not  only  be  longer  in  at tabling 
speed,  but  will  always  have  to  lament  the  illegibility  of 
his  writ  in1'-. 


5-7  THE    ALPHABET.  3 

5.  The  secret  of  success  in  shorthand  is  practice. 
The  exercises  given  in  this  book  should  be  written  and  re- 
written until  the  pupil  is  familiar  with  the  form  of  every 
word.  All  the  illustrative  words  in  the  text  should  be 
written  in  addition  to  the  exercises.  At  least  one  hour 
daily  must  be  given  to  practice,  and  this  practice  should 
be  regular  ;  one  hour  daily  is  much  better  than  two 
hours  every  other  day.  In  learning  the  Alphabet,  each 
letter  as  it  is  written  should  be  pronounced  aloud,  and  in 
subsequent  rules,  each  example  or  illustrative  word  should 
be  traced,  either  with  the  pen  or  the  finger,  as  it  is  read. 
The  pupil  is  cautioned  not  to  look  ahead,  or  to  attempt 
to  read  exercises  in  advance  of  his  knowledge,  as  such  a 
course  is  likely  to  retard  his  progress. 

(i.  From  the  commencement  of  his  study,  the  student 
should  keep  before  his  mind  the  fact  that  be  is  learning 
to  write  by  sound.  The  ordinary  spelling,  with  its 
many  irregularities  and  inconsistencies,  will  afford  him 
little  guidance  in  phonographic  notation.  At  every  step 
he  takes  in  the  study  of  Phonography,  the  student  should 
exercise  his  reasoning  powers,  and  accustom  himself  to 
make  a  mental  analysis  of  the  consonant  and  vowel 
sounds  which  compose  the  words  he  desires  to  write  in 
shorthand.  This  will  greatly  facilitate  his  progress,  and 
will  ensure  correct  writing. 


THE  ALPHABET. 

7.  Phonography,  the  invention  of  Isaac  Pitman  in 
18o7,  is  based  upon  an  analysis  of  the  English  spoken  lan- 
guage. Its  consonants  and  vowels  arc  so  arranged  as  to 
show,  as  far  as  possible,  their  mutual  relations.  In  the 
consonants,  /,  stands  first,  b}  next  the  rest  follow  in  their 
natural  order  :  firsl  the  stopped  or  explosive  letters,  pro- 
ceeding from  the  lips  to  the  throat  ;  then  the  continu- 
1* 


1 

TABLE    OF    CONSONANTS. 

t 

Letter. 

Shorthand 
Sign. 

Name. 

4s 

in 

P 

\ 

pee 

rope 

post 

B 

\ 

bee 

roie 

ioast 

■2 

T 

| 

tee 

fa/e 

Zip 

u 

§< 

D 

| 

dee 

i'a</e 

</ip 

H* 

CH 

chay 

Vtr/i 

<7<est 

^ 

J 

/ 

jay 

vd,Ji  • 

,/Vst 

K 



kay 

leeh 

cane 

V 

G 



gay 

lea</ue 

grain 

' 

F 

V 

ef 

sa./i' 

./at 

V 

V 

vee 

saw 

rat 

^ 

Til 

( 

ith 

\viva//d 

///i.^rh 

c 

TH 

( 

thee 

wrea^Ae 

///y 

e 

S 

z 

) 
) 

ess 

Zee 

hiss 
his 

seal 
zeal 

SH 

J 

isl, 

vicious 

sAe 

ZH 

J 

zhee 

vision 

■3/ 

II 

M 

, — s 

cm 

seem 

met 

N 

en 

big 

sec;/ 
In//'/ 

reet 

11 

L 

up 

el 

fa// 

fight 

I1 

R 

\     •"  "1' 

ar 

for 

right 

down 

!| 

w 

"1' 

way 

IC<-\, 

Y 

<<"  up 

yay 

//I '(, 

Aspirate. 

11 

7  (r   up 

hay 

high 

down 


«T,V 


8-12  THE   ALPHABET.  5 

.nits,  in  the  same  order";  and  lastly  the  nasals,  liquids, 
coalescents,  and  aspirate,  us  in  the  Table  on  the  opposite 
page. 

S.  The  first,  group  of  eight  letters,  represented  by 
straight  strokes,  is  called  "  cxplodents, "  because  the  voice 
is  exploded  through  organs  (the  lips,  etc.)  previously  in 

close  contact. 

!).  The  next  group  of  eight  is  called  "continuants,"  be- 
cause the  breath  or  voice  continues  to  How  through  the 
partially  closed  organs. 

10.  The  "  nasals"  are  produced  by  closing  the  lips  and 
sending  the  sound  through  the  nose.  The  "  liquids"  flow 
into  union  with  other  letters,  and  thus  make  double  let- 
ters or  consonantal  diphthongs.  The  "coalescents"  pre- 
cede vowels  and  coalesce  with  them.  The  "aspirate"  is 
a  breathing  upon  the  following  vowel. 

I  1 .  Sixteen  only  out  of  t  he  1  wenty-four  consonants  are 
essentially  different.  They  are  p,  /,  ch,  /■;  j\  //>,  g,  *//  ; 
in,  n,  in/:  i,  r  ;  ir,  >/ ;  h.  The  articulations  in  the  pairs 
1 1  and  l>,  /  and  il,  /'and  V,  rir.,  are  t  hi'  same,  hut  the  sound 
is,  so  to  speak,  light  in  the  first,  and  heavy  in  the  second 
letter  of  each  pair.  The  letters  of  each  pair  are  repre- 
sented by  similar  strokes,  but  that  chosen  for  the  second 
is  written  thick,  instead  of  thin  ;  ;is  \  ]i,  \  h,  |  t,  \  </, 
\__  f,  V_  >\  etc.;  and  thus,  not  only  is  the  memory 
burdened  with  fewer  signs,  but  the  mind  perceives  that 
a  thin  stroke  corresponds  with  a  light  articulation^  and  a 
thick  stroke  with  a  limn/  articulation.  Ch  and  /are  double 
consonants,  formed  by  the  union  of  ,,  sh,  and  </,  ,://,  as 
may  be  heard  in  fetch,  cheap  ;  edge,  jet.  Hence  in  the 
alphabet  they  follow  t,  */,  their  first  elements.  Through- 
out this  hook  whatever  relates  to  the  light  consonants, 
relates  also  to  the  correspond  inn'  heavy  letters. 

12.  The  consonants  should  he  written  about  one-sixth 
of  an  inch  long,  as  in  these  pages.  Care  should  Ik;  taken 
to  form  the  curved  thick   letters,    when  standing  alone. 


6  THE   ALPHABET.  13-17 

thus  V.  0,  )  -•  If  made  heavy  throughout  they  look 
clumsy  :  they  should  be  thick  in  the  middle  only,  and 
taper  off  at  each  end,  except  when  joined  to  a  thick  Id- 
ler, as  \ r.  g. 

13.  All  the  exercises  that  follow  must  be  carefully  writ- 
ten out,  the  narru  of  each  shorthand  letter  being  pronounced 
aloud  as  it  is  written.  The  pupil  must  always  call  the 
consonants  by  their  phonetic  names  :  thus,  "ch  "  is  to  be 
named  chay,  not  see  aitch;  "  g"  gay,  natjee;  "ng"  ing, 
not  enjee. 

14.  Horizontal  letters  are  written  from  left  to  right  on  the 
line. 

15.  Perpendicular  letters  are  written  downward,  resting 
on  the  line. 

16.  Sloping  letters  are  written  downward,  except  upward 
?',  w,  p,  and  upward  h,  which  are  written  upward,  from 
the  line.  The  letters  p,  h,  i\  v,  sh,  zh,  I,  and  downward  r, 
are  written  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees  from  the  horizontal: 
ch,  /',  and  downward  h,  are  written  at  an  angle  of  GO 
degrees;  and  upward  r,  w,  y,  upward  //,  30  degrees.  The 
letter  (      /,  when  standing  alone,  is  written  upward,  and 

J  sh,  downward. 

17.  If  the  pupil  cannot  produce  a  fair  copy  of  the  letters 
in  Exercise  1  at  the  first  trial,  he  should  write  the  page 
several  times,  and  vary  the  practice  by  writing  the  letters 
in  irregular  order  ;  thus, 

\        I  /       ~      ' 


exercise  on  consonants^ 

Exercise:  1. 
i  To  be  written  by  the  student.) 


V,B          \            \            \            \ 

\\ 

T.I>        M         M         II         II         M 

1 1 

OH,  J  [down]     //        //       //       // 

// 

K,  G 



F.V   V\    V.V.    ^     C.V. 

W 

TH,  TH  (  <          (  (          (   (          (  < 

(( 

S.Z     )  )       )  )       )  >       )  ) 

)) 

sn,7.nJJ     J  J     J  J      J  J 

JJ 

LCupir  rrrrrrrr 

R  [down]  ^     ~^\     ~^  [up]   y 

W[np]      </     a^  tS*    €/'    tS    c/     o^     </ 

r[up]    s  S  S  <s  s  S  <y  <y 

H  [down]      1111       [up]    <S^    <s^    *^    y 


EXERCISE   OX   CONSONANTS. 


18-19 


18.  As  the  letters  of  the  Shorthand  Alphabet,  with  the 
exception  of  ^  ^  "J  ^  arc  straight  lines  and  seg- 
ments or  parts  of  a  circle,  the  following  Diagrams  will 
assist,  in  fixing  them  in  the  pupil's  mind.  He  should 
cop}-  the  Diagrams,  and  write  the  letters  in  longhand 
close  to  the  shorthand  forms.  The  student  will  learn  in 
a  subsequent  lesson  that  the  thick  character  s-^  [there 
being  no  heavy  simple  sound  corresponding  with  ^—S\  is 
used  to  represent  the  double  consonant  mp  or  ////',  and 
r     the  double  consonant  //•. 


^™  \fc_  ^  \W 


19.  To  remember  tlie  strokes  for  tli  and  8,  note  that  ) 
is  the  curve  on  the  right  side  of  jA  and  that  I  and  r 
form  the  /eft  and  right  sides  of  an  arch  ft\ 

EXEKCISE    2. 

Copy  the  slwrthand   letters   and  write   the  longhand    letter 
afU  r  each. 

i.  \*  \»,  i  i     /   .  —  c/  «-  ;  *- 

2.    ^    \     ^      |  \      .     -      |      ^    , ,       _    /    _ 

3. ' .  v  (  (  )  )  j  j  _  _  ^  r  ~\ 

4.  ^  _  r  v.  (  w  )  ~  (  J  v_  j  ) 

5.  \  (    -  _  /  r  ^  )  i  j  )  i  « 

e.  \  _  ;  v_  ^  /.-_,-  ^  ,-  -  i 

s.  i  —  i  _  \  /  \  / ;  ^  ^  ^  / 


EXF.RCISE   ON   CONSONANTS. 


Exercise  3. 


Write  the  longhand  letters,  and  plact  the  shorthand  letter 
after  each.  In  thin  and  subsequent  Exercises,  ifu  letter 
(  named  '•////."  is  represented  by  ltth;"  and  (  named 
"  thee,"  by  "  th." 

1.  t,  ell,  b,  g,  (1,  p,  h  (down),  lit;',  s,  ///,  in,  y,  n,  1,  r  (down). 

2.  tli,  z,  r  (up),  sli,  j.  k,  1",  \v,  li  (up),  zh,  v,  l>,  t,  k,  d,  f,  w. 

3.  j,  z,  v,  s,  in,  r  (up),  1,  h  (down),  p,  n,  cli,  g,  ///,  z,  th,  sh. 

4.  tli,  r  (down),  g,  th,  v,  in,  cli,  y,  j,  t,  l>,  a,  d,  zh,  sh,  p. 

Review. 

1.  Into  how  many  groups  of  consonants  is  the  alphabet 

of  Phonography  divided  ?     Name  them. 

2.  Give  some  words  in  which   the  following  sounds  oc- 

cur : — ith,  thee;  hay,  gay;  inn/,  //hi/  ;  chay,  jay. 

3.  Explain  the  terms  "  liquid  "  and  •'continuant." 

4.  How  is  the  upward  /•  distinguished  from  ch  .' 

5.  Give  the  rules  for  writing  horizontal,  perpendicular, 

and  sloping  letters. 


10 


JOINED    CONSONANTS. 


20-2:; 


CHAPTER   II. 


JOINED    CONSONANTS. 


20.  Whkn  consonants  arc  joined,  they  should  be  writ- 
ten without  lifting  the  pen,  the  second  letter  beginning 
where  the  first  ends  and  so  on  ;  thus, 

L_uoti_  v_  v_.  y  r\  v  r\  l  o 

tk,  fm,        pk,       tl,      It,      pi,       Ip,      ak,     I  ah. 

21.  Consonants  when  joined  are  written  in  the  same 
direction  as  when  standing  alone,  up  strokes  being  always 
written    upward,    and    down    strokes    downward  ;  thus, 

I  ////  not  ^— J  .     L  and  8k,  however,  when  joined  to  other 
letters,  may  be  written  cither  upward  or  downward;  thus, 


£ 


c  ^v   X 


r 


I  in,       Im,       Ik,         Ik,      shf,     ah  tn,     ah  I,      hi,       Ing. 

22.  The  first  of  t  wo  descending  letters  should   rest,  on 
the  line  ;  1 1ms, 

I     tch,      /     rht,    .\.  pt,    ./...    chp,    .V.    ft,     ->     pth. 


23.  When  a  straight  stroke  is  repeated  there  must  be 
no  break  between  the  two  letters;  thus, 


vv/ / 


pp,     bb,  ch  <■/,,)),  hie,       gg,        td,     kg,        bpt     <//. 


24-27  JOINED   CONSONANTS. 

24.    A  curved  consonant  is  repeated  thus, 


II 


mm,  nn,  //,  ff,  88,  /•/•. 

25.  The  lirsi  of  two  ascending  letters  should  start  from 
i  lie  line  ;  thus, 


yr, 


//,        Ir,        rl. 


26.  A  horizontal  letter  followed  by  a  descending  letter 
is  written  above  the  line,  so  that  the  down-stroke  rests 
on  the  line;  thus, 


.ZL11-  J__ "Z\...2^..r\.. 

gt,       mf,       ii  ch,     hp,     mr,       nb. 

27.  A  horizontal  letter  followed  by  an  ascending  letter 

is  written  on  the  line ;  thus, 

inr.       iii/r,        hi,         //•,         ,'//,  km. 


Exercise  4. 

Write  iln   longhand  letters  <ni>t  place  ///.'  shorthand   /lifers 
after  each. 

1.  p  t,  p  k,  (I  ///,  p  sh,  b  th,  p  1;  t  p,  I  k,  t  th,  t  m. 

2.  ch  p,  ch  k,  cli  1,  ch  in,  eh  n  ;  k  p,   k  t,  k  th,  k  sh,  k  m. 
:'..  f  p,  I'  eli,  I'  th,  f  m,  f  ,i,  f  1;  ///  ch,  th  k,  th  f,  th  m. 

4.  s  p,  s  k,  s  1,  s  in,  s  n  ;  sh  p,  sh  k,  sh  f,  sh  in. 

5.  in  p,  in  k,  in  I',  in  ///,  in  n,  in  1;  n  ]),  n  t,  n  ch,  n  k. 
(3.  n  f,  n  ///,  n  sh,  n  m;  1  p,   1  ch,  1  k,  1  f,  1  in;  w  p.  w  1. 
7.  }>  p,  t  t,  ch  ch,  k  k,  f  f,  s  s,  1  1,  in  in,  n  n,  r  r. 

S.   1'  in  1,  d  ///,  m  n  d,  f  1  ng,  y  r  k,  in  n  ///  1,  r  v  1,  t  1  in,  j  k  b. 


12 


AND    TPWARIl 


28-29 


CH  and    UPWARD    11. 

28.  The  upward  r  is  distinguished  from  eh  as  fol- 
lows:— r  is  written  upwards,  and  eh  downwards.  When 
r  and  ch  stand  alone,  r  slopes  a  little  from  the  hori- 
zontal,   and   ch    a    little    from    the    perpendicular;    thus, 

"  r,  /  eh.  The  stroke  naturally  takes  these  slopes 
when  struck  by  the  hand  upward  and  downward  re- 
spectively. 

29.  When  r  and  ch  are  joined  to  other  letters,  they  arc 
distinguished  by  the  direction  of  the  stroke,  and  the 
amount  of  slope  is  of  no  consequence;  thus, 


1 


L     A 


m  ch,       /•//,        ch  n,       /•/.      ch  t,      pr,        p  ch,       mr. 


Exercise  5. — R  and  CM  Combinations. 


0    > 


1.  \  peh,  \ypr,  A      n^     j       V      1      L 

2.  A       /I        ^      1     -/      / N^ 

3.  ^   v  ^  S    f 

4.  4      >       ^        S^     Vs     <~s 

5.  x.  ^  ^  r^  r\  -v    r 

6.  /        "V         X        ^         ^  ^ 


13 


Review. 

1.  How  are  joined  consonants  written? 

2.  Show  by  examples  how  I  and  sh  arc   written    when 

joined. 
:!.    What   is  the   position  of  the  first  of  two  descending 

strokes? 
■1.    How  are  straight  strokes  repeated?     Give  examples. 

5.  Where  does  the  first  of  two  ascending  strokes  begin? 

6,  Show  how  a  horizontal  letter  is  written  when  followed 

by  a  descending  letter,    and   when    followed  by   an 

ascending  letter. 
', .    State   the  distinction  between  ch   and   upward  /' when 

standing  alone. 
8.   How  are  ch  and  /■  distinguished  when  joined  to  other 

consonants? 


14  LONG    VOWELS.  30-31 


CHAPTER    III. 

LONG      VOWELS. 

30.  There  are  six  simple  long  vowels  in  the  English 
Language,  namely, — 

All,         EH,         EE  ;  AW,         OH,         00, 

as  heard  in  the  words 
Alms,        Ale,  Eel;  All,  Oak,        <><>/.<•. 

31.  The  first  three  are  represented  in  Phonography  by 
a  heavy  dot  placed  at  the  beginning,  middle,  or  end  of  a 
consonant  ;  and  the  last  three  by  a  short,  heavy  stroke  in 
the  same  positions.  These  dots  ami  dashes  are  written 
close  to,  but  not  touching  the  stroke  consonant  ;   llins, 

Ah,         Eh,         Ee,         Aw,         oh,         60. 

They  are  here  placed  against  the  phonographic  Letter  i 
in  order  to  indicate  their  position  as  first  place,  second 
place,  and  third  place  vowels.  They  should  all  he  pro- 
nounced as  single  sounds;  thus,  ah  as  in  alms  [not  a-aitch] ; 
eh  (a)  as  in  ape;  ee  as  in  eel;  <nr  as  in  awe  [not  a-doublt 
you]  ;  oh  as  in  owe  ;  00  as  in  ooze.  The  long  vowels  may 
lie  remembered  by  repeating  the  following  sentence: — 

Half    pay    he   thought   bo   poor. 

n/i,      i/t}    ee,       aw,       oh,    <>o. 


32-33  places  of  the  vowels.  15 

Places  of  the  Vowels. 

32.  When  a  vowel  is  placed  on  the  left-hand  side  of  a 
perpendicular  or  sloping  consonant,  it  is  read  before  the 
consonant;  and  when  placed  on  the  right-hand  side,  it  is 
read  after  the  consonant.  A  vowel  placed  above  a  hori- 
zontal letter,  is  read  before  the  consonant,  and  when 
placed  under,  is  read  after  the  consonant.  The  vowels 
are  written  at  the  side  of  the  consonant,  in  three  places— 
at  the  beginning,  middle,  ami  end;  the  beginning  of  the 
consonant,  whether  written  upward  or  downward,  being 
the  place  of  the  first  vowel-sign  ah  or  <ar.  Thus,  when 
the  letter  I  is  written  upward,  the  vowel  places  are 
reckoned  upward  ;  as,  f  ale,  ('  eel.  Vowels  placed  at 
the  beginning  of  a  consonant,  as  ah  and  aw,  are  called 
first-plact  vowels;  in  the  middle,  as  eh  and  oh,  second- 
place  vowels;  and  at  the  end,  as  ee  and  oo,  third-plaa 
vowels.  Their  places  are  indicated  in  the  following  Dia- 
grams by  the  figures  1,  '2  and  3. 

A    VOWEL    BEFORE    A    consonant. 
p  t  sh  I  k 

k  2i    3y    r 

(down)        (up) 


Si 


I     2    3 


A  vowel   AFTER   A   CONSONANT. 
p         t         sh  I  h 

(down)        (up) 
33.   The  vowel   dots   and    strokes    musl   he  written  at   a 

little  distance  from  the  consonant.  If  allowed  to  touch 
(except  in  a  few  cases  which  will  he  mentioned  hereafter), 
they  would  occasion  mistakes.     A  stroke-vowel  may  be 


10  WRITING    PHONETICALLY.  34 

written  at  any  angle  that  is  distinct ;  thus,  y_  orV_  foe  : 
/•.  or  /\  Joe. 

34.  The  English  alphabet  is  deficient  in  letters  to  rep- 
resent the  sounds  of  the  language.  For  instance,  it  has 
no  single  letter  to  represent  the  first  consonant  sound  in 
think,  shoe.  Neither  do  the  twenty-six  letters  of  the 
common  alphabet  always  represent  the  same  sounds. 
Thus,  a  is  used  for  six  different  sounds  in  maker,  father, 
man,  many,  trull,  want.  The  student  must,  therefore, 
write  words  by  the  shorthand  signs  representing  the 
sou  ml*  of  which  the  words  are  composed,  without  regard 
to  the  common  spelling.  In  transcribing  into  shorthand 
the  longhand  words  at  the  end  of  Exercise  6,  the  student 
should,  before  putting  pen  to  paper,  ask  himself  what  are 
the  elementary  sounds  heard  in  each  word,  and  then 
write  each  by  its  shorthand  sign.  In  the  word  though, 
for  instance,  he  will  notice  that  the  sounds  heard  are 
lh,,  and  oh.  These  are  what  he  has  to  write,  and  not  the 
letters  tee-aitch-oh-you-jee-aitch,  the  ordinary  way  of  rep- 
resenting the  word. 

Exercise   6. 
Wiih  flu  longhand  <r<>nl  after  the  shorthand,  as  in  line  1. 

1.  "I  did,  ^   aim,  •  eke,  ~\   oat,     I  ought,    j  are,   (     ale, 

2.  "^    air,     '\    oar,    —     .1     -a-      C     _!_    'I     \)    "^ 

3.-1      /     ^      -(      *r     X      X       ./      .)     ") 

4.  |"  day,    tn    may,     \,    \~  '     f'       — r         >    \ 

s.  (-  c-    c  r   r    )-  i   i  y    t 

6.  J   ...     «    ~-    .--    \      /      <-•    -r      > 

7.  Dough  J-  gay—-   she,  eel,  pea,  ease,  knee,  gnaw,  day. 

8.  Oak,  chew,  ache,  ought,   loo,  hoe  \h  down],  show. 

9.  Awed,  ail,  law,  though,  baa, Shaw, beau, owed,  Joe,  foe. 

10.    Know,  each,  mow,  maw,  ye, jaw,  nay, law,  yea,  bee,  fee. 


35-30 


PLATES    OF    THE    EON(i    VOWELS. 


17 


A    LONG    VdWKI,    BETWEEN    TWO    CONSONANTS. 

35.  PlRST  and   SECOND-PLACE  Long  vowels  arc  written 
after   the  first   consonant;    as    |__   talk,    not     d .    talk; 

I  gate,  not     'I  gate ;  /'       rake,  not  /       rake. 

36.  THIRD-PLACE  vowels  are   written  he/ore.   the   second 

consonant ;   as   I    •  team,   not   V—.  team;      \   teach,  not     ]• 
teach.  ''  ' 


LONG    VOWELS'    PLACES. 


y> 


Exercise  7—  Long   Vowels. 

Write  the  longhand  word  after  the  shorthand,  as  in  tine  1. 

1.        t-»  tome,    \ — ■•   &eff&,        /      Paul,         \    code,  \    mure. 


2.  V      NT     NT 

3.  V     "^      < 

4.  \       A        ^     ^ 


^  <<  -1 


7.     'x 


^    P    K    k  fl 

>     3 

s  ^ 


18  LONG    TOWELS. 


].\i.i;<  tsE  8 — Long  Vowels. 

In  this  and  subsequent  Exercises,  the  pupil  is  directed  by 
,i  small  capital  letter  when  to  write  the  letters  L  and  r 
downward. 

1.  Palm  (p  ah  m;  lis  not  pronounced),  balm,  calm. 

'I.  Shape,  shame,  faith,  bathe,  make,  fade,  date,  rage; 

:!.  Beecl),  cheap,  Liege,  thief,  feed,  beam,  theme,  neap. 

I.  Hawk  i  write  //  down),  laud,  tall,  talk  (t  air  &),  ball. 
5.  Poach,  coach,  both,  comb  (koh  m), toll, foam, coal,  joke. 
(i.  Boom,  doom,   food,  move,  tomb,  poop,  tooth,  cool. 

;.  Peep,  paid,  paii;,  babe,  bake,  teach,  taue;  dome,dooR. 

S.  Chalk,  choke;  jail,   jeei; ;  keyed,  coite ;  game,  gone. 

II.  Folk,  fame,  fool.,  fail;;  vague,  vote.  veai. ;  thieve, 
lit.  Shawl  (sh  and  /  upward),  shone,  zeal;  maim,  name. 

11.  Shoal,  lothe,  loi;c;  wrote,  rogue,  wreathe,  ream. 

12.  Weep,  weed,  ware  ;  yawi,,  yore  ;  heed,  heap,  hope  (h  tip). 

Review. 

1.  How  many  long  vowels  are  there.' 

2.  By  what  signs  are  they  represented? 
:;.    Name  them  in  their  order. 

I.   Explain  the  terms  first,  second,  and  third-place  vowels. 
5.  Give  examples  of  each. 

(i.  What  al'e  the  places  or  positions  of  vowels  ah,  ah, 
•  '■>.  ill,   iiir,  a  .' 

7.  Write  the  characters  for  p  and  /,  and  show  the  vowel 
places  before  and  after  them. 

S.  What  are  Hie  respective  positions  of  first,  second,  and 
third  place  vowels  between  the  following  con- 
sonants:1 

L    N     I  V  \     S 


;;  :;s 


siiokt    VOWELS. 


19 


ClIAI'TKlt    IV. 


SHORT     V  (>  W  E  LS. 


37.  Besides  the  six  long  vowels  already  explained,  there 
:ire  six  corresponding  short  vowel  sounds  in  the  English 
language.  There  are  the  vowel  sounds  heard  iapat,  pet, 
/nt;  not,  nut,  foot.  In  producing  these  sounds,  the  posi- 
tions of  the  vocal  organs  are  nearly  the  same  us  in  utter- 
ing the  long  vowels  in  palm,  pate,  peat;  nought,  note, 
food;  the  chief  difference  being  that  the  short  vowels  are 
more  rapidly  pronounced. 

The  short  sound  of  ah  in  palm  is  a  (say  (ih  quickly)  in  pal. 
The  short  sound  of  eh  in  pate  is  e  (say  eh  quickly)  in  pet. 
The  short  sound  of  ee  iii  peat  is  i  (say  ,,  quickly)  in  pit. 
The  short  sound  of  aw  in  nought  is  o  (say  aw  quickly)  in  not. 
The  short  sound  of  oh  in  note  is  nearly  u  (wA)  in  nut. 
The  short  sound  of  00  in /ood  (say  ooquickly)  is  o">  in  foot. 
By  drawling  a  word  containing  a  short  vowel,  the  corresponding  long 
vowel  will  be  heard.     ( 'ompare  pick,  peek  ;  COt,  Caught. 

08.  The  short  vowels  are  represented  by  dots  and  short 
strokes,  similar  to  those  employed  for  the  long  vowels, 
hut  made  light  to  indicate  their  short  sound,  thus: — 

Son/id 


Sound 


Sign 


■t       thai 

e        pen 


Sign 


0        ii"t 


u        m/M-ii    -i 


1 10      gooil 

The  order  of  the  short  vowels  may  be  remembered  by  saying: 

Tln/t   p<  11  is  not  ni'/eh  good. 


20  SHORT    VOWELS.  30-41 

39.  [nstead  of  calling  these  short  vowel  sounds  short  "//. 
short  eh,  short  ee,  etc.,  it  is  better  to  give  them  nanus  by 
adding  the  consonant  /  to  them;  thus,  at,  et,  it,  ot,  ut,  dot, 
in  the  same  manner  as  the;  consonant  sounds  are  named 
by  placing  a  vowel  either  before  or  after  them;  thus,  ''f,'1 
if;  "m,"  em;  li\t"pee;  "v,"«ee. 

40.  In  order  to  gain  familiarity  with  the  short  vowels 
and  their  powers,  the  student  should  pronounce  them  in 
connection  with  other  letters  of  the  alphabet:  thus, 


,//      (i     U      af      ut     oSt  ad     <il     i'l     ml     ml    odd 

and  so  on  with  other  letters.  When  he  has  done  this,  he 
should  contrast  each  short  vowel  with  its  corresponding 
long  vowel ;  thus, 


iihl     ni,     eht     1 1,     ut     it,     iilul    ad,    Jul   <</.     ml     ill, 

uirl      nt,     n/il       ///,      dot       mil,     uiril    ml.     nlnl     ml,     ,'iml    odd. 

11.   A-  a  result  of  this  practice,  many  common  words 
will  be  made,  as  in  the  following  examples:  — 

ul,      J  1 1 sit,     I    mill,     ^  am,       ^  Ann. 

\  ebb,  /  etch,  egg,  /  edge,   f     ell. 

|   it,        itch,  if,     |  mill,    ■      ,,n,    )  as. 

i  or,      ^    of,  up,    -)  us.    (    ,11,      '■       off. 


42-44 


PLACKS    UK    TIIK    SHORT    VOWELS. 


31 


A    SHORT    VOWEL    BETWEEN    TWO    CONSONANTS. 

4'3.  FlBST  and  THIRD-PLACE  short  vowels  arc  written  in 
the  same  position  as  their  corresponding  long  vowels;  as 

| tack,  I ,  lick,   \^  ]"']',    \.    }>h>,    {      rock,  /      rook. 

43.  Second-place  short  vowels  are  written  before  the 
second  consonant;  as  I  get,  /  wreck,  instead  of  after 
llu  first  consonant,  as  is  the  case  with  second-place  long 
vowels,  as  ^\  gate,  /•       rake. 

44.  Compare  the  places  of  second-place  long  and  short 
vowels  in  the  following  diagrams  and  words: — 

LONG   VOWELS'   PLACES. 


2    3 


$        i    2     ' i    2 

SHORT   VOWELS'   PLACES. 

9. 


r\    lad,       (• 
/\    wrought, 


2N 

lade 


9    3 


^]    led,  .]    lead, 

rot,     Xj    wrote,     /s\  rut, 


2  3 


/I     lid 

/\     rinh  . 


> 


Exercise  9— Short  Vowels. 
\at,  I  J  :  .  w  /\  l_  \_ 
\  ebb,    f    I    /    —     \_    V     Z-"8"  v_^- 

.1*  /   r   \r    I    \   \  = 


J    - 


L 


L 
~] 


6.    V^  bull, 


L',>,>       ->^V> 


SHORT    TOWELS. 

Exercise   9 — (continued) . 


Exicrcise  10. 

1.    Bag,  tap,  .Tuck,  pad,  bat,  hack,  pap,  cap,  cab,  chap. 
'.'.   Peck,  beg,  beck,  leg,  dell,  keg,  debt,  gem,  jet,  deck. 
3.  Dig,  tick,  pig,  big,  pith,  bill,  tip.  ditch,  chip,  lil»,  dip. 
1.    Mock,  knock,  rob,  pod,  dot,  dock,  top,  Tom. 
■V  Tuck,  pup,  butt,  dug,  duck,  dumb,  tub,  jug,  gum. 
(i.    Bull,  book,  look,  took,  cook,  nook,  rook,  pull,   fui.i,. 

Review, 

1.  How  many  short  vowels  are  there  ? 

2.  How  do  the  short  vowels  differ  From  the  lone-  vowels  '. 
:i.   Give  the  sounds  of  the  six  short  vowels  followed   by 

the  consonant  /. 
1.  Give  the  Bigns  by  which  they  are  represented. 
."i.   How  do  tbe signs  of  the  short  vowels  differ  from  those 

of  tin'  long  vowels  ? 
<").     What   are  the  minus  of  the  all Ol' I    vowels  ? 

7.  Give  .-i\   words  illustrating  the  powers  of  the  short 

vowels. 

8.  What  is  the  position  of  a  first-place  short  vowel  be- 

tween   two   consonants?      A    second  place    short 
vowel  '.      A  third-place  short  vowel  '. 


I")  -47  DIPHTDONGS.  23 


CHAPTER  V. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

45.  The  double  vowels,  or  diphthongs,  heard  in  the 
words  ice,  owl,  boy,  are  represented  by  small  angular 
marks,  u  in  due  by  a  small  curve,  and  the  triphthong  wi, 
as  heard  in  wife,  by  a  small  right  angle;  thus, 

I    vi    my.     OW    a!  now.     01      |    oil. 

U      !     new.      WI    l:     /ri<\e. 
"I  : 

40.  The  pen  must  not  he  lilted  in  writing  any  of  these 
diphthongs.  In  vocalizing  words,  7,  w,  and  wi  are  written 
in  the  first,  second,  or  third  place  as  may  he  convenient  ; 
U  is  written  in  the  third  position,  and  oi  in  the  first. 

47.  In  writing  Exercise  11,  the  pupil  should  blend  each 
diphthong  with  the  consonant  against  which  it  is  placed. 
It'  this   be  done,    the  words   will   be  easily   recognized; 

thus, 

\  h?  (by  or  buy),  (v  fcbi  (thigh),  \  bow  (bough) 
f\  owh  (out),  \  p«  (pew),  i  fir  (your),  |  wid 
(wide),   \  boi  (boy),    |     toi  (toy). 


24 


DIPHTHONGS. 


48 


48.  Learners  sometimes  cod  fuse  the  diphthong    j  1  with 

the  short  vowel     j    i,  and  the  diphthong      j  u  witli  the 

short  vowel  _i   u,  and     i   ow  with  the  Ion"-  vowel  -i   oh. 
!  a!  °  i 

Contrast  the  following  pairs  of  words: — 

N.    bite,  \    bit;   X\  right,       |   «vv7  ;     /chide,    /   chid; 

Uduhe,   li     duck':   ,)  »se.  -)  its;        -    now,    — /  know. 


1  \v         V 

2  J,     ^ 

5    \     V" 


Exercise    11. 

Iv  (v  C 


C  r  r  y  v 

r  r  -  J  r 


4 


7  „)    (^   r     a 

8  b  i    4    v/     f 


S 


EXEKCISE    12. 


1.  Bite,  Bite,  cuhe,  uow,  voyage,  buy,  coy,  wife, duke,  lie. 

'^.  Tube,  write,  voweL,  fury,  cow,  toil,  cune,  boil. 

:i.  Your,  oil,  mighty,  few,  review,  gout,  rye,  boy,  dupe. 

1.  Thou,  loud,  like,  thigh,  mew,  pie,  pouch,  out,  view. 

5,  Tithe,  tunic,  beguile,  luite,  mutiny,  assume. 

<>.  FailuRe,  feud,  curacy,  cubic,  juicy,  duly,  piracy. 


49-50 


ORAMMAI.OIifES. 


25 


GRAMMALOGUES. 

49.   With  (wo  exceptions,   (and,  he,)  every    frequently 
occurring  word  in  the  English   language,  such  as  a,  the, 

of,  to,  is  expressed  in  Phonography  by  one  of  its  let- 
ters. These  words  are  called  Grammalogues,  or  letter- 
words,  and  the  shorthand  signs  that  represent  them  are 
called  Logograms  or  word-letters.  Thus,  each  word  in 
line  1  is  represented  by  the  shorthand  letter  or  vowel 
under  it  in  line  2,  which  letter  or  vowel  forms  part  of 
the  word  when  written  in  full,  as  in  line  3. 


1.  Grammalogues.     Oj\      in,      be,      it, 

2.  Logograms.  \ 

3.  Words  in  full.        \_  \-        I 


no,     me, 


them. 
( 

u 


50.  Grammalogues  are  generally  written  on  the  line. 
Sometimes  they  are  written  above  or  through  the  line, 
as  in  the  words  in,  our.  The  following  arc  some  of 
the  most  frequently  occurring  Grammalogues  ;  they 
should  be  committed  to  memory  by  copying  them  several 
times.  The  words  marked  (')  are  written  above  the  line; 
words  marked  ('■')  through  the  line;  the  others  rest  on  the 
line.  And  and  should  are  written  upward,  and  who 
downward. 


a  or  an{x) 

V   have 

on?) 

w   tli  ing 

all?) 

i     he 

-y?.  our(s) 

(      think- 

'     and?) 

^-    are 

\    bt 

,     but 

him 

TV) 
in?) 

!    it 

.\..pn/C) 
J  shall 

y      shoe  lil 

to 
)     waa 
which 

can?) 

me?) 

.      tin 

,      who 

__   give  or  given 

</(') 

(     them 

~     11"" 

2(? 


GltAMMALOGUES. 


Exercise  13. 

1.  You  and  I  can  think  of  a  thing.  2.  It  was  our  all, 
but  shall  it  be  given  to  him  '.  3.  Who  can  it  be  ?  4.  Which 
can  you  have  '.  ■"">.  Should  he  be  in  it  ?  6.  Was  the  thing 
given  to  them  \  7.  Are  you  to  have  it  \  s.  Can  you  give  it 
to  him  ?  9.  Can  you  think  of  all  he  should  have  ?  10.  Put 
it  to  him. 

Exercise  14. 

{The full  stop  is  represented  by  <i  small  cross  ;  thus,   x). 

i   J  —  -*T    J   w    ^    ^^    '  7    ^? 
Shall  we  now  go  out  in    our    new  boat  and  catch  fish  ? 

2  "v%  i- v  r  '  y s  \j  v  ^  \* 

s  L  -  (       '  -a  ?   ^  ^  v^  r    ,  I-  - 

4  J  -  ~  •  ^    '  •  ^ 

5  ^  „  n  ^ 

6  .7    )      |    \ 

7  .      ^    Vs.        - 

-      Z_  .  -a 

i«»  /  V     t  < 

II  )_  /     - 

L2         ..  / 


) 


\  ;v 


c 


I      x     ' 


1  ■  >■ 

I   LU- 

v| 

/  L  )-* 


REVIEW.  27 

Review. 

1.  How  man;  diphthongs  :iru  there? 

2  Give  their  sounds. 

;>.  How  may  ?,  ow,  and  wi  be  written  as  to  place  ? 

4.  State  the  position  for  oi  and  ?7. 

5.  What  is  a  grammalogue  ?     Give  some  examples. 
G.  How  arc  logograms  generally  written  '. 

7.  In    what    directions   are  the   logograms   <///</,    who,  and 

should  written  ? 

8.  Givo   examples  of  logograms   written    above,   on,   and 

through  the  line. 


28  ADDITIONAL   SIGN    FOR    "s"   AND    "  Z."  51-52 


CHAPTER    VI. 


ADDITIONAL    SIGN   FOR    £   AND    Z. 


51.  5  (together  with  its  heavy  sound s,  for  which  s is  gen- 
erally written)  is  the  most  frequent  letter  in  the  English 
language  with  one  exception,  (r).  In  Phonography  s  is 
represented,  in  addition  to  the  stroke  \,  by  :i  small  circle 
[o],  which  is  very  convenient  for  joining  one  letter  to 
another.  When  joined  to  straight  letters,  it  is  written 
on  the  right  side  of  downst rokes,  and  <>n  the  upper  side 
of  horizontal  and  upstrokes;  thus. 

\  sj),   \  st,    I    seh,         sk,   . -'  sr,      o_   ksh\ 
\c  pa,    I  ts,    i    eh  s,     o   /-.v.   y?  rs,      I      tst. 

By    means   of    this    Circle    8,    three    letters   can    l>e    written 
nearly  as  quicklj   as  t  WO. 

52.  W I  nil  the  circle  n  is  joined  to  curves,  it  is  written 
inside  tlir  curve;  as,  ^_  sf,  Vo  fa,  r)  88,  ^~f.i  ms,  s_p  n8, 
t        s/,     {        Is,  '    s  nli,      ..  )     xh  .v,     0~~b    s?ns,     ^-p-s     dish), 

/^'      is/,       \    /nsr,     ,■ '    /'si,    o>«    man,       >—    nam, 

Va_     fs/:.    ,        tsn. 


53-54 


ADDITIONAL   SIGN    FOR    "s"    AM)    "  Z." 


20 


53.  Between  two  straight  lines  forming  an  angle,  the 

circles  is  written  on  the  outside  of  the  angle;  thus,  ~  [  hst, 

54.  8  is  made  double-sized  for  s*,  and  named  .sr.sor  scs  ; 
thus,  \o  ps,    xD  pss,  ^S^  nssr. 


EXEBCISE    15. 

i.  \\    r    r    r   r  *_  ^  •  • 

2.  <L  <L  C  C  °)  °)  J  J   ,  ^  ^  r  "N   w 

3.  \,    I     /     _^     ^  cS   S    I  hs  (down)    ,      hs  (up) 

4.  ^>        ^3         (,  (,         J  }         J  J         ^~t>  -£>N-P/a 

s.  L  j_    v-  -f  —  ^  V-  A  U  ^ 

7.    VI  '^V    ^     ^    M.    V.  -T    ^   Vs 

8.  v*  ^r°  ^  ,)  n  ou  oi  -t,  n 

9.  No  No  b ,  6     iD^Vo^or0'^^^0^ 

io.  ^p  ^  Np    f  ^\    -  VL       I    \)i^/ 


30  VOCALIZATION   OF    "s"   OR    "  z."  55-50 


Exercise  16. 

1.  sk,  si',  si,  sd,  s  tli,  sg,  sin,  aw,  sn,  st,  sr,  s  n»',  s  sh,  sj. 

•J.  ks,  cli  s,  t's,  ins,  js,  lis  (up),  sh  s,  vs,  ys,  gs,  l'S,  ss,  ts,  th  s. 

'■).  sks,  sbs,  sfs,  sds,  sms,  psch,  ch  sn,  msks,  ns  ng. 

4.  (Large  circle  ss)  nsst,  suss,  blnss,  klnss,  knss,  pssv. 


VOCALIZATION    OP    WORDS    CONTAINING    CIRCLE    8    on   Z. 

55.  The  circle  s  cannot  he  vocalized,  that  is,  vowels  can- 
not be  written  to  it.  Vowels  arc  invariably  written  and 
read  according  to  their  position  to  the  consonant  against 
which  they  are  placed,  and  not  with  reference  to  the 
circle;  thus, 

x    I    1    /   _!_    ^   r  \    ~     • 

up,     "/,  ought,  age,    "<'/•,     aim,      ill,     pay,    may,     ray, 

\    f    t    •/    *■_  ^  c  No   ^  J 

stir),   sat,  sought,  sage,    soak,  same,    sill,   pace,    mace,  race. 

The  circle  8  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  is  always  read 
first,  ami  at  the  end  of  a  word  last;  thus,  1  sack,  |  not 
ask];    \,  pay8,\ •  speak,  ^ — o  makes. 

"ill.   The  BTROKE  8  Or  •:•  is  used — . 

i-m  When  .v  is  tin-  only  consonant  in  a  word,  as    )    saw, 
\  s, ,  :  ami   in  derivatives,  as    )     ,'      saw  mill. 

i/m   When    a     word    begins    with    a    vowel     immediately 

followed  by  8,  as   J      ask,   I     espy,    )      assume,    i    add, 


:>]    58  LOCALIZATION    OF    "s"   OR    ''/."  31 

(c)   When   a   word    ends  with  a  vowel  immediately 

preceded  by  a  or  z,  as      -   )   mercy,     \  /»/*//,    <"  /   A'.://. 

(</)   When   initial   8   is   followed   by   two    vowels,    as 
X-^   Siam,     \_,,   science,     f        sciatica  ;    or    when    final   s 
is  preceded    by  two  vowels   in   difiEerent   positions  ;  as 
(     joyous,    I'y  tortuous.      [See  57  ('■.)] 

(e)  When  a  word  begins  with  s,  as  \/  zero,  y  zeal, 
)  o-     zigzag, 

(/")  When  a  word  begins  with  s,  followed  by  a  vowel 
and  8  or  e  /  as  )_  cease,   i    society,    X     saucer,   J^  season. 

57.   The  CIRCLE  8  is  used — 

(a)  When  s  begins  a  word,  and  only  one  vowel 
occurs  between    it   and    the   next   stroke   consonant  ;  as, 

/\8oap,  I  said,  L— '-^  sum. 

(1>)  When  «  or  s  occurs  medially  ;  as  .— ° —  cash, 
s~^'  misery. 

(c)  When  8  or  :  ends  a  word,  and  <>nly  one  vowel 
occurs  between  it  and  the  preceding  consonant  ;  as 
['i/iii/s,  [   joys  [contrast  /   joys  with  /  joyous]. 


c 


58.  The  large  circle  represents  88  or  sz  only  when 
medial  or  final.  This  large  circle  may  be  supposed  to 
contain  the  second-place  short  vowel,  and  thus  to  repre- 
sent   8es,    sez,    zes,    or    zez;    thus:     y     (ses)    necessity; 

\o  («''■")  passes;  o  (zes)  possessive;  r~°  (zez)  causes. 
Other  vowels  may  be  expressed  by  placing  the  vowel-sign 
within  the  circle  ;    thus,     |    exist  (eksist),       '    exhaust, 

•^<f    exercise,    q^J)  census. 


32 


EXERCISES   ON   CIRCLE    "s"   AND    "  Z.' 


3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 


s. 

u. 
Ml. 
I  I. 


EXKKCISE     17. 

o 
Gramrualoisrues   as,  has  ,■     o  is,  his. 


Exercise  18. 


Soap,  soup,  spy,  stay,  slow,  seed,  sawed,  siege,  sage. 
Sake,  seek,  safe,  sieve,  SOOthe,  size,  Sam,  psalm,  sown. 
Sign.  soon,  snow,  sale,  soul,  seal,  slow,  slew,soaR,seaR. 
Oaks,  gaze,  goose,  face,  thaws,  shows,  alms,  mace. 
Neighs,  Dose,  niece,  awls,  lace,  laws,  eaits,  rose,  rare. 
Opposite,  upset,  opossum,  passage,  pacify,  beset. 

Beseech,  bes ,  task,  tacit,  extensive,  dusty,  design. 

Dismay.chas ten,  cask,  excite,  oxide,  oxen,  gasp,  gusty. 
Physic,  vista,  visit,  inside,  answer,  music,  wasp,  hasp. 
A.sk,  Esk,  ash,  espy,  Ezra,  essence,  fussy,  mercy. 
Paces,  races,  faces,  chases,  necessity,  science,  assizes. 


33 


Review. 

1.  On  which    side  of   a  straight   stroke  is  the  circle  a 

written? 

2.  On  which  side  of  curves? 

;!.   How  is   t lie  circle  a   written    between    two    straight 
strokes? 

4.  J  low  between  curves? 

5.  When    a   vowel    is   written    before    a    straight    stroke 

beginning  with  the  circle  s,  which  is  read  first? 
G.  When   is  the   stroke  a  employed  ?     Enumerate   the 
case-. 

7.  When  is  the  stroke  g  employed? 

8.  When     is    the    circle    s    employed     initially?     When 

finally? 
!».   What  is  the  limitation  to  the  use  of  the  large  circle  aa  ? 
10.   What  grammalogues  are  represented  by  the  circle  «? 


34         --st"  and  "str"  loops,  and  "sw"  circle.    59-63 


CHAPTER   VII. 

ST  AX  I)    STM   LOOPS,    AND    SW  CIRCLE. 

59.  The  frequently  occurring  combinations  st  initial,  and 
st  and  zd  final,  are  represented  by  a  loop  made  one-half 
the  length  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  attached.  It  is 
written  on  the  right  side  of  straight  strokes,  above  hori- 
zontals, and  on  the  inside  of  curves,  in  the  same  way  as 
the  circle  s;  thus,  *\  st-]>,  \>  p-st  or  p-zd  ;  f  st-t,  {  t-st 
or  t-sd  :  V  st-f,  K^  f-st  or f-zd. 

60.  As  with  the  circle  s,  the  loop  st  when  written  at  the 
beginning  of  a  word  is  always  read  first,  and  at  the  end 
of  a  word  last.  A  vowel  cannot  be  placed  to  the  st 
loop,  bnl  must  be  written  and  read  with  reference  to  the 
stroke  against   which  it    b  placed  :  thus,  *|   aid,  -f   staid, 

\    pay,   Xi    paste,    p^   cost,      ^    caused,     ^^    amassed, 

*v*>  amazed,     ■.'  raced  or  raised,       \    enticed-. 

61.  The  loop  st  is  employed  medially  when  convenient  ; 

thus.  I,      testify,  /.  ,  justify,  V    vestry. 

62.  A  large  final  loop,  extending  two-thirds  of  the  length 

of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  attached,  and  written  on  the 

same  side  of  the  consonant  as  the  circle  g  and  the  loop  ••-/. 

represents  str;  thus,    \> pastor,    -^  master,  ;    c   monster. 

This     loop     is     not     used      imti  ILLY,     but    may    be    used 
Mini  ILLY. 

68.    's  may  be  added  to  a  final  loop,  or  to  the  large  circle 

.-.v,  by  continuing  the  stroke  of  the  loop  or  circle ;  thus. 
^  lis/.\    [   <iust,rs.  _,_ro  gamesters,      ^S  exercises. 


(i  1-67  INITIAL   "  s\v  *'  CIECLE.  35 

04.  The  st  loop  is  generally  used  initially  when  a  word 
commences  with  st  followed  by  a  vowel  and  one  or  more 
consonants;  as,  f  steel,         stupid. 

li.").  A  vowel  cannot  be  read  before  an  initial  circle  or 
loop,  or  altera  final  circle  or  loop;  thus,  ^v  pasty  [not  H^] 

musty  |  not      •  ,  |,    l^p  honest,   v'ry   honesty.     (See  also 
paragraph  55. 1 

66.  The  loop  st  cannot  be  used  if  a  vowel  occurs  be- 
tween s  and  /  .•  thus,     I       satire. 

Initial  SW  Circle  (named  sway). 

67.  The  double  consonant  sw,  when  occurring  initially, 
is  represented  by  a  large  circle  on  the  same  side  of 
consonants  as  the  circle  s  ,•  thus,  ^  sweep,  p  sweet, 
c       swim,    °*\    sware,    CX'    soiree.     Sw,    not   joined    to 

another  consonant,  is  written  e      as      .      sway. 

Exercise  19. 

1.     <r  ■  si  cam    *~*?  mist  or  missed     ^      ^  If 

2.  V    I    /    <-    -     V    Sll    "^  sf    c 

3.  ^  <*  ^   > ■  K    f  r<  \   x 

4.      v_^o       <Ti       ^      ^       j"    ^      ^o      L      I        b~ 

III  w 

e.  d-  [^  r^  ^  w  r  ^  ^  ^ 
t.  t>  ^  t-  ^  -A-  'h  -P  -P  cL 
8.    <T    5^    o>    <*\     <i     .P    a-    °^    Q> 


<36  exercises  on  "  st,"  "str,"  and  "  sw." 

Exercise  20. 

1.  Steam,  step,  steep,  stoop,  stab,  statue,  statute,  staid. 

•2.  Stitch,  stag,  stake,  stork,  staff,  stiff,  stave,  stem. 

:!.  Stall,  stool,  staue,  stoite,  steeu,  starry,  story. 

I.  Best,  boast,  taste,  dust,  chest,  jest,  laced,  faced. 

5.  Const,  ghost,   kissed,    feast,   vast,   lost,   most,   must. 

6.  Nests,  vests,  lasts,  rests  ;   boaster,  jester,  muster. 

7.  Foster,  duster,  lustre,  roaster  ;  pastors,  masters. 

8.  SwoRe,  swell,  swelling,  swathe,  swig,  swoop,  switch. 

Exercise  21. 

l.^^o.S,^   2. .  ^  /•  r°  x 
s.  ). .  r^  ^,   c  °  -  ^ '  ^  ~  .  v  ^ 

<;.  .   cL  a^     .  f      r~       V   J  '     '^  N  ).  * 

7.      CTN  .     \>«        1.6  t^^  \       .      ^_P      \      X>    x 

s. '  V" w  .  r  »r  n  h  '  f  ^  ^  ii ■ 

io.  o    L,       i-         ) ,  "  l        {  .   *\_^ 

u.    •  ^v~  )_  i^  l,  s  L'  r  ■ .  i_* 
i2.f  i\  Lt,  ^.^  r,0^°.  r 

*-(  *      is.  (;  «^»  ^-s  L^   .  I"  v  .  I"    ^  * 


37 


Review. 


1 .  I  low  is  the  loop  st  written  ? 

2.  W'lu'ii  may  the  loop  st  l>e  written   in   the  middle  of  a 

word  ?     Give  some  examples. 

:;.    How     is    str    represented?       Is    the     str    loop    used 
initially  ? 

4.  How  may  a  final  8  be  added  to  these  loops  ? 

5.  How  is  initial  8W  represented? 

(i.    How  is  xtr  written  when    not   joined   to  another  con- 
sonant ? 

7.  Write  some  words  illustrating  the  rule   that  a  vowel 

cannot    be    read    before   an    initial,    or    after   a    final 
circle,  or  loop. 

8.  Give  several  words  in  which  the  sw  circle  is  employed. 


449486 


38  INITIAL    "  R  "    AM>    "  L  "    HOOKS.  G8-71 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

A  AND  L  HOOKS. 

08.  The  Liquids  r  and  /  arc  often  found  following  and 
closely  united  or  blended  with  other  letters,  forming  a 
consonantal  diphthong  :  as  in  the  words  //row.  y//ough, 
drink,  <//are.  fry,Jly,  douWe,  maker,  etc.  In  pronouncing 
these  words,  the  combination  of  the  /•  or  I  with  the  pre- 
ceding consonant  is  uttered  by  a  single  effort  of  the 
organs  of  speech.  These  consonant  combinations  are 
represented  in  Phonography  by  adding  an  initial  hook 
to  the  simple  letters  to  indicate  their  union  with  a  fol- 
lowing /'  or  I. 

INITIAL    Hook    ADDING    A'  AND    L   TO    STRAIGHT    LETTERS. 

(ill.    A  small  hook  prefixed  to  the  left  side  of  descending 

Straight  consonants,  and    UNDER  horizontal  ones,  adds  /■  ; 
thus, 

w    n    ; ;    c-c- 

pr,  br;       tr,  dr;     chr,  jr;       kr,  gr. 

TO.  A  small  hook  prefixed  to  the  right  side  of  straight 
descending  consonants,  and  to  the  upper  side  of  hori- 
zontal ones,  adds  /  /  thus, 

w    r  r    r  r    <^^_ 

pi,  bl;        tl,  dl;       rhl,  jl;  kl,  gl. 

71.  These  honked  letters  should  be  considered  as  sylla- 
ble-,  and  named  accordingly;    thus,     \     should  be  called 

per  as  heard  at  the  end  of  paper,  and  not  /-<<  <</■.  which  is 
written    ^ 


INITIAL    "  H        AM)    "  I. 


39 


72.  The  following  mnemonic  aids  will  be  useful  for  re- 
membering the  />/■  and  />/  series  of  consonants. 

7:5.  If  the  Zeft  hand  be  held  up,  with  the  first  finger 
bent,  the  outline  of  tl  will  he  seen  ;  and  if  the  /iMght 
hand  be  held  up,  in  the  same  way,  the  outline  of  tr  will 
he  seen.  By  turning  the  hand  round  to  the  following 
positions,  all  the  straight  double  consonants  of  the  j>l 
and  />/■  series  will  be  formed  by  the  first  linger. 


74.  As  an  additional  mnemonic,  it  may  be  observed 
that  a  circle  may  be  struck  by  turning  the  hand  to  the 
Sight,  as  the  hands  of  a  watch  move  ;  or,  in  the  opposite 
direction,  by  turning  the  hand  to  the  Zeft.  Circles  and 
hooks  may  accordingly  be  described  as  "  right  "  or  "  left." 
It  will  be  noticed  that  the  motion  which  makes  a  "  right  " 
circle,  forms  the  /■  hook,  and  the  motion  that  makes  a 
"  /eft "  circle  forms  the  /  hook.  The  hook  is  turned  to 
the  /light  for  /•,  and  to  the  Zeft  for  I. 

75.  These  double  consonants  are  vocalized  like  the  single 
ones  ;  thus,  °\  pray,  \v  apply,  -]  utter,  \  tree ;  and 
are  used  initially,  medially,  and  finally  ;  as,  N  plead, 
"X/'  prairie,     V    .  replica,  n^  library,  /\  rip/'/'. 

76.  The  letter  r  is  not  hooked  for  rr  or  /•/,  as  the  charac- 
ters and  are  employed  for  /r  and  y. 

77.  The  /*/'  and  ///  series  of  consonants  are  generally 
employed  as  follows: — 

(")  Initially  in  words  that  contain  no  vowel  between 
the  two  consonants;  as.      \    pray,    \     play. 

(A)  Medially  and  finally  when  they  make  a  syllable;  as, 
^>T      ri-drr-less,    \^     pa-per,    \     bea-dle. 


40  INITIAL    HOOK    ADDING    "R"    AND    "  L."  78-7!) 

78.  In  writing  the  following  exercise,  call  the  combina- 
tions by  their   single  names,  and  the  words  will   then   be 

easily   recognized;    thus,    °\    per-eh    (pray),    <— :    ee-gel 
[eagh  i. 

Exercise  22. 

1.  \  pray,    K.  pry,   \s  brew,    |  adder,  ,__:  eager,*\  play. 

2.  f        1         1-         1"       U       \_       V-       ~\       \ 

'•  \   j  )v  ^'   ley  ^  V  V 

..\V,(      V-i    ^\    ^r    ^    Y 

-^     —     ^S      \      {     K     }      ^ 

Exercise  23. 

1.  Prow,  upper,  tray,  cider,  dry,  drew,  pauper,  knocker. 

2.  Apple,  plea,  people,  pupil,  brew,  breath,  broom,  bring. 
::.   Fibre,  robber,  blow,  table,  double,  battle,  fiddle. 

1.    Uncle,  clean,  pickle,  globe,  bugle,  Peter,  crumble. 

5.    (Iiass.  adder,  drop,  leader,  preacher. 

G.   Trap,  block,  beggar,  oblige,  bless,  butter,  prison. 

Initial  Hook  adding  Ji  and   L  to   (  i  rves. 

7'.).  As  a  CURVE  cannot  receive  a  hook  on  both  sides  of 
the  stroke  (for  such  characters  as  \_  could  not  be 
written  accurately  and  quickly),  and  as  the  /•compounds 
are  much  more  fre<|Uent  than  the  /  compounds,  a  small 
hook    prefixed  to  a  CURVE  On  the    only  available  side  (the 

inside)  adds  /• ;  thus, 

V_    /.         /A,    ^  m,       - —  v, 

when  written  with  a  small  initial  hook,   become 

V_  Jr.    (     tltr,    c  -.   utr,       >         ur. 


"-II    82  INITIAL    hook    ADDING    "R"    AND    i-L."  41 

80.  The  sign  -_•  following  this  rule  would  represent 
the  souud  ",'/-/',  as  in  singer.  There  arc,  however,  so  few 
words  in  which  ng  is  followed  by  r,  that  this  hooked  out- 
line is  used  to  represent  the  frequently  occurring  sounds 
of  ikj-iji-  and  ng-kr,  as  heard  in  \^  finger,  (  "  linger 
^-^f^  monger,  \_^  banker,  I  tinker,  ^_^  clinker.  Singer 
and   wringer  must  be  written    in  full,  thus,  *"^     /^"^ 

81.  As  the  stroke  8  hooked  thus  *)  ,  is  not  required  for 
sr,  (the  circle   s  joined  to  the  upward  or  downward  /• 

a^  °^\  sr  being  more  serviceable),  and  as  the  down- 
ward r,  hooked  for  rr  °^  would  be  almost  useless,  the 
two  forms  ^  *)  are  used  for  fr,  lltr.  and  their  heavy 
strokes  ^  )  for  vr,  thr,  as  EXTRA  skins.  The  con- 
sonant /""  is  not  hooked  for  r  or  I.  The  following  curves 
are  hooked  for  /•  : — 

V^  V^     C  )      C)      J  J 

fr,      vr  ;         Mr,         thr  ;        shr,  zhr. 
<r-*  mr,  c^  nr,  <^  ng-gr  or  ng-kr. 

82.  The  duplicate  forms  ^   °\     V^     (    ')     (  *)  are  * 
used    thus  : — In   words  that  contain  no  other  consonant 

stroke,  the  left  curves  V  ^  C  (  ari:  USed  when  U  VOWC- 
precedes  ;  as,  '^_  offer,  £  ether,  V  every,  ^  affray;  and 
the  right  curves  *^\  °^  *)  ")  are  employed  when  no 
vowel  precedes  ;  as,  °A.V  fry,  )-  throw,  )  through.  When 
another  consonant  conies  before  or  after,  select  that  form 
of  fr,  VT,  thr,  thr,  which  is  most  convenient  for  join- 
ing; as,     J     diver,     ^\  rover,  ^-^ —  Frank,       )  gather. 


42  INITIAL   HOOK    ADDING    "  R  "'   AND    "  L."  83 

If  both  forms  are  equally  convenient,  ^  ;  should  be 
preferred,  as  agreeing  with  the  7i'  series  of  straight 
letters  ;  thus,  "^n  proffer,  N>  plover,  K  tetker,  ^*\  bother, 
rN\   Arthur. 

s:'>.  /.  is  added  to  the  curved  letters  /,  /•.  sh,  in,  n, 
by  a  large  initial  hook  ;  thus,  \  baffle,  V  evil, 
i      J  commercial,  •—c/  initial,  — c-  camel,  ^-,  funnel. 

Exekcise  24. 

1^        'v    author,    )-     thro-iti,    )    three,      \  free,  'V_  offer- 

^   L  ^    ^   b   >  ^  ^ 

/^  ^y  ^_y  ^_  ^  ^  ^v  ^ 

'^  S     \    ")    cV   *S_   v.   ^" 

Exercise  25. 

Flap,  trifle,  either,  other,  through,  fry,  Same,  Friday. 

Finger,  banker,  hopeful,  dinner,  Sock,  funnel,  banner. 
.;    Manner,  thrust,  oilier,  frame,  favor,  leather,  Anthur. 
I.    Mother,  father,  brother,  evil,  freak,  fluency,  Irian. 

Fisher,  adverse,  eternity,  burglan,  bugle k,  winner. 

Ai;i;i\al,  rather,  rightful,  Loafer,  owners. 


EXERCISES   ON    INITIAL    IK >< >Ks.  43 

EXERCISE    26. 
GUAMMALOGOES  caU,    = —    COTS,      |    (Z«W,     ?    .  for, 

<^\J'n>'n,  i       ///'/-.  ///"/•',  t_^  near,    ^     //"/', 

v)  ////  //•  or  ///m,  ^   eery. 

1     S, 

i v  ■        /f v  ^  vN  r  V      ; 

"^  o     v     ''"""     '  ^-.  V        (     V     V       ^  •       "     ^~ 

-(     ^  ^    s       "'*        3    .   V  o  ,     )     o     ' 

Exercise  27. 

1.  The  calmer  ;i  river  appeals,  the  deeper  it  is  sm  id  to  How. 

2.  Honor  thy  father  and  mother  ;  love  thy  brother  and 

neighbor. 

3.  The  Holy  Hible  should  he  youi:  teacher;   apply  to  it  for 

true  wisdom. 
•1.  Try  to  spe^k  the  truth  I  pray  you.  and  do  no  evil. 
.rt.   After  the  labor  of  the  (lay.  gather  pleasure  from  leisure. 


44 


Review. 

1.  Give  examples  of  words  containing  a  double  consonant 

formed  by  the  combination  of  r  or  2  with  the  preced- 
ing letter. 

2.  How  are  these  combinations  represented  ? 

3.  By  what  means  is  the  pupil  assisted  in  remembering 

these  hooks  I 

4.  In  what  cases  are  the^r,  pi  series  used  ? 

5.  What  does  a  small   hook  prefixed  to  a  curved   letter 

represent  ? 
G.   Write  the  two  forms  of  /'/•,  n:  thr,  thr. 

7.  When   should    the  fr,   vr,    thr,  thr,   right-hand    curves 

be  used,  and  when  the  left-hand  curves? 

8.  What  does  a  large  hook  prefixed  to  a  curve  represent  ? 

9.  How    are    the    double    consonants   pi,    <pr,   etc.,    to    be 

named  ? 


84-85 


IRREGULAR  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 


45 


CHAPTER   IX. 
IRREGULAR   DOUBLE   CONSONANTS. 
Name.  Power. 

up 

WII  c^    whay  as  in  whew 
KW  c hway    "     quick 

GW  ( j/"""//    "     anguish 


MP  / 

Mil  j 


i  nip 

i  i/lh 


j,    j  empire 
/  < •  ///A:i  1 1 ii 


lr    r 

.Wo//* . 

/rr    05  in 

/'mil  r. 

ieeler 

wl  r 

wel    " 

wail 

up 

WHL   6 

//•//<  /  •  ■ 

whale 

84.  The  double  letters,  except  wl  and  whl  are  vocalized 
like  the  /</  and  pr  series  of  consonants  ;  thus,  <;  %-  whey, 

f"  quail,  5\    acquire,    [^   tramp,    (X^S — ^     languor, 

feelers.      The    double    consonant    ^^ 


"> 


when   hooked  becomes   mpr  or  rribr ;  as.     /^     hamper, 

^^    dumber. 

y-").   Vowels  placed   to   "/  and   //■///  are   read  before  or 
after    the    f      l„-    tlius,     (f     well,     '(     wail,     (       weal, 

C  (.  wealthy,  c  woolly,  'X  while,  <',  whale,  (j\  whelp. 
If  a  vowel  occurs  before  |  he  w,  write  the  full  outline  ;  t  hus, 
^f  awhile. 

Exercise  28. 

OS        -^         c^         c/~         A         0"f 


I. 


2.  r  r 

3.     I—       X-n 


*   3  ^   ^    >    > 

4.  Whisk,  qualm,  anguish,  lamp,  ambush  [sh  down]. 

5.  Feeler,  well,  wall,  wool,  woolly,  while,  wheel,  "Willie. 

6.  Whether,  quick,  damp,  nailer,  equip,  wile. 


46  circles  and  loops  preceding  a  hook.  86-92 

Circles  and  Loops  preceding  a  Hook. 

86.  8  is  joined  to  hooked  consonants  thus,  Xy  supply, 
■[  settle,  f  saddle,  <a_j  sickle,  x.  suffer,  v.  civil, 
csk     summer,    <s_>     sinner,    V      passover,     (^>      peaceful, 

I     decipher. 

87.  From  the  y/'  scries  of  straight  double  consonants, 
a  scries  of  treble  consonants  is  formed  by  making  the 
hook  into  ;i  circle  ;  thus,  °\  spr,  \  sbr  ;  *]  sir,  ^  ••«//•,• 
a — skr,  o — "'jr.  [The  forms  )  <^  not  being  required  in 
this  -erics  are  used  for  h.  j 

88.  The  treble  consonants  are  used  initially  thus, 
°X  spray,     }^-<  supreme,   \    straw,    T_y    strike,    \   setter, 

^^^  scrape,    <,— ^   seeh  r. 

89.  When  one  of  the/  or  r  hooked  letters  follows  the 
circle  g  medially,  the  hook  is  shown  thus,  extra, 
/§     reciter,        '       lisper,   c^      whisper,         \    explode, 

I  registry  ;  but  when  following  a  straight  stroke 
in  THE  BAME  DIRECTION,  ii  is  not  necessary  to  show 
the  r  hook  ;  thus,  \  prosper,  '  *■  .--  corkscrew.  In 
some  cases  the  hook   \w.\\  be  omitted  ;   thus,    \   \    sub- 

scribe,  %, superscribe.     When  the  hook  cannot   clearly 

be  shown,  write  the  separate  letters  ;  thus  "  \      sensible, 
[not     \  sensible.  ] 

90.  After   /    and    d,    the    circle    is    written    on    the    righl 

aide  to  express  skr,  sgr;  thus,    |       tasker,    \-r>  disgrace. 

91.  The  s7  loop  may  be  prefixed  to  the  initial  ///series 
of  letters  ;  thus.    '  '    stopper,  \  stutter,    .'     stoker. 

92.  8Wis  prefixed  to  the  pr  Beries  thus,  °\.  sweeper, 

U  r,     ■   Htrilrher,     - —    sirnggt  >•. 


EXERCISES    ON    I  tRCLES    AND    LOOPS. 


47 


Exercise   29. 
L  <\      %     <\       V      °V     \-    V^     *\ 

2.  T    1-    .1     1*    U     ^    ^    U     ^ 

3.  ^    V   V    ,t_r       '  T   /•    —  -^ 

4.  Ak    \   U     *     -^     .?   <N  ->-  — 


V  ^  \  L  \  ^  i 

Exeki  ISE  30. 

1.  Supper,  sapper,  Cyprus,  sprinkle,  springe,  sobriety. 

2.  Stress,  strange,  distrust,  struggle,  stripe,  strong,  cider. 

3.  Screw,  scrap,  scrimmage,  scribble,  scraper,  scrivener. 

4.  Supply,  sable,  sidle.  Miller,  sooner,  squabble,  squall. 

5.  Possibly,  squib,  squine,  sober,  saddleR,  designer. 

(').   Sacred,  scream,  scrub,  scruple,  squane,  cipher,  sinner. 

Exercise  31. 

i  '  ^  'Ml  '  '  f~  V  .  -~  N  \  '  V, 

'  r"1*    2,ni/)"  ,^.    jf  Ml, 

r\  ^  /\  x  t  ./ ;  <n  s~  ■  ^ x  • 

v  n  .  ■  -   » °  (vr"  t  Y  '  °-~  s  J 


48 


REVIEW. 

Exercisc  31   (continued.) 


'  1a  o  ij  %s*  s .  ^  *   5,rj)  f  u 


L, 


Review, 


1.  Hive  a  list   of    the   irregular  double  consonants,   and 

write   words   in   winch    they   occur,    vocalizing    the 
examples. 

2.  How  is  a  joined   to  a  hooked  consonant,  initially  and 

medially  ? 

:;.  Give  the  scries  of  treble  consonants  formed  by  the 
addition  of  8  to  the  pr  series  of  straight  double  con- 
sonants, and  the  rules  for  their  employment. 

■1.  How  are  the  /  or  r  hooked  letters  written  when  follow- 
ing 1  he  circle  s  medially  ? 

■").   How  is  sw  prefixed  to  the  pr  series  '.     Give  examples. 

(i.  Give  examples  of  the  st  loop  prefixed  t<>  the  pr  series 

of  letters. 


93-97  "  n  "  axu   "r"  BOOKS.  49 


CHAPTER  X. 

N  AND    F  HOOKS. 
!);;.    .V  following  :i   stkaiciit  letter   is  expressed  l>y  a 

small  final  llOOK  on  the  LEFT-HAND  side  of  ;i  down-stroke, 
ami  on  the  ONDER  side  of  a  horizontal  or  U[)-stroke  ; 
thus, 

\  pain,  J"  lone,  (/  chain,   -^  cane,    v      turn,    </?  win. 

HI.   The  //  hook  is  written  on  the  ENSIDE  of  all  CURVES  ; 

thus,   ,    ;  shine,  ^j  feign,   ,    'lean,   %_?  fcnown,   ^  mine. 

95.    For  V,  following  a  stkaioiit  letter,  is  expressed  by 

a  small   hook   mi  the    kioiit  hand  side  of  a  downstroke, 

and    on    the    DPPER    side    of    a    horizontal    or    upstroke  ; 

thus,     \»    pf,    [    lj\   /   chf,   _o  If,   ^  rf    </>    If;  as  in 

XG     puff,      L~    tough,     *\f  proof,     if      turf  [.    art  ire, 

■  [,    native,        [.    motive,    (\-^>   lithograph/  There  is  no 

for  v  hook  to  curves.  \  \- 

tilt.   The//  and  f  hooks  can  be  used  medially,  provided 
a  good  angle  is  obtained  ;  thus,      ,^>    French,     \    profit, 

\  fancy,     f    agent,  /^~-  ransom,  u  David,    s    chiefly, 

\     travel,  r—>     </roj>hie.   {,  i    divine. 

!i?.    cf  shl,  J) shn,  when  written  upward  ;  and  (}    (//,-when 
written  downward,  must  never  stand  ALONE,  for  it  might 
be  supposed  that^.,    had   been  written  downward,  and 
4 


56    *~'  "n"  and  "f"  hooks.  98 

C    upward.     These  letters  are  distinct  when  joined  to 
others;  as,  <_, '^"  shilling,  V-y  official,   \yLy    partial. 

98.  A  final  hook  should  be  used  only  when  it  repre- 
sents the  last  sound   in  a  word  ;  as,     ^,  men,   3   cough; 

but  when  a  word  ends  with  n  or  f  followed  by  a  vowel, 
these  consonants  must  be  written  by  the  stroke  letters; 
thus,  ,-v^i  many,  '    ^  coffee. 

Exercise  32. 

i.  ^  x  ^  n  j.  j,  jl  j-  j   r  3- 

2.  \       i"        /'  V     V     ^      }       I          *  ^      ^ 

3.  e^?  o^>  ^  cf  **>  /f  s*9  *?  ^  *? 
4.^  ks  ^4,  <"s>  ^,  ^  vjj>  .  ^  /<"  ^ 
5.    \      \*«     J.  LjS    «/    Zjf     -"     — -i  "P     — ^ 

,  v  ^  r  [.  .-  -v.  ->  ^v  n.  % 

Exercise  33. 

1.  Pain,  plain,  pun,  blown,  brain,  deign,  train. 

2.  Tone,  chin,  bean,  crown,  cone,  join,  cam',  grain,  glean. 
:!.    Fine,  vine,  even,  thine,  nine,  ocean,  lane. 

I.   Puff,  proof,  beef,  brief,  Mull',  rough,  trough,  deaf. 
.").  ('hale,  chaff,  calf,  cough,  cave,  cliff,  grief,  grave,  reef. 

(i.    Hoof,  huff,   waif,  turf,   tariff,   drive,  derive,   roof. 

7.  Bone,  bony;  spoon,  sj ay;  puff,  puffy;  Jane,  Jenny. 

8.  Cone,  coney;   gun,  agony;    fan,   Fanny;    vain,  avenue. 

9.  Man,  many,  manna,  money;    rave,  review  ;  rain,  rainy. 

in.   Buff,  bevy;  nine,  ninny;  pansy,  iitouy,  renew. 


99    108  CIRCLE    "s"    AND    ••!•''■    AND    "n"    HOOKS.  51 


Circle  S  added  to  .V  and  F  Hooks. 

99.   S  or  z  is  added  to  the  final   hook  of  a  straight  let- 
ter thus, 

\  J     J  _  y°  ./>  <r  x-  \    (     .  ."0  ^  ^ 

pns,  ins,  chns,  kns,  rns,  wne,  1ms:  pfs,  tfs,  chfs,  kfs,  it's,  wfs,  hfs; 

as  in    \  pains,    r  torn*,     /•  chains,    ; — 0   coins,    ^°    once, 
X   puffs,  \f  doves,    _s   coughs,    ,  ?    waves. 

LOO.   The    na    circle     enlarged,     becomes    resa?;    thus, 
J-   tenses,      !   dances,     •     chances,       )  glances. 

101.  S  is  added  to  the  n  hook  after  a  curve,  I »y  making 
a  small  circle  or  loop  inside  the  hook;  thus,    Vs   feigns, 

V..  '''//*x,    .',-,  mines,   ■^~s>   nouns,    f*  lanes,      «    turns/" 

102.  Between  two  consonants  the   circle   represents  s 
only;  thus,  ^jj-^  is  not  />»*-, ,,  but  p-S-m. 

103.  Thest,  *</•  loops  may  be  combined  with  the  final  n 
hook  after  straight  letters;  thus,   \    bounced,  J  chanced, 

<^,    chiius,  ,1,     -_     against,      '  ,     /nnixter,      \b    punsters, 
VN,-  spinsters. 


♦  The  two  methods  "f  writing  a  final  ZVS  after  a  i  urved  consonant 
arc  utilized  thus:  When  the  Bound  is  /'.\  /  use  the  hook  «;  and  when 
the  sound  is  ENS  (anst ,  <  nsi ,  inse,'  or  «/<<y,  -  net ,  inct )  use  the  stroke  n; 
thus,  write  fans,  fines,  rims,  man's,  thanes,  Athens,  assigns,  shuns, 
Romans,  men's,  moans,  moons,  mines,  nouns,  pronouns,  with  the  hook  n 
and  a  small  circle  at  the  end  of  it;  and  write  fence,  affiance,  I.  ■  Vance, 
tin  in-, ,  essence,  omniscience,  mince,  immense,  romance,  pronounce,  per- 
manence, with  the  stroke*!  followed  by  ihe  circles.  The  only  exception 
to  this  rule  is.  the  upward  /  after  another  i  onsonant,  which  is  written 
with  a  hook  and  8  either  for  ,  m  oi 


32  EXERCISES   OX    FINAL    "n"    AXD    "f"    HOOKS. 

Exekcise  34. 

1.  Pence,  beans,  tunes,  plains,  spoons,  brains,  blains. 

2.  Fines,  feigns,  means,  noun-,  lanes,  lines,  eauns. 

3.  Dove-,  chiefs,  cuffs,  calves,  caves,  gloves,waves,serves. 

4.  Pounees,  prances,  bounces,  dances,  chances,  glances. 

5.  Instances,  distances,  trances,  cleanses,  princes. 

6.  Lances,  offences,  balances,  romances,  excellences. 

7.  Danced,  chanced,  pounced,  dispensed,  spinster. 


53 


Review. 

1.  How  is  the  letter  n  expressed  when  it  ends  a  word  ? 

2,  I  low  is  8  or  .:  added  to   the  it  hook  '. 

;!.    What  does  a  double-sized  m  circle  represent  ? 

4.  How  is  s  or  z  added  to  the  n  hook  following  a  curve  '. 

5.  How  is  $8  written  after  n  following  a  curve  ? 

G.    When   may   the    //,    hook    be   used    medially  ?      Give 
examples. 

7.  How   are   the  st  and   sir  loops  combined   with  the  n 

hook  ? 

8.  How  is  a  vowel  after  a  letter  with  the  //  hook  read  ? 

9.  How  is  fox  »  expressed  (a)  when  following  a  straight 

letter,  (b)  when  following  a  curve  '. 

10.  How  is  s  joined  to  the  f  or  B  hook  ? 

11.  Which  form  of  /"or  /•  is  used  when  a  vowel   follows  ? 


54  "-TION  "   HOOK.  104-108 


CHAPTER  XL 


TION  HOOK. 


104.  The  termination  -tion,  also  variously  written  sion, 
-dan,  -tian,  -sian,  which  ends  over  2,000  English  words, 
is  expressed  in  Phonography  by  a  huge  liiialiiojjk  ;  thus, 
'\)  option,   \j  edition,  Kj  fashion,  ^  mission,    ^  version, 

\P  Persian,   -~p  nations,  [$  additions. 

105.  When  -//«//  hook  follows  a  CURVE,  it  is  written 
on  the  INNER  side,  like  the  final  n  hook;  thus,    Vj  vision. 

10(5.  After  a  STRAIGHT  letter  which  begins  with  a  hook, 
circle,  or  loop,  or  springs  from  a  curve,  the  -tion  hook  is 
written  on  the  OPPOSITE  side,  to  preserve;  the  straight- 
ness  of  the   letter;  thus.  '  \}  oppression,    x.j  suppression, 

0ycT2  circulation,  J-  station,  J-  citation,  a_  section,  ,  ?  se- 
cretion,      u-5>    execution,    V  ■     affection,     i  selection, 

\j  at t /-it  i"/i. 

107.   After  /,  //,  or  /',  not  beginning  with  a  hook,  circle, 

or   loop,    the    -lion    hook     is    written    mi    the     RIGHT    side; 

thus,     I    ,      dictation,       "{'j     i<>iiiti<in,     I — i      degradation, 
(^  magician. 

His.  W'lien  -tion  follows  :i  simple  straight  letter,  the 
hook  is  written   on    the    side    opposite    to   that    on    which 


'  \s\\_    krrK 

109-113      ,  "-tion"  1K.0K.  55 

the  vowel  (or  accented  vowel,  if  there  is  more  than 
one)  occurs;  thus,    \    passion,  /Nv>  option,   ]_D  occasion, 

—^  action,  \_  diction,  \s>  education,  /\jt  operation, 
\Z* portion.  This  shows  where  the  vowel,  if  omitted, 
is  to  be  read. 

109.  When  two  distinct  vowel  signs  occur  immediately 
before  -tion,  write  sh  and  the  hook  n  ;  thus  {j^  valua- 
tion,     Ms-,  extenuation,      b  tuition,     t  situation. 

110.  The  -tion  hook  is  used  medially,  as  y  addi- 
tional, I  ■  /  dictionary,  ~\  auctioneer,  _5  cautionary, 
—/'  actionary,  -\f  actionable,  V\  fashionable, 
^--^affectionate,  '\S    optional. 

111.  When  -fo'ow  follows  the  circle  s  or  ?w,  it  is  ex- 
pressed  by  continuing  the  circle  on  the  other  side  of 
the  consonant;  thus,  \>  possession,  \>  position,  ^  de- 
cision,    Vg,.    physician,      -—^     accession,    c-^c   acquisition, 

\s&  authorisation,    JL    dispensation,  J,  transition. 

112.  This  back  hook  is  vocalized  thus: — With  down- 
strokes,  write  the  vowel-sign  on  the  left,  or  before  tin* 

hook,  for  a  second -place  vowel  ;  and  on  the  right,  or  AFTER 

it,  for  a  third-place  vowel.  With  horizontal  and  up 
Strokes  write  it  ABOVE  for  a  second-place  vowel,  and 
BELOW  for  a  third-place  vowel.  The  tirst-place  vowel, 
ah  or  3,  does  not  occur  in  any  English  word  between  8 
and  the  syllable  -tion. 

113.  The  circle  8  may  be  added  to  this  hook;  thus. 
\>  positions,  -\,  suppositions,  -„s  musicians;  and  the 
hook    may    be    used    medially;     thus,      V     positional, 

J/      transitional. 


56  exercise  ox  the  " -tion  "  hook. 

Exercise  36. 

1    .    y>     A/K    '    1789   )    .    ^     x       y    r-^    ' 

.      /*"      ^      %     ')       s      •      'U>     N     A      k^      ^      . 

^  x  .  /sy*'  M-     2  "  <-"/  \/>  N  .  \^ 

v  ^>  )    ^    ^    .    'V?        '\s        --,;    W    ' 

^  \  r  \   .  ^   '  v   '^  L  ^;  ^ 
'  J   ^  ^;   r-  "^^  Er"~".  ^; 

/*  s  <-*> ' .  v> s  ^  r,  ^  rl  \ 

°    ->N    IP*        8.     J*     (,    ^~    "    %N     /' 

4  •  i^  •  r\-r,  .  ^  .  _w>  '     ^  ^V 

(  ^  N  •  -"  J, %  '  fcx  ^  '■ 


EXERCISE   ON   THE    "-TION"    HOOK. 


Exercise  37. 

1.  Fashion,  mission,  motion,  notion,  nation,  oRation,  lotion, 

evasion,  vision,  fusion,  elation,  solution,  delusion,  donation, 
mention,  invasion,  dimension,  nomination,  invention,  pen- 
sion, relation,  cremation,  salvation,  evolution,  infusion,  col- 
lision, veneration,  provision,  pollution,  ammunition,  reserva- 
tion, intimation,  revelation 

'J  Suppression,  attrition,  Grecian,  abrasion,  suction,  equa- 
tion, accretion,  secretion,  expression,  selection,  location, 
faction,  fiction,  vocation,  vacation,  approbation,  illustration, 
emigration  ;  addition,  imitation,  exhortation,  deputation, 
vegetation. 

;!.  Option,  potion,  passion,  auction,  caution,  cushion,  ap- 
parition, education,  diction,  duration,  Egyptian,  implication, 
aberrat  ion,  appor!  ion,  coercion. 

4.  Evacuation  attenuation,  intuition  :  missionary,  op- 
tional, visionary,  illusionary,  occasional,  educational,  sec- 
tional :  passions,  stations,  relations,  occupations,  explana- 
tions, gradations,  divisions. 

5.  Possession,  precision,  procession,  requisition,  disquisi- 
tion, inquisition,  incision,  authorization,  sensation,  evangel- 
ization, cessation,  transition;  suppositions,  accusations, 
pulsations;  positional,,  transitional. 


Review. 

1.    How  is  the  termination  -tion  expressed  ? 

'i.    How  is  the  -tion  hook  written  when  following  a  curve  ? 

:!.    How  after  a  straight  letter   beginning  with  a    hook. 

circle  or  loop,  or  springing  from  a  curve  ? 
t.    How  is  the  -tion  hook  written  after  t,  d,  or  j  .' 
5.    How  is  the  hook  written  in  other  cases  \ 
(I.   How    is  -tion    written   when    two    vowel    signs   occur 

before  it  '.     Write  accentuation. 

7.  Give  examples  of  the  -tion  hook  used  medially. 

8.  How  is  -tion  expressed   when   following  the  circle  .•>• 

or  n& .' 

9.  How  far  can  this  hook  he  vocalized  \ 


58  THE   ASPIRATE.  114-119 

CHAPTEE   XII. 

THE    ASPIRATE. 

114.  H  is  represented  in  Phonography  in  four  ways: — 
(a)  stroke  h,  written  downward  ,  (b)  a  tick  (an  abbrevia- 
tion of  the  downward  h)  ;  (<■)  stroke  //,  written  upward  ; 
and  [<h  a  dot;  thus, 

il5.  (a)  By  the  character  /  written  downward,  in  words 
containing  no  other  consonant  than  //  ;  as,  /•  hay, 
fv  high,  and  when  h  is  followed  by  /■  or  g  ;  as  Zl  hawk, 
L   hag. 

11(1.  {!/)  By  a  Tick  slanting  downward  to  the  left  (aeon- 
traction  of  '  by  writing  only  the  lower  half  of  the  sign) 
before  upward  /,  downward  /•,  stroke  s,  e,  and  m,  ////*  .- 
thus,    »/""   In///,     f     hail,    f~    heel,    y^~     hill,     f    whole, 

<^  howl;  ;,  here,  ^\  her,  A  hair,  ^\  hoar,  '^  horse; 
j  hiss,  )  haze,  t  hum,  h-  hem,  ■  hymn,  <^  hemp. 
It  is  written  thus,  r"    hi,   ■      hm ;  [not   /    hi,  v->   hm.\ 

117.   (c)   By  the   character  written  upward,  when 

followed  by  all  other  consonants,  and  also  when  fol- 
lowed by  /and  r  with  a  vowel  following  ;  as,  tf*\  hope, 
<f\  Jiaughty,  $1  hatch,  <f\*  heavy,  /y,  heathen, 
<s^  honetj,  ,rf^  Henry  ;  <z  *  hallow,  ,_  holly,  e»  holy; 
<i^'  Harry,       '    Horace,     '      luzggle,  5  c     Hooker. 

lis.  1,/ 1  r,\  a  Dor  before  the  \  owel  sign  ;  thus.       happy, 
I  had,    '   hath,     /"  uphill,    \    perhaps,         J  manhood, 

I.  handy. 

ll'.i.  The  stroke  //,  when  following  another  consonant, 
must  be  so  joined  thai   the  upward  h  cannot   be  read  as 

8T,  nor    the   downward    //    as    sch;    as.    \  abhor,    |  not 

\c^     abhor,  1    "Z   M'tijlitii-,  [not      ;,    Mayhew.]    The  ex- 


120-124  THE    ASPIRATE.  50 

amples  given  in  the  foot-note*  show   how   to  join  //  to 
c\  w\  ni  lii ir  consonant. 

120.  The  four  curved  consonants  before  which  I  he  tick  A 
is  used  are  the  four  consonants  in  the  word  smaller  ;  and 
the  fad  thai  the  downward  r  h  is  made  smaller,  that 
is  reduced  to  a  tick,  before  any  one  of  these  tour  con- 
sonants, forms  a  useful  aid  to  memory. 

121.  The  tick  h  is  also  used  before  a  hooked  letter 
when  it  is  convenient  ;  as,  ^v  hyperbola,  >'  Hebrew, 
v1  hydra,  /  hedger,    )  hither. 

122.  The  tick  //  is  always  read  FIRST,  like  the  circle  s 
in  v,     Saul,    c_  sack;  and  the  hook  in  v     wall,    C     well, 

C     while. 

123.  The  dot  aspirate  cannot  be  used  before  a  vowel 
not  followed  by  a  consonant  ;  thus  \.v  is  Aj/jiii  (A.cts 
28.  15),  not  Ap-hy. 

124.  The  dot  h  is  only  employed  in  a  few  words  of 
frequent  occurrence — (a)  where  it  may  afterwards  be 
safely  omitted  and  the  word  treated  as  a  grammalogue, 
and  (&)  in  some  long  words  in  order  to  give  a  briefer 
outline. 

*   A/-  .         ^T^"r?f    /'        K 

upheave,    Tahiti,    Fitzhugh,    adhere,    dishearten,    Jehu,    Jehovah, 

\^-  ■'  ^  :    I    y 

Fbhi,  Thahnsh  {GenesisSZ.  24),  Sihor  (theNile),  Soho,  Sahara,  Sheehy, 
Mohawk,  enhance,  Nehemiah,  l'.lilin,  rehearse,  racehorse,  Eehum  ( Ezra 

i  8),  Aarbuus  (in  Denmark),  weigh  house,  warehouse,  Yahoo,  heigh-ho  ! 

In  the  example  Fitzhugh,  the  circle  .<  and  the  circle  of  the  upward  h  make 
a  large  circle,  which  cannot  be  mistaken  torftssr,tti  which  the  ss  circle 
won  hi  be  written  on  ihe  other  side  of  t.  S  and  «A,  preceding  h.  are  wril 
ten  with  the  circle  of  the  A  inside  the  cmve  because  ilie  combinations 
#,  »•,  chi  sh,  s,  ch  ;  do  not  occur  in  English. 


60 


EXERCISE    ON    T11K    ASPIRATE. 


Exercise  38. 

°    "  <7  1 ,  v   ^   -  J^  s  <d    o  ^x     \ 
C  Ur   .  ^   "I   J^  7  ^   ^  .\p,  '  A  V.   ,  . 

— .«    3  *<  ,  r  ^  ^  ^A  \  K  V,  .  C 

\   %   ;  .  ^    ^1 ;     .    o   /V.  </\  f   ^  -  Z_ 
^  ^^  .         x       I    C   Ur ,       cr^l  n  .   <^>  ,  '  JL 

cA    /    ^         No-    U^    \    I    V^   .    ^    vpx 

*  *    "  ^  ~l,  x  .  -r  a  —L  '  '  \J^ 


u  s 


"1   >,  x      6 


O  c!   ,  .A  \j       I       O        \       f\ 


EXERCISE   ON   THE   ASPIRATE.  61 

Exercise  39. 

Downwa/rd  H.  Ha  !  Hague,  hock,  hoax,  haggis,  huckster, 
hexagon,  hookah,  hackney. 

Tick  If. — Ham,  homily,  hymn,  hull,  hump,  horn,  hare, 
hire,  hires,  horse,  hemp,  Hymen,  horror,  hiss,  hurl,  hail- 
stone, helm,  hearty,  hasty,  harvest,  harbor,  hilarity,  whole- 
sale, hemlock. 

Upward  II. — Heed,  hoop,  hide,  hatch,  hung,  hush,  heavy, 
Hannah,  hamper,  haddock,  hazel,  ahead,  haggle,  hardy, 
hawker,  hammer,  hunger,  hobble,  Hindoo,  hustle,  husk, 
bearth,  harrow,  hurry,  Harry,  hero,  horizon,  horrify,  holly. 

D<>t  II.  -Happen,  happy,  happily,  happiness,  perhaps, 
uphill,   heaven,  handy,  apprehend. 

Medial  II  Behave,  behead,  upheave,  outhouse,  adhesion, 
adhesive,  Jehovah  (up),  Jehoiakim  (down),  coffee-house,  over- 
hauls, Nahash,  rehearse,  Yahoo,  Sahara,  coheRe,  cohesion, 
warehouse. 

Review. 

1.  How  is  the  Aspirate  represented  in  Phonography  ? 

2.  Give   the   rules  for  the  employment  of  the   different 

forms  of  h. 

3.  What  ride  must  be  observed  when  It  follows  another 

consonant  ? 

4.  Name  the  consonants  before  which  the  downward  It 

is  reduced  to  a  tick. 

5.  When  is  the  dot  h  employed  '. 


62 


UPWARD    AND    DOWNWARD    "  B,  "    AND    "L."      125-129 


CHAPTER   XIII. 


UPWARD   AND    DOWNWARD    R   AND   L. 


125.  The  following    rules  for  the    employment  of    the 

upward  and  downward  forms  of  /■,  and  tin:  upward  and 
downward  direction  of  /  have  been  deferred  to  the  present 
chapter,  because  they  were  not  necessary  to  the  student 
in  the  initial  stages  of  his  study.  The  pupil  should 
thoroughly  master  the  rules  for  r  before  turning  to 
those  for  / :  — 

12(5.  Initial  R. — When  /■  is  tin'  first  or  only  consonant 
in  a  word,  it  is  written  downward  if  a  vowel  precedes 
and  upward  if  a  vowel  does  not  precede  ;  thus,     ~^\    air, 

T  arrow,  ^.  ray;  '^  airs,  ^  rose,  ^  rise ;  o  earn, 
"~^i  arraign,  <"  reign,  /r9  run;  '  &  orations,  "?  rations; 
"V   earl,    ^.  error,  /      rock,    /f   rule. 

127.  When  /•  precedes  t,  </,  ch,  j,  th,  M,  gl,  write 
the   upward    r;    thus,       /\j      irritation,        ■       aridity, 

■/j     arch,     A.     earth,       K—\      orthography,    y* —    oracle, 
/~     argal ;    and    in   ^Z^^^f  ornamental.    Outlines  like 
earth,     \      oracle,  impede  the  writer. 

128.  When  r  is  circled  or  looped  initially,  it  is  written 
Upward    if    a    vowel     follows,    and    downward    if  a    vowel 

docs  not  follow;  thus,  ."  sorry,  \  sir;  ,  '■  series, 
o*r  serious,    °'o  soura  ;     v      story,         star;      o  stern. 

129.  PlNAL  /.',  in  short  words,  is  written  downward,  if 
it     ends  ;i    word,    and    upward    if  a    vowel    follows;   thus, 

|"    Tory;    '        fear,*   .     fury  /    s<^spare,  \/' perry  ; 
~\  car,  carry;  /     jury. 


1:50-134      UPWARD    AMi    DOWNWARD    "li"   AND    "L."  fi-3 

130.  When  a  word  has  two  descending  strokes  before 
the  final  r,  the  upward  r  is  generally  used  ;  as  >^/  pre- 
pare, L  /  debar,  '  fairer,  -£\>  Shakspere.  Write 
kitiikk  i\  irrespective  of  vowels,  rather  than  an  awk- 
ward outline  ;  1 1 1 us,  /\^y    [not   ^Sj  officer,     ..     answer. 

131.  The  upward  /■  is  always  written  alter  a  single 
Straight  upstroke  (/',  n\  wh,  y,  It)  ;  as  in  ^^  rare, 
c^  yore,  (^  wore,  c^  where.  The  upward  m,  final, 
is  generally  more  convenient  than  the  downward  one; 
thus,  S/"  born,    \/°    turn,  ^S  mom. 

132.  Initial  7,  is  always  written  up,  except 

(o)  When  preceded  l>y  a  vowel  and  followed  by  a 
horizontal  letter  not  hooked  initially  ;  as,  ^v  alike, 
(^  elm,    (S  alone,  f^,  almoner. 

(5)  When  preceding  sv,  sn,  sng,  as  -^  illusive, 
(^  lesson,  ([_,  Leasing.  In  these  eases  it  is  written 
down  ward. 

133.  Final  Lis  always  written  down  : 

(a)  After  n.  ikj,  ns,  ngs,  fs,  VS,  //is;  as  J  animal, 
\^  strongly,     ~J     counsel,    \<?    vessel,     Jo   thistle. 

(b)  After  the  straight  upstrokes  /•,  ir,  wh,  //,  li  ;  and 
after/',   V,  si;  Jew,  shw,  if    no   vowel    follows;   as,    ^f    roll, 

<rf  Yale,  s^(  HoweU,    >  fool,   >  vale,   f"  skill,  7~  quail. 

(c)  After  a  straight  downstroke,  if  two  vowel-signs 
Come  between  ;  as,  .}*  toirel.  .J^  <i 'tnl.  J  trial.  In  other 
cases  it  is  written  upward  ;   as,  \f~  Paul,     J*  fellow. 

134.  Final  Li?  can  be  used  where  a  final  downward  / 
would      be      written   ;        as         >       fowler,         T       In,, In: 

\^ys>  peninsular,  -if  roller,  •/"  scholar,  f  queller. 
When  a  strongly-sounded  vowel  conies  between  I  and  r, 
write  the  two  letter.-,  as   !  (     ^failure. 


04  upward  and  downward  "  r  "  and  ',l." 

Exercise  40. 

C ^  ^  s  1.  \  ^  /^?"    ''^   .   • 
).  )    o  v    ^  -  /  •  %.*    C  ,   A-*    ° 

c_^x        '    ^_  'Y\o     N    ^,     /   o     _     N    C     ^ 

n  )  o  '  a  ,  u^    *)  ^  sy  c 

^  ).  s ).  w  '  L,  7  tf  ^  '  b  -    C-  <^  .^  N 

°    •  6  ( ,  )  ^     vv.^ir^, 


UPWARD   AND    DOWNWARD    "R"   AND    "L."'  65 

Exercise  41„ 

Initial  R.  —  Row,  wry,  raw,  roan,  roii^h.  rice,  reuse,  rage, 
rich  ;  oars,  ears,  Arran,  urban,  Irish,  arrear,  orrery,  aurora, 
orb,  arisen,  arm:  arise,  arose,  aura,  amuse,  erase;  rob,  robin, 
Arab;  room,  aroma;  rogue,  argue;  range,  arrange;  rival,  ar- 
rival: aright,  arsenic,  wrath,  irritation.  Sore.  Sarah;  sores, 
series;  sire;  stare,  store,  starry;  arrest ;  stern,  siren. 

Final  H. — Pair.  Peru;  liar,  bury,  bureau;  tar,  tarry,  tyro; 
core,  carry,  curry;  gore,  gory;  fair,  fire,  fiery:  four,  foray; 
share,  shore,  sherry  ;  mar,  mare,  moor,  marrow;  inure,  narrow, 
Nero;  lore,  lair.  Laura,  Iory;debar,  aspire,  transpire,  tramp- 
Ler;  roar,  rear:  were,  weir;  tarn,  torn, borne,  cairn,  return. 

Initial  /..-—Less.  else.  eels,  lees:  lack,  alack,  Aiick;  lame, 
elm:  Lennie,  Ellen; lamb,  Alma,  lane,  Allan;  location,  alloca- 
tion; leg,  Olga;  alcove,  alkali,  election,  elocution,  eliminate, 
alchemy,   almanac,  almoner,    Elgin. 

Final  I j.  Feel,  foil)  :  vale,  valley; avowal,  value;  roll,  rule, 
rely,  rally,  only,  feeler,  ruler;  Powell,  towel,  dial,  dual,  duel, 
fuel. 

Miscellaneous.-  Apple,  pall,  plea,  peel,  pray,  prow,  power, 
brow,  bower,  able,  bale,  tray,  claw,  coal,  free,  (ear,  Haw.  fall, 
Luna.  Luke,  rubric,  ruminate,  rust,  rustle,  leather,  leaven, 
eleven,  nasal,  muscle,  employer,  silver,  slavery,  oppressor, 
molar,  timbrel,  vessel,  downhill,  ruthless,  ruddy,  Priscilla, 
rosemary,  legatee,  lesson,  Alps,  levee,  level,  liberal,  instal, 
extol,  litany,  Latin,  lancers,  ear-ache,  tureen,  retire,  retrench, 
rigor,  ridicule,  repose. 

Review. 
1.    When   should    an   initial    /•  be    written    upward,    and 

when  downward  \     Mention  the  exceptions. 
•„'.    When  r  is  circled  or  looped   initially,    how   i>  it  writ- 
ten .'     Write  sere,  Sarah  ;  sour,    Surrey. 
:'..    When  is  final  /'written  upward,  and  when  downward  '. 

I.   When  /•//  is  final,  which  form  should  lie  used  '. 

.">.  When  is  initial  /  written  upward,  and  when  down- 
ward '. 

<>.  After  what  letters  i^  final  I  written  cither  upward  or 
downward,  according  as  it  is  or  is  not  followed  by 
a  vowel  '. 

7.  After  what  letters  is/  always  written  downward  '. 

8.  When  may  final  //"  lie  used  .' 

5 


G(i  THE   HALVING    PRINCIPLE.  135-140 

CHAPTER    XIV. 

THE    HALVING    PRINCIPLE. 

135.  (.1)  A  single  thin  consonant,  standing  by  itself, 
and  made  one-half  its  usual  length,  indicates  the  addi- 
tion of  t  ;  and  a  thick  consonant,  standing  by  itself,  when 
halved,  expresses  the  addition  of  <l ;  thus,  \  ]>,  \  pt; 
\  />,  \  Id;  V_   f,  v_  ft ;   ^-n  m,  ^  mt ;  v.  vd;  _  Tct. 

136.  A  vowel  before  a  half-sized  consonant  is  read 
before  both  letters;  as,  'V.  oft,  ^_  act,    n  thlml. 

137i   A   vowel    after    a    half-sized    consonant  is  read 

next    to    the    PRIMARY    letter;    thus,    \     pay,    \   pate ; 

\    tie,     '      tight;    ^^    may,      .     mate;    \      die,  died; 

vc  view,    ^    vieioed ;  oft  ;    ^    void ;    .)   east;  <>-  wit. 

r  \S  would    not    be     __/].    guilty,    'Kf']   faulty,    but 

'lilt/  faulit. 

138.  (A')  The  four  half-length  curves  ^mt,  ^nt, 
r  It,  ~\  rt,  are  thickened  to  express  d  ;  thus,  >~«md,  ^  ltd, 
r  lil  [written  downward],  ■>  rd  ;  as  in  ^  mate,  ^  made, 
a  aimed,  ^  mode,  L  tempt,  L-  deemed,  &>  sent,  ^  send, 
^f  felt,    V,  filed,  \  heart,  S  hard,  ^>  moored. 

139.  The  letters  <~>md,  ~  nd,  may  be  used  when  a  vowel 
either  precedes  or  follows  tit  or  t>  ;  as  i.  aimed,  T  mode, 
~  amid,  i  owned,  ^  mid,  r  annoyed  ;  but  r    Id,  ~>  rd,  are 

used  only   when    the   two   consonants   succeed    each   other 

without  a  vowel  between;  as,  v 'r  fold,  \  paired. 
When  a  vowel  comes  between  /  <l  or  rd,  the  single 
letters  should  We  written;  as,  f\  laid,  ^J^  followed, 
\/\ parried,      j  read,         \\   corrode. 

1  K».  I.i  is  written  upward;  as,  \  /„-//,  except,  after 
/>.   u\  ///',   when   ii   is  written  downward  ;  as,  knelt, 

I  ;  dwelt,      '   quilt, 


I  11-14-1  THE    SALVING    PRINCIPLE.  07 

141.  The  consonants  w  ng,  '-s  mp,  f  lr,  cannot 
be  halved  for  the  addition  of  t  or  d,  the  half-length  signs 
being  assigned  to  w  nd,  -  md,  r  Id  ;  but  ^~-,  mpn  may 
be  halved  to  add  t  or  <//  as,  -,  impend,  -j  impugned;  and 
«-*  «0T  and  ~  mp*  may  be  halved  ;  as,  ^  angered  or 
anchored,  ./    hampered,  (^  slumbered, 

142.  Words  of  one  syllable  containing  only  one  con- 
sonant, hooked  or  circled  initially,  follow  the  rule  that 
by  halving  a  thin  consonant  /  is  added,  and  that  by  halv- 
ing a  thick  consonant  d  is  added ;  thus,  Opiate,  \  blade, 
*<  prate,  \  braid,   d.  soaked,  \  sobbed. 

143.  (<')   Either   t   ok   d   is   added   by   halving: — 
(a)   In    words  of  one   syllable   when    the   letter   ends 

with  a    hook,    or   with    a   circle    formed   on   a   hook  ;   as, 

pint   or   /'//in/:    J    tint   or   tinned;    J  tents   or    tends; 

l  dint  or  dinned;  v  /•<///  or  vend;   -    mount  or  mound  ; 

s>  rent  or    rend;    '!     TVeni  ov  t/-///d  ;     ,    plant   or  />/unn<d. 

(A)  Generally  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable  ;  as, 

'<l    offered,    -1     uttered,    f   seated,    .,\     suited,    •'    stated, 

rapid,        N     rabbit,    rabid,    I      tepid,    _J^    colored, 

vr-  ventured,   v^  forward,  [,     ^contraction  for  -woreZj, 

^-^  di  h  r/ui/ii',   x    .  between,  /  V_^  alphabet,  ip  occasioned, 

J.,    disappoint,     \      despond,      [     distant,     I      destined, 

)     detach,      [.      debate,      %.     trader,     c~\  free-trade. 

144.  (//)  CIRCLE  5,  at  the  end  of  a  half-sized  character, 
is  always  read  last  :  that  is  AFTER  the  f  or  </  added  by 
halving;  thus,  \  paJ,  Sj  pa£s  (not  past),  \  pants  (not 
panst).  The  following  examples  show  the  steps  from 
the  primary  character  to  the  half-length    with  *  added  : — 


\ 

^ 

\ 

lr 

y 

i 

/"<// 

/in  in 

blown 

tough 

chin 

frown 

piltl 

/mi/// 

\ 
blend 

lr 
tuft 

chant 

front 

pates 

paints 

s 
blends 

lr 

chants 

fronts 

THE    HALVIN't;    PRINCIPLE. 


145-151 


The  Past  Tense  ending  in  T  on  D. 
14.j.   Verbs  ending  in  t  or  d,  arc  written  thus,    '    chat, 
/    chatted ;  r    nod    ~-  I    nodd,ed  ;    \y  part,     \/'   parted, 
[net    \|  parted,]  etc. 

146.  Verbs  written  by  a  half-length  letter  ending  with 
a  hook  are  written  thus,     ;  paint,  X_    painted,        print, 

\_i    printed,    %   plant,    x    (to  preserve  the  straightness 
of  the    stroke)  planted,    J    stint,    J     stinted,    c,   acquaint, 
CV^_-1  acquainted,  —  grant,    <= — — i   granted,  /^  rented. 
Junction  of  Half-length  Strokes. 

147.  Two  half-length  strokes,  or  two  strokes  of  unequal 
length,  must  not  be  joined  together  cnless  they  make 
an  angle;  thus,  /  cht  must  not  be  joined  to  /  cht  for 
chit-chat;  nor  —  1c  to  It  in  faetiex,  nor -— s  m  to  _<  ?i£ 
for  minute.  Take  the  pen  off,  or  write  the  simple  con- 
sonants; thus,  \.  or  chit-chat,  N  yr  y<  /  [not  %, 
pr pt],  propped,  ' — i      tactics,  .1    minute.     In     i-^  ford, 

.__ -^  named,  etc.,  the  junction  being  evident,  is  allowed. 


lis.   To  avoid  long  strokes  like 


,//,/, 


/,/,/, 


ilrdd, 


write  the  half-length  /  or  (7  at  the  side;  thus,    |    edited, 
.   tided,  \       dietetic,  I    dreaded,    !,    situated, 

149.  7/  half-length, — Write  the  upward  />  in  words  that 
contain//  halved  with  or  without  final  a  or  n  hook;  as, 
ox    hat,    i,J    hats,    ..•  heat,      '   hunt.  Hants. 

150.  AI'tiT  the  -tion  hook,  the  stroke  st  may  be  written 

upward    when    if    cannot    be    written    downward;    thus, 
u  \    excursionist,    fi6    liberationism   ■(,  v3>    Salvationist, 

151.  The  half-length  /■  |  ]  should  never  be  written 
alone,  nor  with  8  only  |  ■  |  added.  In  rapid  writing, 
when     vowels     are     generally     omitted,        '     rl    would    be 

confused    with    the   logograms    for  and,   should.     Write 
/*1  [not   .  J  rate,       I    [not      |  write,     J,    [not  -£]  writes. 


exercise  on  the  halving  principle.  g9 

Exercise  42. 

Graminalogues  •       cannot,   e-  greatf,         »o^  sAojtJ, 

///«/,  (  without,   f  (Wi/,  _  could, 

cuU,( called),  1  toward,     Cjirst. 

a  t  \i|  j  "i  rv.  x,,    ,  >  x    _  0  ^ 

'   K  *  a|    .    ,.    ,     |    rd     ^    '    \x      2       "\    /* 

<     o     \     ^     ..     I      °       -      --S     N     ~\     ^,     '      )- 


x    i 


- 


us,  )-  .  V  v* :  %  ^  /y,  '  ^  ^  s  _^  x 
^        -  \  .  *,  '    1  ~  s  .  ^  L_x 


70 


EXERCISE    ON   THE    HALVING    PRINCIPLE. 


.       I 


Exercise  42 — {continued). 


V^    ,  </^> 


^  r 
c  ^ 


v,  ' 

9        <^> 


M 


(   r 


<  J  s  *   i    L.   S,  ; 

Exercise  43. 


.  A,  U 


(.4)  Pit,  pate,  pet,  bed,  bond,  obeyed ;  taught,  added ;  etched. 
edged;  ached,  caught,  guide;  evade:  thought;  east,  eased: 
shot;  meat;  ant,  neat;  liijht,,  alight;  wait-,  yet:  heat;  quote; 
pots,  eats,  nets;  God,  gaudy;  cat,  Kitty;  mote,  motto:  dado, 
date;  loft,  lofty:  abode,  body;  weight,  weighty. 

(li)  Ailed,  peeled,  appalled,  fold;  mode,  amid;  swooned 
send,  sound,  hand;  hard,  heard  ;  middle,  palmed,  bard,  heard, 
absurd:  prate,  plot;  abroad,  Made;  treat,  trite,  straight, 
dread;  secret,  glide;  Eruit,  flight,  threat;  plight,  spite,  split. 

(( ')  Pant,  paint-,  splint,  proved,  bend,  abound,  blind,  brand  : 
Trent,  Count;  fount,  fountain;  mount,  mountain;  lent,  land; 
raft,  rend,  served:    waved,  cushioned:   pack,  packed;    live, 

lived;    kept,,    moved,   robbed,   patent ,  tickets,  torrent ,  peopled. 

invent,  parent,  ordered,  assembled;    beautiful,  arithmetic, 

indicate,  backward,  forward,    Edward. 

(/>)  Drifts,  accounts,  friends,  winds,  proves,  brands,  lands, 
mounts,  finds,  prints,  pants,  blinds,  faints,   minds. 

Hand,  handy;  end,  ended;  need,  needy;  sport,  sported; 
pat-ted,     pitted,    appetite;    start,     started;    coated:     refuted, 

melted,  included,  pocketed;  piped,  popped,  bribed,  judged, 
effect,  cooked,  afflict,  licked,  select,  looked,  quaked,  reared: 

Card,  named,  discord  ;  attitude,  sil  ua.led,  dreaded,  illustrated, 
obtruded  ;  hot,  hate,  hit  ;  fashioiiisl.  libera)  ionisl  ;  wrought, 
rot,  rat 


;i 


Review. 

1.  'What  consonants  arc  halved   for  t  only,  and  what  for 

d  only? 

2.  How  is  a  vowel  road  before  a  half-sized  letter?     How 

after? 

3.  How  is  the  addition  of  t  and  d  to  m,  n,  /,  r,  represented? 

4.  When  may  a  thin  letter  be  halved  to  express  d\ 

5.  When  may  a  thick  letter  be  halved  to  express  tl 

6.  Under  what  circumstances  may  a  full  size  ami  a  half 

size  consonant  not  be  joined? 

7.  Illustrate  the  rule  by  writing  cooked,   midnight,  fact, 

liked. 


72   Table  of  Single  and  Double  Consonants. 


L  hook. 


R  hook. 


N  hook. 


Fund  V\   „  .,  .       ,, 
hook.      Ha,f  len3th- 


P 

B 
T 
D 

CH 
J 
K 
G 
F 
V 
TH 
TH 
S 

z 

SH 
ZH 
M 
N 

NG 
L 
R 
R 
W 
Y 
H 


\ 


( 
( 


J 


Is 


pi  \ 

bl  \ 

ti  r 
ai  r 

chl  f 

jl  / 

kl  ^_ 


crl 


v] 


0. 


upidown 


ml   C^ 
nl    o 


pr      \ 
br    \ 
tr     1 
dr     1 
clir    / 
jr     / 
kr    c- 
gr    — 
fr    ^ 
vr    O 

Or  n 

thr   () 


sblr79   !   shr      '' 


zhr  J 


mr 
n  r 


pn     \ 
bn    \ 
tn     J 
dn     J 
cbn  J 


pf\ 
bf\ 

tf  I 
df  I 
chf  / 


.in 


J       jf    / 


I'll  ^ 


kf 
gf. 


kn   _, 

£ii    _, , 
fn  V^ 
vn  Vi 
llnx    L 
tlin  ( 
sn    ) 
zn    ) 
shn  c^yj' 
zlm  ,-V 
mn   ^_0 
nn     v_? 


ln/T" 

up,  down 

rn   ^         rf 


Wll 

c^> 

\\  £ 

\\t       </ 

\" 

s* 

yf  ** 

yt    ^ 

hi! 

s 

bitf-9 

lit     cT 

pt 

bd 


tt      I 
dd      l 
cht 
3d      / 
kt 

gd  - 
ft 

vd  L 
tht  ( 
thd  ( 
st  ) 
zd      ) 

sht     ' 

zlul    > 

j  mt      , 

I  .ua  ~ 

(  nt  ^ 


I  It 
ll.l    ' 

rt     - 


I 


152-153       "w"   AM)    "v"   SERIES   OF    DIPHTHONGS. 


73 


CHAPTEE    XV. 

TFAND  T  SERIES  OF  DIPHTHONGS. 


Wand  Y  prefixed  iii  the  six  simple  vowels,  both    font/  and  short. 

152.   When  w  or  y  is  followed  by  a  vowel,  a  diphthong 

is  formed,   which  is  represented  l>y  a  sign  in  the  same 

position  as  the  simple  vowel;  thus,    ;  ah,  witli  w  becomes 

j  wah,  and  with  y  ^    yah  ;  aw  with   w  becomes  3;  waw  : 

and  so  on. 


W  Series 
Y  Series, 


wah.  c.  weh,  t    wee,    j  waw,  'j  woh,  j  woo. 


yah,  u;  yeh,  ui  yee,     j  yaw,  Ai  yoh,  „ 


yoo. 


153.   Tin' same  signs  written  light  represent    wand  y 

prefixed  to  the  SHORT  vowels. 


I/'  Series.        \  wa,   ' :  we,     i   wi',     j  wo,    3|  wti,   ji  woe. 


T   Sei 


\  ya»  l  i  ye,   J  yi,    •  yo, 


yu, 


yoo. 


It  is  seldom  necessary  to  make  any  distinct  ion  between 
the  light  and  heavy  signs.  The  w  signs  r<  present  the 
form  of  the  mouth  in  pronouncing  w  or  oo\  and  the  y 
signs  represent  the  shape  of  the  mouth  iii  pronouncing 
y  or  ee. 


74  "w"  and  "y"  series  of  diphthongs.      154-157 

154.  Joined  Vowei,  Signs  for  Initial  W. — The  w 
diphthong   sign  c  may   be   joined   to  downward    I;    as, 

(Z^     (^    William    Wilson;  and   >  may   be    joined    to    k, 
g,   m,   to  represent  w ;  as,    a_=_   wake,    i_L  woke,    j .  wig, 

.". woman,     >— s     women.     The  alphabetic   form  <^  w, 

should  be  used  when  a  vowel  precedes  ;  as,  y.       awake, 
</.      awoke. 

155.  Joined  Initial  Vowels  and  Diphthongs. — 
At  the  beginning  of  a  word,  the  following  vowels  may  be 
joined : — 

aw,  o,  oi,  ow,  before  I ;  as  V      awl,  /   (j  alteration, 
f    oil,    p*       owl ; 

waw  and   wo,  before  k,    upward   r,    t>\    ehr,   shr;  as, 
walk,    >-      war,    |   water,      /   watcher,    y    washer  : 

7  before  /,  p,  f,  th,  s,  sh,  downward  r;  as,    |       i<llt. 
\^    identify,    \>   ibis,    Vj   ivy,    )  ice,       \  ire; 

wt  before,/  and  t,  as    \_   wife,  "]  or    |    white,    |    wide, 
Y~  widely. 

L56.  The  logogram  air  (oil)  may  be  joined  in  the 

compound   words      v|    Almighty,    .\:\..  always,    s  !     al- 
ready,   )         almost,      (~     although,  all-iris,. 

157.  Joined  Pinal  Vowelb.  When  a  word  ends 
wiiliy,  b,  /,  d,  th,  8,  n,    the  diphthongs  u,  ow,  may  be 

joined  ;   as,        .,     pew,        1     rir//n\       L     '/'",       (,     Matthew, 

X  issue,  ^_j  new  (a  part  of  the  diphthong  being  writ- 
ten), <■  sinew,  \  &ow,  vv  about,  \  doubt,  .  N  raow 
(part  of  the  diphthong);  and  7  may  be  joined  to  u  ; 
:is       v  nigh. 


EXERCISE   ON    THE    "  W  "    AND    •,V*'    DIPHTHONGS.  75 


Exercise  44. 
Grammalogues     with,  t  when,     what,   >  would,     beyond. 

1.  ^    k     .     S6/     A    ,    U     s      ,1     ^"    /      / 

*  ^l  )&  c^  .  <r  \  k  s  -fe  c  -c  r- 
^  '  w  '  ^S  ^    v-  '  ^  ^ x 

j.  _  \  ^ ,  /  .  o  \  x  v  C    y  r 

,  Ay 

" ft ,  .  l.  .  vv  s  \  ,  x  •  (x 
c .  *\  (•  ^  CY    |  )    ..     /  •  )-> 


TG  EXERCISE   ON    THE    "w"   AND    "y"   DIPHTHONGS. 

Exercise  44 —  (continued). 

5.  r  )  t  K.  ^  x  /,  .  •  f  x  "K_ c  *  r 


\.\  ERCISE    45. 

1.  Twelve,    twenty,   wish,   word,    railway,    frequent,    Asia, 

India. 

2.  Associate    association,  year,  yearly,  yard,  period,   folio, 

ratio. 
:!.   Password,  patriot,  fuchsia,  recreation,  variation,  various. 
I.  Superior,  cameo,  glorious,  piteous,  fume,  alien,  year. 
5.   Week,    wax,    wake,   walk,    Wilkinson,    Wigan,    woman, 

walker. 
(>.   Alternative,  water,  icy,  iron,  eyes,  frish,  item,  ivory,  icicle. 
7.  Almost ,  already,  lout ,  t  issue,  brow,  endue,  endow,  dispute. 


I!i  \  ii.w. 

I.  Write  the  signs  for  wah,  weh,  wee,  waw,  woh,  woo;  yah, 

yeh,  yet .  yaw,  yoh,  yoo. 

'!.  In  what  positions  arc  these  signs  written  '. 

3.  To  what  consonants  may  the  w  diphthong  he  joined  '. 

4.  What  vowels  maj  be  joined  initially  to  consonants  ? 

5.  What  vowels  may  be  joined  Snail]  to  consonants  ? 
(i.  Give  examples  of  joined  initial  and  final  vowels. 


158-162  VOCALIZATION    OF    ••  PL"    AMI    "  I'R."  77 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

VOCALIZATION    OF   THE   PL  AND  I'll  SERIES  OF 
CONSONANTS. 

158.  The  /»/  and  pr  scries  may  sometimes  be  used  to 
obtain  a  good  consonant  outline,  even  although  an 
accented  vowel  comes  between  the  two  consonants.  In 
such  a  case  the  long  vowels  ah,  eh,  ee,  between  the  two 
letters,  may  be  expressed  by  a  small  circle  before  or 
\ i;< >\  i :  the  consonant-stroke;  thus.  J  dear,  c°j  careless; 
and   the  short  vowels  a,  e,   i,  by  a  small  circle   placed 

AFTEE    or    UNDER     the     consonant  ;     as,      p     tell,     \0     till, 

iT  parcel,    /''    Charles,    ['-.  term,')  third,   &—*  gardener. 

159.  In  cases  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  observe  this 
rule,  the  circle  may  be  written  on  eithek  side,  for  either 
a  long  or  a  short  vowel;  thus,  /T    regard,    /    engineer. 

160.  A  stroke  vowel  is  struck  THROUGH  the  consonant  : 
thus,    i    court,    i    cold,      i   school,      ^    record,   ^    |  soldier. 

161.  When  a  first-place  vowel  occurs  between  an  in- 
itial hook  or  circle  and  the  character  to  which  the  hook 
or  circle  is  added,  the  vowel  sign  may  be  written  at  the 
BEGINNING  of  the  consonant;  and,  in  like  manner,  when 
a  third  place  vowel  occurs  between  a  final  hook  or  circle 
and  the  preceding  consonant,  the  vowd  si^n  may  he 
written  at  the  END  of  the  consonant  ;    as.    p    child,   I  ,     dor- 

mouse,      i    quality,     e-P'  figuration,      j-i>  figures. 

162.  It  is  seldom  necessary  to  vocalize  the  /</  and  /</• 
series  to  mark  an  unaccented  vowel;  thus,  V,  per- 
mit,   v£_        VOCtd;    hut   accented   vowels  should  lie  in-ei'ted; 

thus,  \j    pervert,      ,    pervert. 


exercises  on  "  pl "  and  "pr"  vocalization. 
Exercise  46. 

i-  ■  |,x  .n-^N  ^  nv  j '  r-\ 


v^«   » i .  ■  l  Si,  v  ^, ,  ; 

aUv  ;/—  u.,°„  r  i  x  ■  (^ 
n  -  •■•  ^ .  ,  ,  a  ^° s  ^  -  •  v,  ^ 

Exercise  47. 

1.  Cheer,  guard,  verse,  target,  term,  charm,  jerk,  germ, 
German,  garland,  shirk,  parley,  garment,  percolate,  barley, 
pilgrim,  terminus,  challenge,  perfection,  perverse,  deliver, 
parlor,  telegram,  perchance,  martyr,  darling,  person,  deli 
cate,  carnal  (kr-nl). 

2.  Churl,  journey,  shorten  (sft/p-tn),  moral  {mr-t),  courage, 
curtail,  colony,  corruption,  coldness,  portray,  tolerate,  tor- 
ment, nurse,  nuri  lire  (nr-t-u), dormitory  [dr  mt-r),  Norman, cor- 
rect, collect,  golden  (gld-n),  portrait  (pr-trt),  church,  Furnish. 


79 


Review. 

1.  How  may  the  long  dot  vowels  be  indicated  between 

the  two  letters  of  the  pr  or  pi  scries  of  consonants? 

2.  How  are  the  short  vowels  expressed  in  the  same  case? 

;!.  When  the  position  of  the  consonants  renders  it  incon- 
venient to  observe  this  rule,  how  may  the  vowel 
then  be  written? 

4.  How  are  the  stroke   vowels  written,  when  occurring 

between  the  letters  of  the  pr  or  j>l  series  of  con- 
sonants? 

5.  When  a  first-place  vowel    occurs    between  an   initial 

hook  or  circle  and  the  consonant  to  which  the  hook 
or  circle  is  annexed;  and  when  a  third-place  vowel 
occurs  between  a  final  hook  or  circle  and  the  pre- 
ceding consonant,  how  may  these  vowels  be  written? 


SI) 


DOUBLE-LENGTH    PRINCIPLE. 


1G3-16G 


CHAPTER   XVII. 


DOUBLE-LENGTH    PRINCIPLE. 


163.   A    cukved    consonant     written    twice     its     usual 
length,    expresses  the  addition   of  tr,   dr,   or  ////■  „•  thus, 

f       letter,  _^(  shutter,      \^_,    inventor,    '  ^^~\     re/porter, 
niitrc     or     sender,     (^  slaughter,  \      cider, 

£.      dander,     (-    thunder,       i       mother.* 

K>4.   When  doubled,  ^-^  ng,  ^  mp,  become  •» ,  ng-ger 

or  ng-ker,  .- — ^  mper  or  m&^ry   thus,  ^    "  longer,  I        rfw- 
temper,  l> — s/^  Chamberlain.^ 

L65.    A  straight  stroke,  ending  with  a  hook,  or  fol- 
lowing another  letter,  when  doubled,  adds  tr  or  </r ;  thus, 
\>  printer,       tender,     >       objector,  .    numerator, 

\c/~ •     evercirculator,     ^v    proprietor,       \  embroider. 

166.    The   lengthening   principle    does   not    apply    to   an 
initial    STRAIGHT    STROKE     unless     it     ends    with    a    hook 
or  the  circle  //.s  ,■    thus,   it,  does  not  apply  to    \   p,     \     pi, 
\    /'/',  Sp,   etc  | 


*  Use  the  double  length  Itr,  when  not  joined  t<>  another  i  ettbr, 
for  ttr  only ;  us  m  latter,  later,  letter,  these  being  very  common  words; 
and  «  rite  lead<  r,  oldt  r,  !■  atiu  r,  etc  .  by  /  dr,  I  thr,  etc. 

(■The  hooked  letters  —  mpr,mbr,  _  /"/'//'.  mikr.; :nv  most  conven 
iciii  for  verbs,  because  iheycun  be  readily  halved  for  the  past  tense;  as, 

encumber,     -  cumbered,    '"-^  linger,      -  lingered. 

X  \  double-length  straight  letter,  ending  with  n  hook,  has  thus 
two  meanings,  the  alphabetic  or  scarce  meaning,  and  the  extra  or  general 

aning;    .-is.  /,  Jen   and   /,  nil     Thuy   will  be  distinguished  by 

vocalizal [on  ;  ihus:   - 


/      / 


pippin,  pounder,  cocoon,   canter,  Teuton,    tinder,  jejuni',    gender. 


167   168 


EXERCISE   ON   THE    DOUBLE  LENGTH. 


SI 


167.  When  the  present  tense  of  a  verb  is  written  by  a 
double-length  stroke,  write  the  pasl  tense  by  the  halving 
principle;  thus,  render,  ^v  rendered,  c^"  wander, 
c^y  wandered,  \,  ponder,  >  pondered,  tender, 
S  tendered,       \  encountered,    '---1  sundered. 

168.  Tlie  rules  for  the  vocalization  of  half-length  char- 
acters  apply    also   to    double-length   characters  ;    thus, 

^pain,  : paint,     '^painter;     fen,  'V» offend,    v.    offender. 


Exercise  48. 


7* 


I     o 


vr 


I    o 


\\ 


YT 


V<yv  ■ 


6 


82  EXERCISE   ON   THE   DOUBLE-LENGTH. 


Exercise  49. 

1.  Enter,  another,  Easter,  oyster,  loiter,  latter,  alter,  shat- 
ter, softer,  fender,  founder,  offender,  asunder,  smatter. 
smoother,  mounter,  psalter,  slighter,  Walter,  slander, 
islander,  fomenter,  Sunderland,  bewilder  (b,  upward  Mr, 
vocalize  with  wi),  remainder,  reminder  (show  a  slight  angle 
between  r  and  mndr),  defender  (/  hook),  wilderness,  idola- 
ter, pamper,  temper. 

2.  Ponder,  pointer,  planter;  bender,  brander:  tender,  at- 
tainder, tinder ;  chanter;  gender;  counter,  gander,  grander, 
grafter;  ranter,  rounder,  rafter,  winter,  surrender:  yonder, 
hinder. 

3.  Acceptor,  captor,  rector,  erector,  persecutor,  engender, 
elector,  discounter,  nectar,  darter,  depender,  curator,  coun- 
teract, detractor,  Jupiter,  prosecutor,  vindicator,  arbitrator, 
participator,  inspector,  moderator,  mitigator,  distributor, 
lubricator,  litigator,  liberator,  deprecator,  alligators,  tor- 
mentor, progenitor,  pretender. 

Review. 

1.  What  does  a   curved    consonant  written    double  its 

length  express  ? 

2.  Write  mother,  loiter,  murder,  another,  fender,  softer. 
:!.    Write  the  words  latter,  ladder,  letter,  leather. 

4    When  may  a  straight  stroke  be  written  double-length, 

and  what  is  added  thereby? 
5.    An  initial  straight  stroke  cannot  be  lengthened  for  //■ 

or  '//',  except  in  certain  instances.      Name  them. 
G.  How  is  a  double-length  consonant  vocalized  '.     Give 

illustrations. 


K'.!i-173  PR]  i  [xes.  83 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

PREFIXES. 

169.  The  prefix  con  or  com  is  expressed  by  a  light 
dot,  written  at  the  beginning  of  the  word  ;  thus 
J*  contain,     v    comply.     Winn  preceded  by  a  consonant, 

either  in  the  same  or  the  preceding  word,  con-,  com-, 
COG-,  or  cum-,  is  denoted  by  writing  t lie  syllable  or 
word  that  follows  UNDER  or  close  to  the  consonant  or 
word  that  precedes;  thus,  I,  discontent,  J3  inconstant, 
/C\.  reconcilable,  .'  \  irreconcilable,  L  misconduct, 
^  unconfined,  |\^  decompose,  Lx,  discompose,  r  ^  just 
completed,  /•*  recommend,  -  uncommon,  /C_p  recognize, 
o/<^\  circumscribed,  °\^  circumspect,  rj  rin-umstances, 
\  incumbent,  accompany,     \  accomplish. 

170.  Inter  (inter,  inter),  intro,  enter  w  as,  ^\^.inter- 
view,  ^Lij  introduction,  *}  internal,  ^  enterprise.  This 
prefix   may   generally    he   joined;    thus,      \n    introduce, 

Vi  intervene. 

171.  Magna,     magni    *—>    as.     ^-to     magnanimous, 
vv  magnify,      I    magnitude. 

1 72.  Self  o  as,  •-.  self*<'i/i>,  \"  s, i f-r, mirol,  {  self- 
conscious. 

173.  The  prefix  in  before  spr,  sir.  shr,  and  h,  may 
be   expressed    1>\   a  back    hook  ;    thus,   ^o    inspiration, 

[    instruct,   ^~\i  inscription,    -       inhabit,    t-$  inhuman. 


84 


EXERCISE    ON    THE    PREFIXES. 


Exercise  50. 

\     .     o     V         , '      x       2.     o  '    o^ 


1  ^  ■  'V  ° .}' '   I  •  "i     •  ^ 

i  V  ^   ^  3      .  2K  L  *      6.    ■   1 .  L- 


\       \      V.      I   *        7.    C.    So 


V*'  i    -  .  -  -* 

1  '  -t^  \~A  « 

EXERCISE   ON   THE    PREFIXES.  85 


EXEHCISK    51. 


1  Condole,  -join,  -vey,  -veno,  -vince,  -eeit,  -cede,  -demn, 
-fess,  -found,  -dense,  -gratulate  ;  comply,  -potent,  -plete, 
-pule,  -pass,  -pose,  -pure,  -promise,  -(m)ence. 

'2.  Inconstant,  -siderate,  -testable,  -ceivable,  -elusive, 
-junction,  -sideration,  -(n)ection  ;  incomparable,  -patible, 
-petent,  -plete,  -prebeusible,  -(m)odious,  -bent;  unconflned ; 
decompose,  -position. 

d.  Disco- JLfit,  -tinue,  -(n)ect,  -tent,  -solate,  -fort  ;  miscoru- 
eeive,  -jeelure,  -pnte,  -pnliil  ion  ;  nonconductor,  -tent, 
-( missioned  ;  reconcile,  -sider,  -pense,  -pose,  irreconcilable. 

4.  Circumstantial,  -ference,  -vent,  -cise ;  recognizable, 
-nizance  ;  accompany,  -plice,  -plisbed,  -(m)odate  ;  will  com- 
menee,  am  content. 

o.  Intel  'fere,  -pose,  -cept,  -diet,  -ject,  -val,  -view,  -cessor  ; 
enterprise,  -tain  ;  introduce,  -duction,  -mission ;  maginiy,  -tie, 
-licence,  -loquent,  -tude,  -nimous  ;  self-love,  -hood,  respect, 
-rigbteous,  -conceit ;  inspiration,  -strument,  -structor,  -scribe, 
scru  table. 

Review. 

1.  How  is  the  prefix  eon  <>r  com  written,  and  how  may  it 
lie  understood  when  preceded  by  a  consonant? 

•J.   What  are  the  prefixes  for  inter,  magna,  magni,  self? 

3.  How  may  the  prefix  in,  before  the  treble  consonants 
S/U-.  str,  sJcr,  and  the  upward  or  downward  h,  be 
expressed  '. 


86  affixes.  174-176 


CHAPTER   XIX. 

AFFIXES. 

174.  Ing  is  expressed  l>y  a  light  dot  at  the  end  of 
a  word  ;  thus,  .j  cut  ing,  >_>\.  hoping,  \±.  conduct- 
ing,    ^-v^>      mentioning;    or   by   t he   alphabetic    •w  ;  as 

v  writing,  \s^>  farting,  V>_^  evening.  Ings  is  written 
by  /  or  \  or  by  the  alphabetic  form  o> ;  .as,  ^~^/>  morn- 
ings,    r-r>/  engravings,    <1p  sayings.* 

175.  Ai.ity,  ility,  aijity,  etc.,  are  expressed  by  dis- 
joining the  consonant  that  conies  immediately  be- 
fore ality,  etc. ;  thus,  ~"  carnality,  -^-^.  formality, 
\-^  venality,  k  stability,  \v  barbarity,  <i^—sf  sin- 
gularity, \y^  popularity,  /T"  regularity,  /  majority, 
s~^s>  minorities. 

176.  Lt,  r  as  ey-  friendly,  ^,-  confidently.  This 
affix  does  not  interfere  with  -<ilih/.  lt  is  generally  more 
convenient  to  join  the  Z;  as  ^'goodly,  /»'     loosely. 

\ii'i  »,  /.  c//.  /'./,-,  '/,/',  /•.  the  downward  r,  circle  as,  and  //,  the 

dot  iny  isDest.    The  Btr'oke     -    nff  is  i i  convenient  after  the  circle 

8,"  as,   '  _  facing;  generally  after  6,  </;  aa,      \_,   nil/hint/,     \_   read 

ingjAtter  a  Btraighl  upstroke  ;    as,   \  %w  borrowing,     -~    weighing. 

s***  roaring;  arter  all  curves  except  £  w,  downward  r,  and  upward 

W .'   as    A_  bathing,     •_    assaying,      _    washing,       *w   following, 

,?-  feeling,  -i«w  aiming,  -  annoying,  —  singing,  ■  melting; 
and  after  i  he  /<  or ./'  hook  whenever  the  stroke  -_  /•"  may  be  joined  t<>  a 
sharp  and  easily-written  angle ;  as,  $_  printing,  J^  lending,  —  count- 
ing, —  finding,  -  mounting,  •_  paving,  |  .  driving.  The  coo- 
sonanl  in  this  case  represents  I  lie  m  llajble  {«<?,  and  the  vowel  >  need 
no)  be  « i iiii-n. 


177-17!) 


EXERCISE   ON    THE    AFFIXES. 


177.  Mental,  mentality,  ^  as  f0  instrumental  or 
instrumentality;  [.,  insirumintoHties,  -\  fundamental. 
Xt  may  be  employed  as  a  contraction  for  -ment  after 
//.  stroke  ns,  or  n  hook  ;  thus,  '  .,  .w  imprisonment, 
^"  resentment,  -  commencement,  '  pavement,  ^>- 
refinement,    (Ls  achievements. 

ITS.   Self,  o  as,  (°v  thyself,     selves,     i  as.  ( .•  themselves. 
The   affix    may    be   joined    in  myself,     ,<-&    himself, 

!      thyself,  ...  '.-'...  n  ti  est  In  8,   (     I  Ik  ni  selves. 

179.  Ship    _y  as   |»      stewardship.     Sometimes  sA-p  is 
preferable  to  a  separate  *A  ,■   thus,     >"  friendship. 

Exercise  52. 


%  .A    b_  '    ^r,^L  v  V|  ^ 


EXERCISES    ON   THE    AFFIXES. 

Exercise  52 — {continued). 
'   .  \o «       8.   '    «t^    )   _ ,  '    .    y 

i  T  ^   l  .  vv,,  ,  ^Z 
I".  <Y  <•>  \  ,V^  -     7.^~^ 

EXERCISE    53. 

[The  dot  and  da.-h  affixes  for  ing,  ings,  are  denoted  by 
italics  in  this  Exercise.  Jn  words  not  thus  marked,  use  the 
stroke  ing,  ings.] 

1.  Staying,  weep/////,  talking,  dancing,  catch/////,  painting, 
joining,  printing,  swaying,  willing,  borrowing*,  sinning,  com- 
posing, v&ging,  robing,  waving,  presiding,  choosing;  facings, 
losings,  paintings,  plotting^,  turnings,  windings,  sittings. 

2.  ApplicaA/7/7//,  proba-,  porta-,  audi-,  dura-,  sta-,  alia-. 
no-,  capa-;  brutality,  mortality',  familiarity,  peculiarity,  car- 
nality, originality,  juvenility,  gentility,  barbarity,  popular- 
ity, secularity,  majority. 

:!.   llcavcu/y,  suddenly,  instantly,  confidently. 

4.  Detrimental,  sacramental, monumental, instrumentality. 

5.  <  'Icrk.v/////,   hard-,  head-  apprentice-,  steward-,  town-. 

(i.  Write  //"  folloioing  words  by  tlu  ir  s<  vi  ral  consonants,  in- 
stead of  by  the  S  affix :  herself  (tick  h-rs-l-f),  yourself,  your- 
selves. 

Review. 

1.  What  are  the  signs  for  t  he  affixes  ing,  ingst 

2.  When  is  it  most  convenient  to  use  the  stroke  ing,  and 

\\  hen   1  he  dot    ' 

'■'>.  Write  the  following  words  containing  the  ality  or 
arity  aflBx  :  vitality,  fidelity,  jocularity,  conviv- 
iality. 

4.  What   are  the  aflixes    for  ly,   mental,   mentality,  self, 

SI  III  s.    s/i  i/l  .' 

5.  I  low  are  the  affixes  ly  and  ship  otherwise  represented  } 


180-182  ADDITIONAL   VOCALIZATION.  89 

CHAPTEK    XX. 

ADDITIONAL    METHODS    OF    VOCALIZATION. 

180.  The  scientific  construction  of  Phonography  ren- 
ders it  both  a  means  of  rapid  writing  (reporting)  and  a 
complete  recorder  of  spoken  sounds.  It  may.  conse- 
quently, be  employed  for  the  representation  of  dialect-. 
peculiarities  of  individual  pronunciation,  and,  with  slight 
modification,  foreign  languages.  In  fully  vocalized  Pho- 
nography it  is,  therefore,  necessary  to  provide  a  con- 
venient sign  for  every  vowel  and  combination  of  vowels. 
The  following  methods  complete  the  phonographic  sys- 
tem of  vocalization. 

181.  Dissyllabic   Diphthongs. — The  short  vowel  7. 

piece, lid  by  the  six  long  vowels,  forms  a  series  of  TWO- 
syllable  diphthongs,  the  accent  being  on  the  first  sylla- 
ble.    These  diphthongs  arc  represented  thus: 

1.      H.       J.  i.       I. 

ah-i,       tJi-i.        ee-i,       aw-i,       nh-i.       <»>-/. 

as  in    ^  f\.         ^       _jT_        ^-  r 

Kaiser,       laity,       howbeit,       coil,        Stoic,         l/n/'w. 

182.  The  four  dissyllabic  diphthongs  eh-i,  ee-i,  <>li-i. 
oo-i,     may    he     used     for    diphthongs    composed     of    a 

lone-    vowel    and     ANY    short     unaccented     vowel   ;     thus, 
c_       clayey,  i      <i<r<it<,      ^     ]     Umjomt.       \         Hnitrlr,, 

yf    real,    ^J<z    realize,  I    realty,    \      'i<l<>i.  J       ideal, 

(     theatre,   //     geological,      •-*    ■     museum,  snowy, 

^S     /„>,/,  coalesce.     When  the  accent  is  on  the  second 

vowel  use  the  yah  series;  a-,  j  beatitude,  p  creation, 
^  I   reality. 


90  ADDITIONAL    VOCALIZATION.  183-185 

183.  When  two  vowels  occur  in  succession,  not  other- 
wise provided  for,  write  the  separate  vowel   signs  ;  thus, 

f\'   Leo,   y   oasis,    (\)   Louisa,    7U     Ohio,       7     Messiah, 

)    Isaiah,      f   royal,   I    dewy. 

184.  Nominal  Consonant. — Vowels  may  be  written 
without  consonants  by  using  ]  |  as  outlines  having 
no  specific  values;  thus  J.  a,  j,  eh,  \  1,  \  ah-i  (yes).  The 
stroke-vowels  may  be  struck  horizontally  through  the 
nominal  consonant,  as  J  0,  \  u,  1  00.  The  initials  of 
Christian  names  should  be  written  in  longhand. 

185.  Foreign  Consonants  and  Vowels. — The  Scotch 
guttural  ch,  Irish  gh,  (heard  also  in  German,  Dutch, 
Welsh,  and  other  languages,)  is  written  thus,    —5—  ch:  as 

in  C^ loch  (Scotch,  lake),  /^J*~'^'  Loughrea,  f-*"'"  Glogher, 
-s_  ich  (German,  /),  \_!<_  Buck  (German,  roof).  The 
Welsh  //,  (the  whispered  or  breath  form  <>f  the  Eng- 
lish I,  like/'  and  v,  ir/i  and  w,)  by  f  II  ;  thus,  f  LUin . 
French  nasal  -^  French  and  German  vowels  cA  jeune, 
~\  Goethe,    li   'I/'. 

Exercise  54. 

A  %   o   C  W  ^ !     .   s   '   r  '    .    I- 

>  )-   f   w    ^    (  <<>  v    V,    /  ^   -p  ~  x 

1^^A1;.^^;       ^  *  .   .P 

>  -^  °  'li  ■  >  o  '  -a  •  ^,/,r 
^>  0  1    s  v  \o-x   '  ~  K  </*  r\  c- 


EXERCISES    ON    ADDITIONAL    VOCALIZATION.  91 

Exercise  54. — (continued). 


Vl    -76 

Exercise  55. 

1.  Bayonet,  gayest,  sayest,  idea,  theory,  real,  ruin,  toil, 
lowest,  agreeable,  deist,  solfaing,  reality,  laity,  deity,  snowy, 
orthoepy,  Owen,  Lewis,  Judea,  Chaldea,  realty,  beatitude, 
geology,  geography. 

2.  Diary,  lion,  riot,  violate,  diamond,  diameter,  royalty, 
Ohio,  biography,  iodine,  iota,  Ionic,  oology,  Jeremiah. 


Review. 

1.  Give  the  series  of  dissyllabic  diphthongs. 

2.  Write  real,   seeing,   being,  theorem,   museum,  with  the 

dissyllabic  signs. 
'S.   When  two  vowels  occur  cither  before  or  after  a  single 

consonant,  how   are  they  written  .' 
1.   Write  diary,  oasis,   Owen,  Tona,  mower. 
5.    Explain   the    nominal    consonant,    and   state   how   the 

dot  and  stroke  vowels  are  placed  to  it. 
(!.    How  is  the  German  -7/  written  '.       How   the    Welsh  // .' 


92 


LIST    OF    GRAMMALOGUES. 

PHONETICALLY   ARRANGED. 


Grammalogues  marked  "  I  "  (first  position)  are  written  above  the  line. 
Those  marked  "3"  (third  position)  are  written  th>-ottgh  the  line. 
Those  not  marked  (second  position)  are  written  on  the  line. 

CONSONANTS. 


p 

\ 

pn 

\ 

pr 

% 

prt 

<\ 

B 

\ 

bv 

\ 

bn 

\ 

br 

\ 

T 

1 

tit 

P 

tr 

1 

trt 

1 

D 

1 

dl 

[ 

df 

L 

dn 

J 

dr 

1 

CH 

/ 

J 

/ 

jn 

J 

jnt 

j 

E 

— 

kt 

knt 

- 

bappy  1 ; up ;  put  3 
upon 

principal  3 
particular  1 ;  oppor- 

L  t  unity 

by  1  ;  be ;  to  be  3 

above 

been 

remember-ed,mem- 

[lier;  number-ed  3 
at  1 ;  it;  out  3 

told 

truth  ;  true  3 

toward 

had  i  ;  do  ;  different-ce  3 

delivev-ed-y 
advantage;  difficult  .'! 
done;  down  3 
Dr  ]  ;dear;  during  3 

mui  h  i  ;  which  ;  each  3 

Large  l 
genera] 

j_r<  1 1 1  Leman    1  ,  gen- 
tlemen 

can  1 ;  come 
qtiite  1 ;  could 
cannot  1 ;  account 


ks 
kl 
kr 
krt 
G 

gd 
grt 
F 
ft 
fr 
fr 
fn 
V 
vr 
vr 
Til 
tin- 
TH 
tht 
ths 
thr 
thr 

thr 

S 
8 


( 
) 
( 

( 

( 
c 


because  1 

call  1 ;  equal-Jy 

care 

according:  1 

go,  ago  1 ;  give-n 

God  1 ;  good 

great 

if 

after  1 

for 

from 

Phonography 

have 

over  1 ;  ever-y 

very;  however 3 

thanked  1  ;  thiuk 

through  8 

though  1  ;  t  beni 

that  1  ;  without 

those     1 ;     tins; 
these,  9 

other 

their,  (here 

therefore  :? 

(double  length) 

so,  us;  see,  use  (noun) 3 
as,  lias  1  ;  is,  his 


93 


GKAMMALOGFES  phonkticai-lv  arranged. 


st 

" 

tirst 

VOWELS. 

sprt 

<\ 

spirit 

Dub 

|  and  (up) 

sv 

^ 

several 

a 

i 
-- 

a,  an 

Z 

SH 

) 

J 

was;  use  {verb)  3, 

[whoso  3 

shall,  shalt 

ah 

e 

•     i 

! 

ah! 

the 

shrt 

ZH 

J 

short  1 
usual 

eh 

• 

ehP  aye 

/.lir 

J 

pleasure 

b 

1 

of 

M 

— 

me,my  l;him,may 

on 

mt 

^ 

might  1 

aw 

\ 

all 

ms 

S~b 

myself  1;  flimself 

/ 

awe 

mp 

~ 

importance  1 ;  hn- 

[prove-d-ment 

ii 

1 

hut 

nir 
N 

more,  remark  -ed  l 
[Mr,  mere 
in,  any  1 ;  no 

oh 
Dasli 

1 
1 

O  !  oh  !  owe 
he 

nt 

*■* 

not  1 ;  nature 

OO 

s 

to 

nd 

~ 

hand  1 ;  under 

/ 

should  (up) 

nn 

v_3 

opinion 

OO 

N 

two,  too 

nr 

<i-^ 

nor  1 ;  near 

, 

who 

NO 

^ 

language  1 ;  thing 

DIPHTHONGS. 

L 

r 

Lord 

wo 

<- 

when 

R 

^ 

or  1 ;  your ;  year  3 

Wl 

c 

with 

r 

^ 

are ;  our  3 

wo 

what 

rd 

■> 

word 

woo 

> 

would 

w 

c^ 

Wl' 

yo 

beyond 

wn 

c/> 

one 

yoo 

you 

wl 

c 

will 

I 

V 

1,  eye 

Wh 

c/ 

whether 

,n 

' ' 

ay  (broad  ai,  yes) 

-whl 

c 

while  I 

ow 

• 

1 1  c  I  w 

Yt 

<; 

yet 

wi 

why 

94 


GRAMMALOGUES. 

ALPHABETICALLY   ARRANGED. 


V 


V 


\ 
\ 

i 
\ 


A,  an 

above 

according 

account 

advantage 

after 

all 

and  (up) 

any 

are 

as,  has 

at 

awe 

be 

because 

been 

beyond 

but 

by 

call 

can 

caimol 

care 

come 

could 


0 


/ 


I 

\ 


dear 
deliver-ed-y 

different 

difficult 

do 

Doctor 

done 

down 

during 

each 

equal-]  y 

ever-y 

first 

for 

from 

general 

gent  leman 

gentlemen 

give-n 

go,  ago 

God 

g<  >(  >d 

greal 

had 

hand 

happy 


V_ 


.sy 


\ 


/ 


have 

he 

him 

himself 

how 

however 

I,  eye 

if 

importan« 

improve-d-ment 

in 

is,  his 

it 

language 

large 

Lord 

may 

me,  my 

member 

might 

more 

Mr.  mere 

much 

myself 

nature 


95 

ALl'HAliKTICAU.Y    ARRANGED. 

k^    near 

J) 

short 

\ 

upon 

— 

no 

/ 

should  (up) 

) 

us 

t^ 

) 

w" 

nor 

so 

")- 

use  (verb) 

not 

°\ 

spirit 

-)- 

use  (noun) 

.y 

number-ed 

{ 

thank-ed 

J 

usual 

X 

0  !  oh !  owe 

( 

that 

°> 

very 

Of 

the 

) 

was 

on 

) 

their,  there 

</ 

we 

<^> 

one 

( 

them 

> 

what 

— p 

opinion 

) 

therefore 

when 

<\ 

opportunity 

4 

these 

C? 

whether 



or 

^ 

thing 

1 

which 

c 

other 

think 

C 

while 

./- 

our 

4 

this 

, 

who 

t 

out 

over 

particular 

Phonography 

( 
( 

those 

though 

through 

L 

c 

whose 
why 

will 

J 

pleasure 

\ 

to 

with 

A™ 
--V 

principjj 

put 

quite 

remark-ed 

-V 

p 

i 

4~ 

to  be 
told 
toward 
true 

( 
> 

without 

word 

would 

\ 

remember-ed 

1 

truth 

A 

year 

-)- 

see 

\ 

t  W<  >.  tOO 

Vet 

<L 

several 

- 

under 

you 

J 

shall,  shalt 

\ 

up 

A 

your 

flfi  GRAMMA  LOG1  ES.  180-1  f»0 

186.  In  tlie  preceding  Tables,  some  words  are  printed 
with  a  hyphen,  (as.  give-ri)  ;  or,  with  a  double  termination, 
(as,  important).  The  corresponding  logograms  repre- 
sent both  givt  and  given,  important  and  importance. 

187.  A  logogram  (or  word-letter),  may  be  used  either 
as  a  prefix  or  affix  ;  thus,  //"  Lordship,  \^>  after- 
noon,  "T      undertake,      \    hereafter,  .^....indifferent. 

188.  The  positions  of  the  grain malogues,  above,  on, 
and    through    the    line,   are  in  general    determined   by 

their  vowels  ;  and  it'  a  word  has  more  than  one  syllable, 
by  its  accented  vowel.  For  perpendicular  and  sloping 
strokes,  standing  alone,  the  positions  are  : — 

1.  nli.  aw,  a,  b",  1.  oi,  wl,  above  the  line. 

2.  eh,  oh,  e,  u,  on  the  line. 

3.  ee,  oo,  7.  bS,  ow,  u,  through  the  line. 

189.  Vowel  logograms,  and  horizontal  and  half-sized 
consonants  have  hut  two  positions: — 

1.  ah,  a ir.  Yi.  Yi.  I,  ni.  hi/,  vol;* 

2.  <h.  oh,  P.  U,  ee,  oo,  7.  <5o,  v.  ow. 

190.  These   rules  do   not   apply   to  irregular  gramma- 

logues,  namely  :  — 

1.  Those  of  frequent  occurrence,  written  on- t hi  line 
for  convenience: — advantage,  are,  be,  been,  dear,  deliver, 
do,  for,  from,  have,  if,  it,  Lord,  Phonography,  shall,  think. 
upon,  usual,  was,  we,  which,  will,  your. 

2.  Those  which,  in    their    proper    position,   would  clash 

with  some  others:  any,  go,  ago,  in,  me,  more,  much,  num- 
ber, 0,  over,  particular,  this,  those,  though,  truth,  with. 


*The  -i'_'n  An.  signifying^*,  should  be  placed,  to  the  nominal  consonant 
(par,  184),  to  avoid  clashing  with  the  grammalogne,  on  t/u  (see  p.-ir.  194). 


101  EXERCISE   OX    THE    URAMMALOGUES.  97 

191.  8  may  be  added  to  a  logogram  to  mark  the  plural 
number  or  the  possessive  case  of  a  noun,  or  the  third 
person  singular  of  a  verb ;  as,  _  good,  _;  youth,    (     Lord. 
f°  Lord's,  — come,  0  comes,    {,  advantages. 

Exercise  56. 

F.ii  nj  nind  in  this  F.crris, ,  e.ir,  /,/  inapt  r  names,  is  a  Grammalogut,  and 
oil  tin  (iriuiiiiniliiiji.es  in  the  preceding  Table  are  introduced. 

1.  My  dear  Tom, — I  shall  give  you  my  opinion  on  Phonog- 
raphy. I  think  it  is  an  important  improvement,  and  that 
it  will  be  a  very  good  thing  for  myself,  and  equally  so  for 
every  gentleman  who  would  improve  himself  in  the  nature 
and  spirit  of  those  tilings  which  are  good  and  true.  2.  lean- 
not  see  why  more  '1"  nol  think  of  the  general  use  and  impor- 
tance of  it,  and  how  much  it  would  improve  them  heyond 
others,  as  it  ever  will  improve  all  who  have  pleasure  in  it, 
and  whose  usual  principle  it  is  to  think  things  out,  and  put 
them  down  with  their  hands.  3.  Think  how  good  you,  too, 
might  have  been  at  it,  if  you  had  improved  every  particular 
opportunity  that  you  have  had  during  the  year.  It  will  give 
me  much  pleasure,  and  Oh,  how  very  happy  I  shall  be,  to  see 
thai  you  do  what  you  can  to  improve  in  your  Phonography. 
4.  There  is  a  great  advantage  in  it,  because  if  you  go  on  with 
it,  ami  do  not  give  it  up.  after  a  short  while  you  will  have 
much  good  from  it.  However,  you  may  not  see  the  truth  of 
this  remark  at  first.  5.  A  while  ago,  I  was  told  by  Dr.  T., 
Mr.  .1.,  your  principal,  and  other  gentlemen,  that  it  was  so 
very  difficult  that  several  of  their  members  could  not,  and 
would  on  no  account ,  go  on  with  it.  (!.  1  was  not  told  whether 
or  no  these  gentlemen  are  near  Glasgow.  But  though  one, 
two,  or  any  large  number  may  call  it  difficult,  yet  the  truth 
is  given  to  US  that  we  should  use  it,  and  ever  do  according  to 
it.  ?.  Do  you  think  t  here  is  a  difference  of  opinion  as  to  how 
it  is  to  be  done?  Eh?  If  we  go  through  it  with  care,  and  do 
what  we  can,  we  shall  see  that  our  opinions  are  not  so  very 
different  from  each  other,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  quite  equal. 
8.  Ay,  think  upon  these  things,  therefore,  and  above  all,  re- 
member the  language  of  truth  as  it  is  delivered  to  us  in  the 
Word  of  God, without  which  we  cannot  he.  nor  do.  as  we  should. 
0.  When  it  is  remembered  that  the  Lord  overall  is  He  whose 
word  to  us  is,  "  Come  to  Me,"  thai  to  Him  we  owe  all  that 
we  have,  and  that  lie  will  deliver  us.  we  will  call  upon  Him 
with  awe.  and  thank  Him  by  whose  mete  good  pleasure  it  is 
that  we  can,  under  lliin,  go  on  toward  every  improvement. 


98 


Review. 

1.  Give-  some  examples  in  which  s  may  be  added  to  a 

logogram  to  express  the  plural,  the  third  person 
of  a  verb,  or  the  possessive  case. 

2.  How  are  the  positions  of   grammalogues   generally 

determined  ? 

3.  When    perpendicular   and  sloping   strokes,    standing 

alone,   are    used   as    grammalogues,  how    are  their 
positions  determined  '. 

4.  How  many,  and  what  positions  have  vowel  logograms 

and  horizontal  consonants  ? 

5.  Copy  the  Irregular  Grammalogues  of  the  1st  (Mass. 

and   state   why  they    are    not   written   in    position 
according  to  their  vowels. 
G.   Copy  the  Irregular  Grammalogues  of    the  2d  Class, 
ami  state  why  they  are  irregular. 


192-193  CONTRACTIONS.  99 

LAW'/:   • 
CHAPTE  R   X  X  DALLAS,  TEXj . 

CONTRACTIONS. 

192.  Phonography  has  now  been  presented  to  the  stu- 
dent in  detail,  as  an  alphabetic,  or  phonetic,  system  of 
writing.  By  means  of  the  twenty-four  consonant  strokes, 
supplemented  by  a  circle!  for  the  oft-recurring  sound  of  s, 
by  an  elongated  circle  or  loop  of  two  sizes  for  st  and  str, 
by  a  honk  on  each  side  of  a  straight  stroke  at  the  begin- 
ning and  end,  by  an  initial  and  final  hook  on  the  inside 
of  a  curve,  by  a  large  final  hook  to  straight  strokes,  and 
initially  and  finally  to  curves,  by  writing  a  letter  half- 
length  to  add  /  or  il,  and  by  doubling  its  length  to  add 
//•,  <//•.  or  (fir — the  outline,  or  skeleton,  of  every  word  in 
the  language  may  be  written  with  marvelous  brevity. 
As  a  further  principle  of  abbreviation,  the  writer  may, 
as  in  longhand,  omit  the  latter  part  of  a  long  word,  or  a 
medial   consonant   that  is  lightly  sounded:   thus.     \     for 

"\  X 

probable,     \   for  arbitration. 

193.  The  following  letters  may  be  omitted  without 
danger  to  legibility: — - 

P  between  m  and  *  ;  thus,  t-S.  temptation,  \X  pumped, 

{x  thumped,  c-,  stamped  I  from  a^  stump),  c — ->  cramped. 
/'between  m  and  sh  ;  thus,     • 'j  presumption. 

T  between  g  and  another  consonant;  as,  ^C  mostly, 
y  honestly,  X-^  post-card,  ^  postage  stamps, 
/"*  lastly,  q  .  fastness,  ,.;■,  .V'"-  Testament,  j^.^.  tes- 
timony, etc. 

A'  or  ;/  between  ng  and  /  or  sh  ;  as.  t~^|  distinct  (dis- 
tingi't),  ^,  anxious,    ~<j>   sanction,    tr7  distinguish. 


100  CONTRACTIONS.  194-196 

194.  Tick  THE.—TJie,  the  most  frequent  word  in  the 
English  language,  may  he  expressed  by  a  short  slanting 
stroke  /  joined  to  the  preceding  word,  and  generally 
written  downward  ;  thus,  in  the,  \  for  the, 
--b"...  oy  the,  >  of  the,  5  with  the,  >  to  the,  as  the,  />  is  the; 
but  when  more  convenient,  it  is  written  upward  ;  thus, 

_Jr...  at  the,  ^\  before  the,  A  on  the.  The  first  stroke 
of  on  the  is  made  sloping  to  keep  the  sign  distinct  from 
v  /.     The  tick  the  should  never  begin  a  phrase. 

195.  Op  the. — The  phrase  "of  the,"  may  be  intimated 
by  writing  the  words  which  it  connects  NEAR  to 
each  other,  showing  that  one  is  of  the  other  ; 
thus,  f\^^  love  of  the  beautiful,  \\_  plan  of  the 
work,  <5~v-^  some  of  the  indications,  /^'~y  result  of  the 
//unsure,  if\  _/  a  statement  of  the  actual  condition  of 
the  country.  The  method  of  intimating  con  or  com  can- 
not he  mistaken,  in  practice,  for  this  mode  of  expressing 
of  tin-.  When  of  the  is  followed  by  con,  write  the  dot 
for  con  ;  thus,  ^_o[  close  of  the  contest. 

196.  These  contractions  should  not  be  used  after  a 
dot  or  dash  vowel  sign  ;  J  -,  a  condensed  account, 
<2\-  ^-a  two  of  the  principal  nan,  would  not.  be  distinct. 

Exercise  57. 

1.  Stumped,  prompt,  tempt,  encamped,  damped,  exempt, 
exemption;  post-office,  post-paid,  post-free,  listless,  celestial; 
distinction,  injunction,  distinguish,  extinguish,  languish, 
j  u  nil  ion. 

2.  By  the,  at  the,  which  the,  if  the,  for  the,  from  the,  thai 
the,  in  the,  of  the,  all  the,  on  the,  to  the,  bul  the,  and  the, 

wit li  the,   as  the,  is  the,  what    the,    would  the,  at  the  same 

time  (/,  upward  the  tick,  smt  m). 

:;.  Rights  of  the  subject.  Attribute  of  the  soul.  Loss  of 
the  money.  Some  of  the  men  of  the  present  day.  Copy  of 
the  petition  of  the  committee,  opinion  of  the  majority  of  the 
deputal  ion, 


LIST   OF   CONTRACTIONS. 


101 


Words  marked  (*)  are  7vritten  above  (he  line. 


Acknowledge-d 


altogether  *     * 
anything  * 
architect-ure     ' — i 
Catholic      ( 
character  * 
Danger  y 
destruction    4 
difficulty     Y  _ 
doctrine     V 
domestic      Us— 
Enlarge-d   h  V" 
especial-ly    } 
essential-ly   \_^ 
establish-ed-ment 

Govern-ed  

-ment        k, 

Immediate  -~^ 
immediately 


impossible  *    *"* 
inconsistent 
influence  * 
influenced  *  ^ 
influential  *   — O 
information  * 


instruction  Xj 
interest-ed    |     "f 

irregular  "^ 

Kingdom  * 
knowledge    V 

Magazine    /-- 

manuscript 

messenger       / 
mistake*n*  /r_^ 

more  than  * 
and  so  with 
better  than  \ 


rather  than 
Natural-ly  ...y.... 
neglect-ed* 
never  ^V. 
nevertheless  *■*<. 
next    -^> 

nothing • 

notwithstanding 

Object  \ 
objection  / 

Parliament -a  rv 

V 

peculiar-ity  \ 
perforcn-ed 


Phonetic  Journal 

Phonetic  Society 

phonographerVjf 
phonographic^ — 
practice-cal-ly 

probable-bly  or 
probability    \ 
prospect  *Na 
public-sh-ed     \. 
publication    V 
Rather  or 
Tvriter    „ 

reform-ed 
reformation 

reformer 
regular  /~ 
remai-kable-lv 


\ 


represent-ed 

representation 

representative 

republic  '  \^ 
respect-ed  /\ 
Reverend  /V_ 
Satisfaction      £ 


102 


EXERCISE    OX    THE    COXTRACTIOXS. 


satisfactory  <r 
something   a-^^ 
Spelling  reform 

w 

stranger   J? 
subject   \ 
subscription  V^ 

surprise  *    %> 

it)  Transaction  should  be  written  at  length, 
traded  form  might  clash  with  transgression. 


Temperance  Soci- 
ety  l^ 

Thankful  *  ^ 

together    > 

transcript  J-^ 
transfer    1 
transgress    3-" 
transgression  (t) 


Unanimity  or 

unanimous  <T~ 
understand  ~f 
understood  "f 
uniform-ity  <T~ 
Whatever   v. 
whenever    - -v-  - 

Yesterday    <f\ 

because  the  con- 


V, 


Exercise  58. 

The  following  Exercise  contains  all  the  above  Contractions. 

1.  My  object  is  to  call  your  immediate  attention  to  a  subject 
of  remarkable  interest  to  every  member  of  the  Phonetic  So- 
ciety, and  especial/i/  to  every  Phonographer  whose  practice  it 
is  to  write  manuscripts,  transcripts,  or  transfers,  with  'pho- 
nographic characters.  For  your  especial  information,  i  may 
remark  that  Phonography  was  first  published  in  1837.  or 
rathi  r  its  publication  dates  from  1840,  when  it  received  its 
piculiar  and  distinctive  name.  2.  The  Phonetic  Society  was 
establislied  in  1843,  and  lias  received  the  unanimous  support 
of  Rev.  gentlemen,  writers  in  magazines,  architects  remark- 
ably skilled  in  arcJdtecture,  public  messengers,  those  who  are 
i nte rest t a"  in  and  t/orcm  the  Temperana  Society,  and  other 
respected  Reformers,  who,  thankful  for  such  a    regular  and 

natural  way  of  spelling,  gave  their  influence  to  spread  a 
knowledge  of  Phonography,  and  to  establish  the  essential 
principles  of  the  Spelling  Reform,  whenever  they  had  an 
opportunity.  :i.  Nothing  can  be  more  simple,  uniform,  and 
natural  than  the  primary  doctrim  of  the  Spelling  Reform, 

I  hat  every  sound  should  be  7*1  /</r,v,  ///'•'/  by  only  one  Sign,  and 
that,  each  sign  should  //«/•,/•  represent    more  than  one  sound  : 

but  in  Phonography  some  exceptions  are  allowed,  and  every 
letter  is  made  the  representative  of  some  common  word.  4. 
There  is  something  in  this  system  which  immediately  and 
especially  commends  itself  to  all  who  acknowledge  this  true 
principle  of  spelling.  The  annual  subscription  to  the  /7/u- 
//(//-•    Society    is    2.")C.,   and    those  who    neglect  to  pay   this, 


KKYM'.W.  103 

transgress  the  laws  of  the  Society  ;  the  danger  of  which 
transgression  is,  that  their  names  will  be  removed  from  the 
list  of  members.  5.  I  have  always  regarded  this  Society  as 
an  establishment  of  great  importance,  governed  in  &n  essen- 
tially catholic  and  practical  spirit,  and  thought  it  was  impos- 
sible for  anyone  to  object  to  it  ;  but  to  my  surprise  I  found 
yesterday  that  I  had  made  a  mistake,  when  I  understood  that 
some  strangers,  certainly  not  very  influential,  had  raised  an 
objection  to  the  Society,  or  rather,  had  remarked  "  What 
good  has  it  performed?"  0.  Anything  so  inconsistent  was 
altogether  more  than,  I  could  understand.  Nevertheless,  it 
should  be  understood  that  such  men,  notwithstanding  their 
knowledge  upon  other  subjects,  and  irli<it,rer  others  may 
think  of  them,  are  greatly  mistaken  in  this  respect.  7.  Prob- 
ably their  minds  have  been  influenced  in  a  wrong  /•<////(  r  £AaH 
in  a  right  direction,  but  1  expect  they  will  now  take  a  more 
enlarged  view  of  the  subject,  and  try  to  gain  a  satisfactory 
understanding  of  it,  and  the  objects  for  which  it  was  estab- 
lished, and  thus  be  led  to  see  what  a  r<  mark-able  advantage  it 
would  be  as  a  means  of  instruction  in  the  principles  of  speech, 
and  as  adapted  to  reform  the  representation  of  the  English 
language.  8.  If  they  would  do  this,  in  all  probability  we 
should  //^.i'£  have  the  satisfaction  of  hearing  that  they  were 
giving  their  influence,  together  with  their  subscription,  to  help 
it  forward,  and  to  publish  a  knowledge  of  Phonography  in 
every  kingdom  and  republic  in  the  world.  9.  To  enla/rge  on 
the  probable  results  and  prospects  of  thisreform  is  a  task  1 
am  unable  to  perform.  Its  great  p<  culiarity  is,  that  it  would 
make  a  thorough  reformation  in  our  spelling,  and  introduce 
a  uniformity  which  would  practically  Lead  to  the  destruction 
of  our  irregular  and  falsi'  orthography.  10.  So  many  donas. 
tic  and  other  blessings  may  naturally  be  expected  to  arise 
from  reformed  spelling,  that  I  hope  the  subject  will  no  longer 
be  neglected,  but  be  brought  under  the  notice  of  Govern- 
ment and  occupy  the  attention  of  Parliament.  11.  I  think 
it  more  important  and  better  than  many  matters  of  Parlia- 
mentary discussion.  There  is  no  real  difficulty  in  the  study 
ot  Phonography,  as  has  often  been  acknowledged  with  w»o- 
nimity  in  the  Phonetic  Journal. 

Review. 

1.  When  may  />,  /,  £,  ,'/.  be  omitted  in  Phonography  1 

2.  How  is  the  connective  phrase  o/' £&   indicated  ' 

3.  Write  mj  tin.  far  the,  of  the,  on  the,  with  the,  to  the,  at 

the,  and  the,  from  the,  or  the,  but  the,  is  the,  as  the. 

4.  Copy  distinctly  the  list  of  contractions  on  pages  101-2. 


104 


1'IIKASEOCRAPHY. 


197 


CHAPTER   XXII. 

PIIRASEOGRAPIIY. 

197.  In  longhand,  swift  writers  join  sill  the  letters  of  a 
word  together,  and  sometimes  write  several  words  with- 
out lifting  the  pen.  In  Phonography  also  several  words 
may  often  be  united.  This  practice,  called  Phraseogra- 
phy,  gives  great  assistance  in  following  a  rapid  speaker. 
The  shorthand  signs  for  phrases  and  sentences  are  called 
Phraseograms.  Phraseograms  should  never  go  too  far 
below  the  line,  present  difficult  joinings,  be  too  long, 
difficult  to  decipher,  or  liable  to  be  mistaken.  In  these 
cases,  time  will  be  saved  by  lifting  the  pen  and  commenc- 
ing afresh.  Words  that  form  a  phrase  of  frequent  occur- 
rence, present  easy  joinings,  and  would  not  be  mistaken 
for  some  common  word,  may  be  united;  thus,  L^j^/*  ^  *s 
not  necessary  that.  The  following  examples  show  how 
other  phraseograms  may  be  formed. 

Phraseograms  marked  (*)  arc  written  above  the  line. 


V    and  have 

and  the* 

C    as  well  as* 

_^     could    lint 
J        do  not* 


PHRASEOGKAPHt 

7ji_s    for  lllis 
^"^    reason 

I      did  not, 

J      had  not* 

lias  not* 

i-^    lie  may 


!> 


he  would 


I  am* 
1    [do 

V    1  have 
i       I  will* 


198-201 

PHRASEOGRAPIIV. 

105 

Qs 

is  not 

T 

should  do 

I 

who  have 

I 

it  is 

I 

so  that 

< 

who  would 

I 

it  is  not 

(, 

that  is* 

n 

you  can 

\ 

it  is  said 

(r 

they  will 

^-3 

you  cannot 

K 

it  should  be 

<o 

this  is 

^ 

you  may 

k 

it  would  be 

^ 

we  are 

-^ 

you  must 

^\ 

may  be 

c/*<-^   we  have  not 

^ 

you  must  not 

v-" 

of  course 

A«_^  we  have  seen 

,/N 

you  will  be 

.../>.. 

Our  own 

) 

when  lie  was 

/I 

you  will  do 

-Ac- 

should  be 

4 

which  cannot 

198.  /  may  be  abbreviated  by  writing  only  the  first 
stroke,  when  it,  will  join  easily  to  the  consonant.  (Seelam, 
I  trill.)  Most  of  these  phrases  may  be  vocalized ;  thus, 
|n  /  tin.  „Q;„.  as  well  as,  etc. 

199.  The  first  word  in  a  phrase  must  occupy  its  own 
position  ;    thus,       \,   can   be,      A    of  your,   n_   you  can, 

_^_^    could  not  /"  :  but  a  logogram  in  the  first  position 

may  l>c  si.k.iitly  raised,   or  lowered,  to  suit   the   position 

of  a   following  one  ;    thus,      I  _   /  "had,     .*       /  had  not, 

j    /  ilnl  not. 

200.  A  logogram  or  phraseogram  may  be  written  over 
or  close  to  a  word  to  express  con  or  com  ;  thus,  ,  you 
trill  comply,  J  /  a  at  content,  \j  mul  contrive,  ~~  ^  and 
connected,  '  and  consented,  -1  has  commenced,  and 
is  contt  at. 

201.  There  or  their  may  be  added  to  a  curved  full- 
length    logogram    by   doubling   it    :    thus,    '  fur   linn, 

\from  their,  in  their,   V^_  if  there. 


106  EXERCISE  ON  PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


Exercise  59. 

The  hyphen  shows  when  words  may  be  joined.     This  exer- 
cise contains  all  the  phrases  in  par.  197,  and  some  others. 

Uncle  Sam  to-his  Nephew  Tom. 

1.  My-dear  Tom.  I-am-glad  that-you  have  come  to  Glas- 
gow, and-have  resolved  to  pursue  your  studies  at-the  Acad- 
emy. This  is  right,  and-as  it-should-be;  you-could-not  have- 
-done  better,  and  I-do  hope  that-you-may-be  successful,  and- 
-that  you-will-do  as-well-as  you-can,  so-that  you-may  excel 
in  every  department.  2.  It-is-said,  and  of-course  we-are  all 
aware  of-it.  that- we- have- not  all-the-same  capacities  for  re- 
ceiving instruction;  it-is-not-necessary  that  -we  should-have; 
tlud-is-not  a  matter  of  consequence,  but  it-is  of -great  impor- 
tance that  all  who-have  talents  should  use  them  to-the  best 
advantage.  3.  I-shall-be-glad  to  assist  you  when  I-have  an 
opportunity;  I  would-have-done  so  had-not  you  asked  me; 
but-you- must  remember  that- we-cannot  obtain  any  great  ben- 
efit without  individual  exertion  on-our-own  part.  4.  You- 
-must-not  forget  this  and-the  other  maxims  we-liave  so  often 
talked  about,  for-we-have-seen  that-they-are  {tht-thr)  princi- 
ples which  cannot  fail  to  be  of  good  service,  yea  even,  that- 
-they-will-be  essential  to-your  success.  5.  Be  constant  and 
persevering,  that-is,  do-not  study  merely  by  tits  and  starts; 
lor-t hat -is-not  wise,  and-has-not  a  beneficial  effect,  6.  It- 
-would-bc  for-your  interest  that-you-shonld-be  uniformly 
steady,  and  you-should-do  what  you-can  to-gain  a  character 
for  diligence  and  perseverance,  tf-you  do  so,  I-will  give 
you  a  reward.  ?.  Eor-tbis-reason  alone  it-may-be,  indeed, 
it-should-be.  your  desire  to  achieve  success,  for-is-not  it  a 
source  of-pleasure  to-receive  marks  (of  the)  approbation  of - 
-those  interested  in  our  welfare.  8.  Many  a  youth  when-hc- 
-w:is  at-your  age  had  no-such  incentive,  and  I-will-say  lliat- 
-  the  re  are.  lew  who-would-not-have-been  delighted  to-have- 
had  it.     9.   If-you-will  (com)ply  with  my  desire,  and  (con) 

I  rive   lo-do   well    ii)-the  session   tint-has  (eoin)inenced.    I  am 

(con)tent  to  wait  the  result,  which-cannot  but  be  satisfac- 
tory, and-with-which  you-cannol  but  be  pleased,     10.  Your 

brother  John   may  do  as-well    il'-he  would  but  try:  and-if-lie 
sh  luld-do-so,  and  should-be   successful,  it  may-be   that-he- 

■may   also    will-he   a    credit     In  mil-own    family,   for-there-is 

little  reason  to  doubt  his  abilitv. 

Four  affect  ionate  Uncle,  etc. 


202-206  PUNCTUATION,    ETC.  107 

PUNCTUATION,    Etc. 

202.  Stops  should  be  written  as  usual,  except  the 
Period,  for  which  a  small  cross  is  used  ;  thus,  x  The 
HYPHEN  is  written  thus,  <T%  xL^  well-spoken  ;  the  Dash 
thus,  *.-,  ;  A  Smile  thus,  ^  ;  used  in  correspondence,  but 
not  in  printing.  The  Parenthesis  stroke  should  be 
made  a  little  larger  than  a  double-length  upright  conso- 
nant. 

203.  ACCENT  may  be  shown  by  writing  a  small  cross 
close     to    the     vowel     of    the     accented    syllable  ;     thus, 

*^f  arrows,    'V  arose,  /^t  renew. 

201.  EMPHASIS  is  marked  by  drawing  one  or  more  lines 
underneath  :  a  single  line  under  a  single  word  must  be 
made  wave-like,        .  ,  to  distinguish  it  from   h. 

205.  To  Mare  an  Initial  Capital  draw  two  short 
lines  under  the  word  ;  thus,      L->f    The  Times,      \    Abel. 

200.  Figures  are  written  as  usual.  When  one  and  six 
are  written  by  themselves,  form  them  thus,  /,  f,  that 
they  may  uot  be  mistaken  for  shorthand  characters. 

Review. 

1.  What  is  Phraseography  \ 

2.  State  the  characteristics  of  a  good  phraseogram,  and 

give  a  few  illustrat  ions. 

3.  Copy  the  brief  list  of  phraseograms  given  on  pages. 

104-"),  in  shorthand,  then  shut  the   bonk  and  write 
the  longhand. 

4.  How  is  /,  in  some  cases,  attached  to  a  phraseogram  '. 

5.  When   logograms  are    united,    which    determines  the 

position  of  the  outline  '. 
G.   How  may  a  logogram  be  written  in  relation  to  another 

word  so  as  to  indicate  <•"//  or  com  .' 
7.  In  what  way  can  then  or  their  be  added    to  a  curved 


108  METHOD    OF   PRACTICE.  207 


CHAPTER    XXIII. 


METHOD    OF    PRACTICE. 

207.  The  student,  having  made  himself  familiar  with  the 
principles  of  the  system  as  presented  in  the  preceding 
pages,  should  take  every  opportunity  to  practise  writing. 
As  much  time,  however,  should  be  spent  in  reading  as  in 
writing  Phonography.  Printed  Phonography  is  better 
for  this  purpose  than  manuscript.  One  or  two  short- 
hand volumes  should  be  read  before  a  rapid  style  of  writ- 
ing is  cultivated,  so  that  it  may  be  formed  on  a  correct 
model.  Preference  should  be  given  to  those  books  which 
contain  a  key  to  the  shorthand.  The  "  Phonographic 
Reader,"  "  Talcs  and  Sketches,"  "  Selections  from  Popu- 
lar Authors,"  or  the  shorthand  portions  of  the  Phonetic 
Journal  or  Pitman's  Shorthand  Weekly,  will  l>c  found 
especially  useful.  The  following  is  a  good  method  of 
practice  : — Take  a  specimen  of  printed  shorthand,  and 
read  it  over  two  or  three  times.  Then  write  it  in  short- 
hand from  the  shorthand  copy,  pronouncing  every  word 
aloud  while  writing  it.  Nexl  take  the  key  in  the  com- 
mon print,  and  write  the   passage  in  shorthand  without 

looking  at  the  printed  shorthand.  Then  compare  the 
written  and  printed  shorthand,  and  correct  anj  errors. 
Write  the  correct  mil  line  for  every  word  wrongly  written 
at  lirst  several  times  on  a  separate  sheet,  or  in  a  note- 
book, filling  a  line  with  each  word,  and  pronouncing  it 
aloud   while  writing  it.     This  practice  should  be  continued 

until  a  correct  style  is  obtained.     In  writing  from  a  book 


208-210  METTIOD    OF    PRACTICE.  100 

printed  in  Phonography,  to  which  there  is  no  key,  the 
learner  should  write  out  the  longhand  on  every  other  line 
of  his  note-hook.     After  filling  in   the  Phonography  on 

the  vacant  lines,  he  should  compare  what  he  lias  written 
with  the  book. 

208.  The  hooks  mentioned  above  are  printed  in  the  ( !or- 
responding  or  full  style  of  Phonography,  as  developed  in 
the  preceding  pages  of  this  book.  This  style  of  writing 
is  chiefly  employed  in  correspondence  between  phonog- 
raphers,  in  making  extracts  from  books,  and  for  other 
purposes  for  which  longhand  is  generally  used.  The 
Corresponding  Style  of  Phonography  can  be  written  two 
or  three  times  as  fast  as  longhand.  It  is  to  the  practised 
reader  more  legible  than  quickly  written  longhand. 

209.  It  must  be  remembered  thai  the  saving  of  time  and 
great  ease  in  writing  are  not  secured  by  using  hooked, 
grouped,  or  half-sized  letters  on  all  possible  occasions. 
A  long  and  flowing  outline  is  better  than  one  that  is 
short  but  cramped,  with  joinings  that  check  the  pen. 
For  instance,  the  outline  ""J  minute  (sixty  seconds)  is 
briefer  to  the  eve  than  minute,  but  is  not  so  quickly 
written:  and  the  two  strokes  in  mental  take  more 
time  than  the  three  strokes  in  1  mental.  The  rule 
for  choosing  outlines  should  be  SHARP  ANGLKS  and 
FORWARD  ! 

210.  As  in  rapid  writing  from  dictation  it  is  impossible 
to  insert  many  vowels,  and  as  the  ability  to  follow  a  public 
speaker  should  he  the  goal  to  which  every  phonographer 
should  aspire,  the  student,  as  soon  as  he  can  write  with 
accuracy,  should  accustom  himself  to  write  onlj  the  out- 
lines or  consonants  of  words,  and  go  over  his  work  a 
second  time  to  insert  vowels.  This  will  train  his  hand  to 
reporting,  and  accustom  him  to  read  unvocalized  Pho- 
nography. 


110 

ADVANTAGES 

OF    SHORTHAND. 

Exercise   60. 

ADVANTAGES 

OF     SHORTHAND. 

1. 

L  N 

^p    c    .    ^   s    2,    s  ~>    ^   % 

x 

n< 

>       1 

r 

x      ^^o^U" 

ir       \ 

(A  • 

,v. 

^       '       C^                .Tfc.    ,        n)        •       ^1 

"a 

..,  t " 

'/w  ^  .  %, :       )  /^ 

> 

/ 

* 

^l 

j- 

^  rv>V  3  >  v  \ 

\ 

•       '        ^-^. 

(?. 

<       2. 

u  v-.yr,  a  u, 

/  s 

_         c 

^~ 

^, 

~  \  ^  *  °  ^.  \  -i 

-  i^i, 

'.VL^ 

^,-  -^rx,^^ 

X 

X/?  N 

)  P 

\3 

-%, 

x      'V 

(  v,, 

c\  £  /Q^^<  V 

^ 

.1  3- 

°  Jr 

^ 

^\t(—-L- 

/ 

Ns 

,r"V^% 

^  ^   V,   L  ,  '  (  . 

) 

^f      N 

u 

\.  . 

v^  v  .  <^  r™  ^rJ 

N         1       " 

b     ck-> 

°\ . 

\_N.  -  ,•>>  .  \  N  ^ 

n 

'       *       V) 

-  1 

V   V^*    :)  ■     : 

4. 

«  ^ 

.-y 

^~ 

)                k    v  Vp  ~   ^ 

^ 

j; 

rx./ 

\ 

O 

/  t^  y\ .  -  v«| , ( i  - 

J' 

-     N    °So 

(       |           ' 

~   V^^f'U'  S 

c~^ 

/^ 

-l"  c 

-w    - 

VI  ^,  C^  -\  a  ' 

Ex.  60        ADVANTAGES  OF  SHORTHAND.  Ill 

jT  ^  •  '  k  /  c~      •  ~U*  .rp.  \  I,       (^ 

A     *S\    I       •    "'    L      ~1     '         ^    ^   x  6.         .      ^ 

•  ^  N  •  V  v  ~  ......  v,  '    '    /  s 

L  ^  \  /      f    ' .  -  ,  :  i  ^A.  \ 

-'U^x't.  v_^\  ■■■  v^/'"  ; 
'  ^7  -L    *  J...  •  ^v  N  .^.  ^  ^  >-, 

^'U^x       8.     V.    ^    V.    '    <\  ^  T  J)   -pt  N 
-**-'  •  ^  >  '  ^  ■  \    C   °    JL  n/y' 

£x    0.  w  *, N  c  v '  «?\  v^  /  .  <$  s  .  v 

u  x  n  r  m/  /  •  %  J,  v ) e  ^  ^ 
ri ,  ^  -n  .  ^o  '  -t,  e  •  r  N  •  #  v., > 

UTCv   >;,  '^  /"  V  n  ,--    I 
r    \  L  •  VL.  V/i  n  )  <V^  S    l  x   io.  ^ 

.  -\*  v  .1.  /      v    ■*»      -**-  c  "\ 


^  '  J>  y  N 


w'0   ,     \ 


112 


ADVANTAGES  OF  SHORTHAND. 


Ex.  61 


Exercise   61. 

Written  with  Phraseography. 
/^('Ild^^x       1.     «    ~  W   V, 

4.  " .  ^s  o  n  ^  .\.  v_  N  c~^v.  x    • 


U^    l 


-/x       6.      '    k 


Ex.  6] 

I 

ADVANTAGES   OF   SHORTHAND. 

113 

S 

\ 

^  /L  \  '  ~\  \ 

V 

( 
> 

<V- 

c^r-^ 

>  C 

^r  /—\  <    c  «~ 

c 

V^ 

l~Ci-w1 

\     _ 

1     s 

v  w  U  -N>..    -)-  *    - 

'     X 

6.    " 

K 

^  'v.j  N  *  '  *  -1- 

>    \ 

V^ 

tc 

i     \ 

?> 

■""b      •        C-i  >         -^     •      /    >                b* 

•  t 

s. 

7.    " 

1  I  S  >  *-  N  ^  "I 

\ 

'   1  '  ^s 

L,N  lx    \    A  ^3 

\     s- 

i>,  °V*,  L  ,  o      \  } 

\              * 

X 

I 

i 

"J"      O            yi                      J         '    <*                ^ 

\ 

^a 

.  ^L 

^T^b> 

s  rj,  '  s   (s  ^  \  ' 

i 

^    7    ^      o 

^' 

-?x 

9.    M  (    '  *=£.  \ 

^^■^ 

.  J 

"  -\ 

\      <_ 

\  x        <f    b    ^  \^   " 

"\> 

■>-■  * 

"1 

"N 

VL 

; '  .£  ^    y\  ,  \ . 

> 

"7t> 

V* 

•L 

N  •*  ^ 

N   S".  b  ^    ^ 

LN 

^ 

W      ' 

r 

M7^^io.. 

1 

;  ia," 

%^ 

s 

^t      S     /^X         11.    -V      -o 

v  > 

)  z 

°      : 

> 

^—r 

-  v 

/  Y 

!_*) 

/ 
> 

^  <r  \  -  "  s  ( v 

"*"     ^ 

'  ** 
i 

-~\ 

114 


ADVANTAGES  OF  SHORTHAND. 


Ex.  61 

rx  is.  ^  r"  ^  ^  „l  x  <v  ...)...  ^ 
' "  ~, '-.).-—  rL  %  -j-  •  uN  u, J 

i/r' va  °  n  w   i4.  c  k_.  v^  %, 

r,  •  ""  v.  -  4  ~  -f  i  °  -^  o, 

/  ^i  N      -  o       O         n  6~-  I  S 

v,«  -<^n  /^,  ~-  ~  n  i,  >'\N^i . 

is."  -  v>  /  -  .V*  Zp  v^_1»\^-^r 
,    )  ^^,>  1  i  i  °  v  ^  i  Vx 

\      >        Vp^/-^N       \    ~»  ,     *       ^ 

N  \r-    \;     H   1  I    j^   V    i 


211-212  SPEED   PRACTICE.  115 


PART  II. 


SPEED   PRACTICE. 

21 1.  Presuming  thai  the  student  has  followed  the  advice 
given  on  page  108,  and  is  able  to  write  about  sixty  words 
per  minute,  he  should  now  commence  the  study  and  prac- 
tice of  ilie  "Reporting"  or  Abbreviated  Style  of  Pho- 
nography. A  speed  of  sixty  words  per  minute  may  be 
attained  by  any  person  of  ordinary  capacity  and  manual 
dexterity  in  from  three  to  four  months,  by  practising  a 
few  hours  daily.  To  write  at  the  rate  necessary  to  report 
an  address  deliberately  uttered,  will  require  a  longer 
period  of  time  and  the  employment  of  additional  princi- 
ple   of  ril >]>i-c \  ial  ion. 

2  1  2.  The  secret  of  rapid  writing  may  be  said  to  consist  in 
two  things,  practice,  and  the  use  of  judicious  abbreviations. 
The  student  must  furnish  the  first  requisite  ;  and  for  the 
second,  he  will  find  in  the  following  pages  the  most  efficient 
help  that  over  fifty  years'  experience  of  the  most  skilful 
phonographers  can  supply.  Of  these  two  essentials  the 
greater  is  practice,  by  dint  of  which  alone,  in  the  full 
style  of  Phonography,  illustrated  in  the  precediug  pages, 

100  words  per  minute  may  be  written.  As  the  greal 
Grecian  orator,  when  asked  what  was  the  most  important 
requisite  in  elocution,  said,  "  Delivery,"  |  meaning  t  hereby 
not  merely  attitude  and  evsture,  but  the  correct  utter- 
ance of  every  word,  attention  to  emphasis,  tone,  inflec- 
tions, pauses,  etc..)  and  when  asked  what  was  the  next 
essential,  replied.  ''Delivery,"  and  still  gave  the  same 
answer  to  the  query  as  to  the  third  essential  in  the  art — 
so  we  may  say  of  "  that  much-coveted  art  by  which  the 


116  SPEED    PRACTICE.  213-215 

orator's  eloquence  is  caught  in  its  impassioned  torrent, 
and  fixed  upon  paper,  as  a  picture  of  his  rich  and  glowing 
mind,"  the  first,  the  second,  and  the  last  essential  is, 
practice,  practice,  PRACTICE. 

213.  There  is,  however,  a  practice  that  will  hinder  the 
student  instead  of  forwarding  him.  This  is  the  habit  of 
writing  carelessly  in  order  to  gain  speed.  Badly  formed 
characters  become  illegible,  and  speed  without  legibility 
is  worthless.  The  student  should  never  let  his  desire  to 
write  swiftly  overcome  his  determination  to  write  cor- 
rectly. The  same  rule  holds  in  shorthand  as  in  long- 
hand :  he  who  first  learns  to  write  well,  may,  in  course  of 
time,  write  both  well  and  quickly;  whereas  he  who  aims 
first  at  swiftness,  regardless  of  accuracy,  will  never 
write  well;  and  though  he  may  learn  to  write  quickly,  lie 
will  not  be  aide  to  read  what  he  has  written  with  rapidity 
and  certainty;  and  if  he  cannot  do  this,  he  might  almost 
as  well  not  write  at  all. 

214.  Mere  copying  from  a  book  is  worth  little  as  re- 
porting practice.  The  best  practice  is  that  of  writing 
from  another  person's  reading.  An  hour's  practice  in 
this  manner  is  better  than  several  hours'  copying  from 
a  book.  The  reader  should  read  as  slowly  as  the  writer 
requires;  and,  if  a  useful  and  interesting  book  lie  chosen, 
the  practice  may  lie  made  beneficial  to  both. 

21.1.  In  choosing  matter  for  dictation  practice,  regard 
Should,  of  course,  be   paid    to   the   particular   purpose   for 

which  the  art  is  being  acquired.     A  book  of  commercial 

letters  and  luisiness  forms*  will  provide  the  most  advan- 
tageous practice  for  the  young  shorthand  correspondent ; 
the  private  secretary  should  select  such  works  as  are 
likely  l<>  prove  useful  in  his  daily  work;   and  the  embryo 

*"  Business  Correspondence  in  Shorthand,"  containing  actual  letters 
dictated  in  American  business  offices.  Keyed  in  ordinary  type,  and  mat- 
i.i  divided  into  sections  for  testing  of  speed  in  shorthand  or  typewriting. 
io  pages  In  cover.  Price,  80  cent-.  Isaac  Pitman  A:  Sons.  33  Union 
Square,  New  York. 


216-21?  SPEED    PRACTICE.  117 

reporter  should  follow  the  dictation  of  speeches,  lectures, 
and  parliamentary  debates.  In  tins  way  the  beginner 
will  accustom  himself  to  the  language  he  will  hear  when 
professionally  engaged. 

21G.  It  is  sometimes  difficult  to  find  a  friend  who  will 
patiently  undertake  the  office  of  reader,  but  an  intelligent 
boy  or  girl  can  generally  be  obtained;  who,  for  a  trifling 
remuneration,  will  gladly  read  for  an  hour  or  two  daily. 
If  a  Stenographer's  Association  or  School  of  Shorthand  is 
within  reach,  the  student  will  probably  find  there  suitable 
facilities  for  dictation  practice  at  different  rates  of  speed. 

217.  Wlien  the  student  can  follow  a  reader  at  from  80 
to  100  words  per  minute,  he  can  attempt  note  taking  in 
public.  Slow  preachers  afford  the  best  practice  to  the 
sindent ;  rapidly-delivered  sermons,  especially  when  read, 
are  very  trying  to  the  inexperienced  reporter.  At  the 
outset  of  his  practice,  the  writer  will,  of  course,  be  unable 
to  keep  up  with  a  fast  speaker;  many,  indeed,  in  their 
firsl  attempts,  despair  of  ever  being  able  to  accomplish 
the  task.  A  few  trials,  however,  will  render  the  labor 
less  irksome,  and  increase  the  speed  of  the  writer.  The 
object,  at  first,  should  not  be  to  write  as  rapidly  as  pos- 
sible, but  rather  to  take  down  only  so  much  of  what  is 
said  as  can  be  readily  deciphered  afterwards.  The  young 
reporter  should  be  cautioned  against  leaving  off  writing 
ie  the  middle  of  the  sentence,  and  commencing  another 
with  tiie  speaker.  His  object  should  be  to  secure  as 
many  complete  sentences  as  possible.  If  necessary,  these 
may  be  curtailed,  to  enable  the  writer  to  keep  up  with 
the  speaker,  and  to  preserve  the  drift  of  his  discourse. 
Where  only  detached  words  and  parts  of  sentences  are 
written,  no  sense  can  be  made  of  the  report,  but  if  care 
lie  taken  to  put  down  as  much  as  possible  of  the  sense  of 
the  speaker,  the  mind  will  be  called  into  more  active 
exercise,  and  the  art  of  verbatim  reporting  will  be  more 
speedily    attained.     If  there   are   no   other  opportunities 


118  SPEED    PRACTICE.  218-219 

for  practice,  the  phonograph er  may  sometimes  write 
down  t lie  conversation  of  those  around  him,  or  at  least 
as  much  as  he  can  catch.  This,  however,  is  the  most 
difficult  of  all  kinds  of  reporting,  as  the  conversational 
style  is  excessively  rapid,  (though  it  may  not  appear  so,) 
and  the  writer  is  often  puzzled  by  several  persons  speak- 
ing at  the  same  time.  In  reporting  speeches,  the  writer 
should  accustom  himself  to  be  several  words  behind  the 
speaker.  With  rapid  speakers  he  will  often  be  neces- 
sarily behind,  and,  if  he  has  not  accustomed  himself  to 
be  so  in  his  usual  reporting,  he  will  find  some  difficulty 
in  recovering  lost  ground.  A  practised  writer  should  be 
able,  in  an  emergency,  to  write  twelve  or  fifteen  words 
behind  the  speaker. 

218.  The  writing  should  not  be  too  large;  and  outlines 
that  check  the  hand,  and  therefore  lead  to  loss  of  time, 
should  be  avoided.  No  exact  size  of  the  shorthand  char- 
acters can  be  prescribed  for  all.  No  one  style  of  writing 
suits  all  alike;  some  find  it  easier  to  write  the  characters 
small  and  neatly,  while  others,  with  a  freer  hand,  are 
more  at  ease  in  writing  large,  and  with  less  regard  to 
exactness  of  outline.  There  is  a  general  tendency  among 
beginners  to  increase  the  size  of  their  outlines  as  they 
increase  their  speed,  and  to  run  into  an  awkward  and 
"sprawling"  style.  This  tendency  should  be  resisted. 
The  writer,  if  he  is  careful,  will  soon  ascertain  what  size 
suits  his  style  best,  but,  as  a  general  rule,  it  may  be  said 
that  the    lines   of  a   note-book  .")    inches  wide,  should    not 

contain  less  than  an  average  of  twelve  words,  or  more 
than  an  average  of  t  wenty. 

219.  The  mind  and  the  hand  of   the  phonographic   stu- 
dent should  lie   constantly  engaged    in  forming   and   writ 
ing  outlines,  and  as  they  are  mentally  conceived  the  hand 
can  trace  thein  on  imaginary  paper.      The    follow  Jul;'  plan 

has  been  recommended  for  this  kind  of  practice:  Take 
an\  interesting  book,  and  with  a  blunt-pointed  piece  of 


220-201  WRITING   MATERIALS.  119 

wood,  or  the  end  of  a  penholder,  trace  the  shorthand 
outlines  for  the  words  as  they  are  read,  under  them 
or  on  the  opposite  page.  A  better  plan  is  to  take  a 
book,  the  pages  of  which  have  a  wide  margin,  and,  while 
reading,  write  the  words  in  shorthand  on  the  margin 
of  either  side,  or  under  the  lines,  placing  a  tick  in  the 
margin  whenever  a  difficult  word  occurs,  and  consulting 
the  Shorthand  Dictionary  *  at  the  end  of  the  practice. 

220.  It  should  always  be  remembered  that  facility  in 
reading  is  as  essential  as  rapidity  in  writing;  the  latter, 
indeed, is  worth  nothing  without  the  former.  Everything 
that  is  written  should  be  read  afterwards,  and  all  the 
errors  carefully  marked,  so  that  they  may  be  avoided  in 
future;  if  necessary,  the  words  maybe  more  fully  voca- 
lized, so  as  to  render  the  notes  easily  decipherable  at  any 
distance  of  time.  The  notes  should  also  be  occasionally 
written  out  in  longhand,  for  practice  in  easy  and  rapid 
transcription. 

WRITING   MATERIALS. 

221.  The  importance  of  suitable  writing  materials  for 
aote-taking  cannot  be  over-estimated.  No  shorthand 
writer  should  ever  trust  to  chance  supplies  of  pencils, 
pens,  ink,  or  paper,  but  should  make  a  careful  selection, 
and  take  care  to  be  well  equipped  for  any  professional 
work  he  may  undertake.  For  all  descriptions  of  note- 
taking,  the  pen  is  more  suitable  than  the  pencil,  on 
account  of  the  permanence  and  superior  legibility  of  the 
notes,  both  important  considerations  when  the  transcript 
is  undertaken.  A  suitable  pen  is  also  far  less  fatiguing 
to  the  note-taker  than  a  pencil,  a  great  advantage  when 
writing  for  a  lengthened   period.      But,  as  it   sometimes 

*  A  Phonographic  Dictionary  of  the  English  Language  ;  Containing  the 
Shorthand  Forms  for  55,000  Words,  and  5,000  Proper  Names.  Sixth  edi- 
tion. 300  pages,  crown  8vo,  handsome  cloth  binding.  Price,  Si. 25 ; 
"Library  Edition,"  half  roan,  beveled  boards,  gilt,  $1.50.  1-aac  Pit- 
man &  Sons.  33  Union  Square.  Now  York. 


120  WRITING    MATERIALS.  222 

happens  that  the  use  of  a  pen  is  undesirable  or  impos- 
sible, the  note-taker  should  accustom  himself  occasion- 
ally to  report  with  a  pencil.  In  order  to  be  prepared  for 
any  unforeseen  difficulty  or  accident,  the  phonographer 
should  never  be  without  a  case  of  thoroughly  good  lead 
pencils,  sharpened  ready  for  immediate  use.  The  pencil 
should  be  used  in  preference  to  the  pen  for  note-taking 
in  the  open  air  in  wet  weather,  or  when  writing  in  semi- 
darkness,  as  at  illustrated  lectures.  These  remarks  apply 
chiefly  to  public  note-taking;  for  office  note-taking, 
which  is  not  done  under  such  exacting  conditions,  the 
shorthand  writer  will  find  that  ordinary  pens  and  ink  fur- 
nish satisfactory  writing  materials. 

222.  Fountain  pens  have  of  late  come  into  general  use 
among  shorthand  writers  in  the  law  courts  and  reporters 
for  the  press.  The  fountain  pen  should  be  provided  with 
a  thoroughly  strong  and  flexible  nib.  During  rapid  note- 
taking  the  strain  on  a  nib  is  very  considerable.  If  it  is 
stiff  and  unyielding,  the  labor  of  note-taking  is  seriously 
increased,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  if  it  is  not  a  strong 
pen,  it  may  speedily  become  useless.  For  these  reasons 
a  fountain  pen  with  a  gold  nib  is  strongly  recom- 
mended, and  the  shorthand  writer  who  lias  one  thor- 
oughly suited  to  his  hand  will  possess  the  best  writing 
instrument  it  is  possible  to  have.  Some  shorthand  writers 
prefer  an  ordinary  penholder  with  gold  nib,  and  a  pocket 
inkstand,  and,  where  they  are  always  certain  of  the  ac- 
commodation  of  a  table,  the  arrangement  is  a  good  one. 
Here  again  a  word  of  caution  may  be  given  as  to  ink- 
stands, many  pocket  inkstands  being  entirely  unsuited 
for  constant  use.  For  note-taking,  paper  with  a  smooth, 
hard  surface,  not  too  highly  glazed,  will  be  found  most 
suitable.  The  elastic  bound  books  which  open  llat  on 
the  desk  are  the  best,  though  the  note-books  bound  in 
the  CUStomar;  way  are  suitable  tor  ordinary  work.  For 
a    list   of   approved    fountain    pens,  inkstands,    ink,  note- 


223-224  WRITING    MATERIALS.  121 

books,  etc.,  the  shorthand  writer  is  referred  to  the  Cata- 
logue at  the  end  of  this  volume 

223.  The  phonographer  may  write  steadily  on  the  knee 
by  placing  aboard  about  sixteen  or  eighteen  inches  long, 
five  inches  broad,  and  {j  inch  thick,  under  his  reporting 
book.  This  portable  writing  desk,  as  it  may  be  called, 
supports  the  weight  of  the  upper  half  of  the  note-book 
when  open,  which,  otherwise,  drops  inconveniently  over 
the  knee. 

224.  Much  time  is  sometimes  lost  in  turning  over  the 
leaves  of  note-books.  The  following  plan  is  perhaps  the 
best  that  can  be  adopted: — While  writing  on  the  upper 
half  of  the  leaf,  introduce  the  second  finger  of  the  left 
hand  between  it  and  the  next  leaf,  keeping  the  leaf  which 
is  being  written  on  steady  by  the  first  linger  and  thumb. 
While  writing  on  the  lower  part  of  the  page  shift  the 
leaf  by  degrees,  till  it  is  about  half  way  up  the  book  : 
when  it  is  convenient,  lift  up  the  first  finger  and  thumb, 
and  the  leaf  will  turn  over  almost  by  itself.  This  is  the 
best  plan  when  writing  on  a  desk  or  table.  When  writing 
on  the  knee,  (lie  firsl  linger  should  be  introduced  instead 
of  the  second,  and  the  leaf  be  shifted  up  only  about  two 
inches.  The  finger  should  be  introduced  at  the  first 
pause  the  speaker  makes,  or  at  any  other  convenient  op- 
portunity that  presents  itself.  Other  shorthand  writers 
adopt  another  method  of  turning  the  leaves.  They  take 
hold  of  the  bottom  left-hand  corner  of  the  leaf  with  t he 
finger  and  thumb,  and  on  reaching  the  bottom  line  the 
leaf  is  lifted  and  turned  over.  Some  reporters  prefer  a 
reporting  book  that  opens  as  a  printed  hook  dors.  In 
this  case  there  is  less  difficulty  in  turning  over  the  leaves 
with  the  left  hand.  Whichever  form  of  book  is  used. 
the  writer  should  confine  himself  to  cur  side  of  the  paper 
till  the  end  of  the  book  is  readied,  and  then,  turning  it 
over,  begin  at  the  other  end,  and  write  in  the  same  man- 
ner on  the  blank  pages. 


122  PHRASEOGRAPHY.  225-226 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 

225.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  Lists  of  words  aud 
phrases  that  follow  should  be  written  out  before  com- 
mencing practice,  but  they  should  all  be  copied  at  as 
early  a  period  as  possible.  A  good  method  of  doing  this 
is  to  get  a  book  of  ruled  paper,  and  write  out  the  several 
contractions  and  phrases,  one  on  each  line,  at  the  left- 
hand  side  of  the  page.  Each  phrase  and  contraction 
should  then  be  copied  over  and  over  again.  By  persever- 
ing in  this  way  they  will  become  indelibly  fixed  in  the 
mind,  and  facility  in  writing  them  will  be  attained.  The 
Exercises  at  the  end  of  this  book  should  be  written  from 
dictation  till  a  speed  of  120  or  150  words  per  minute  has 
been  acquired. 

220.  The  student  will  derive  considerable  assistance 
from  an  extensive  and  judicious  use  of  Phraseography. 
This  branch  of  reporting  practice  is  fully  dealt  with  in 
the  "  Phonographic  Phrase  Book,"  which  is  recommended 
to  the  reader's  attention  as  soon  as  he  has  mastered  the 
principles  of  the  art  as  here  explained.  From  the  pre- 
face  to   the    "Phrase    Book"    we   quote    the   following 

remarks  on  the  advantage  which  a  judicious   employment 

of  phraseography  secures  :  "  Phraseography  maybe  re- 
garded as  an  ars  iu<irl<,  lan  art  .wit  bin  an  art . )  ami  it. 
requires  some   special   attention    and    practice   before  ii 

can  he  judiciously  used.  It  is  chiefly  useful  in  reporting, 
where  the  least  saving  of  time  in  writing  is  often  of  the 
greatest   importance  ;    il    need    not,   however,    be    confined 

to  this  bianch  of  Phonography,  but  may  frequently  be 
used  in  the  Corresponding  Style,  for,  with  very  little 
practice  on  the  pari  of  the  reader,  the  phraseographic 
combinations  are  found  to  be  as  legible   as  ordinary  Pho- 


PHRASEOGR  \i'!IV.  123 

nograpby.    Indeed,  Ave  think  that  when  combinations  are 

well  chosen,  and  correctly  written,  the  words  are  more 
easily  read  when  united  than  when  written  separately. 
There  is  something  characteristic  about  a  phraseogram, 
which  usually  distinguishes  it,  from  single  words  ;  and 
the  very  compactness  of  its  form  enables  the  eye  to  de- 
cipher it  in  less  time  than  would  he  required  to  take  in 
several  separate  words,  which  occupy  so  much  more 
space.  In  the  one  case  the  eye  rests  upon  a  single  out- 
line, and  in  the  other  it  has  perhaps  to  travel  over  half  a 
line  before  it  can  seethe  whole  phrase.  The  phraseogram 
will  most  probably  be  written  more  carefully  than  the 
separate  words,  as  it  requires  less  time.  More  space  is 
saved  by  phraseography  than  would  be  imagined  ;  and  if 
the  characters  employed  are  carefully  formed,  they  are 
as  legible  as  they  arc  compact  and  brief."'  Ask  any  ex- 
perienced phonographer  whether  he  would  rather  read 
the  following  sentence  thus  :  — 

v    ~     J    „     r     \     H    ,    r^    ( 
s      N     '^     °      \      V 

or  grouped  in  a  few  compact  phraseographic  forms,  thus: 


r>   /\   ^    j-  % 


In  this,  as  in  many  other  instances  which  mighl  be  given, 

a  marked  benefit    accrues   both    to    the    reader  and  the 
writer  from  the  use  of   Phraseography. 


*The  "Phonographic  Phrase  Book,"  containing  above  two  thousand 
useful  phrases  in  Phonography,  with  a  Key  in  the  ordinary  type,  and  an 
Exercise  on  all  the  Phrases.  132  pages  Price,  85c;  cloth,  5<ic.  I-:ui<- 
Pitman  &  son-. 83  Union  Square,  New  York. 


124  WRITING   IN   POSITION.  227-229 


WRITING   IN   POSITION. 

227.  When  writing  rapidly  it  is  impossible  to  insert 
many  vowels.  If  the  position  of  a  consonant  outline  indi- 
cates the  vowel  or  principal  vowel  of  the  word,  it  can  be 
easily  read.  A  word  containing  only  one  or  two  consonant 
strokes,  whether  full-length  or  half-length,  is  usually 
written  in  position,  as  determined  by  its  vowel,  or  ac- 
cented vowel.  (See  page  96.)  Position  need  not  he 
observed  with  respect  to  most  words  containing  three  or 
more  consonants. 

228.  The  student  has  hitherto  written  all  words  on 
the  line,  except  those  grammalogues  that  go  above 
or  THROUGH  the  line.  lie  should  now  begin  to  write 
in  POSITION  all  words  that  contain  only  one  stroke, 
and  most  words  that  consist  of  two  strokes,  and  bring 
into  use  the  list  of  Reporting  Grammalogues  given  on 
pages  12S-129. 

229.  A  word  formed  by  a  horizontal  and  a  down  or  up 
stroke,  has  its  position  determined  by  the  down  or  up 
stroke.  "When  a  word  consisting  of  an  initial  horizontal 
letter  and  a  downstroke  is  placed  in  the  ii  rst  position, 
the  initial  letter  must  be  written  a  little  higher  than 
usual  to  accommodate  itself  to  the  position  of  the  fol- 
lowing stroke;  and  when  placed  in  third  position,  the 
initial  letter  must  be  written  a  little  lower  than  usual; 
thus,  I  gaudy,  <■<,<!,,  i  giddy.  In  words  in 
which  an  initial  horizontal  letter  is  followed  by  an  up- 
stroke, the  initial  letter  is  written  lower  than  usual  for 
first   position,   and  below  the   line    for   the    third    position; 

thus,        /       mil,,        ,      male,  mini.      Derivative 

words    should     commence    in    the    same    place,    with    re- 
port    to     the     line,    as     their     primitives;     as,  care 

(grammalogue),  e       careful,       sir,  °~i>  xi,rtcni,    ■  >    si.rfy. 


230-286  writing  in  msiTioN.  125 

230.  Double-length  perpendicular  strokes  and 
straighl  sloping  down-strokes  take  only  the  third  posi- 
tion, through  the  line;  as,  ._\_  ponder,  -N^-  plun- 
der, pounder,  ••••■--  tender,  --)--  ((sunder.  A  double- 
length  curved  sloping  stroke,  or  a  straight  upstroke, 
can  be  written  in  the  three  positions;  as,  _v~_  father, 
_V_   fetter,     \ future;        ....     hitter,      L......     letter, 

.,^77-  litter ;  <£_.  wander,  c^<^.  wonder,  ..y?  winter.  A 
double-length  horizontal  stroke  takes  only  two  posi- 
tion-,,   VBOVE  and  on  the  line  ('par.  189). 

231.  Words  that  contain  only  horizontal  and  half- 
sized  letters,  and  an  accented  third-place  vowel,  as  en,,/,-. 
king,  antique,  cubed,  canoe,  music,  are  written  on  the 
line,  in  accordance  with  paragraph  189.  On  unruled 
paper  the  third  position  for  horizontals  and  half- 
sized  letters,  cannot  he  distinguished  from  the  second, 
unless  the  words  he  written  so  low  as  to  interfere  with 
the  characters  in  the  line  beneath. 

232.  The  rides  as  to  position  should  not  be  applied  to 
such  words  as  have  outlines  of  their  mm,  (no  other  words 
being  written  by  the  same  consonant  skeleton  form.) 
because  the  inconvenience  in  writing  words  like  derive, 
dogmatic,  Trafalgar,  etc..  in  the  first  position,  and  disci- 
pline, newspaper,  Peterborough,  etc..  in  the  third  position, 
in  accordance  with  their  accented  vowels,  would  not  lie 
compensated  by  greater  ease  in  reading. 

233.  In  words  having  a  vowel  before  and  after  a  single 
consonant,  both  should  be  written  if  possible;  if  only 
one  can   be   written,  the   most    prominent  one  will   afford 

the   best    clue    to    the   word;  thus.    \     obey,     ,     <rl,,,. 

In  words  containing  two  or  more  consonants  and  vowels. 
the  initial  or  final  vowel,  whether  accented  or  not, 
usually    affords    the    greatest     facility    in    reading;    as, 

L^  atom,    I attack,  ^-v  emollient,  VC  pillow,  [\_  lady. 


126  EXERCISE   OX   WRITIXG    IX   POSITION. 

This  rule  does  not  apply  to  outlines  in  which  the  method 
of  writing  the  first  or  last  consonant  indicates  a  pre- 
ceding or  following  vowel  ;    as,    ~\_     erect,    /~    react, 

)    n  esculent,  ~\_  argued,  /~  rugged,    f-  fail,  \f~  follow. 

Exercise:  62. 

Tht  words  in  italics  are  to  be  written  in  position,  above,  on, 
or  through  the  line;  words  not  in  italic*  arc  Ghrammalogues. 
1'h  is  and  the  following  Ext  rcises  should  be  practised  until  they 
can  be  written  at  100  words  per  minute. 

If  you  (h  sire  to  write  at  a  high  rate,  you  must  read  and  mas- 
ter the  rules  so  as  to  follow  them  fully,  and  be  able  to  apply 
them  on  all  occasions.  I  feci  that  you  cannot  fail  to  fall  into 
the  true  and  proper  way  if  you  will  only  try.  The  race  is  to  the 
sure  and  not  to  the  strong.  Do  not  tarry  by  the  way.  Re- 
member  the  fable  of  the  feeble  tortoise  that  outstripped  the 
/////■«.  Master  one  thing  at  ixtime.  and  you  are  awe  to  win. 
Set  apart  ior  study  a  smallportion  of  each  day.  I  fave  patience; 
Rome  was  not  />«?'//  in  a  day.  //'///'  fttZ?*  arow  teas  as  we 
ascend  them.  That  which  is  lightly  a<  t  is  little  rain,  it.  If  you 
would  get  gold,  you  must  dig  deeply :  it  is  not  dug  on  the  sw- 
/ace.  Please  note  thai  the  rw?e  oi  position  applies  chiefly  to 
short  words,  and.  thai  the  pfoce  or  position  otlong  words  is 
generally  on  the  line.  /.</  your  letters  be  »eai  and  light;  a 
large  and  heavy  stylt  wastes  time.  StUlyou  must  not  wm7< 
too  small.  The  bestplan  is  to  '■"/>//  the  plain  models  in  the 
" Phonetic  Journal.  Tah  care  thai  your  outlines  arc  /n-/7 
spaced.  Crowded  writing  is  nol  easy  to  /cr/.  1'akeposses- 
sionot  these  //////*  withoul  opposition.  They  are  mean  I  for 
you.     It  is  my  intention  to  maAre  you  a  good  writer.     Keep 

your  outlines  near  t  lie  ///c.      1  >o   not    ?ea«  loo  lieaeili/  OD  the 

</r.s/.'.  A',  ep  your  "v/V  up  and  resi  <»n  the  middle  of  the  "/•//>. 
This  is  a  matter  upon  which  you  will  do  ireZZ  to  pander  with 
care.     The  line  upon  which  you  wnYe  is  &  royal  road  along 

which  iri/i  a  a/V<  /  pi  //  can  hare/  in  _/?ne  .v  //,7c.     It   is  enjoyable 

to  /'v//rA  a  pen  ////al'ii-ra  good  speaker.  Sec  how  it  keeps  pace 
with  the  steady  flow  of  words,  and  stopssA  a  women  lory  pause 

Marl*    how  the  nimble  steji  inert  as,  8   to   a  //W,  breaks    in/a  a 

ea nter.  loiters,  makes  another pau8(  ;  ai  '  £Aen,  as  if  suddenly 

taking  leaee  of  reason,  goes  raring  aieaij  in  a  mad  mooil.  with 
/iv///.s-  and  bounds,   for  xd'ir/  ///'r,  /V/.v  a  liiinlnl  iln  r  In  for,    the 

hounds  [  daresay  that  you  will  smile  al  my  choice  of  simile, 
but  you  will,  if  you  choose,  know  the  excitement  of  the  elms,. 


234-235  REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES.  127 


REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES. 

234.  The  following  list  of  words  contains  only  26 
additional  grammalogues  that  need  be  committed  to 
memory  :  18  of  these  are  contracted,  belief-ve,  Christian- 
ity,  generation,   glory-ify-Jied,   holy,   itself,   larger,   liberty, 

outfit,  religion,  religious,  Sttrioitr,  Scripture,  signify,  speak, 
special,  strength,  whither;  and  8  are  exceptional  as  to  posi- 
tion, approve,  house,  met,  most,  oiring,  sent,  thus,  ye.  All 
the  other  words,  such  as  see,  thy,  etc.,  are  single-stroke 
OUTLINES  that  express  all  the  consonants  of  the  word, 
PLACED  IN  POSITION,  except  approve,  not.  most,  oiring, 
sent,    and   thus,    placed    OUT  OP    POSITION    to   prevent    their 

clashing  with  prove,  meet,  must,  young,  send,  this;  and 
house,  ye,  written  on  the  line  for  convenience.  Of  the 
irregular  grammalogues  as  regards  position.  7  of  the  Cor- 
responding Style  Grammalogues,  and  :!  of  the  Reporting 
Grammalogues,  contain  the  vowel  oh,  and  are  placed  in 
the  first  position,  instead  of  the  second,  to  accommodate 
other  words  that  musl  be  written  on  the  line.  They  are: — 
ago,  don't,  go,  more,  most.  Of  owing,  over,  those,  though. 

2o.">.  The  past  tense  of  a  verb  thai  LS  expressed  by  a 
logogram,  or  by  a  contracted  outline,  may  usually  be 
written  in  the  same  way  as  the  present  tense;  thus,  the 
logogram  \  l>r.  may  represent  both  remember  and 
remembered,  /\  represent  and  represented.  When  the 
writer  thinks  that  possibly  kitiikr  tense  might  be 
read,  the  sign  of  the  past  tense,  d,  may  be  added  sepa- 
rately, or  the  word  may  be  written  in  full;   thus.    — I    or 

<__/v  glorified.  Logograms  that  represent  the  whole 
of  the  consonants  in  a  word,  should  be  shortened  for  the 
past  tense;  as,  c —  aire.  _  cared;  ~  call,  '_  called; 
|    ><U.  p  told;  c —  equal,  =   equalled. 


128 


REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES. 


REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES. 

ARRANGED    PHONETICALLY. 


CONSONANTS 

\  1  happy,  2  up,  3  put 
\  1  happen,  2  upon 

^   1  happened 
<\  3  principle,  principal 

\  1  particular.  2  opportu- 
1  approve  |  nity. 


\  1 
\=  2 

\  2 

\2 
s  2 
\  1 


r  2 


by,  2  be,  3  to  be 
above 
been 

able,  3  belief,  believe-d 
build-ing,  able  to 
liberty,   '2  member,  re- 
member-ed.  3number-ed 

at,  2  it,  3  out 

itself 

at  all,  2  tell,  3  till 

told,  till  it 

truth,  3  true 

i ried,  '-2  toward,  trade 

out  of 


J  1 


had,  2  do,  3  different 
did  [-ence 

advantage,  ■'>  difficult 

done,  :!  down 

had  not,  do  not,  don't. 

•2  did  not 
Dr.,  2  dear,  3  during 
deliver-ed-y 
niiicli,  2  winch.  3  eai  h 
which  have 
child 

chair,  :'.  cheer 


large 

religious 

general-ly,  3  religion 

gentleman,  2  gentlemen 

larger 

generation 


-  1  can,  2  come 

1  quite,  2  could 
3  1  because 

1  cannot,  2  account 

1  call,  2  equably 

1  called.  2  cold,  equalled 

1  Christian.  Christianity. 
2  care 

1  according,according  to, 
cart.  2  cared 


go,  ago,  2  give-n 
God,  2  good 
glory,  glorify-ied 

gold' 

guard,  2  great 


1  half,  2  if 
1  alter.  2  if  it 

1  often,  2  Phonography 

2  for 

from 

have 

heaven 

over,  2  ever-y 

very,  3  however 

evil 


3 

1 
I 

3 
2 


thank-ed,  2  think 
thought  [3  you!  h 

through 

third" 


though,  thy.  'J  them, 
that.  2  without        [they 
those,    thyself,    2   this, 

::  thus,  these,  youths 
t  hemselves 
within 
other 

there,  their,  they  are 
therefore 


REPORTING    (MtAMMALOGUES. 


129 


0 

1 

) 

2 

ol 

0 

2 

\ 

2 

•\ 

o 

1 

2 

o— 

1 

o_ 

1 

L2 

o.     1 


lias,  as,  2  his,  is 

so,  us,  3  see,  use  (mottfa  | 

as  is  this,  or  has),  has 

his,  -J  is  as,  {or  his),  his  is 

first 

special-ly,  3  speak 

spirit 

strength 

Scripture ;  a-  2  secret 

signify-ied,  significant 

several,  Saviour   [-ance 

scut  ;  q,   2  send 
2  somewhat 

2  was,  3  whose, use  (verb) 
2~ 
3 
1 


1  in,  any,  2no,  know,  3  own 

~  1  not,  2  nature 

w  1  hand,  2  under 

-'■'  1  information,  2  nation 
v-p  1  influence 
--»  2  opinion 
=-^  1  nor,  2  near 

_    I  language,  owino-, 
2  thing,  3  young 

f  3  Lord 

1  light,  2  let 


r 


sliali,  sliall,  :J  wish 

sure 

short 


j  2  usual-ly ;    )  2  pleasure 


1  me,  my,  2  him,  may. 
1  might,  met,  2  meet-ing 
1  myself,  2  himself 
1  most,  2  must 
1  important-ance,  2   iui- 
prove-ed-ment. 

1  impossible,  2  improve- 

ments 

2  may  not,  amount 

- 1  more,  remark-ed, 
2  Mr.  mere 


"M 
^2 

■>  1 

->  1 


or,  2  your,  3  year 
are,  3  our,  hour 
art 

yard,  2  word 


cS  2  we,  way,  away 
"  2  wait,  weight 
</*  2  one 

^  1  want,  2  went,  won't 
C  2  will,  well 


whether,  3  whither 
while 


^2 

„^2 


ye ;  <r  2  yet 
yes 


/  1 
^2 


high 

holy 
house 


Vowels. 

Dots,    a,  an,  •  the,   ah!  .  aye,  eh? 

N  I  / 

Dashes.       of,       on,       and 

\        i  / 

all,     (>,  OD  !    OWe,     awe,   onghl 

x  fro,    i  but,    /  should 

\  two,  loo,  i  he.  ,  who 

When  I  he  and  I  did  follow  each 
other,  vocalize  I  Sid, 

9 


Diphthongs. 

t  *  L 

I.     eve,     ay,    ,\    how,     why, 

With,    c    When,     what,    ;>  would, 

beyond,    n  you. 


In  I'hraseopraphy  mi,  'ind  (written 
upward  i.  hui,  are  used  ouly  Initially, 
and  medial,  is,  -  or 


130 


REPORTING   GRAMMALOGUES. 


REPORTING   GRAMMALOGUES. 


ARRANGED    ALPHABETICALLY. 


A  or  an,  *  1 
able,  bl  2 
able  to,  bid  2 
above,  bv  2 
according,  fcrt  1 
according  to,  krl  1 
account,  Tent  2 
advantage,  dr  2 
after,//  1 
ago,  q  1 
ah  !  ;  1 
all,  N  1 

amount,  mnt  2 
an,  •  ] 

and,  /  (up)  1 
any,  n  1 
approve,  prv  1 
art,  rt  (down)  1 
are,  r  (up)  2 
as,  s  (circle)  1 
as  has,  (large  cir.)  1 
as  his,  (large  cir.)  1 
as  is,  (large  cir.)  1 
at,  / 1 
at  all,  //  1 
away,  w  2 
awe,  '  1 
ay,  (ai,  yes)  /■  1 
aye,  (ever) .  2 
Be,  b  2 
because,  ks  1 
been,  bn  2 

belief,  bl  8 

believe,  bl  3 
believed,  bl  3 

bej  "nil,  n  l 
build,  bid  2 
building,  bid  2 
but,  I  2 
by,  b  1 
Call,  II  1 
called,  kid  i 
can,  /•  l 
cannot,  hat 1 
care,  kr  2 
cared,  krd  2 
curl.  /./■/  I 

chair,  <■///■  2 
cheer,  chrS 


child,  »•///</  1 
Christian  {.adj.),  kr  1 
Christianity,  kr  1 
cold,  £/d  2 
come,  k  2 
could,  jfcd  2 
Dear,  dr  2 
deliver-ed-y,  dl2 
did,  oW  2 
did  not,  dnt  2 
difference,  c/  3 
different,  d  3 
difficult,  <//■'  3 
do,  rf  2 
do  not,  (/id  1 
Doctor,  dr  1 
done,  dn  2 
down,  dn.  3 
during,  dr  3 
Each,  c/i  3 
eh?  -2 
equal-ly,  kl  2 
equalled,  //</  2 
ever-y,  vr  2  (1,  curve) 
evil,  vlZ 
eye,  v  1 

First,  st  (loop)  2 
Cor,/r2  (left  curve) 
from,//'  2  (r.  curve) 
General, ,/'//  2 
generally,  jn  2 
generation,  ,/sAn,  2 

g(  ntlcman, ,/'/*/  1 

gentlemen, ,////  2 
give-n,  f/  2 
glorified,  gl  2 

glorify,  f//2 
glory,  r//  2 

go,  r/ 1 
God,  gd  l 

gold,  gld  2 

g 1,  (jd  2 

great,  r/r/2 
guard,  prd  I 
Ibid,  (/  1 
hud  DOt,  did  1 

half,/] 

hand,  ml  1 

happen,  />/<  l 


happened,  pnd  1 
happy,  p  1 

has,  s  (circle i  1 
has  his,  (large  cir.)  1 
have,  v2 
he,  i  2 

heaven,  vn  2 
high,  h  (down)  1 
him,  in  2 
himself,  ms  2 
his,  x  (circle)  2 
his  is,  (large  cir.)  2 
holy,  A  (up)  2 
hour,  r(up)  3 
house,  hs  (up)  2 
how,  A  2 

however,  w  3  (r.  cur.) 
I,  v  l 
if,  f2 
if  it,  ft  2 

importance,  »ip  1 
important,  mp  1 
impossible,  mps  1 
improve,  mp  2 
improved,  //;/<  2 
improvement,  mp  2 
improvements,  mp«  2 
in,  n  1 

influence,  ns  l 
information,  «sA«  l 

is,  g  icircle)  2 
is  as.  (large  circle)  2 
is  bis,  (large  circle)  2 
it,  t  2 
itself,  to 8 
Know,  ii  2 
Language,  hq1  1 
large,  j  1 
larger,,/'/-  1 

let,  Ii  2 

liberty,  br  1 
light,"//  1 
Lord,/ 2 
May,  m  2 
may  not,  ?««/  2 
me,  in  1 
meet,  nd  2 
meeting,  •//</  2 
member,  lir  2 


REPORTING    GRAMMALOGUES. 


131 


mere,  m/' 2 
met,  mt  l 
might,  mt  1 
more,  mr  l 
most,  mst  1 
Mr,  mr  2 
much,  ch  1 
my,  //<  l 
myself,  ids  1 
Nation,  rc«A/a  2 
nature,  nt 2 
near,  ///•  2 
no,  n  2 
nor,  in-  1 
not,  n<  l 
number-ed,  br  3 
O,    1 
of,  n  1 

often,  fn   1 

oh,  II 

on,  i  1 

one,  an  2 

opinion,  ran  2 
opportunity,  /)//  2 
or,  r  (down  i  l 
other,  thr2 
ought,  /  1 
our,  ■;•  (up)  3 
out,  /  3 
out  of,  to  3 
over,  vr  1 
owe,  I  l 
owing,  >ig  1 
own,  ii  3 
Particular,  jtrt  1 
Phonography,./^  - 
pleasure,  zhr  2 
principal,  pr  3 
principle,  pr  3 
put,  y;  3 
Quite,  £/  1 
Religion,  jn  3 
religious,  ;g  :! 
remark  ed.  inrl 

remember,  br  2 

remembered,  &/•  2 
Saviour,  ge  '.' 
Scripture,  skr  1 


secret,  fkrt  2 
see,  «3  (stroke 
send,  gntf2 

sent,  g«.<  1 
several,  sv  2 
shall,  *//  2 
shalt,  ,?A2 
short,  >■///■/  1 
should,  '  (up)  2 
signiflcanl  ce,  sg  l 
signified,  sg  l 
signify,  ggr  1 
SO,  s  2  (stroke) 
somewhat,  smt  2 
speak,  gp  3 
specially,  ty>2 
spirit,  */«•/  2 
strength,  str  2 
sure,  gAr  3 
Tell,  «2 
thank  ed.  tli  1 
that.  tht\ 
the, .  2 
their,  $7-2 
them,  ///  2 
themselves,  thss  2 
there.////'  2 
therefore.   \ 

these.  //,,<;!  ' 
they.  ///  2 

they  are.  tin-  2 
thing,  ////  2 
think,  tii  2 
third,  tli/// 2 
this.  ths2 
ill"-.'.  ///<  1 
though,  tli  1 
thought,  th/ 1 
through,  tlw-3 
thus,  tin  3 
thy,  //i  1 
thyself,  ths  1 
till,// 3 
till  it,  tit  2 
to,  \  2 
to  be,  b  3 
told.  ////  2 
too,  \2 


toward,  /r(/  2 

tried,  /;•//  1 

true,  trS 

truth,  //•  2 

two,  \  2 

Under,  nd  2 

up,  p2 

upon,  ////  3 

us,  x2 

use  (noun),  g  3 

use  (verb),  z  3 

usually,  -//  2 

Very,  vr  2  (r.  curve) 

Wait,  ict  2 

want,  wnt  1 

was,  s  2 

way,  w  2 

we,  "•  2 

weight,  «•<  2 

well,  wl2 

went.  /'7//  2 

what,  3  1 

when,  c  2 

whether,  u 7/  2 

which,  era  2 

which  have,  cAt)  2 

while,  /c/i/  1 

whither,  irli  3 

who,  '  2 

whose,  z  3 

why,  l  l 

will.  wl2 

wish,  g/]  3 

with,  c  i 

within,  t/ui  3 

without,  /A/  2 

won't,  ir nt  2 

word,  /  //  2 

would,  '  2 

Yard,  rd  1 

ye,  y  2 

year.  /•  (down)  3 

yes,  y$  2 

yet.  ///  2 

you,  -  2 

young,  ////3 

your,  /■  (down)  2 

youth,  th3 


It  assists  in  the  reading  of  Phonography  if  the  final  vowel  of  — '■  any  be 
inserted.  Own  I  n  .  so  »a  sn  I,  young  ng),  may  be  written  okdbb  the  lixe, 
the  ends  of  the  letter  touching  the  line,  to  distinguish  these  words  from  no. 
sin,  thing.    Vocalize   ,  j  notion  lest  It  should  be  read  as  nation  or  opinion. 


132  SIGNIFICANT   MARKS.  236->:!'.t 

SIGNIFICANT    MARKS. 

236.  When  the   reporter  is  uncertain  whether  he  has 

written  the  proper  word,  not  having  heard  it  distinctly, 
he  should  draw  a  circle  round  the  word,  or  place  a  cross 
under  it.  If  a  word  has  been  lost  to  the  ear,  a  carei 
should  he  made  under  t lie  line  to  denote  the  omission. 
If  part  of  a  sentence  should  be  thus  lost,  the  same  mark 
may  lie  made,  and  a  space  left  proportioned  to  the  num- 
ber of  words  omitted. 

237.  A  perpendicular  mark  in  the  left-hand  margin 
may  be  used  to  point  out  an  important  sentence  or  para- 
graph, such  as  the  heads,  or  the  principal  points,  of  a 
speech,  lecture,  or  address.  This  reference  mark  is  use- 
ful when  a  verbatim  report  is  taken,  and  only  a  con- 
deused  report  will  lie  required. 

238.  A  quotation  known  to  the  reporter  need  not  he 
written  at  Length.  The  commencing  and  concluding 
words,  with  a  long-  dash  between,  will  be  sufficient.  The 
letters  rih  (not  heard)  in  longhand,  may  mean  that,  to 
the  extent  of  a  sentence  or  more,  the  speaker  was  not 
audible. 

239.  When  reporting  the  examination  of  witnesses, 
the  name  of  each  witness  should  form  a  fresh  head- 
ing and  he  written  in  longhand,  the  distinctive  char- 
acter of  which  increases  the  facility  of  reference  to  the 
notes.  The  name  of  the  examiner  placed  under  that  of 
the  witness  may  he  written  in  Phonography.  If  (he 
judge  or  other  person  interferes  and  asks  a  question,  the 
name  of  t  lie  interrupting  party  should  precede  the  ques- 
tion. If  lie  asks  several  questions,  his  name  need  not  he 
repeated  after  the  first ;  but  care  must  he  taken  to  inserl 
the  name  of  the  original  examiner  when  he  resumes 
his  interrogations.  When  a  document  is  put  in,  write 
"  document "  between  parentheses,  thus,  (  I _, )  When  a 

document  is  put  in  and  read,  write  [   I /] 


240-242  TRANSCRIPTION.  133 

240.  A  long  dash  may  be  employed  to  denote  the  repeti- 
tion of  certain  words,  instead  of  writing  them  every  time 
they  occur,  such  as  in  the  sentence,  "Whatsoever  things 

are  true,  honest,  just,"  etc  ,  in  Philippians  4.  8, 

which  is  repeated  six  t imes. 

241.  Signs  of  approbation,  dissent,  etc.,  interjected  by 
the  audience,  or  descriptive  of  their  feelings,  should  be 
enclosed  between  parentheses  of  a  large  size,  ..S...  7iear, 

"■^er"  hear,  hear,  _,  no,  ^_^_>  no,  no,  <i_a  sensation, 
..„?„    applause,     /    chair,    ...I.,    cheers,     /A^^     laughter, 

\s^  uproar,  ^  hisses.  In  describing  the  kind  of  ap- 
plause, laughter,  etc.,  the  adjective  is  written  last  when 
reporting.  Thus,  what  the  reporter,  when  writing  out 
his  notes,  would  describe  as  "loud  and  continued  ap- 
plause"  would   be   written  .. JS_. .^1_. L- <  in   reporting,   for 

he  will  not  know  that  the  applause  is  continued  till  it  has 

lasted  for  some  time. 

TRANSCRIPTION. 

242.  A  shorthand  writer  should  be  able  to  make  a  ver- 
batim transcript  of  his  notes  at  the  rate  of  from  20  to  30 
words  per  minute.  The  secret  of  writing  longhand 
rapidly  and  legibly  is  to  move  the  whole  hand  with  each 
stroke  of  the  pen.  Nearly  all  persons  use  the  little  finger 
as  a  fixed  prop,  and  in  forming  the  letters  move  only  the 
first  two  fingers  ami  thumb  ;  when  the  fingers  will 
stretch  no  further  the  hand  is  shifted  over  a  space  of 
from  half-an-inch  to  an  inch,  three  or  four  letters  are 
written,  and  the  hand  is  again  moved.  The  hand  thus 
makes  a  scries  of  jumps,  and,   unless  slowly  executed,   the 

writing  generally  shows  great  irregularity  in  the  distance 
and  inclination  of  the  letters.  To  write  rapidly,  and  at 
the  same  time  well,  the  arm.  hand,  and  lingers  should 
move  simultaneously.      The  middle  of  the  forearm  should 


134 


POSITIVE    AND    NEGATIVE    WORDS. 


243 


rest  lightly  on  the  table  or  desk;  and  the  hand  resting 
lightly  on  the  end  of  the  outside  edge  of  the  little  finger, 
should  glide  over  the  surface  of  the  paper  as  each  letter 
is  formed.  The  wrist  must  not  touch  either  the  paper 
or  the  desk.  The  pen  should  not,  as  a  rule,  be  lifted 
until  each  word  is  finished,  and  the  writer  should  seek  to 
acquire  such  a  command  of  hand  that  he  could,  if  need- 
ful, write  a  whole  line  of  words  (except  the  dotting  of 
i,  j)  without  taking  the  pen  off  the  paper.  By  using  a 
typewriter,  a  shorthand  writer,  provided  that  he  is  an 
expert  operator,  can  produce  his  transcript  at  a  much 
more  rapid  rate  than  by  employing  the  pen.  Still  better 
results  may  be  attained  by  dictating  notes  to  an  expert 
operator. 

POSITIVE    AND   NEGATIVE   WORDS. 

243.  Negatives  of  words  that  begin  with  /,  m,  n,  are 
distinguished  from  the  positive  by  repeating  the  first  con- 
sonant; thus, 


I 


legal 

illegal  f* 

legible  f] 

illegible  ^ 

logical      / 

/ 

illogical  i    J— 

material 

immaterial 

Words  commencing  with  r  follow  the  rule   for  upward 

and  downward   r,  without  repeating  the    first    consonant; 

as,  J  resolute,  \  irresolute;  -^  respective,  \^^  ir- 
respective; -^  resistible,  (  irresistible;  ^  °  rele- 
vant, V^°  irrelevant.  When  this  rule  cannot  be  ob- 
served, repeat?-;  as  /i    rational,  ""V*     irrational. 


moral 
immoral  ^-< 

mortal  <-~y' 
immortal 
noxious  ^\y 
innoxious  ^~7 

necessary  ^j>/ 
unnecessary  _^_cy 


EXERCISE   ON    POSITIVE   AND   NEGATIVE   WORDS.  135 


Exercise    63. 

Morality  has  been  the  subject  of  much  discussion.  The 
Moral  Laws  are  thought  by  some  to  result  from  a  natural 
sense.  They  consider  that  we  distinguish  between  right  and 
wrong  respectively  as  we  do  between  colors.  Man  would,  they 
believe,  exercise  this  faculty  irrespective  of  education  ;  its 
possession  distinguishing  rational  from  irrational  beings,  and 
those  who  are  deficient  in  it  being  necessarily  unnatural. 
Those  who  follow  this  line  of  thought,  produce  a  mass  of  evi- 
dence in  support  of  their  theory,  from  which  they  draw  many 
logical  and  relevant  conclusions.  A  second  class  of  thinkers 
aver  that  morality,  as  distinguished  from  immorality,  is  sim- 
ply that  line  of  conduct  which  the  teaching  of  ages  has  shown 
to  be  best  for  man.  They  hold  that  mortals  are  born  with 
little  or  no  innate  perception  of  right  and  wrong — that  they 
are  in  fact  naturally  immodest  and  evil — and  that  the  mora' 
sense  depends  upon  education,  and  is  independent  of  instinct, 
and  irrelevant  to  religion.  In  support  of  their  position  they 
advance  many  irrefutable  facts  and  what  appear  to  be  irre- 
sistible arguments.  They  state  that  morality  declines  as  we 
descend  the  human  scale,  that  what,  is  legal  to  savages  is  il- 
legal to  the  race  above,  and  that  the  mora!  sense  becomes  liner 
as  the  degrees  of  en  ilization  advance  and  education  becomes 
more  liberal.  Religious  and  reverent  thinkers  incline  as  a  rule 
to  the  first  line  of  thought,  and  irreligious  and  irreverent  to 
the  second,  but  many  of  the  former  may  be  said  to  be  respon- 
sible fora  position  of  their  own.  They  advance  thai  the  moral 
laws  owe  their  origin  to  Revelation,  and  that  the  moral  sense 
is  an  immortal  monitor.  These  thinkers  are  met  by  others 
who  declare  that  Revelation  is  irresponsible  lor  morality,  and 
that  the  illiterate  Ulogically  draw  the  immature  conclusion 
that,  because  certain  precepts  are  true,  the  narrative  in  which 
they  are  set  must  likewise;  be  beyond  reproach.  It  is  miner,  s- 
sary  and  immaterial  to  enter  here  into  these  questions.  Let 
us  lead  modest  and  irreproachable  lives,  and  avoid  illiberal 
aud  immoral  thoughts. 


13G 


OMISSION    OF    "CON"    AND    "  COM "    PREFIXES. 


244 


OMISSION   OF    CON  AND    COM  PREFIXES. 

244.  The  clot  for  the  prefixes  con,  com,  may  sometimes 
be  omitted  without  danger  of  illegibility.  In  the  follow- 
ing words  and  a  few  others,  the  dot  for  the  prefixes  con 
and  com  may  generally  be  omitted  with  safety. 

Combine      a 


combined 
combination  'Vj? 
commandment      ]_, 
communicate  ^_^- 

company  \ , 

comparative    \^^ 
comparatively    ^ 
complete  <\ 
compliment  '\^> 
conceive  .j?^ 
coiiccni-ing       ^ 

concerned  °i 
conclude  c_ 
conclusion    *—} 

confidence   ^ 
conjecture   / 

conscience    </^ 


J 


conscientious 
conscientiousness  <^; 

consciousness  cj_y 
consequence  rjL-o 


consequent  &, 
conservative 
consider  °j 
considered   1 
considerable     J 
consideration  % 
consist  °! 
consistence  1_p 
consistency    «— ^ 
consistent  \, 
consonant   o_~ 
consonantal  Q~y 
contemplate  L— ^ 
contemplation   L-t 
continual    <y- 
continue  l_, 

contracted    I 

contrariety  |/| 
contrary    ]/ 

convenience    V^—P 

com  enient  V>- 
conversation    V^ 


omission  of  "con"  and  "  com  "  prefixes.         137 

Exercise  64. 

In  this  age  of  political  freedom,  men  combine  with  confi- 
dence,  and  by  continual  efforts  seek  to  promote  the  object  for 
which  their  combination  is  tunned.  Jf  unable  to  meet  for 
conversation,  they  can  exchange  views,  by  means  of  the 
post,  with  comparative  ease,  and  in  comparatively  little  time 
on  the  subject  under  consideration.  After  full  contempla- 
tion, and  all  to  xh.e  contrary  having  been  urged,  they  can  come 
to  a  conclusion  concerning  any  matter  with  great  conveniens  , 
and  without  having  to  communicate  personally.  Even  when 
they  do  not  conclude  the  discussion  in  which  they  are  con- 
cerned  by  this  means,  the  consequence  is  not  serious.  Their 
leaders  have  the  consciousness  that  the  subject  is  no  longer  one 
of  conjecture,  and  to  a  conscientious  man  this  will  give  consid- 
erable pleasure.  It  would  he  well  if  all  leaders  would  do  their 
work  with,  conscientiousness,  and  remember  that  the  public 
contemplate  with  pleasure  the  consistent  and  continual  dis- 
charge of  duty.  They  should  keep  before  their  conscience, 
xaA  ever  consider  the  commandment,  "Thou  shalt  not  bear 
false  witness,"  and  only  bestow  a  compliment  where  they 
conceive  it  can  be  given  with  consistency  and  is  not  in  con- 
trariety  to  the  truth.  If  they  do  this,  in  whatever  company 
they  find  themselves,  whether  Conservative  or  Liberal,  the 
consequent  result  will  be  that  they  will  continue  to  be  consid- 
ered men  who  will  not  utter  a  convenient  falsehood,  even 
though  their  popularity  should  be  contracted.  As  our  country- 
men admire  consist,  nc,  iii  this  matter,  it  is  difficult  to  under- 
stand why  they  tolerate  an  alphabet,  the  consonant  or  conso- 
nantal pari  of  which  is  so  misleading.  An  alphabet  should 
con  sis/  of  letters  each  of  which  represen  ts  one  sound  only,  and 
should  be  &  complete  phonetic  alphabet.  Such  an  alphabet  is 
found  in  Phonography,  and  the  consequence  of  the  present 
considerable   study  of    the   art    by  all   classes   must   lead  to  a 

consciousness  of  the  convenience  <>f  an  orthographic  reform, 
consistent  with  spoken  sounds.  Continual  use  renders 
Englishmen  less  mindful  than  foreigners  of  the  contrariety 
of  the  ordinary  spelling,  hut  if  they  give  il  quiel  contempla 
/ion,  or  engage  in  conversation  about  it.  they  will  have  less 
confidence  in  the  value  of  the  presenl  alphabel  for  the  com- 
pter and  correct  representation  of  the  English  language. 


138 


INTERSECTED    WORDS. 


245 


INTERSECTED   WORDS   AND   MISCELLANEOUS 
PHRASES. 

245.  Official  titles,  names  of  public  companies,  and  any 
words  or  phrases  that  do  not  otherwise  admit  of  brief 
easily-written  forms  may  be  abbreviated  on  the  principle 
of  intersection,  that  is,  by  writing  some  one  prominent 
letter  across  another,  or  by  writing  the  words  in  juxtapo- 
sition, as  in  the  following  examples.  When  the  positions 
of  the  letters  do  not  admit  of  intersection,  the  second 
litter  is  written  under,  or  at  the  side  of,  the  first. 


Act  of  Assembly 
"     "  Congress 
Adams'  Express  Co.  U-<\ 
Agricultural  Society  <r~^~ 
American  Bank  Note  Co.  ^-^y^- 

Express  Co.  *~V- 
Assembly  Chamber   )^ 
At  owner's  risk  ^Z — 
"  sender's  risk  b^^9 — 
Bankrupt-cy  Xs     X) 
Bill  of  lading  \dl. 
Board  of  Aldermen  \s^~ 
••   Directors    ^o 
•■    Education  \j 
(  lapital  punishment  ^ 
Capt.  <  laxton  J 

'■     Reynolds  t^~^ 
< lhamberof  <  !ommerce^ 

City  and  ( 'mini  \   of 

N'\v  STork 


City,  County,  and  State 
of  New  York 


Coal  Co.,  Ltd.  _^ 

Col.  Dixon  Hl«_^ 

Company's  risk  ---~ 

Conservative  party   <X 

Custom  House     i-^ 

Delivery  ofiice   \o 

Democratic  party    |>^. 

Embankment    \    as  in 
Sea  embankment    )v-- 

Equitable  Life  Assur- 
ance Society  Ny^" 

Express  Co.      % — 

Parmer's  Loan  and     i   ,-] 
Trnsl  Co. 

<  General  Manager  ^~~) 

"       Bcofield  °^\ 

<  lerman  American  In- 

surance Co.  f~^j> 

Sigh  water  mark  ..A... 


House  of  Represent- 
atives cT^ 
Internal  revenue  """VV. 
Last  year's  report  rW 
Life  department  /^|_ 
'•     Insurance  Co.  C  ^-v_r 

Local  Government  Board  ~f~f\ 

Local  traffic  i~\ — 
Major  Jones    -g^ 
Managing  Director    ^^ 
Manager's  office 

Matter  of  form    "     ^ 
Mutual  Life  Ins.  Co. 

National  Bank  of 

Commerce  ^y^-trt 

National  Express  Co.  ^3^ 
New  York  Life 

Ins.  Co.  v_r 


ED    WORDS. 
Northern  Pacific  R.  II. 


139 


Passenger  dept.    y 
People's  party  \N 
President  of  the  U.  S.  V 
Prohibition  party     \- 
Professor  Morgan    %fS 

"       Thompson   IH^ 
Quinquennial  valuation  "-V. 
Railroad  //    as  in 

Grand  Trunk  R.  R.  *^\// 
Republican  party  /Ass> 
Senate  Chamber      / 
Stock  Exchange     / 
Union  Trust  Co.  <T^\- 
CJnited  States  of  America  f~~$~^/~ 
-     Exp.  co.  <^Sr- 
"     Senate  ..  ^ 
Vice-President  Vo 


140  THE    REPRESENTATION    OF    FIGURES.  24G-247 


THE  REPRESENTATION  OF  FIGURES.* 

240.  Many  attempts  have  been  made  to  utilise  short- 
hand alphabets  for  the  expression  of  figures,  but  there 
are  several  objections  to  this  mode  of  representation. 
In  the  first  place,  it  is  easier  to  mistake  one  shorthand 
letter  for  another  than  to  mistake  the  ordinary  figures, 
which,  being  each  composed  of  several  strokes,  are  rarely 
liable  to  clash,  and  as  great  exactitude  is  especially 
necessary  ill  dealing  with  figures,  this  is  an  important 
consideration.  In  the  ne:;t  place,  alphabetic,  shorthand 
characters  for  figures  resemble  in  appearance  the  other 
writing  surrounding  them,  while  the  ordinary  Sgures  are 
so  distinct  in  character  that  they  readily  catch  the  eye, 
and  can  be  easily  referred  to  when  necessary.  Although, 
therefore,  the  shorthand  forms  are  briefer  than  the  com- 
mon figures,  the  latter  are  more  definite  and  legible,  and 
will  be  found  far  preferable  for  reporting  purposes. 

217.  Wh'en  several  noughts  occur,  the  number  repre- 
sented by  them  should  be  expressed  in  Phonography, 
thus:  30  L  ;  M  C  \  rather  than  30,000,  44,000,000. 
"  Thousand  dollars  "  should  be  expressed  bywords,  thus: 

150    £  =  $150,000;    15      £=$1,500,000.      This   saves 

the  writing  of  the  noughts  at  the  end,  and  the  %  at 
the  beginning.  In  reporting,  the  following  shorthand 
letters,  written  in  the  third  position  close  to  the  figures, 
will  be  found  useful  :  ^_/  hundred,  or  hundredth, 
///mis, mi/,  million,  -—y  hundred  thousand  -_^-^  hun- 
dred million,  \  billion;  as  :;  (  3,000,  5  w  500,000, 
1  s  100,000,000,  :;  ,  3,000,000,  7  ^-s  700,000,000, 
1  \  I. 1,000,000. 

♦  Amore  elaborate  system  <<(  reporting  figures  fractions,  measures, 
ct..,  is  given  in  "  Technical  Reporting,"  by  T.  A.  Reed.  60  pages.  Price, 
■(Hi-.  ;  cloth,  .".or.;  n,  !„■  obtained  from  tin- publishers  of  this  work. 


248  THE    REPRESENTATION   OF   FIGURES.  141 

248.  iii  reporting  sermons,  indicate  the  Book  or  Epistle, 
Chapter,  and  Verse,  in  quotations  from  the  Scripture-. 
thus  : — Place  the  figure  for  the  Book  or  Epistle  in  the 
first  position,  for  the  Chapter  in  the  second  position,  and  for 
the  Verse  in  the  third  position  ;  thus.  Cor.  iv., ..  By  this 
met  hod  the  hook,  chapter,  and  verse  may  be  written  in  any 
order  by  means  of  the  figures  only,  and  without  danger  of 
ambiguity. 

Exercise  66. 

The  total  area  of  the  United  States  approaches  in  round  figures 
4  million  (4,000,000)  square  miles,  but  of  this  aggregate  over  55 
thousand  (55,000)  square  miles  are  covered  by  water.  Its  great- 
est length  i-  1,6  hundred  (1,600)  miles,  and  greatest  breadth  2,7 
hundred  (2,700)  mile-.  According  to  the  census  of  1889,  the 
I'"], uiation  approached  63  million  (63,000,000),  of  whom  I  be  whites 
numbered  nearly  55  million  (55,000,000)  and  the  colored  the  re- 
maining one-eighth.  The  proportion  of  the  sexes  is  32  million 
(32,000,000)  men  and  31  miUion  (31,000,000)  women.  In  a  single 
year  the  number  of  immigrants  has  been  between  4  hundred  thou- 
sand (400,000)  and  5  hundred  thousand  (500,000).  The  entire 
strength  of  the  United  States  Army  is  nearly  29  thousand  (29,000) 
men,  and  the  Navy  is  manned  by  between  8  thousand  (8,000)  and 
9  thousand  (9,000)  men. 

The  net  revenue  of  the  United  States  has  almost  reached  4  hun- 
drcd  million  ,l„ll,trs  (slUO.OOO.UOO).  In  1S92  the  net  National  Debt 
amounted  to  801  million  dollars  ($801,000,000).  There  was  an 
expenditure  for  pensions  in  1889  of  95,  6  hundred  thousand  dollars 
($95,600,000);  the  cost  of  printing  the  Congressional  Record  is 
350  tftousand  dollars  ($250,000). 

In  1890  the  mineral  products  of  the  United  States  included 
over  16  million  (16,000,000)  tons  of  iron  ore.  and  in  1892  over 
1  hundred  million  (100,000,000)  tons  of  bituminous  coal  was  pro- 

dueed,  against  over  52  million  (52,000,000)  tons  of  anthracite. 
The  value  of  American  gems  in  the  rough  state  amounted  in 
1887  to  ss.c>  hundred  dollars  ($88,600),  besides  gold  quartz  for 
specimens  and  gems,  valued  at  '•'>  thousand  dollars  ($75,000). 

There  are  over :.'  hundred  (200)  electric  railways  in  existence  in 
the  United  State-,  operating  some  2  thousand  (2,000)  cars.  In 
the  New  York  Post  Office  the  number  of  improperly  addressed 
letters  annually  dealt  with  is  over  6  hundred  thousand  (600,000), 
and  of  these  over  .">  hundred  thousand  are  corrected  and  for- 
warded. Nearly  3  hundred  million  (300,000,000)  items  of  mail 
matter  are  handled  by  carriers. 

The  minister's  text  was  taken  from  the  1  .St.  John,  1,9,10;  and 
he  referred  to  the  following  passages  of  Scripture : — Isaiah,  4'.', 
G  ;  1  John,  2,  8;  Luke,  19, 14  :  Acts,  13,  16  :  and  Romans,  8,  15. 


142 


LIST   OF   REPORTING   CONTRACTIONS. 


LIST    OF    REPORTING    CONTRACTIONS* 

(Words  marke.l  (  *  )  are  written  above  the  tine.) 

circumstantial    (\y 


1 


Administrator    \~./ 

administratrix  L~.    n 
advertise-d-ment     J 
agriculture-al* 
antagonist-ic-ism* 
applicab]fity  \ — 
appointment*  ^ 
arbitration     *| 
aristocratic-acy 
archbishop         ^ 
assemhlj,"1    )-^ 
astonish-ed-ment*  < — 
a  t '/', M  ment    L 

bapti^fm  \ 

l>el]eVole||,',,.    Vi 

i  ant  x 

l>enignity   \_ — 

( labinet     \ 
Calvinism      V_ 
capable    ~\ 
<  laptain* 
celestial  f° 
!•<  rtincate  oa 
characteri  si  ic* 
circumstance  / 


commercial*  ~~ 

constitution-al  J 

construction  \j 

contentment  l, 

contingency       L^ 

conti'oversy-sial     J 

covenant      V_ 

cross-examine-d      \  ( 
cross-examinatif  >n  ) 

December  J-^ 

defendant     y 

deficiency   \y 

degeneration  J 

democrat       U< — 

description  I — 
dignif£-fied  L_ 
disappointment  1^ 
discharge    X 

disillterested-liess 
displeasure  I 

dissimilar  J-s 
distinguish-ed   fc— ' 
Ecclesiastic-al  ^^ 
efficient-cy  V_y 


it 


*  The  student  «ill  find  in  "Technical  Reporting,"  60  pages  of  Pbooo- 
graphii  \  I  breviations  for  words  and  phrases  commonly  met  with  in  report- 
ing Legal,  s.  ientific,  and  other  Technical  bubjecis. 


LIST    OF    REPORTING    CONTRACTIONS. 


143 


entertainment   T-, 
entlmsiasm-ast-ast  ic 
episcopal-ian 
esquire       ) 
evangelical 

example* 
exchequer  ~f 
executor  — / 
executrix       „  n 
expenditure  — S 
expensive  ~ \ 
extemporaneous  ~U^ 
extinguish       [_, 
extraordinary  1^ 

extravagant-ance  ~~\ 
Familiar-ity 
financial 
friendship    J? 
Generalization        J 
Henceforth    Z^^. 
holiness  /^ 
Imperfect-ion 
impracticable* 
impregnable 
imperturbable 
improbable 
incapable 


^ 


\ 


*=> 


inconsiderate      \, 
inconsistency  j 

indefatigable     S 
indenture  ^^ 
independent-ce*      ° 
indescribable  ^r- v 

indigna^  > 

indiscriminate       fc — 
indispensably    *\ 
individual* 
inefficient-ly-cy 
inform-ed 
inscribe* 
inscription* 
insignificance* 
insignificant* 
inspect-ed-tion   "~\ 
insubordinate-tion  % 

insufficient-cy  ^ — J 
intelligence     7 
intelligent  "V 

intelligible  / 
intemperance  l^s 

investment         S3 
January   (_^ 
journalism      /-^ 
jurisdiction    </ 


1 


^r 


144 

jurisprudence    </ 
Lieutenancy  ( 

Lieutenant-Col.  ( 
Magnet'/^*  ^~ 
majesty  / 

manufaeture-d 

manufacturer      "">> 

mathematic-s-al       ( 

mathematician 

mechanic-al    ' 

melancholy 

Methodism* 

metropolitan 

misdemeanor 

mortgage*    <r' — 

Non-com  m  is-  \^~f  / 
sioned  officer  )     ^^ 

noncoiiformist  V^ 

nonconformity       V_ 

Novemher    ^~V 

Objective  / 

obscurity  \ 

observation  x^ 

organize-d    \_> 

organizal  ion      ~^-e 

original         ^/ 

orthodox-y        A 


LIST   OF   REPORTING    CONTRACTIONS. 


1 


Passenger   \ 
perform|IR.e  \y\, 
perpendicular  \/\ 
perpetual-ly   X/^ 
philanthropy-ic  Vy° 
philanthropist  Vy%, 
plaintiff   ^ 
plenipotentiary    \ 
prejudice-cial  ^ 

preliminary  *V^ 
Presbyterian-ism    "N? 
preservation    V^ 
professional 
proficiency    %< 
proportion-ed       ^ 
proportionate 
Recognizance  /~ 
regeneration  ^6 
relinquish    -^ 
repugnant-ce     /^ 
resignation  / 
respectively  /\. 
responsible 
resurrection  ^^ 
revenue   /V. 
Selfish-ness       J/ 


A 


sensibij-ty  ^\ 

September  ,;^-- 

signification* 

^-> 

singular   v— — 

subscribe 

V 

subservient  Ss 

substantial 

Y. 

substitute  N> 

Bufficiency 

<u 

superscribe-d 

V- 

superscript  ioi 

v> 

suspect-ed  1 

suspicious    1 

\ 

Tabernacle 

k 

temperance 

k 

thanksgiving 

c 

k 


V 


^ 


^ 


^f 


LIST   OF   REPORTING   CONTRACTIONS.  145 

transcribe 

transcription 

transmission 

transubstantiation 

tribunal 

Unconsl  it  ut  ional 

unexampled* 

unexpected-ly 

uninnuential* 
uninteresting 

unquest  Lonable-y 
unsatisfactory     r' 
unselfish    J 
unsubstantial  V~JS> 
Wondi  rt'ul-ly  c^° 

In  words  ending  in  -action,  -ection,  etc.,  omit  h  when 
the  outline  thus  obtained  is  a  convenient  torin,  and 
docs  nnt  interfere  with  any  other  ..inline.  In  words 
ending  in  tive,  the  t  and  /,  can  both  be  emitted,  thus: 
subjective  (adding  the  »  hook  after  the  italic  letter, 
abstractive,  architective,  circumspective,  destructive, 
intro</uctive,  irrespective,  obstructive,  productive,  per- 
spective, prospective,  protractive,  respective,  restrictive, 
retrospective.  In  other  cases  omit  the  syllable  -tivt  : 
as,  defective  {>\(  k),  prerogativi  (pr  r  g).  When  str 
follows  mn,  it  may  be  written  thus,  i  ministry, 
L   administrate,    i-^    demonstrate. 


146  exercise  on  reporting  contractions. 

Exercise  67. 

It  is  unquestionably  a  characteristic  of  modern  journalism, 
and  an  indispensable  condition  of  success,  that  every  notable 
circumstance  which  happens  in  the  commercial,  the  aristo- 
cratic, the  financial,  and  the  professional  world,  should  be 
reported  in  a  circumstantial,  sensible,  and  intelligible  manner, 
and  at  a  length  proportionate  to  its  importance.  A  mere 
generalization  will  not  suffice.  The  political  department  of 
a  newspaper  must  contain  intelligence  relating  perhaps  to  the 
construction  of  a  new  Cabinet,  the  unexpected,  resignation  of 
one  of  its  members,  and  the  chances  some  other  statesman 
may  have  of  an  appointment  in  the  ministry  as  a  substitute, 
and  of  thus  obtaining  recognisance  of  his  services  and  a  sub- 
stantial political  reward.  The  newspaper  must  give  an 
intelligent  description  of  the  movements  of  our  plenipoten- 
tiaries abroad  and  distinguished  individuals  at  home  (includ- 
ing  those  of  Eer  Majesty,  our  constitutional  sovereign),  and 
prominent  members  of  our  aristocracy.  Every  political  con- 
troversy must  be  touched  upon  with  dignity.  The  condition 
of  the  national  excJiequer,  the  slate  of  the  revenue  and  ex- 
penditure, must  each  respectively  be  matters  of  observation. 
Extravagance  or  inefficiency  in  any  public  department  must 
be  exposed,  and    the    writer   should    </<  inonst rate   that    lie   is 

famihar with  the  topics  he  treats  upon.  If  an  imperfection, 
deficiency  in  the  accounts,  insujficu  ncy  of  funds,  or  any  other 
unconstitutional  ana.  unsatisfactory  feature  in  a  democratic 

Or  any    political   onja  nidation    is    detected,  which    renders   it, 

incapable  of  <.///V/i  rci  work,  it.  is  an  indispt  usable  and  unques- 
tionable duty  of  the  editor  to  discharge  his  responsible  duty 

and    inform    his    readers    in    a    disinterested   and    independent 

manner  of  it,  qoI  seeking  to  distinguish  himself,  but  needless 
whether  he  provokes  the  antagonism  and  displeasure  of  the 
democracy  or  not.  His  disinterestedness  and  indept  nrf,  nee 
will  unquestionably  seldom  go  unrewarded. 

Ecclesiastical  matters  should  no!  be  ignored  in  a  news- 
paper. When  such  a  contingency  occurs  as  the  death  of  an 
t pise,, p<ilian  archbishop,  the  claims  to  the  vacanl  appoint- 
ni,  ni  of  a  dignified  ana  capable  ecclesiastic,  noted  Eor  Ins  mm 
periurbable  i><  nignity,  and  likely  to  dignify  the  office  and 
always  ad  in  a  benignant  manner,  may  justly  '»•  urged. 
CoftfrMJtffw'aJ  subjects-  such.  Cor  trample,  as  the  differences 
between  Episcopalian,  Presbyterian,  Baptist,  and  other  iV^- 
conformist  and  Evangelical  Churches,  on  Mich  almost  w/r- 

eerilialili    points   as    baptism,    transubstantiation,    atom  mint. 


EXERCISE   OX   REPORTING    CONTRACTIONS.  117 

the  resurrection  of  the  material  body,  regeneration,  original 

sin.  what,  is  or  is  not  antagonistic  to  orthodoxy  and  holiness, 
tlic  transmission  of  sin.  national  degeneration,  and  similar 
subjects,  are  besl  Lefl  alone  in  newspapers,  whose  writers 
generallj  have  nol  sufficient  familarity  with  these  matters  to 
treat  them  with  efficiency.  It  is  improbabU  thai  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  celestial  regions  would  be  assisted  by  such  discus- 
sions. Calvinism,  Methodism,  Presbyterianism,  and  nearly 
all  kinds  of  Nonconformity  have  done  good,  ami  it  is  melan- 
choly work  to  encourage  jn  rp.  hml  wrangles  on  Christian 
doctrines.  Such  conduct  is  almost  a  misdemeanor,  and 
must  be  antagonistic,  unsatisfactory,  repugnant,  ami  pri  ju- 
dicial to  veal  orthodox  religion.  The  press  should  lie  inca 
pabl  of  it;  it  should  rather  seek  to  organize  schemes  which 
will  cause  the  different  sects  to  relinquish  insignificant  con- 
troversy of  this  kind,  and  axsembl  together  in  unselfish 
friendship  and  contentment.  If  tin-  unity  and  Christian 
enthusiasm  could  lie  broughl  about,  many  good  and  benevo- 
I  ni  objects,  such  as  i  he  promotion  of  temperance,  the  aboli- 
tion of  selfishness  and  intemperance,  the  adoption  of  arbitra- 
tion for  settling  international  disputes,  and  other  similar 
schemes  of  Christian  benevolence,  which  many  think  at  pres- 
sent  impracticable,  would  soon  be  found  easy  of  attainment, 
and  those  who  advocate  them  would  not  lie  looked  upon  as 
solitary  enthusiasts,  many  persons  would  soon  become  equally 
enthusiastic.  Many  a  Christian  philanthropist  would  he 
encouraged  to  greater  efforts  in  philanthropy  if  the  press 
took  notice  of  and  gave  a  kindly  word  to  Ins  self-denj  ing  ami 
philanthropic  efforts;  it  is  wrong  to  ignore  work  of  this  kind. 
Military  intelligence  claims  notice  in  the  newspaper.  In- 
subordination of  a  singular,  extraordinary,  unexampled,  and 
un  xpected  kind,  which  it  is  necessary  to  extinguish,  is  sus 
ju  di  d  in  the  army.  The  editor  is  inform^  '/that  the  tribunal 
before  which  the  insubordinate  was  tried,  acted  in  an  indis 
criminatt  manner;  t  hey  asst  mbled  together  with  closed  door-, 
and  the  facts  of  the  case  are  veiled  in  oils,- ii ri/i/.  Me  thinks 
the  reasons  for  this  secret  military  jurisdiction  are  insufficient 
and  unsubstantial,  and  believing  a  report  would  no1  he 
repugnant  or  uninteresting  to  those  who  subscribe  to  or 
advertise  in  Ids  paper,  his  preliminary  step  is  to  send  a 
reporter,  of  whose  proficiency  for  the  task  he  ha-  no  doubt, 
to  interview  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  or  Captain  of  the  regi- 
ment. The  officers  may  he  selfish,  inconsiderate,  &n6  sus- 
picious pei-sons. who  though  they  have  no  substantial  grounds 
to  suspect  the  reporter,  nevertheless  do  so.  and  to  his  aston- 


14S        EXERCISE  OH  REPORTING  CONTRACTIONS. 

ishment,  refuse  him  any  information.  Their  reticence  is 
impregnable.  The  reporter  is  naturally  indignant,  and  feels 
the  disappointment  keenly:  his  sensibility  is  injured;  but,  if 
he  is  indefatigable,  in  his  calling,  he  must  control  his  indig- 
nation and  make  his  pride  subservient  to  his  judgment.  He 
will  perhaps  discover  an  uninfluential  personage — ^non-com- 
missioned officer  perchance — and  cross-examine  and  take  down 
in  shorthand  all  the  substantial  lints  he  can  glean  from  his 
cross-<  .lamination.  He  must  then  transcribe  all  that  is 
applicable,  and  send  his  transcription  by  the  post-office  tele 
graph  fco  the  office  of  his  paper.  Of  course  this  is  expensive, 
but  it  is  an  investment  which  pays.  The  presi  rvation  < > !'  the 
independence  of  a  uewspaper  should  be  studied,  and  nothing 
antagonistic  allowed  to  prejudice  it.  Incidents  not  very  dis- 
similar to  the  one  we  Save  just  related,  occur  nearly  every 
month  of  the  year — from  January  to  December.  In  fact, 
last  September  ox  November,  one  something  like  ittookplace, 
but  our  readers  will  not  be  astonished  it  we  inform  them  that 
a,  large  proportion  are  hushed  up.  Military  officials  are  fre- 
quently jealous  of  what,  they  consider  their  prerogative;  they 
seem  to  fancy  that  the  publication  of  reports  of  their  pro- 
ceedings might  be  introductive  of  results  which  would  prove 
destructive    to  discipline;   consequently,   they  evince   their 

repugnance     by    putting    every    obstruction     possible    in    the 

way  of  reporters. 

It  will  astonish  most  | pie  to  learn  that  the  London  news- 
paper press,  which  usually  reports  every  dramatic  performance 
and  musical  entertainment,  imperfect  and  trivial  though  it  be, 
and  sometimes  even  reports  lectures  on  magnetism,  seems  to 
consider  pulpit  discourses  as  of  such  insignificance  that  to 
notice  them  would  be  an  unpopular  feature.  This  is  an  incon- 
sisti  ncy,  I  he  signification  of  which  it  isdifficull  to  understand. 
One  is  almost  led  to  think  that  journalists   have  entered  into 

an  organ!  ed  covenant  that  religious  services  shall  not  be 
advertised  h\  them.  The  late  Mr.  Spurgeon  had  great  mag- 
netic power  over  his  congregation,  but  even  his  extemporaneous 
ermons,  delivered  ai  I  lie  Metropolitan  Tabernacle,  YfereineM- 
ciently  reported.     The  decorations  at  Harvest  Thanksgiving 

Services   sometimes    have   but    a.   line   or  two  given  to  them. 

Henceforth,  however, wo  hope  this  will  be  altered,  and  so  much 

inefficiency  will  not  lie  exhibited  in  this  respect.      In  America 

reports  of  religious  matters  are  verj  far  from  being  defective, 

and   adrertisi  n/cuts  of   religious  services  frequently  appear  in 

i  he  columns  of  newspapers. 

Tin'  press   frequently  performs  g I  service  both  to  the 


249  EXERCISE  ON   REPORTING   CONTRACTIONS.  149 

manufacturt  r  and  the  mechanic  by  directing  their  attention 
to  the  progress  and  applicability  of  mechanical  skill  as  applied 
to  new  and  wonderfully  manufactured  goods,  of  late  years 
there  has  been  a  perpetual  increase  in  the  manufacture  of 
machinery  employed  in  agriculture,  as  one  may  sec  if  he  will 
inspect  the  exhibits  a1  agricultural  shows.  The  mathematic 
exactness  of  the  different  parts  of  some  machines  is  wonder- 
ful. An  inspection  of  them  shows  that  the  designers  must 
have  been  good  mathematicians;  their  work  is  a  good  cer 
tificateoi  the  sufficiency  of  their  mathematical  knowledge,  for 
persons  not  well  up  in  mathematics  generally  produce  ill  pro- 
l>t>rtii>>it(l  and  inefficient  machinery.  It.  is  not  an  extravagant 
statement  to  say  that  such  men  could  raise  a  considerable 
mortgage  on  their  brains. 

Jurisprudence  also  claims  attention  in  our  newspapers. 
Curious  cases  are  somet  imes  reported.  Some  time  ago,  Thomas 
Jones.  Esquire,  who  a1  one  time  filled  a  lieutenancy  in  the 
navy,  died;  he  had  bequeathed  his  property  to  a  distanl  rela- 
tive, a  clerk  in  the  passenger  department  of  a  railway  com- 
pany. An  executor  or  executrix  was  appointed  to  carry  out 
the  provisions  of  the  will,  and  the  indenture  seemed  valid 
An  antagonist,  however,  unexpectedly  appeared ;  an  action  at 

law  was  brought  by  one  of  the  other  relatives  of  t  he  deceased 
gentleman,  who  contended  that  the  will  was  not  properly 
inscribed  and  superscribed ;  it  was  clear,  too.  that  tne  testa- 
tor did  not  understand  the  objectivi  case.  The  superscription 
was  particularly  faulty.  The  plaintiff  was  severely  cross- 
exammed  bj    the  defendant,  but  the  Court  gave  judgment 

that  the  document  was  not  legally  executed,  and  appointed  an 

administrator  or  administratrix  to  take  chargeof  the  prop- 
erty in  dispute. 

One  of  our  public  buildings  inclines  considerably  from  the 
perpendicular.     Tins  is  noticeable  to  everyone  who  looks  up 

to  read  the  inscription  over  it. 

COMPOUNDS  OF  HERE,    THERE,    WHERE. 

2  L9.   Write  the  com  pound  words,  fa  re,  tfa  re,  wht  re,  joined 
to  at,  i",  of,        with,        in.       on,      thus: 

Here      -^  ^        -^       ^     -V 

There      J  ?  'I         v  ^        D 

Where  lS[       o^       ^V     (  A    </       c/° 


150 


LIST   OF   GENERAL    PHRASEOGRAMS. 


250 


LIST   OF    GENERAL    PHRASEOGRAMS. 

250.  The  following  list,  though  extensive  enough  for 
ordinary  reporting,  is  merely  suggestive,  not  exhaustive. 
Additional  phrases — the  list  being  extended  to  above 
two  thousand —are  given  in  the  ''Phonographic  Phrase 
Book  "  (30c.)  The  student  should  endeavor  to  grasp 
the  principle  of  uniting  words  which  will  admit  of  easy 
recognition  by  the  reader,  rather  than  endeavor  to 
commit  phrases  to  memory.  Thus,  the  contraction  for 
rather  (r  r),  ending  with  the  hook  n,  represents  rather 
than,  omitting  the  first  consonant  of  than  (th).  This 
phrase  will  naturally  lead  him  to  adopt  >  more  than, 
<s_3  sooner  than,  etc.  The  first  word  in  a  phrase  must 
occupy   its  own   position,   and  unimportant  words,  such 

as  the,  of,  or,  etc.,  may  1 mitted:  thus  t  on  {the)  other 

hand,  ',,  for  (the)  sake  (of),  s-*"*''  in  (the)  way  (of ) 
V)  two  (<</■)  three,  — ■=_,  again  (and)  again,  p„.  side  (by) 
side,  ^  on  (the)  part  (of),  \  fact  (to)  face ;  and  words 
m;i_\  be  contracted;  thus,  \^~^  Prime  Minister, 
\  in  ij  brethren. 

> 


ABLE  to  make  S 
ABOVE  the  V 

Absolute!}  neces  ■  >  r  \ 


ALL  its  1, 

all  its  bearings  \, — p 

all  lien 

all  i hat  has  been    \ 

all  that   is  said     X 
all  that   is  to  be      ^ 
all  t  hat   yon  call    *> — 


all  tl 

all  these    (, 

all  i  imes    l-o 
all  j our  own       i 

f\7>all     A 
and  as  if     "V 

ami  believe    \ 

and  complained    $r 

ami  composed    X> 
ami  have  been    ^^ 


LIST  OF   GENERAL 

and  have  done      X 

and  have  their    v^^ 

and  in 

and  is  not 

and  need  not  ~^ 

and  never         V 

and  that 

and  the 

and  the  contrary     y 

and  the  present     n^, 

A  S  far  as  ^-—^ 

as  good  us 

as  if  there  .X^. 

as  long  as  (^> 

as  man;  as  possible 

as  mucli  as 

as  soon  as    ^-p 

as  soon  as  possible        <^ 

as  the 

as  to  


PHRASEOGE  LMS. 


151 


AT  hunt    I    -  (In  at  Jr»s/  in- 
sort  the  vowel.) 

at  their    Jv- 
at  the  present  day   -Kqv 
at  some  time  ?XZ>. 
because,  it  is      {, 
BY  means  of  ._^_ 


by  them     ^ 

1  >y  which  they  are  "-?'•" 

C. ,        e  T         j  P     (and  so  with 

ity  of  London^  othel.  places) 

COMMON-PLACE  *""%. 

DAY  after  day  || 

from  day  to  day  ||   (and  so 

with  other  similar  phrases  thai 
admit  of  being  Urns  written.) 

FOR  ever  V 

for  liis    Vo 

for  his  own  sake       V_p_ 

for  instance    Nj; 

for  my  own  part 

for  the    S 

for  the  most  pari 

for  the  purpose  of     \,/\ 

for  the  sake  of    Va 

for  this  reason     \   a, 
free  trade      >| 
free  t  rader     >j 

freedom  of  t  rade    c>v~y) 
FROM  me  or  my   °V^    (In 

from  him  insert  the  vowel  of  him.) 

from  the   ^V 

great  deal  <ry^ 
great  extent  ef 
great  many    c-^*-' 


152  UST   OF   GENERAL 

HA  YE  had    ^j 

have  not  V^ 

having  regard  to  the  v^p 

HE  has  been     k 

he  is  (or  has)  not  L. 

be  would  no  doubt  ^       (Al- 

ways  join  the  vowel  in  no  doubt, 
to  keep  it  distinct  from  indeed.) 

bon.  gentleman    "S/ 

honorable  member  C_J\ 

hon.  and  learned  member 

hon.  member  for  Bristol 

House  of  Commons  <f~~ 
House  of  Lords  <j^° 
House  of  Parliament  </\ 
HOWare   >/ 
how  could  you    ^ 
bow  many  of  such    *«— ^» 
how  must   /v-i 
how  will  they   H  ( 

/admit       i. 

I  am  glad 

I  i ertain  that  you  are  ^° in/" 

I  ;i in  inclined  toi  bint 
I  am  very  glad 
I  believe  ..^.. 

I  <  .m 


piikase(h,i;a.ms. 


cannot  do    | 
dare  say     V) 
did  not      i 
expect  ^\ 
fear  you  will  have 

fear  you  will  think  me 

go 

had  ...]... 

had  not 

have  been    V. 

have  been  told    ^\ 

have  done     S 

have  bad  many 

have  indeed 

have  said    \" 

have  suggested     V 

hope     \ 

hope  you  are      v/ 

„    you  are  satisfied   ^^\ 

hope  you  will     v/ 

know  that  you  may 

know  they  will       \j^ 

may  (or  am) 

may  as  well 

may  be  told  that        ^ 

may  not  be      \ 

may  perhaps  be 


LIST   OF   GENERAL   PHRASEOGRAMS. 

if  those  who  can   V 


153 


I  must  be  v"*\ 
I  must  see  ) 
income-tax 

I  need  not 

I  need  not  point  out 

I  never        V. 

I  shall     y 

I  shall  be    s{ 

I  shall  esteem     ^ 

I  shall  not    2 

I  think    X 

I  think  it  is  impossible    ] 

I  think  so       \ 

I  think  there  is    1 

I  think  there  will 

I  will    ^ 

I  will  not  be  .._„>.. 

I  will  say 

I  will  try     ^ 

I  wish  it    y 

I  wish  there   _y 

IF  ever       \- 

if  it  is  said    ^> 

if  it  be  not  v^ 

if  such      \o 

if  that  V^ 

if  the    V^ 


V 


if  there  is  V^ 
if  t  here  is  to  be 


^A^So 


X> 


V^ 


IN  any 
n  all 

n  all  respects 
n  all  their        ) 
nasmuch  as     I 
n  comparison  with 
n  consequence  of 
n  fact 
n  its       1, 
n  like  manner 
n  my 

n  my  opinion 
n  order  to 
n  proportion 

11  reference  tn 

n  regard  to 

n  relation  to     0 
n  respect  to  "\ 
n  so  many 
nsomueli  as 
n  such    V 
d  such  a  manner  as  ^7^ 
n  support  of     ~^ 
in  the  first 


154  LIST   OF   GENERAL 

n  the  first  instance 
n  tlic  first  place     ~^° 
n  the  main 

n  the  next  place       ^n> 
n  the  second  place  *""  ^\> 
n  the  third  place      £ 
n  the  last  place    <T 
n  the  same 
n  their 

n  this  country       \^y 
n  this  instance      '"--p 
n  this  neighborhood     Vi_^ 
ntothe      1 

n  which  it  has  appeared    \^ 
IS  to  ^ 

is  t  lie    fi 

IT  can    L 
it  could  not  lie 

il  has  I n    ^ 

it,  has  been  suggested 

it  is  impossible    J-» 

it  i:  many    \-~~~s 

it  i    must  certainly   ,\-/y 

it  is  most  important  that     I   <— 

it,  is  my  opinion    d~^> 
it  is  necessarj  I  hat    \<_iy< 


\ 


PHRASEOGRAMS. 

it  is  no     L^ 

it  is  not  so     U 

il  is  quite  certain  that  you  should 

it  is  surely     \  ™~~t* 

it  is  said  that  P 

it  is  well  known    a^ 

it  may    U-s 

it  seems  impossible    &-rrb 

it  seems  to  me    cK>^~, 

it  would  not   [_, 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen  (jo 

mber  of  Parliament   *\\ /-" 

more  and  more 

my  dear  sir      X 

my  dear  sister       A 

my  fellow  eiti/ens        N» 

my  own  opinion 

of  course  it  is        h, 

,,  ,,  it  is  1 1 < > t  expected  I 

Of  course  t  hey   will    S  ~V 
of  course  it  will  not  lie      <s\ 
of  his 
of  importance 

of  it       I 

of  it     own  ]., 

of  life 


LIST   OK  GENERAL 

of  many  of  them      ^( 
of  sm-li  as  have  6 

of  then  I     ( 

of  this     (, 

of  this  subject  t 

of  which    / 

of  which  it  has  been     °\ 
of  which  it  must  be  ;~x 

of  which  you  will    Jf~ 

ON  account  of  their     ) 

on  his  own 
on  my  pari 

on  the 

on  the  Committee   | 

on  the  contrary  1/ 

on  the  otlicr  hand    « 

on  the  present   \^ 

on  the  part  of   ^ 

on  their  own    ,) 

on  this  account  C, 

on  this  point    L 

Parliamentary  Committee       V| 

peculiar  circumstances 

„      „    of  the  case  ^~f  n 
per  annum  \/^~ 
per  cent   N/^ 


PIIRASEofiRAMS. 


point  of  view     ^ 
political  economy  =- 


155 


present  circumstances     j¥ 
present  state  %-p 
Prime  Minister  ^V-^? 
Secretary  of  State   ^' 
SHALL  he    ^ 
shall  have     ^ 

SHOULD  be  able  to 
should  hav< 


\ 


V 


1 


( 


should  not  do    ^i 
should  mil  have  been       ■^'N. 
should  not  think  that 
should  the  ., 
should  think 
SO  as  to   ) 
so  as  to  be    1 

so  as  to  receive     )   ^ 

so  many  as    )^_p 

so  that   ) 

so  that  it  is  impossible     { 

so  the   ) 

so  there  is    j 

THAT have   V 

that  is 

that  it  may  as  well  \-^ 


156 


LIST   OF   GENERAL   PHRASEOGK  A  MS. 


that  such      f 

that  the    * 

that  they   ( 

that  which  has  heen   c/ 

„  you  will  have  no       ^-^ 

THE,  as  a  short  downstroke, 


may  be  joined  to 


After 

all 

among 

are 

as 

be 

because 

been 

being 


believe 

neither 

by 

nor 

eitlier 

not 

for 

of 

have 

Send 

if 

should 

in 

thai 

is 

think 

make 

this  is 

thus,  to 

towards 

under 

upon 

were 

when 

where 

with 

without 


even 

see 

was 

from 

so 

what 

had 

than 

whirl 

how 

there 

WOllll 

into 

1  hrough 

say 

unto 

and,  as  a  short  upstroke,  to 

Above 

at 

before 

between 

but 

(luriiif;    'say 

The  t ok  the  (   '  )  is  not   used  initially 

hi  huh;  another  word,  but  only 

u  ben  media]  or  final. 

THERE*™  V 

there  can  7 

there  could  not  be  ^-~v 

there  is    ) 

) 
there  could  no!  nave  been        \^_ 

there  is  another  fact  3 — s- 

there  isanot  her  point    ) 

„  is  jinn) her  subjecl   I 

I  here  is  ao  more  JL*^ 

there  seems  to  be    '  \ 

there  were    s^ 


there  were  some  s. 


there  would  be 


\ 


they  are  not   ") 
THOSE  who  can   k_ 
THOUGH  there  is  / 
till  it  has  been    £ 
TIME  to  time    U^ 

TO  a  great  extent    \f    (To 

may  be  joined  to  verbs  beginning 
with   m,   the  upward    I  or  r,  the 

circle  .v,  or  a  letter   of   the   kl,  ler 
series.) 

to  as  many  as  y^-s> 
to  be  able  to    \,  • 

to  be  able  to  make  \- 

to  become  -N;-^ 
to  be  saved   N^-- 
to  church     y 
to  do      ^|    / 

to  do  some!  llillg    1 

to  have   -\ 

to  it      -l 

to  love     /"V_ 

to  many  of  those  who  v  ^~7 

to  me    ^^ 

to  some  >s~^ 

to  the    > 

to  them    > 


LIST   OF 

to  think  that    ( 


to  those  that    t 

to  which    j 

to  which  yon  art  indebted 

to  y<  >n    v, 

towards  them     h 

United  Kingdom    •— 

United  States   "^ 

UPON  it  > 

upon  its  own     f 

upon  the 

vice  versa   V^ 

WASH    (> 

was  not  \ 

was  i he  ) 

WE  axe  <^ 

we  have    </\^_ 
we  may    </^~ 
we  will  <y 

li  SAT  can  be  the  reason 

what  could  be      \ 
what  could  they     ( 
what  may  not  *"'■ 
what  the 
what  were     "\ 
what  were  their       >^ 
what  were  their  reasons 


GENERAL   PHRASEOGRAMS.  157 

WHEN  the   y 
when  we    k/ 
WHICH  are    l^ 

7  ^         which  are  necessary  l^~^^ 
which  are  sufficient  ^\^ 
which  cannot  [^ 
which  has  been    <*. 
which  has  not  been  L*. 
which  have  not  [^ 
which  is  (or  has)    ( 
w  hich  is  (or  has)  not 

which  is  now    [ 

,,  must  not  be  considered  A- o--v 
which  receive  /-\_ 
which  was     \ 
which  were 

which  were  certainly  ^%y 

which   were   likely    -w 

which  were  not   / 
which  the   . 
which  we 
which  would  be  x 

which  you  can  / 

which  you  are  1/ 
which  you  are  not  l/t 
WHO  are  ^ 
who  can   t 


158  LIST   OF   GENERAL 

who  has  been    oC 

who  have  been  £v 

who  is  6 

who  is  not  (^ 

who  may  be  «->^ 

who  will   v 

who  will  not  be  fi 

who  were    *-. 

who  would  ? 

who  would  no  doubt    J_^_ 

who  would  not  have    *-i 

who  would  not  say    -^. 

WILL  these  C\ 
will  they   C\ 

WITH  it  ] 

wit  h  its    1 

with  reference  to    .<£%>. 
with  regard  to  .£:... 
with  respect  to  *£S. 
with  respect  to  the   .£*>.. 
with  the  exception  of      :> 
wit  h  such    / 
wit  h  t hem  ( 
wit  h  them  that    ^ 

wit  h  this    ( 

w  it  h  which    / 

with  which  it  has  been  "s^ 


PHRASEOGRAMS. 

with  which  it  is  not   L 
with  which  it  must  be  -H^ 
with  which  you  may  be  ^-^ 

WOULD  he   ^ 

would  come  a 

would  do    ? 

would  have  been  L,^ 

would  have  to  be  ^^ 

would  it     P 

would  it  be    f 

would  make  them    >~^~t 

would  no  doubt    j_^ 

would  not  be  sat isfied    i 

would  not  have  said  ^h> 

would  see    \ 

would  the    y 

YOU  live    „/ 

you  are  no),  rS> 

you  n u -l it  ion    ^-^s> 

jrou  must  recollect  that     rs-g         < 

you  should    ^ 

you  were     -v. 

you  will  be  certain     /   y~ 

yon  will  be  sure  to  >/  y 

\nu  will  have  been  <  ^>. 

you  wdl  think  it      \ 


\ 


EXERCISE   ON    PHRASEOGRAPHY.  159 


EXERCISE   68. 

A  large  number  of  examples  of  the  use  of  phrases  are  fur- 
nished in  the  following  Exercise.  After  writing  the  exercise 
from  dictation,  the  student  should  compare  his  notes  with  the 
text,  in  order  lo  ascertain  what  phrases  he  has  omitted  to  em- 
ploy.    This  practice  may  be  usefully  repeated  st  veral  times. 

All-men  are  able  to-agree  on-this-point  thai  notwithstand- 
ing what  we-are  able-to-do  in-it,  life  is  short  and  transitory. 
To-be  able-to-think  and  act  aright,  it-is-absolutely-necessary 
that  men  hold  correct  views.  By  all-means  strive  to-be  useful. 
All-right  thinking  persons  in  all-states  of-life,  and  all-stations 
of  society  find  happiness  in  well-doing.  Almost  any-person 
can-be  happy  in  tli is  Life,  always-excepting  the  selfish  individ- 
ual. And-as  a  man  can  choose  for-nimself,  and-as-it-is-in- 
his  power  to  do  good  or  evil,  and  as-he-is  endowed  with  rea- 
son, he-can-be  happy  himself,  and-have-the  satisfaction  of- 
proraoting  the  happiness  of-others.  And-this-the  lives  of- 
good-men  demonstrate  :  and-this-is,  and-under-the-circum- 
stances  musl  be  a  comfortable  reflection,  and-we  should, there- 
fore, strive  as-far-as  possible  to-be  as-good-as  we-can  and  to 
benefit  as-many  of  our  fellow-beings as-we-can,  so-thai  at  last 
by-means-of-our-endeavors  we-may  leave-the  world  better- 
th:iii  we-found  it . 

It-is  foolish  to-make  false  statements,  for  even  if -we-are  for 
a  time  believed,  we-cannot-be  happy  for-fear  of-some-persons 
not-being  satisfied  and  asking  for-further-particulars.  Wheth- 
er for-great  or-small  matters  it-is  best  to-tell-the  truth  ;  who 
l'ordns-aeeount  tells  lies  will-find  in-the  end  that  it-is-not  for- 
his-advantage,  for-his  appearance  will  soon  excite  suspicion. 
For-his-own-interest,  and  for-his-own-sake  a  man  should-be 
truthful.  Most  of  us  have-seen-instances  of-this.  We-have- 
had  many-instances  of  it.  Por-example,  few  have-seen  de- 
ceit IH1  men  respected  or  regarded  for-1  heir-opinions. 

James-Smith  is  a  meek  man.  Be-has-been  always  opposed 
to  standing  armies,  and  he-would-no-doubt  abolish  the  navy. 
I  should  like  to  hear  more  from-him,  from  you.  and-from- 
your-friends  on -this  subject.    How-are-we  to  manage  without 

trained  defenders  ?  Ilow-are-we  to-prevent  invasion,  and  how- 
can-we protect  our  lives  and  homes?  Though  [-admit  the  bless- 
ings of  peace  iand-I  ha  ve-ilone-so  on  ;ill  occasions)  1-fcar  that- 
it-would-lie  rash  for-any-nation  to-throw-down  its  arms  al- 
present.    I-think-if-we-are  to  abolish  war,  and-if-such  a  thing 


160  EXERCISE    ON    PIIRASEOGRAPHY. 

is  possible,  it-must-be  brought  about  by  united  action.  If-you, 
and  your-friends  will  advocate  peaceful  measures  on  all-occa- 
sions, and-in-such-(a)-manner  as-to-bring  pressure  to  bear 
upon  representatives,  I-have-no-doubt  that  something  may-be- 
done  in-this-respect.  In-my-opinion  there-should-be  a  council 
of  nations  in-order-to  create  an  international  court  of  arbitra- 
tion, and-if-this-wefe-done  it-would-be  in-all-respects  satis- 
factory to  all-persons.  The  blessings  of  peace  would  then  be 
enjoyed  not-only  in-this-neighborhood  and-in-this-country, 
but  iii-lac!  by-the  world  al  large. 

Is-it-likely,  is-it-possible  thai  law  and  order  can  exist,  with- 
oul  taxation  ?  Is-it-the  duty  of  a  citizen  to  avoid  taxation  ? 
Is-it  thus  an  honest  man  can  act  ?  Is-not  taxation  indispen- 
sable? Is-this-not  self-evident  ?  Is-it  not  true  thai  many- 
persons  evade  taxation,  and-is-nof-llus  very  dishonest?  1-do- 
not  like-the  Income  Tax,  It-is-most-certainly  true  fchat-it-has 
objectionable  features,  and  it-is-well-known  lobe  unfairly 
levied,  [t-is-my-opinion  that-it-is-impossible  for  a  good-man 
to  evade  tliis-tax,  but  it -seeins-to-me  that  many-persons  envy 
those-who  do. 

My-Dear-Sir,  -It-is-wel)  to  Know  how  to  address  people. 
When  writing  to  a  friend,  you-should  commence  "  my-dear- 
friend  ;"  when  to  a  brother,  "my-dear-brother;"  in  address- 
ing a  married  lady  whom  you  well. know,  "  my-dear-madam  " 
is  correct.  Of-course,  a  letter  to-your-mother  always  begins 
with  "  my-dear- I  her,"  and  to  your-sister  "  my -dear-sister." 

Mj  father  was  fond  (of  the)  phrases  "  my-good -friend,"  "  my- 
good  sir,"  and  "  my-f  el  low-citizens." 

To  rid  our  language  of-its  irregular  orthography  would-be 
of-itself  a  great-blessing,  and  an  act  of  love  to-our  children. 
On-their-account  alone  some  reform  should  lie  attempted. 
<>n  this-point  l-shall-noton-the-present-occasion  enlarge,  but 
[-shall,  nevertheless,  do  mj  besl  to-proraote  this-object,  and 
shall  endeavor  to  make  converts  to  my  view,  [-shall  expect 
opposition,  but  [-shall-give  little  heed  toil  and  shall  go  as- 
far-as  I  can  in-its  support.  It  is  in  the-power  of-man  to-give 
but  a  smattering  of-many-things  In  our  elementary  schools 
on-accounl  (of  the)  time  wasted  in  acquiring  reading.  This 
was  tin'  experience  of  my  schoolmaster,  and  of-most  others. 
He  was  possessed  of  pi  rhaps  more-than  average  abilities,  mas- 
ter of -several  languages,  and-the  possessor  of -some  very  varied 
knowledge,  hut  his  spelling  was  wretched.  In  phonetic-spell- 
ing he-would  have  heard  of  somel  hing-to-his-advantage.  Of- 
iich  men  it  cannol  he  said  that  I  heir  faulty  spelling  is  due  to 
stupidity  ;  of-that  I  am  certain. 


EXERCISE   ON    PHRASEOGRAPHY.  1G1 

Protestants  should-never  forget  Queen  Elizabeth.  Catholics 
may  consider  her  to-have-been  hard  to-their  religion,  but-they 
should-nevertheless  remember  the  provocation  she-received, 
andshould-nol  entirely  condemn  her.  Her  popular  title,  "Good 
Queen  Bess,"  ought  to  convince  us  that  her  subjects  loved 
her,  should-nol  hing-else  do-so,  and  our  minds  should-only  be 
swayed  by  trust  worthy  evidence  like-tins.  Should  this  be  dis- 
puted, should  these  facts  lie  denied,  and  should-those-who 
dislike  Queen  Elizabeth  refuse  her  tin- credit  she  is  entitled  to, 
we  shouhl-i hink  it  impossible  that-such-persons  should-un- 
derstand  history.  Should-we-not  lament  this,  since-it  blinds 
their  judgment,  and-since-no-doubt  they  lead  others  astray? 

Do  what  good  you-can;  so-may  you  find  real  happiness, 
and  SO-might  countless  others.  So-must  those-who  value 
nothing  so-much-as  a  good  name,  for-t here-is  no-way  so-sure 
as-this  of  getting  one.  Other-ways  have-been  tried,  but 
always  failed.  SO- that  there-has-been  proof  (of  the)  truth  of- 
niv  statement,  indolence  has  never  made  men  happy.  So- 
w-as it  in-all-times,  so-will  it  continue,  and  so-woula  we  wish 
it  to-be.  You-will-not  find  happiness  in  indolence,  for  so- 
you-are  breaking  Nature's  law,  and so-you- must  reap  misery. 
1-am  forced  to-that  conclusion,  for-that-does-nol  seem  un- 
likely. There-have-been  some  idle  men  that-have-been  happy, 
but  that-is-Only  the  exception  to  all  t hat-has-been  given  as  a 
rule. 

Carlyle  and  Macaulay  have-shown  their  reasons  for  believ- 
ing  Cromwell  to-have-served  his  country  well,  and-I  would- 
say  fco-those-who-can  do  so,  read  these  authors  carefully.  I- 
trust  there-are-not  many  who-will  condemn  him,  and-t  hat  - 
they-are-not  influential,  ha-  there  arc-now  bitter  means  of 
judging  his  conduct.  There-are  persons  who  do-so — there- 
are-some  who  censure  him  :  but-there-are  those-who  think 
for-themselves,  and-these  see  that  Cromwell  was  a  greal 
Englishman.  To-(a)great -extent  t  here-  has  -been  misconcep- 
tion of  his  character.  There-has-uever  been  a  man  more 
maligned,  but  there-has  no-doubt  lately  been  a  change. 
There-has-now  arisen  an  eloquenl  defender  of  Cromwell  — 
there-have-been  many-such,  and-t  here-is-another  proof  that 
truth  will  come  uppermost.  L-think-there-is  as-much  cause 
to-re\ere  Cromwell's  memory  as-thai  of-many  of-our  rulers  ; 
there-is-certainly  inore-thau  for-most-of-them.  There-is- 
little  good  to-be  said  of-some  English  sovereigns;  there-is- 
much  Eor  Cromwell.  There-is  need  of  resolute  government 
sometimes,  and-there-is-never  fear  of -its  being  abused  when 
men  like  Cromwell  arc  at  the  helm.  There-is-no-doubt  of- 
this. 

n 


102  EXERCISE   ON   PHRASEOGRAPUY. 

Till-you  learned  Phonography,  you-were,  perhaps,  to-some- 
extent  ignorant  (of  the)  uses  to-which-it-may-be  turned  to- 
account  and  to-advantage.  The  time  required  to-learn-the 
system  you  thought  likely  to-amount  to-something  consider- 
able, and-the  benefits  to-be  gained  did-not  appear  enough 
to-assure-you  that-it-was  worth  the  trouble.  To-be-able-to- 
write  shorthand  you  considered  would-be  advantageous,  but 
you-could-not  bring  yourself  to-believe  you-eould  master  the 
system.  Was-not  that  so  ?  Depend  upon-it,  you-were  to- 
I dame  for  underrating  your  abilities.  We-are-certain,  for- 
we  -have-reason  to  know,  that  none  need  despair  of-success 
in-Phonography.  What-can-be-the  reason  (of  the)  great- 
sale  (of  the)  text-books  if-it-is-not-the  simplicity  (of  the) 
system  ?  Wnen-we-think  of-it.  what-could-be  more  convinc- 
ing? 

The  measures  for-the-promotion  of  temperance  which-havc 
often  been  proposed  in-the-press,  and  which-have-been 
brought,  before  Parliament,  but  which-have-not  passed,  are 
numberless.  The  compulsory  abolition  (of  the)  Liquor  Traf- 
fic is  a  remedy  which-is  vigorously  pushed  forward  by-tlie 
United-Kingdom  Alliance,  which-is-no-doubt  an  influential 
body,  and  whieh-is-not-only  desirous  of -closing  public-houses 
but  averse  to  compensating  their  owners.  Compensation  is 
a  policy  which -is-of ten  discussed,  which-is-sometimes  desig- 
nated a  robbery  (of  the)  rate  payers,  but  which  is  die  scheme 
favored  by-many  statesmen,  and  which-is-thus  entitled  to- 
consideration. 

While  systematic  obstruction  in-Parliamenl  continues, 
nothing  can-be-done.  Steps  should-be  taken  to  alter  tins, 
for  who  are-they  who  come  forward  to-waste  the  time  (of  the) 
Souse-of -Commons  ?  'they  are  nun  who-cannol  have-the 
interests  (of  the)  nation  at  heart.  Nb-one  who-has  would  act 
in-this-(man)ner.  Any  Member  who-has  offended  in-this- 
way  should-be  exposed,  and  any  elector  who-has-the  oppor- 
tunity to  vole  againsl  such  a  person  should  not  refrain  from 
using  it,  l-iriisi  parliamentary  obstruction  will  soon  cease, 
or-the  nation  will-have  few  reforms. 

Wilberforce's  biography  may-be-read  with-advantage.  In 
L788  he  commenced  his  agitation,  and-witb  each  succeeding 
year  his  convictions  with  regard  (to)the  Slave-Question  were 
strengthened.  Mr  Clarkson  with-even  an  equal  zeal  sup- 
ported Wiiberforce,  and  with  one-mind  and-with  one  consent 
fch<  |  labored  together.  Mr.  Fox's  labors  deserve  praise,  and- 
with-reference-(to)<  his  Wilberfon  e  bears  honorable  testimony. 


BUSINESS    PHRASES   AND   CONTRACTIONS, 


163 


BUSINESS  PHRASES  AND  CONTRACTIONS. 


-C 
\ 


-Vv-v 


According  to 

agreement 

account  sales 
additional  ex- 

pense 

after  due  consid- 
eration 
all  claims 

and  if  ynii  can  in- 
form  me 

as  a  matter  of 

coui  e 

as  a  matter  of  fact 
as  soon  as  ready 
al  all  events 
at  any  rate 
at  his  request 
at  your  earliest 

convenience       . 

Balance  due  ^k 

balance  sheet  N/9 

be  good  enough  ^^_i 

h'.'st  of  my  ability  N-^ 
best  quality 

bills  of  lading  N/f' 

by  goods  train  ^ 

by  his  requesl 
by  letter 
by  my  letter 


| 


by  mn  invoice 

by  passenger  N 

train 

by  telegram 

by  which  you  mil       N~ 

see  > 

by  wire 

bj  your  letter 

( iannol  account 

cannot  answer 

cannoi  say  ) 

copy  of  my  last 

letter 

Declare  a  divi- 
dend 
deliver  imme- 
diately 
directors  of  I  he 

Company 

directors'  report 

discount  for  cash 

Early  attention 

early  considera- 
te n 

early  reply 
enclosed  letter 
enclosed  please 

find 
Facts  of  the  case 

faithfully  yours 

few  Jays  ago 


h 

"VI 


^ 
V 


164 


lil  SIN]  SS    PHRASES 


financial  affairs  *~~^-s. 

first  instant  °^~£ 

for  their  interest  V_w> 
freight  train 
from  my  last  ^ — 

letter  ~~\^/^ 

from  the  enclosed  > 

letter      ^ — < — (, 

from  the  last  re-    c%  ^-ts^V 

port     V 
fully  considered        -V/— 

further  consideration  \ 

further  particulars  N^ 

({( )ods  not  to  —  - 

hand 
great  disappointment  J 

gross  receipts  c- tft 

I  am  directed  I — , 

I  am  directed  to  state 

[i utremelj  sorry     ^~" — 61     so 

I  Mm  in  receipl  of    """""tL/"' 

your  tetter        \'— ^ 

I  am  obliged  ^ 


1  am  rather  Burpri  led 

I  am  reque  >ted 
i  hi  reque  ted  to  state 
I  am  very  sorry 
I  a  m  very  1 1  »rry 

Mi  ii  you  should  think 

I  beg  to  enclose 
I  can  a  38ure  you 

I  d I   iiml. 

I  enclose  accounl 

I  enclose  cheque      *—*-p 

I  have  ii"  objection  ^— v 


AND   CONTRACTIONS. 

I  have  received 
I  have  the  honor 

I  have  to  inform  you 

I  shall  be  obliged 
I  shall  be  pleased 

I  shall  expect 
I  thank  you 
I  will  consider 
I  will  endeavor 
if  we  understand 
if  you  will  oblige 
in  consideration 
in  exchange 
in  the  course  of  a 

few  d»ys 
in  my  last  letter 

in  my  letter 

in  reply 

in  i i-|ii\  to  your  letter 

in  the  matter 
into  I  he  matter 
in  this  case 

it  gives  me  grea.1 

pleasure 
in  which  you  will  Bee 

in  your  la  .t  letter 
in  your  lei  ter 
in  your  reply 

in  your  reply  to 

nu  letter 
.lust  possible 

just  received 


BUSINESS    PHRASES 

Last  week 
Lowest  terms 


4~ 


Make  an  appoint- 
ment 

much  obliged 

my  last  letter 
ray  letter 

Necessary  ar- 
rangements 
necessary  atten- 
tion 
next  week 

no  coniinunica-         -— ^_jd 

tion  . 

Of  this  date  I 

ordinary  rates  v], 

our  West  t  hanks  /(c 

Payment  of  ac-  X^^ 

count 

postal  card  \^ 

please  note  "\^ 

Railway  companies 

registered  letter      /y 

respectfully  request  /^v/*-^ 

Satisfactory  answer  P/~^sy"^ 

some  time  ago  c^~^~ 

special  rates  "^/j, 

To  our  satisfac- 
tion <k 

Under  bill  of  sale   °-\f* 
underwriters  ^>^ 

unless  we  receive     £^\^ 


AND   CONTRACTIONS. 

We  are  confident 
we  are  in  a  position 

we  are  not  satis- 

Bed 
we  beg  to  ack- 
nowledge 

we  beg  to  call 

your  attention  ! 

we   have   received      t/\ii_ 

we  respectfully 

reque  I 
we  shall  expeel 

which  will  be  r\ 

takenintoconsideration  U 

You  are  at  liberty         k 
your  considera-  <S 

tion  b 

3  our  Bavor  > 

your  last  letter 
your  obedienl 

Servant 

yours  faithfully 
yours  obedienl  ly 

yours  respectfully 

yours  truly 


105 


vi. 


"V 


your  reply  to  my      /V-/' 

letter 

you  may  rely 
you  ina\  require 
you  may  consider 
youmust  consider 

you  will  be  sorry 
you  will  consider 


1G6  BUSINESS   LETTERS. 

BUSINESS    LETTERS.* 

Mr.  Ciias.  Anderson, 

1001  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City. 
Dear  Sir:—]  regret  that  I  am  compelled  to  return  your 
check  for  $50.00,  being  10$  on  your  application  for 
"Hecker"  Preferred.  The  applications  were  largely  in 
excess  of  the  amount  offered.  I  secured  some  in  my  own 
name  and  would  have  let  you  have  the  amount  desired, 
but  it  was  all  sold  on  Saturday.  Should  I  be  able  to  se- 
cure any,  1  shall  be  pleased  to  set  aside  live  shares  for 
you.  Thanking  you  for  past  favors, 
Yours  respect  fully, 

2. 
Mr.  John  Robb,  Altoona,  Pa. 

Dear  Sir :  Promptly  upon  receipt,  of  this  letter,  cancel 
policy  428967  Wilson  Bros.,  and  re-write  for  an  amount 
not  exceeding  $1,500.  Unless  you  can  d<>  this  and  have  a 
daily  report  in  this  office  by  Sept.  11th  the  day  insurance 
»oi's  into  force,  please  retire  us  altogether  from  the  risk, 
yours  respect  fully, 

o 

Mi:.    B.    II.   HOWLAND, 

I  is  West  69th  Sired,  New  York  city. 
Deal'  Sir :     Your  favor  of  Sept.  Mth  received,  and  we 
have  sent  you  the  cord  of  pine  and  oak  kindling  wood 

as  ordered.       In    relation    to   the    hickorj    wood,  you    may 

remember  that  yon  wrote  us  on  the  4th  of  last  January, 
asking  lis  to  put  two  cords  of  hickory  wood  in  your 
cellar  during  the  summer.  We  have  been  waiting  till  we 
commenced  to  move  our  selected  stock  from  the  country. 
The  first  shipment  we  are  hauling  to-day. 

Unless  Otherwise   advised   we  will    select   yon  two  cords 

or  more  if  you  desire,  and  put  it  in  your  cellar  this  week. 

The  price  will  be  the  same  as  last. 

V*r\    truly, 

*  For  additional  practice  the  student  is  referred  to '■  Business  Corre- 
spondence in  Shorthand,"  containing  m  tual  letters  dictated  in  Amerl 
can  offices.  Keyed  in  ordlnan  type,  and  the  matter  divided  Into  sections 
foi  testing  of  speed  in  shorthand  or  typewriting  K)  pages  in  cover. 
Pi  Ice,  80  cents. 


BUSINESS   LETTERS.  107 

4. 

Mr.  TT.  Clark,  Providence,  R.  T. 

Bear  Sir: — We  have  a  vessel  Load  of  pine  wood  here 
to-day  of  about  the  size  required  a1  your  dock.  If  you 
can  take  the  wood  which  we  are  under  contract  to  fur- 
nish you.  we  should  be  very  glad  to  deliver  it  just  now. 

The  object  of  this  letter  is  not  to  hasten  you  at  all,  but 
to  guard  against  the  possibility  that  when  you  need  wood 
we  might  have  great  difficulty  in  getting  a  vessel  small 
enough  to  come  to  your  dock.  We  will  send  the  vessel 
down  Monday  morning  if  you  desire  to  take  it.  Please 
answer  I > y  return  mail  and  oblige. 

Yours  respectfully, 

5. 
Mr.  John  Jones,  Chicago,  111. 

Pair  Sir: — Mr.  George  Adler  handed  us  your  letter  to 
him  of  the  Kith  inst.,  in  relation  to  the  claim  against  the 
Insurance  Co.  We  have  inquired  of  a  member  of  the  late 
linn  of  Crockett  &  James,  as  to  the  authority  of  Mr. 
Taylor  to  make  the  draft  for  one  hundred  dollars  in 
favor  of  the  Insurance  Co.  We  are  advised  that  the 
clerk  had  no  such  authority,  and  that  the  Insurance  Co. 
cannot  possibly  succeed  in  deducting  the  amount  from 
t  he  account  due  by  them. 

At  the  same  time  if  there  is  to  be  any  litigation  about 
the  matter,  we  prefer  to  let  ii  go.  Cur  reason  for  mak- 
ing this  statement  is.  that  the  expense  of  contesting  the 
matter  will  be  so  considerable,  thai  in  view  of  the  amount 
involved  it  will  be  hardly  worth  while  to  continue  the 
prosecution.  At  the  same  time  we  urge  you  to  make  an 
adjustment  of  the  matter  with  the  Insurance  Co.  so  that 
at  any  rate  you  will  receive  from  them  an  amount  sufficient 
to  pay  your  and  our  fees. 

Yours  respect  fully, 

6. 
Mu.  John  Brow,  Washington,  lb  C. 

Dear  Sir : —  We  have  your  endorsement  under  policy 
329767,  and  beg  you  will  have  the  kindness  to  pay  the 
/'/■<<  rtit, i  return  premium  to-morrow  and  retire  our  policy. 
We  have  this  risk  marked  to  drop  at  expiration,  and,  as 


168  BUSINESS   LETTERS. 

you  will  have  to  provide  for  it  elsewhere,  you  might  as 
well  do  it  to-morrow  as  a  few  days  later.  Please  give 
this  matter  your  prompt  attention. 

Yours  very  truly. 

7. 
Mr.  John  Louis,  1000  Broadway,  New  York  City. 

Dear  Sir  : — Enclosed  please  find  the  original  mortgage 
made  and  executed  by  John  Davis  to  you,  to  secure  the 
payment  of  the  sum  of  five  hundred  dollars,  a  copy  of 
winch  was  tins  day  filed  in  the  office  of  the  Register  of 
the  City  aud  County  of  New  York,  as  required  by  law. 
You  understand  that  the  chattel  mortgage  must  be 
renewed  within  thirty  days  previous  to  the  17th  day  of 
June,  1889,  together  with  a  statement  signed  by  you, 
showing  the  amount  that  may  lie  due  at  the  time  that 
you  renew  the  mortgage.  This  must  be  done  every  year 
until  the  mortgage  is  paid.  Kindly  acknowledge  receipt 
and  oblige,  Yours  very  truly, 

8. 
Mr.  L.  E.  Brooks,  Washington,  I).  ('. 

Dear  Sir : — Your  favor  of  .March  liith  enclosing  report 
for  week  ending  March  17th  just  received.  The  provi- 
sion in  the  contract  to  which  you  object,  was  put  there 
as  much  for  the  benefit  of  our  representatives  as  for  our 

own.  We  are  old  hook  canvassers,  and  experience  lias 
abundantly  taught  us  that  far  more  sales  can  be  made 
and  far  more  satisfactory,  if  an  agent  i>  canvassing  one 
or  two  books  than  if  he  is  canvassing  more  than  that 
number;  however,  you  can  make  the  experiment  if  you 
desire,  but  if  it  prove  a  failure,  as  it  is  almost  certain  to 
do,  we  will  have  to  repeal  t  he  old  hackneyed  phrase,  "we 
told  you  so."  Very  truly  yours, 

9. 
Mus.  Hill,  "Red  Bank,  Nr.  J. 

Dear  Madam  /—In  replj  to  your  favor  of  the  20th  inst., 
the  goods  nached    us   safely,  and    the   suits   ordered  were 

forwarded  by  express  on  the  22d  inst.  We  beg  to  say 
Ilia!  your  oiiler   for  shoes  is  rather  indefinite,  and  we  are 

unable    to   tell    exactly    the    styles   you    desire.       We   have 


BUSINESS   LETTERS.  L69 

mailed  t<>  you  under  a  separate  cover  a  copy  of  our  cata- 
logue to  which  we  refer  you  for  prices  and  description  of 

our  shoes.  Kindly  make  a  selection  of  the  styles  you 
prefer.  Trusting  this  delay  will  not  inconvenience  you, 
we  are,  Very  truly  yours, 

10. 

The  Scranton  Coal  Co.,  Scranton,  Pa.. 

Gentlemen : — Confirming  your  communication  of  this 
date,  we  would  thank  you  to  take  up  a  boat,  and  ship 
upon  our  hill  of  lading  a  cargo  of  Highland  stove  coal  to 

New  York  Condensed  Milk  Co.,  Passaic,  via  Port  Morris 
&  Harlem  R.  1!.,  for  our  account.  We  would  like  this 
coal  shipped  promptly. 

Very  t  ruly  yours, 

11. 
Mi:.  James  Quinlan, 

1246  Sixth  Avenue,  New  York  City. 
Dear  Sir:  —To  your  favor  of  the  8th  inst.,  I  would  say 
that  I  do  not  recollect  ever  having  informed  you  that  the 
property  corner  of  Third  Avenue  and  11th  Street  was  sold 
by  me  to  .lames  Rush  instead  of  to  Mrs.  Caroline  Powers. 
I  might  have  written  you  that  James  Push,  who  is  act- 
ing for  Mrs.  Powers,  who  is  at  present  in  Europe,  will 
pay  the  interest  on  the  property. 

Yours  respeel  fully, 

P.\ 
Thk  EUREKA    M  \.\ri'\<  ti  kino    Co..  Cincinnati,  0. 

Gentlemen: — Your  favor  of  the  17th  relative  to  Mr. 
James  Morrello  of  Pio  Janeiro,  to  hand  and  carefully 
noted.  Replying  to  your  inquiry  we  beg  to  state  that  we 
consider  .Mr.  Morrello  a  \er\  desirable  party  to  have  busi- 
ness with. 

Our  methods  have  been  to  ship  to  panics  in  South 
America  upon  his  order,  and  cashing  the  drafts  here  in 
New  York  and  paying  him  a  commission.  Our  dealings 
with,  him  have  extended  oxer  a  period  of  six  years,  and 
have  been  most  satisfactory.  We  should  not  hesitate  to 
extend  to  him  quite  a  large  line. 

Yours  very  truly, 


170 


I. AW    PHRASES. 


13. 

Mi:.   James  Cameron,  Albany,  1ST.  Y. 

Di  nr  Sir:  -  Referring  to  your  letters  and  telegrams,  the 
receipt  of  which  was  acknowledged  yesterday,  we  regrel 
that  we  arc  obliged  to  delay  your  advertising,  and  our 
only  reason  for  doing  so  is  that  it  seems  to  be  for  your 
advantage  that  we  should. 

The  advertisement  sent  us  occupies  considerably  more 
space  than  you  have  stipulated:  too  much  space,  in  fact, 
to  enable  us  to  cover  the  country  as  it  should  be  covered 
for  the  amount  of  your  remittance. 

If,  however,  you  decide  that  proof  No.  1  inclosed  here- 
with, is  to  be  used,  we  will  proceed  to  give  you  what  we 
consider  best  service  for  the  money,  but  we  favor  cutting 
down  the  advertisement  so  that  it  will  go  in  less  space. 
ami  suggest  copy  No.  2  as  a  substitute.  This  letter  is 
sent  under  special  delivery  stamp  and  ought  to  reach  you 
promptly.  Telegraph  us  your  desire  in  the  matter. 
Yours  very  truly, 


Act  ual  damage  „-±.hz>. 
articles  of  agreement  /- 

as  to  I  he  matters    '      b 
"  "  these  matters  Q — b 

-    ••  those       "  ^ 

Bankruptcy  ( !ourt  X 
before  him 


"       me    >e-\„ 
beneficial  estati 

"  interest 

bill  Of  sale    \  j 

breach   of  promise  of  mat 
riage  ^V-^/ 


LAW    PHRASES. 

by  t  his  act  ion        (^ 
"      "    court    Y_ 
called  for  the  defendant  ^-i 
"         "      ••    plaintilf  X 
in  his  own  behalf  '  ^-S—\J 
Centra]  Criminal  Court     Q-_^ 
Chancer]    Division    (_s>/| 
circumstantial  evidence  o  "^-v-P 
Circuit   Court     Yr- 
( 'oinmon  jury       l^ 
law     T 
( lounty  ( llerk 
C i 


County  Treasurer  J2- 
Counsel  for  the  defence       I    p 

"       '•    '•  defendant        i 

k plaintiff  — i 

■•    '•  prisoner      %_^ 

"         "     "   prosecution      '^-i 
( 'null  of  A [>peals  trA\/t' 

"      "  Bankruptcy    \ 

"      "  Chancery  1^ 
"  Claims  ^_/^i> 

"        "  Common  Pleas  <r^~^\0 

"      '•  Equity  ^ 

"  General  Sessions    7 

"      "  Justice    c/ 

"      ••  Record  J^~ 

"        ■■  Spec  inl  Sessions  <rV, 
crirainaljurisprudence       c/ 

Deed  of  sett  lenient    f 

"     '•  trusi   ', 
defendant's  tesl  imonv  \ 
aired  e\  idence  L 

"      examination   I 
District  A-ttornej 
"       Court    \ 
Ecclesiastical  ( lour!     ^ 
equity  of  redempl  ion        ~l  a 
Federal  Court   ^-i 
fee  simple        v 
fiduciary  capacity     1 


i,  \\\    nil;  \-i  <. 

final  decree  V^< 
I'm-  defendant  ^ 
"   plaintiff  \^ 

•*    t  his  action 
"      "    court  S 
( reneral  term    / 


in 


gentlemen  of  the  jury  r 

goods  and  chattels    T 

government  securities     ^    A 

gross  receipts  c-S\ 

llaheas  Corpus    c  \ — «. 

heirs,  executors,  administra- 
tors, and  assigns      *~f>  ■ 

heirs,  executors,  administra- 
tors, or  assigns      °~f*-* 

In  t  bis  action    ^\_ 

"      "    court     X- 

"  w  itnessw  hereof 

interlocutory  decree 
international  law 
interstate  commerce    I  ^-^ 
"  "        commis 

sion  i  jcr>^5 

Joint   Stock  °f 

"     company    V_ 

judicial  sale 

Justice  of  the   peace     j^ 
Last  will  and  testament     t™  •" 


172 


LAW   PHRASES. 


learned  counsel  for  the  de- 
fence  /^~/    U_p 

learned  counsel  for  the  de- 
fendant 

learned  counsel  for  the  plain- 
tiff ^~^ 

learned  counsel  for  the  pris- 
oner ^/      ^s-' 

learned  counsel  for  the  pros- 
ecution   _^     \ 

learned  judge  fl 

legal  estate  -f^~\ 

letters  of  administration  /     Pa 

letter's  patent  (     j 
letters  testamentary  (  °*/ 
Life  estate  f\a 
Malice  prepense  /^i\ 
manslaughter  ^-6 
marine  insurance  ^~y~~ 
may  it  please  t  lie  courl 
"      "      "    your  Honor  ^\ 

memorandum    of    agree- 
ments^— -a 
my  learned  friend 

Next  of  kin  v_^-^-; 
No.  sir  k_p^ 
notary  publil 
(  >f  this  aetioii     ( 


y* 


"V-. 


Of  this  agreement  {. ^ 

"      "    court     >. 

objection  sustained    2> 
offered  in  evidence  ^v 
originating  summons  /j-^ 
Party  of  the  first  part   \<? 

"         "     '•  second   " 
Patent  office 
penal  offence 
Petit  jury   ^ 
plaintiff's  case  \-i> 

"         counsel  \j^ 
"         testimony 
"         witnesses    y 
police  court  \^~ 
power  of  attorney    \/J/s~x 
preliminary  injunction  *\y'^/ 
prisoner  at  the  liar      >   v 
Probate,    Divorce,  and   Ad- 
miralty   Division      I  I       | 
Quit  claim    c^^ 
Rebutting  testimony        j 

re-cross  examination 

reversionary  interest  A 
rigid  of  way  ^/ 

Solicitor  Of  patents  C\ 

special  jury  ^ 


LAW    I'lli;  \>l  -. 


173 


summary  proceedings  s-n/V 

Supreme  Court  c\— <- 

Tax  deed   L_p 

that  this  action   4_ 

"    court   t- 
testimony    of    the    defend- 

aut     ,] —  j 

testimony     of     the     plain- 
tiff  K^ 

trust   funds     L 


Verdict  for  the  defendant  °\_^ 
"     "    plaintiff  °\ 
"     of  the  jury  ^y, 
Vice-Chancellor  Vo 
voluntary  conveyance    ^r^\r, 
Ward  of  the  court  y\. 
warrant  of  attorney  -/\/^~ 
without  prejudice  % 
wrongful  possession   /^% 
Yes,  sir  J^ 
your  Honor 


171  LEGAL   CORRESPONDENCE. 

LEGAL   CORRESPONDENCE. 

1. 
Mr.  Gr.  H.  Muller,  Lowell,  Mass. 

Dear  Sir: — Your  letter  of  July  15th  duly  received.  We 
have  not  as  yet  examined  Charles  Spencer  in  supplemen- 
tary proceedings.  We  shall,  however,  obtain  an  order 
and  cause  him  to  be  examined.  The  very  fact  that  he  is 
employed  as  an  excise  inspector,  leads  us  to  suppose  that 
the  judgment  cannot  be  collected.  We  cannot,  as  you 
undoubtedly  are  aware,  levy  upon  Ins  salary,  and  there- 
fore the  prospects  are  not  very  bright  for  a  collection. 
Very  truly  yours, 

2. 
Messrs.  E.  Brown  &  Co.,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 

Gentlemen : — As  further  consideration  for  the  execution 
by  you  of  the  agreement  with  you,  dated  this  day.  I  here- 
by promise  and  agree  to  pay  out  of  the  proceeds  of  the 
collections  of  the  outstanding  accounts;  which  will  lie 
intrusted  with  me  for  collection,  an  amount  equal  to  one- 
half  of  the  sheriff's  fees,  which  have  been  incurred  by 
reason  of  the  attachments  and  executions  issued  in  the 
actions  commenced  by  you.  Very  truly  yours, 

3. 
Mr.  II.  Hambury,  New  Fork  City. 

Dear  Sir : — Early  in  the  week  we  procured  an  order 

for  the  examination  of  Charles  Stevens,  in  supplementary 
proceedings  upon  the  judgment  obtained  by  you.  The 
order  was  returnable  this  a.m.  at   LO. 30.       We  attended  at 

the  examination,  and  after  proceeding  with  tin'  same  for 

an  hour,  Mr.  .lames  agreed  that  if  the  examination  was 
adjourned  fur  a  month,  that  he  would,  within  a  week, 
send  me  a.  check  for  $75  on  account,  and  shortly  there- 
after would  settle  tin'  judgment.  Your  Mr.  Johnson 
informed  us  thai  if  the  matter  could  be  finally  closed,  a, 
concession  would   be  made  to  Mr.  .lames  upon  the  amount 

evidenced  by  the  judgment,  ami   in  order  to   procure  a 

settlement  of  the  same,  we  communicated   that    fact  to 

him.      As  soon  as  the  check  is  received  we  will  forward  it. 

I  return  to  (own  this  a.m.,  and  have  not  as  yet  received 


LEGAL   CORRESPONDENCE.  175 

anything  bj  way  of  information  that  is  important,  in  re- 
gard to  Mr.  Smith. 

I  telephoned  this  morning  to  Judge  Gilbert,  and  lie 
answered  thai  Mr.  Smith  had  written  him  a  Letter  saying 
thai  he  was  ill,  and  asking  liim  to  come  to  the  house, 
which  he  refused  to  do.  He  further  says  that  he  expects 
to  see  him  on  Monday.  Yours  very  truly, 

4. 
Mrs.  11.  A.  Boyd,  1111  East  Street,  New  York  City. 
Dear  Madam: — The  administrator  and  administratrix 

of  the  defendant  aeknow  Ledge  the  circumstance  that  they 
have  advertised  in  a  commercial  paper  for  the  last  week 
of  December  the  goods,  chattels  and  credits  of  the  plain- 
tiff, botli  domestic  and    otherwise,  in  the  establishment 

of  tlie  deceased  individual.     The  character  of  the  g Ls 

was  altogether  satisfactory,  several  articles  naturally 
bringing  high  prices,  mid  probably  the  prospects  for  the 
heirs  of  the  deceased  are  rather  more  than  expected, 
especially  owing  to  the  essential  facts  that  the  executor 
and  executrix  will  mortgage  the  property.  The  inden- 
ture of  mortgage  will  immediately  he  executed,  and  inas- 
much as  the  architecture  is  of  the  did  Catholic  style  ami 
not  original,  will  fetch  a  good  price  and  we  have  no 
doubt  surprise  the  undersigned,  for  which  we  should  he 
thankful.  We  understand,  or  rather  understood,  that  a 
welcome  subscription  for  the  stranger  by  several  revered, 
respected  and  popular  gentlemen  is  to  he  made.  And  to 
our  knowledge  there  is  no  objection  or  reason  why  we 
ourselves  should  not  perform  some  kind  act,  the  perform- 
ance of  which  in  this  peculiar  case,  notwithstanding  the 
mistake  made  by  the  majority,  will  meet  with  greal  satis 
faction.  They  say  the  eldest  child  comes  of  age  in  Sep- 
tember.  This  subject  tou'ether  with  whatever  follow-., 
and  whenever  it  may  happen,  will  give  the  administrator 
no  trouble  in  the  regular  course  of  things. 
The    phonographer    took    phonographic    notes   at    the 

death   of    the    testator.       They    ha\e     keen     published    ill    a 

remarkable  publication  which   i-.  represented  by  a  repre- 
sentative of  the  republic.     Nevertheless  we  shall  call   a 
meeting  of  the  executors,  nothing  happening  to  the  con- 
trary, by  November,  when  everything  will  he  settled. 
Yours  respectfully, 


17(5  PRACTICAL    HINTS   IN    LEGAL    WORK. 

PRACTICAL  HINTS  IN  LEGAL   WORK.* 

HOW    A    LAWSUIT    IS    BEGUN    AND    CARKIED    ON. 

There  are  several  wordy  used  in  speaking  of  a  lawsuit, 
namely  "action,"  "  suit,"  "proceeding,"  "cause,"  etc. 
These  words  have  slightly  different  shades  of  meaning, 
but  are  generally  used  synonymously. 

There  are  also  different  kinds  of  lawsuits.  These  may 
lie  divided  into  two  large  classes,  criminal  and  civil  ac- 
tions. The  first  of  these  relate  absolutely  to  the  commit- 
ting of  some  crime,  while  the  latter  embrace  only  such 
cases  as  relate  to  the  settling  of  a  matter  in  connection 
with  which  no  crime  or  criminal  intention  is  charged. 

Let  us  suppose  that  A  has  sold  a  parcel  of  goods  to  B 
on  credit.  At  the  proper  time  an  account  is  rendered. 
Instead,  however,  of  promptly  paying  for  them,  the  pur- 
chaser neglects  this  important  duty,  and  after  many  futile 
attempts  to  collect  the  amount,  as  a  last  resort,  A  seeks 
the  advice  of  a  lawyer.  If  the  latter  deems  t lie  facts  in 
the  case  sufficient  to  promise  a  successful  issue  in  favor 
of  A,  he  assumes  the  conduct  of  the  case  upon  payment 
of  a  "retainer,"  according  to  Blackstone  "a  fee  paid  to 
engage  a  lawyer  or  counsellor  to  maintain  a  case  or  pre- 
vent his  being  employed  by  the  opposite  party."  Upon 
the  payment    of  this   retainer,  which  may  vary  in  amount 

from  twenty-live  dollars  up  to  many  thousands,  A  be- 
comes the  lawyer's  "client,"  while  the  lawyer  is  known 
i      V-   "  attorney  "  or  "  counsel." 

After  stating  the  facts  of  the  case  to  his  attorney,  the 

latter  proceeds  to  "  draw  up  "  or  "  draft  "  the  first  neces- 
sary document  in  the  case.  This  documenl  is  known  as  a 
"complaint,"  and  embodies,   besides    'he    name  of  the 

*  Specially  written  for  thie  work  by  w  I,.  Mnson.  Principal  of  the 
Metropolitan  School  of  Isaac  Pitman  Shorthand,  95  Fifth  Avenue,  New 
V«»rk. 


PRACTICAL    HINTS   IX   LEGAL   WORK.  177 

court  in  which  it  lias  been  decided  the  case  shall  be 
brought,  and  the  names  of  the  parties  to  the  suit  (all  this 
being  technically  known  as  the  "title"),  the  facts  upon 
which  the  proceeding  is  to  be  had,  ending  with  a  "prayer" 
lor  judgment  and  the  name  and  address  of  the  lawyer. 

Following  tins  comes  the  sworn  statement,  or  "verifi- 
cation," of  the  plaintiff,  which  he  himself  must  sign 
before  a  "  notary  public,"  who  testifies  that  the  verifica- 
tion has  been  made  in  due  form. 

Following  is  a  form  of  complaint  as  commonly  used 
in  New  York,  and  in  the  majority  of  the  States. 

SUPERIOR  COURT  OF  THE 
CITY  OF  NEW  YORK. 


MARY 

A. 

MOORE  and  ALBERT  II. 

MOORE 

,  her  husband, 

Plaintiffs, 

against 

JOHN    WILLIAMSON 

Defendant. 

The  plaintiffs,  lor  a  cause  of  action  against  the  above 
named  defendant,  respectfully  show  to  this  Honorable 
Court  and  allege  as  follows,  to  wit: 

First:  That  at  all  times  hereinafter  alleged,  the  plain- 
tiffs were  and  still  arc  associated  together  as  co-partners 
doing  business  in  the  City  of  New  York,  under  the  firm 
name  ami  style  of  M.  A.  Moore  and  Company. 

Second:  That  at  the  city  of  New  York,  between  the 
4th  day  of  June,  and  the  8th  day  of  November,  1881,  the 
plaintiffs  at  the  request  of  said  defendant,  and  upon  his 
promise  to  pay  for  the  same,  sold  and  delivered  to  said 
defendant,  upon  ten  days'  credit,  certain  goods,  wares 
and  merchandise   of  the  agreed  value  of  nine   hundred 


178  PRACTICAL    HINTS    IN   LEGAL   WORK. 

and  seventy-two  dollars  ($972.00),  and  that  no  part  thereof 
has  ever  been  paid  by  the  defendant. 

Wherefore:  These  plaintiffs  demand  judgment  against 
said  defendant  for  the  sum  of  nine  hundred  and  seventy- 
two  dollars  ($972.00)  with  interest  from  the  8th  day  of 
November,  1881,  besides  the  costs  of  this  action. 
(Signed)         John  T.  Jones,  Plaintiffs'  Attorney, 

17  Bank  St.,  N.  Y. 

City  and  County  of  New  York,  ss.  : 

A,  being  duly  sworn,  deposes  and  says:  that  lie  is 
the  plaintiff  herein;  that  the  foregoing  complaint  is  true 
of  his  own  knowledge,  except  as  to  the  matters  therein 
stated  to  be  alleged  on  information  and  belief,  and  as  to 
those  matters  he  believes  it  to  be  true. 
Sworn  to  before  me  this  ) 
day  of 18       f 

The  paragraphs  in  a  complaint,  if  more  than  one,  after 
the  introductory  paragraph,  arc  numbered,  the  para- 
graph beginning  "  Wherefore  "  being  called  the  "  prayer." 
The  words  at  the  beginning  of  the  verification,  — "  City 
and  County  of  New  York," — are  known  as  the  "  venue," 
a  Latin  word  meaning  the  place  where,  or  the  locality 
in  which,  the  action  is  brought.  The  letters  SS,  arc  an 
abbreviation  of  the  Latin  word  '-Scilicet"  and  mean 
"to  wit,"  or  "  namely."  They  must  always  be  inserted, 
as  in  most  States  their  omission  renders  the  verification 
void.  Every  verification  must,  end  with  the  "jurat" 
(oath)  "Sworn  to  before  me,"  etc. 

Of  this  complaint  three  copies  arc  made,  one  of  which 
i  cut  to  or  "served  upon,"  the  defendant's  attorney; 
one  filed  with  the  court  in  which  the  action  is  brought, 
and  the  other  retained  by  the  plaintiff's  attorney.  It 
is  customary  to  fasten  each  copy  of  the  complaint  in 
;i  'cover,"  or  piece  of  paper  a  little  wider  and  longer 
than  the  legal  paper  upon  which  the  document  is  written, 


PRACTICAL    HINTS    IN    LEGAL    WORK.  179 

and  on  this  cover  is  endorsed  the  title  of  the  case,  the 
name  of  the  document,  and  the  name  of  the  plaint  ill's 
attorney  with  his  address.  With  the  complaint,  however, 
there  must  be  bound  into  this  cover  another  document 
known  as  a  "Summons,"  the  form  of  which  is  substan- 
tially as  follows  : 

COURT. 


Plaintiff, 
vs. 
Defendant. 


TO  THE  ABOVE  NAMED  DEFENDANT: 

YOU  ARE  HEREBY  SUMMONED  to  answer  the 
complaint  in  this  action,  and  to  serve  a  copy  of  your 
answer  on  the  plaintiff's  attorney  herein,  within  —  days 
after  the  service  of  this  summons,  exclusive  of  the  day  of 
service,  and  iu  case  of  your  failure  to  appear  or  answer, 
judgment  will  be  taken  against  you  by  default  for  the 
relief  demanded  in  the  complaint. 

Dated,  New  York,  

189  Plaintiff's  Attorneys, 

(Office  and  P.  o.  address) 

The  blanks  are  to  be  filled  in  with  ink  or  on  the 
typewriter,  and  the  name  and  address  of  the  plaintiff's 
attorney.  It  will  he  M't-n  by  this  Summons  that  the  de- 
fendant is  required  to  appear  in  court  to  answer  the  com- 
plaint within  ascertain  number  of  days  after  the  service, 
and  on  Ids  failure  to  appeal',  the  plaintiff  will  have  the 
right  to  move  that  the  judge  for  the  "  Court  "  as  the  judge 
is  frequently  termed)  give  1dm  judgment  against  the  de- 
fendant in  default  of  the  hitter's  appearance. 

When  the  defendant  or  his  attorney  receives  the  com- 
plaint, he  must  prepare  a  document  in  reply  known  as  an 


180  PRACTICAL   HINTS   IN   LEGAL   WORK. 

"  Answer."  This  document  is  arranged  on  the  typewriter 
exactly  the  same  as  the  Complaint,  with  the  same  title,  a 
similar  introduction,  paragraphs  numbered,  the  defend- 
ant's lawyer's  name  and  address,  a  verification,  and  the 
defendant's  signature  before  a  notary. 

The  case  is  now  fairly  begun,  and  it  is  the  plaintiff's 
next  move.  He  may  do  one  of  several  things  : — serve 
upon  the  defendant  an  amended  complaint  which  lie  lias 
a  right  to  do  by  special  permission  of  the  Court,  if  he 
finds  anything  in  his  original  complaint  needing  altera- 
tion; or  he  may  ask  the  Court  for  an  Order  for  delay,  for 
some  cause  which  appears  to  him  necessary.  In  order  to 
secure  the  Order  which  he  covets,  it  is  frequently  neces- 
sary that  the  attorney  present  to  the  Court  a  sworn  state- 
ment which  is  known  as  an  ''Affidavit,"  before'  he  can 
secure  the  desired  Order.  As  the  form  of  an  Affidavit  dif- 
fers somewhat  from  that  of  a  Complaint  or  Answer,  it  is 
given  herewith  : 

AFFIDAVIT   ACCOMPANYING    ORDER   FOR    AMENDED 
COMPLAINT. 

SUPERIOR  COURT  OF  THE  CITY  OF  NEW 
YORK. 


^ 

.MARY    A.    MOORE   and    ALBERT 

ir. 

MOORE,  her  husband, 

Plaintiff's, 

against 

JOHN   WILLIAMSON, 

Defendant. 

JAMES  BALDWIN,  being  duly  sworn,  deposes  and 
says: 

I  am  i  he  attorney  for  the  plaintiffs  herein.  On  or  about 
tin'  day  of  March,  1890,  I  drafted  the  complaint 


PRACTICAL    HINTS    IX   LEGAL   WORE.  181 

in  the  above  entitled  action,  a  copy  of  which  has  been 
duly  filed  with  the  Clerk  of  this  Court,  and  served  upon 
the  attorney  for  the  defendants  herein. 

At  the  time  of  drawing  such  complaint  we  had  infor- 
mation, which  we  verily  believed  to  be  accurate,  concern- 
ing the  allegations  contained  in  the  first  paragraph  of  said 
complaint.  These  allegations  have  since  been  found  to  l>e 
somewhat  incorrect,  and  while  not  materially  affecting 
the  result  of  the  action,  we  deem  it  necessary  to  make 
such  changes  as  seem  to  us  best,  in  order  to  have  the 
complaint  conform  in  all  respects  to  the  entire  truth;  and 
it  is  therefore  desired  that  an  order  be  issued  granting 
permission  to  the  plaintiffs  to  so  amend  their  complaint 
as  to  be  in  all  respects  accurate  and  true. 

Sworn  before  me  this  ) 

day  of  March,  1892.  \ 

The  paragraphs  in  an  affidavit  may  he  numbered  or  not 
according  to  taste,  but  court  documents  must  be  "  fo- 
lioed."  This  consists  of  indicating  the  end  of  each  hun- 
dred words  in  the  margin  for  the  sake  of  easy  reference, 
and  it  is  usually  done  by  writing  "Fol.  1"  opposite  the 
first  word  on  the  first  line  on  the  first  page.  "Fol.  2"  or 
"  2  ",  is  written  nine  lines  below,  on  the  theory  that  there 
are  ten  words  to  a  line,  and  at  every  nine  lines  the  num- 
ber of  the  folio  is  indicated  in  the  same  way,  all  the  way 
through  the  document. 

Almost  every  paper  has  a  peculiar  form  of  its  own,  the 
two  most  alike  being  the  Complaint  and  the  Answer.  By 
familiarizing  one'-  sell'  with  the  different  forms  these  can 
he  recognized  at  sight.  An  Affidavit,  for  instance,  be- 
gins with  the  "venue";  otherwise  it  is  worthless.  A 
Complaint  can  be  known  by  the  fact  that  it  begins  with 
some  such  words  as  "The  plaintiff  for  a  cause  of  action,'' 
or  "Plaintiffs  by  So  and  So.  Esq.,  their  attorney."  etc. 
At  the  time  of  drawing  up  the  Affidavit   the  lawyer  will 


182  PRACTICAL   HINTS    IN    LEGAL    WORK. 

also  draw  up  a  form  of  Order  which  lie  desires  to  have 
granted  upon  the  facts  set  out  in  the  Affidavit.  This  is 
written  in  somewhat  the  following  form  : 

At  a  special  Term  of  the  City  Court  of 
New  York,  held  at  the  Chambers 
thereof,  in  the  City  Hall  of  said 
city,  on  the  10th  day  of  March, 
1892. 
PRESENT : 

HON.    ERNEST   HALL, 

Justice. 


JOHN   UNDERWOOD, 

Plaintiff, 
against 

EDWARD    DONALD   and    AUGUSTUS    RIGG, 

Defendants. 


Upon  reading  the  annexed  affidavit  of  the  plaintiff 
herein,  from  which  it  appears  that  since  the  service  of  the 
complaint  herein  an  order  of  arrest  has  been  applied  for, 
on  the  ground  thai  the  defendants  have  disposed  of  their 
property  with  intent  to  cheat  and  defraud  their  creditors, 
and  that  the  complaint  as  served  does  not  contain  this 
allegation  as  required  by  Section  .">G8  of  the  Code  of  Civil 
Procedure. 

Now,  upon  motion  of  Franklin  A:  Ogden,  Attorneys  for 
plaintiff,  it  is 

ORDERED  that  the  plaintiff  serve  upon  defendant's  at- 
torney herein,  within  twenty  days  from  date,  an  amended 
Complaint  containing  the  allegation  that  since  the  making 
of  the  contract  set  forth  in  the  complaint,  the  defendants 
have  removed  or  disposed  of  their  property  with  intent 
to  cheat  and  defraud  their  creditors. 


PRACTICAL   HINTS   IN   LEGAL  WORK.  183 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  attorney  is  given  so  many  days 
in  which  to  draft  a  new  Complaint,  and  it  usually  costs 
him  five  or  ten  dollars  as  a  fee  to  pay  the  court  for  the 
trouble  of  issuing  it.  Then  if  he  fails  to  have  the  Order 
ready  within  the  time  stipulated,  he  will  be  in  default  and 
contempt,  and  his  opponent  may  proceed  to  take  advan- 
tage thereof. 

An  Amended  Complaint  is  drawn  up  in  the  same  form 
as  the  original  one,  served  in  the  same  manner,  and  an- 
swered or  not,  as  the  defendant  chooses.  The  plaintiff's 
attorney  upon  receiving  the  answer  of  the  defendant  to 
his  first  or  to  his  Amended  Complaint,  may  issue  another 
document  in  response  which  is  called  a  " Reply, " and  is 
arranged  similarly  to  the  Complaint.  The  parties  then 
proceed  to  trial  on  the  day  appointed. 

This  gives,  in  a  general  way,  the  course  usually  pursued 
in  the  bringing  of  a  suit,  but  this  is  only  the  beginning. 
These  preliminary  steps  are  to  be  followed  by  the  real 
"proceedings."  or  taking  of  evidence  in  the  presence  of 
the  judge  who  is  to  try  the  ease,  with  or  without  a  jury. 

Evidence  may  be  presented  either  in  form  of  oral  testi- 
mony or  by  means  of  documents.  Any  papers  which 
have  passed  between  the  parties  to  a  suit  at  any  time 
previous  to  the  commencement  thereof,  such  as  Leases, 
Deeds,  Mortgages,  Agreements,  Letters,  Articles  of  Co- 
partnership »nd  the  like,  may  be  used  as  proof  of  allega- 
tions set  up  either  by  the  plaintiff  or  the  defendant. 
Most  of  the  proof,  however,  is  oral,  and  for  this  purpose 
witnesses  are  called  to  testify  to  their  knowledge  of  the 
facts  which  it  is  intended  to  prove.  It  is  in  the  taking  of 
such  testimony  that  the  stenographer  is  called  upon  to 
exercise  his  greatest  skill  and  use  to  the  utmost  his  intelli- 
gence, education  and  common  Bense,  and  while  every 
stenographer  may  not  hope  to  become  an  official  court 
reporter,  almost-  anyone  who  can  write  shorthand  rapidly 
enough  may  be  called  upon  at  some  time  to  take  testimony 


184  PRACTICAL   HINTS   IN   LEGAL  WORK. 

at  private  hearings,  such  as  those  had  before  "Referees" 
in  the  State  of  New  York,  or  "Masters"  in  the  State  of 
New  Jersey,  and  elsewhere. 

In  taking  testimony,  great  care  must  be  paid  to  the 
questions  asked  by  the  counsel  or  the  Court,  as  well  as  to 
the  answers  of  the  witnesses. 

The  witness  may  frequently  be  interrupted  in  the  giving 
of  his  testimony  by  the  attorney  on  the  opposite  side 
objecting  either  to  the  question  or  to  the  answer.  Some- 
times the  objection  will  be  made  formally  in  something 
like  the  following  language  :  "  Objected  to  as  immaterial, 
irrevelant,  and  incompetent."  At  other  times  the  lawyer 
will  enter  into  an  argument  in  which  he  will  state  his  ob- 
jections. This,  however,  the  stenographer  will  rarely  have 
to  take  in  full  unless  indeed  specially  requested  to,  but 
he  must  listen  carefully,  and  after  the  counsel  is  through 
put  the  objection  into  proper  form.  Following  is  a  sam- 
ple of  testimony  when  written  out  by  the  stenographer. 
This  form  varies  somewhat,  but  the  general  arrangement 
remains  the  same. 

NEW  YORK  SUPREME  COURT. 

CITY    AND   COUNTY   OP   NEW    YOIJK. 


HENRY    MACY,  et  al. 

against 
CHARLES   STEWART, 


Plaintiff's. 


Defendant. 


New   York,  January  10,  1S93. 
APPEARANCES  : 

John  R,  Brady,  Esq.,  Attorney  for  Plaintiffs. 
Messrs.  Lee  &  Jackson,  Attorneys  for  Defendant. 


PRACTICAL   HINTS    IX    LEGAL    WORK.  185 

Oath  of  referee  waived  by  consent  of  both  parties. 

HENRY  RAYMOND,  a  witness  called  on  behalf  of  the 

plaintiffs,  being  duly  sworn,  testifies  as  follows  : 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION:    I'.Y   Ml!.    BRADT. 

Q.  You  are  the  book-keeper  of  Messrs.  Macy  &  Co.,  the 
plaintiffs  ?     A.  I  was. 

Q.  And  you  were  their  book-keeper  throughout  the 
year  1888  ?     A.  Yes,  sir;  I  was. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  see  Mr.  Stewart,  the  defendant  herein, 
in  Mr.  Macy's  shop  ?  A.  I  have  never  seen  Mr.  Stewart 
before. 

Q.  In  Mr.  Macy's  shop  ?     A.  In  Mr.  Macy's  shop. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  hear  any  conversation  between  Mr. 
Stewart  and  Air.  Macyaboul  Palmer?  A.  About  Palmer, 
I  did  not. 

Q.  Did  you  hear  any  conversation  about  these  sashes 
that  are  spoken  of  \     A.  I  did. 

Q.  "What,  was  said  ?  A.  Mr.  Stewart  sent  us  a  letter 
requesting  that  the  sashes  should  be  sent  up,  that  they 
were  needed  ;  in  the  letter  it  was  said  that  Palmer  and 
Smith  would  want  the  sashes.  Mr.  Macy  then  said,  "I 
will  have  nothing  to  do  with  those  parties." 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Macy  tell  Mr.  Stewart  this,  that  you  were 
telling  me  now  1  A.  He  told  that  to  Mr.  Stewart,  too, 
about  this. 

(J.  What  I  want  to  know  merely  is,  what  did  Mr.  Macy 
say  to  Mr.  Stewart  about  these  sashes  ;  not  what  Mr. 
Macy  said  to  you.  thai  is  not  allowable  ;  but  what  he  said 
to  Mr.  Stewart  !  A.  Well,  he  said  to  Mr.  Stewart,  then, 
that  he  did  not — such  words  as  that — I  cannot  recoiled 
the  exact  expression. 

Q.  The  substance  !  A.  That  he  did  not  consider 
Palmer  and  Smith  responsible  enough  for  the  amount. 


18G  PRACTICAL   HINTS   IN   LEGAL   WORK. 


CROSS    EXAMINATION   :    BY    MR.   JACKSON. 

Q.  You  were  asked  a  moment  ago  if  Mr.  Macy  said 
anything  to  Mr.  Stewart  about  the  financial  responsibility 
of  Palmer  and  Smith  ?     A.  Nothing  more  than  that. 

Q.  I  understood  you  to  state  that  lie  had  not  said  any- 
thing in  your  presence  ?  A.  Only  that  he  did  not  con- 
sider them  responsible  enough  for  the  amount. 

Q.  When  was  this  ?  That  was  after  the  contract  had 
been  made  ?     A.  Certainly. 

BY   PLAINTIFFS'    COUNSEL  : 

Q.  Was  this  before  the  sash  was  delivered  ?  A.  No, 
sir  ;  not  before  the  sash  was  delivered. 

BY   DEFENDANT'S   COUNSEL  : 

(J.   Were  you  present  after   the   note    was   protested, 
when  Mr.  Stewart  came  to  the  store  ?     A.  I  was. 
Adjourned  to  Thursday,  March  28th,  1893,  at  2  p.m. 

Testimony  is  written  on  different  styles  of  paper.  Some 
lawyers  prefer  what  is  known  as  square  paper,  (hat  is  let- 
ter size,  while  others  prefer  the  long  paper,  or  legal  size; 
but  whichever  is  chosen,  the  paper  is  usually  ruled  with 
a  red  line  at  the  left  side,  and  in  writing  out  the  tran- 
script the  "  Q"  for  question  is  usually  put  outside  this 
nd  line;  sometimes,  also,  the  ''A''  for  answer  is  put 
outside,  but  quite  frequently  this  is  made  to  follow  the 
questiou  on  the  same  line  with  the  latter.  As  the  taking 
of  testimony  is  tin;  most  rapid  note-taking,  probably, 
which  a  stenographer  has  to  do,  it  is  better  that  he 
should  begin  every  question  on  the  Left  hand  margin  of 
the  page  and  write  clear  across  and  back  to  the  margin 
again,  and  begin  every  answer  in  the  middle  of  the  page, 
and    so   back    to  the  middle    for   each  line,   lather  than   to 


PRACTICAL    HINTS    IN    LEGAL   WORK.  187 

attempt  to  indicate  in  any  other  way  the  beginning  of 
the  question  or  answer. 

OTHER   LEGAL   FORMS. 

Beside  court  documents  such  as  have  been  already  de- 
scribed in  the  foregoing  pages,  there  are  many  miscella- 
neous legal  documents,  such  as  Deeds.  Mortgages,  Leases, 
Towers  of  Attorney,  Assignments,  Articles  of  Agree- 
ments, Minutes  of  Meetings,  Wills,  etc.,  etc.,  each  of 
which  has  its  own  peculiar  form.  A  copy  of  the  final 
document  in  a  lawsuit — the  Opinion — set  out  in  both 
shorthand  and  longhand,  will  be  found  on  pages  188- 
192.  As  this  contains  the  correct  outlines  for  many  legal 
terms  in  common  use,  a  careful  study  of  same  will  be 
found  most  helpful. 


188 


PRACTICAL    niNTS    IN    LEGAL   WORK. 


(Opinion.) 


FIRST  DEPARTMENT, 
GENERAL  TERM. 


PEARCE  BARNES  ° 

k-' 

A* 

josepii 

D. 

JONES 

'  c, 

V 

X 

NOAH   DAVIS, 

JOHN  R.    BRADY, 

CHARLES  DANIELS, 

J.  J. 


APPEAL 
^  '  "^  L_  "  ^  -   x  V  .  *    ^-   0  \  *-   L.  '  ^,  ' 
x   C  v-   ^p    -- ,  ^  x 

Stern  &  Ames,  ^  ^  x 
Thomas  G.  Evans,  ^  ,A.  x 
C.  DANIELS,  J. 

•     *     <-,     -^      -    °  \     \    -      v/     '     S.    \^      V  — 

%  „  V  *  ^x  vl^.    "     "°  )  /  )  /-^  r 

M    *    /    I,    .  -    x. ;/  U   fc,.    -    (,    '  \       .Ja  *> 


""""^7.    .     I  ,    </,     ,     •»^-$>, 


'  ?        1         ',     .,     x_ 


PRACTICAL    HINTS    IX    LEGAL    WORE. 


189 


\«G->    ■-V^/    ?    XV  '   30i' 


) 


|.  >   Vi,   </,    V'    ' 


1- 


'  10j^ 

~l   \    c^    ^x 


^: 


("H    v  ^  Y"  546x) 


I 


>  ^  , 


T_ 


s       \ 


^l'  ^ >'^ s- 


w   „  ^    o    L,  -\  -^   ^  /    n^-  %  Ux 


190  PRACTICAL   HINTS   IN   LEGAL   WORK. 


KEY  TO  "OPINION." 


FIRST  DEPARTMENT, 
GENERAL  TERM. 


PEARCE  BARNES  as  Receiver, 

etc. 

Respondent, 

against 

JOSEPH  D. 

JONES  and  others. 

Appellants. 

NOAH  DAVIS, 

Presiding  Justice, 
JOHN  R.  BRADY, 
CHARLES  DANIELS. 
J.  J. 


APPEAL 

from  an  Order  denying  a  motion  made  to  compel  the 
PlaintilT  lo  make  his  complaint  more  definite  and 
certain,  and  to  elect  between  inconsistent  cause, 
etc. 

Stern  &  Ames,  for  Appellants. 
Thomas  G.  Evans,  for  Respondent. 
C.  DANIELS,  J. 

The  complaint  is  in  the  form  known  as  a  creditors'  hill 
t<>  reach  and  apply  property  belonging  to  the  debtors  to 
the  payment  of  two  judgments  recovered  against  them 
upon  which  execution  has  been  issued  and  returned  un- 
satisfied. It  shows  the  commencement  and  prosecution 
of  supplementary  proceedings  in  which  a  Receiver  was 
appointed  of  the  property  and  effects  of  the  judgment 
debtors,  and  that  tlie  plaintiff  is  the  successor  of  that 
Receiver.  By  the  succeeding  allegations  the  causes  of 
action  upon  which  the  judgment  was  recovered  set  forth 
that  the  judgment  debtors  were  partners  in  business 
when   such   demands   accrued   against    them,  and   upon   a 


PRACTICAL    HINTS    IN*    LEGAL    WORK.  191 

dissolution  of  their  copartnership,  the  defendant,  Jones, 
who  was  one  of  the  partners,  took  the  greater  part  of 
tlic  assets  of  the  firm,  and  by  a  written  agreement  with 
his  copartner,  assumed  and  agreed  to  pay  the  debts  and 
liabilities  of  the  firm.  That  instead  of  doing  that,  he, 
together  with  two  other  persons,  formed  a  corporation 
under  the  manufacturing  laws  of  the  State,  to  carry  on 
the  same  business  as  had  been  transacted  by  the  firm, 
and  that  t he  assets  placed  in  Ins  hands  were  transferred 
to  the  corporation  after  its  formation,  and  used  in  carry- 
ing on  a  profitable  business  by  it.  The  capital  of  the 
corporation  is  stated  to  have  been  fixed  at  the  sum  of 
$•30,000,  and  $10,000  of  the  capital  stock  was  issued  to 
the  wife  of  the  defendant,  Jones,  at  his  instance,  and 
without  auy  actual  consideration,  parted  with  by  her. 

The  transfer  of  the  assets  of  the  firm  to  the  corporation 
as  well  as  the  stock  issued  by  it  to  the  wife  of  the  de- 
fendant, Jones,  is  alleged  to  have  been  with  intent  to 
delay  and  defraud  the  creditors  of  the  preceding  copart- 
nership, and  for  that  reason  it  is  claimed  that  the  title  of 
the  wife  of  Jones  to  this  stock  should  be  vacated  and  set 
aside,  and  its  proceeds  applied  to  the  payment  of  the 
judgment.  This  is  the  substance  of  the  complaint,  al- 
though the  facts  are  more  clearly  set  forth  and  with 
greater  detail  in  it.  A  perusal  of  the  complaint  pro- 
duces the  conviction  that  no  misapprehension  whatever 
could  arise  as  to  the  scope  of  the  action,  the  facts  upon 
which  it  has  been  based,  or  the  relief  intended  to  he 
secured  by  it. 

The  allegations  are  clear  and  distinct,  and  free  from 
all  obscurity,  and  no  difficulty  stands  in  the  way  of  fully 
understanding  the  claims  inserted  in  it.  In  fact  it  may 
well  be  said  to  have  been  drawn  up  on  a  clear,  legal  and 
logical  theory,  plainly,  precisely  and  intelligently  set 
forth,  more  so  certainly  than  pleadings  of  this  nature 
usually  are.     The  law  has  provided   for  an  application  to 


192  PRACTICAL   HINTS   IX  LEGAL  WORK. 

make  a  pleading  more  definite  and  certain,  only  when  its 
precise  meaning  or  application  is  not  apparent. 
(Code  of  Civil  Procedure,  546.) 

This  is  not  a  pleading  of  that  nature,  for  the  allega- 
tions are  definite  and  certain,  and  their  precise  meaning 
is  entirely  evident. 

"While  it  is  alleged  that  all  the  assets  of  the  preceding 
firm  were  transferred  to  the  corporation  with  the  intent 
of  hindering,  delaying  and  defrauding  the  creditors  of 
the  firm,  the  only  relief  claimed  by  reason  of  this  circum- 
stance is  that  the  $10,000  of  stock  issued  to  the  wife  of  the 
partner  who  had  undertaken  to  pay  the  firm's  debts,  should 
be  used  and  appropriated  for  the  payment  of  the  two 
judgments  recovered  by  the  creditors  at  whose  instance 
the  Receiver  was  appointed.  There  consequently  was  but 
one  cause  of  action  or  one  subject  matter  to  lie  affected 
by  these  general  allegations  inserted  in  the  complaint. 
The  claim  of  the  Receiver,  upon  the  facts  as  they  have 
been  stated,  might  very  well  have  been  more  extended-, 
but  as  this  stock  or  its  proceeds  would  probably  lie  suffi- 
cient to  pay  the  judgmenl  and  the  expenses  of  the  litiga- 
tion, no  further  relief  seems  to  have  been  thought  neces- 
sary. The  complaint  was  well  drawn  and  a  cause  of  action 
presented  by  it  has  been  clearly  stated,  and  there  was 
consequently  no  ground  for  the  motion  denied  by  the 
order  from  which  the  appeal  has  been  taken. 

The  order  should  be  affirmed  with  $10  costs  besides  the 
disbursements. 


THEOLOGICAL    PHRASES. 


193 


IDEOLOGICAL    PHRASES. 


Almighty  and  Everlasting  God 

Almighty  God  ^  ^£^- 

Apostle  Paul  .  VVT.. 

ark  of  the  covenant  ~"\ v 

articles  of  religion      J 
at  the  lust  day  .1.1. 

„  right  hand  of  God  „br7. 

Begotten  son  of  God       >^-a — — 

blessed  Lord    p- 

blessing  of  God    >o- 
blood  of  Christ  V-= 
blood  of  Jesus    S 

body  and  Mood  of  Christ      £^ 

body  and  mind    |^ 
Catholic  Church  _      ) 
Catholic  faith 
Catholic  Priest 
Catholic  worship 
ceremonial  law  °V^ 
child  of  God  £L 
children  of  God  k 
children  of  Israel       ( 
Christ  Jesus  "v 
„     Jesus  our  Lord    1/ 

13 


Christian  brethren  c_s\ 
Christian  brother  '—  \ 
Christian  character  c~ 
Christian  charity     l/\ 
Christian  church    "  / 
Christian  faith       S 
Church  and  State  y 
Church  of  Christ     / 
Church  of  England   / 
Church  of  Ireland         /^ 
Church  of  Rome    L^ 
Church  principles    / 
cross  of  Christ  cr-^r"° 
Daily  bread    r 
day  of  redemption    l/J^ 
Divine  being     I — v 
Divine  glory  L_<_ 
Divine  government  U~ — i 
Divine  love  L_. 

Divine  Man    l_^ 
Divine  Providence 

U — ■i 

Divine  things    L^^> 
Divine  wisdom  U_ </ 


194  THEOLOGICAL   PHRASES. 

Elder  of  the  Church      f\      glorious  gospel  of  the  Lord 

Jesus  Christ  p <l— 

God  and  Saviour  ~v 


Episcopal  Church      y? 


Epistle  of  Paul  .v^rwT. 

„  to  the  Corinthians  .VfZ.    God  m  nis  goodness 

„  to  the  Romans  .\/3.. 
eternal  bliss     L_^ 

eternal  condemnation 

eternal  damnation 


everlasting  covenant 
everlasting  day    ^_. 
everlasting  God    ^_ 
everlasting  life  V 
everlasting  misery  V^-^ 
Face  of  the  earth     Ko\ 
family  prayer  V^-<\^ 
fast  day    \> 
Feast  of  tabernacles     ]* 
fellow-creature  V^^ 
for  Christ's  sake  ^  0_ 
for  ever  V 
for  ever  and  ever  N_ 
forgiveness  of  sins      \^L° 
fruits  <>i*  the  Spirit 
future  state  Vj, 

fnt  are  world  V^/f 
Glad  tidings  ^ 


God  is  faithful     ^7 
God  is  good 
God  is  great 
God  of  grace 
God  of  heaven    v, 
God  of  love     "/V 
God's  character  and  govern- 
ment "°       '    V^ 
God's  glory 
God's  justice 


God's  law 


-r 


God's  providence  j 
goodness  of  God  ^_ji_ 
gospel  of  peace  ~~  v> 
grace  of  God  ^-a- 
grow  in  grace  <t-c~d 
growing  in  grace  r—*s-° 
Head  of  the  Church    4 
heart  of  man   ^> 
hearts  of  men    °-a 
heaven  and  earth  Va 
Heavenly  Father  ^\^ 
Holy  Ghost  6 


holy  land   ^ 

holy  of  holi.s  cr** 

holy  place   ^\> 

Holy  Spiril  of  God  ^ 

Boly  Word  <i" 

house  of  Israel  <s) 

I  am  God 

I  observe  lastly    <\s 

image  of  God     J_ 

in  Christ  "~~ 

in  Church  / 

in  faith  "~\ 

in  Jesus  Christ  ^7— 

in  the  Church    7 

in  the  city  of  God 

in  the  heart  v~<\ 

in  the  midst  of  life  "^**  ^ 


THEOLOGICAL   PHRASES. 

Jesus  Christ    /_ 
may  be  written 


105 


Christ 

when 

it  follows  Jesus  ;   in  other 
eases  write  C7^J 

Jesus  Christ's  sake  /  O 
Jewish  dispensation   (. 
Jewish  persuasion    / 
ust  and  the  unjust    fr-i 
ust  for  the  unjust   ^-/ 
ustice,  mercy  and  truth  </-*j 
ustification  by  faith  ^ 
ustification  by  the  works  of 
t lie  law- 


Kingdom  of  Christ  ~ 
kingdom  of  darkness 
kingdom  of  God  ~ 
kingdom  of  grace  ~ r~ 
kingdom  of  heaven 


„      presence  of  God^V_c_  kingdom  of  the  world    —^^ 

„    providence  of  God  ^~~%  |  kingdom  of  this  world  ~\^i 

in  the  sight  of  God  ^1  kingdoms  of  the  world  -*-" 

in  the  word  of  God  ^*\_  kingdoms  of  this  world  ~\yi 

„   words  of  my  text  "V-  knowledge  of  Christ  ^~U 

,        „  ,         ^—t  knowledge  of  Christianity       Z_ 

„   words  of  our  text    "^ 


„  words  of  the  text  >~S-=> 

inspiration  of  Scripture      "^sa— 
inspiration  of  the  Bible    ^^^V 

Jehovah  Jesus  // 
12* 


knowledge  of  God      L 

knowledge  of  the  truth      / 

Lamb  of  God  f      *" 
language  of  Scripture 


196  THEOLOGICAL   PHRASES 

language  of  the  text     La 
language  of  my  text 
Lord  and  Savior  /'v. 
Lord    and    Savior   Jesus 

Christ  ^2- 
Lord  Jesus    fl 
Lord  Jesus  Christ     I— 
Lord's  kingdom   C 
Lord's  prayer    ^^ 
Lord's  supper  i\ 
love  of  self  f\_ 
Minister  of  the  gospel  ^_o_ 
Mosaic  Law  ^~b— ' 
my  beloved  brethren  ^vv 
my  brethren    '  ^ 

my  dear  fellow-sinners       A 


my  dear  friends        L 

my  fellow-sinners  '^'\s_s, 

my  friends  '    ^ 

my  reverend  brothei"-^^ 

my  text 

Nations  of  the  earth  ^sA 

N<  w  Church   V 

New  Testament  Bcripl  area   — i 

J  a  on  the  dill 
Of  Christ  *"* 

of  Christianity 


of  God 

of  my  text 

of  Scripture    h 

Old  Testament  ^ 

Old  Testament  Scriptures    (-o— ° 

omnipotence  of  God  *~  ~%- 
omnipresenee  of  God  ^^~^V 
omniscience  of  God    ~^2 
our  blessed  Lord  ~/S^r.. 
our  Lord  .^/7- 
our  Lord's  ?*£- 

our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  .^/f~. 

our  Savior  .^. 
Part  of  Scripture  \^— 
passage  of  Scripture   \_ 
penitent  sinner  ^-i 
portion  of  Scripture    \/9~ 
Protestant  Church    7° 
Protestant  faith     > 
Protestant  religion    f 
providence  of  God   *\ 
Quick  and  the  dead  c — i 
Reformed  Church      y 
resurrection  glory  / 
i<  si  i  rrection  of  Christ  ^^ 

resurrection  nf  the  liody    y^^\ 

resurrection  of  the  dead  ^^ 


THEOLOGICAL    PHRASES. 

resurrection  of  the  just  /b   St  James    A-j, 

right  hand  of  God 

right  hand  of  (>"il  the  Father 

right  baud  i>f  the  Father        \ 

Right  Reverend  /W 

Right  Rev.  Bishop/V 

rise  again  .<...... 

Roman  Catholic  s^' 
„    Catholic  Church 
Sabbath  day    ^| 

Sabbath  school    >o 
Savior  of  the  world  ^y^ 
Scripture  promises        Vq 
Second  coming  of  Christ 

Second  Epistle  ^£"~ 
Sermon  on  the  Mount    v— ^ 
Son  of  God  q^— 
Sons  of  God  o_a_ 
Son  of  Man   o_^> 
Spirit  of  Christ 
Spirit  of  God  c^- 
spiritual  life  °S\. 
spiritual  meaning  cv-^_, 
spiritual  sense  'Nj_J) 


197 


St  John  y 

St  Paul's  epistle  ^W 

St  Peter  *% 

Sunday  school      j,__ 

Sun  of  Righteousness  Q^/ lj_p 

Things  of  God  s> 
things  of  men     ^^> 
through  Christ  .?)..-. 
tree  of  life  ..Vi    . 
Trinity  in  unity    •J->i 
Under  an  influence  which  ' — -f> 
under  the  influence  of  which  s"— % 

under  the  necessity  of  ~-p 
unsearchable   riches  of 

Christ  vJ^, 
Virgin  Mary  S-     . 
Water  of  life   Vv_ 
ways  of  the  world  ^^ 
way  of  salvation    c  '   ^° 
wisdom  of  God    <^L 
Word  of  God    "\. 
works  of  the  law- 
world  without  end 


198  exercise  on  theological  phrases. 

Exercise   69. 

A  Sermon  including  all  the  Theological  Phrases. 
"  The  kingdom  of  God." — Luke  vi.  20. 

My  beloved  brethren, — The  passage  of  Scripture  in-which- 
the  words  of  my  text  are  found  is  known  to-the  Christian 
(li arch  as-the  Sermon  on  tlie  Mount.  In-it  ovx-Lord  and 
St i riour  Jesus  Christ  places  before-the  nations  of  the  earth 
those  principles  of  justice,  mercy,  and  truth,  under  the  influ- 
ence of  iohich-ihe  kingdoms  of  this  world  have  advanced  in- 
(the)-woyy  of  salvation.  We-cannot-say,  alas,  t  hat-tin-  hearts 
of  men  are  entirely  turned  to  divine  thing*,  or  that  a  proper 
sense  of-God's  characti  r  and  govemmt  nt  is  so  fully  manifesl 
that-the  world  can  yet  be-ealled.  in  the  words  of  my  text,  the 
"kingdom  of  God.''  But,  by-the  providence  of  God,  the 
kingdoms  of  this  world  are-now  ruled  on  far  different  prin- 
ciples to-tbose-which  prevailed  ere-the  Sun  of  "Righteousness, 
appeared.  When-the  tempter  showed  our  blessed  Lord  the 
kingdoms  of  the  world  and-the  glory  of-thcm,  he  little  knew 
what  a  change  in  God's  Providena  would-be  created  in 
Paganism  through  -the  glad  tidings  (of  the)  glorious  gospel  <>f 
the  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  By-the  blessing  of  God,  the  gospel  of 
peace  has  in-the  Divim  Providenct  been  proclaimed  over-the 
face  "/the  earth  ever-since-the  Lord  Jesus,  the  glorified  Head 

of  the  Church,  revealed  the  things  of  God.  When-IIe  as- 
cended to-the  right  hand  of  God  the  Father,  the  apostles  who 
had-been  witnesses  to-the  resurrection  of  Christ  received  the 
Holy  Spirit  of  God  and  mat,  r  an  influena  which  they  could- 
imt  withstand,  proclaimed  the  goodness  of  God  and-the  gract 
of  God,  manifested  in  sending  t  lie  Lamb  of  God  to  show  fori  h 
tin'  glories  (of  the)  spiritual  life  and  the  Kingdom  of  Christ 
to  all  wbo-are  in-the  kingdom  of  darkness.  8t  James,  8t 
John,  si  /',/,/■  and-the  other  apostles,  inspired  by-the  Holy 
<;imst,  spread  a  knmvledgi  of  Christ,  nut  to  Gentiles  only 
but  to-the  house  "f  Israel  under-the  ceremonial  law  or  Mosaic 
law,  in  other-words  the  Jewish  dispensation.  Proselytes 
(of  the)  Jewish  persuasion  were-nol  overlooked,  and-all  who 


EXERCISE   OX   THEOLOGICAL   PHRASES.  19!) 

looked  to-the  Old  Testament  Scriptures  were  pointed  to-that 
part  of  Scripture  or  portion  of  Scripture  which  prophesied 
(of  the)  Son  of  Man  and  foretold  the  unsearchable  riches  of 
Christ.  The  apostles  were-not  under  the  necessity  of  quoting- 
the  words  of  Scripture  to  demonstrate  God's  everlasting  cove- 
nant, because-the  Messianic  prophecies  are  as-well-known  to- 
the  children  of  Israel  as- the  history  (of  the)  ark  of  the  cove- 
nant, the  observance  (of  the)  Feast  of  Tabernacles,  or-the 
keeping  of  a  fast  day.  The  Apostle  Paul  was-the  most 
powerful  exponent  of  Christianity  to-the  Gentile  world,  as- 
his  Epistle  to  the  Romans  and  many  another  Epistle  of  Paul 
show.  When-wc  read  St  Paul's  Epistle  to  any  (of  the)  early 
converts  to-the  Christian  faith,  we  feel  that-he  had  a  deep 
sense  (of  the)  D irinc  glory,  Dicine  love,  and  Divine  wisdom 
wbich-the  Heavenly  Father  had  placed  in-the  Divine  Man, 
Christ  Jesus  our  Lord,  and-that-the  Apostle  felt  that-the-GW 
t>(  11,  ,ir,  i,  was  a  Cod  of  grace  and  a  God  of  love.  Nor  can- 
we  wonder  (hat  St-Paul,  who  had  seen-the  resurrection  glory 
of  Jesus  Christ,  should-be  Divinely  inspired  by-the  resur- 
rection nt  Christ,  to-preach-the  resurrection  of  tin  dead. 
Fewwho-have  beard  the  Church  of  England  Burial  Service 
will  forget  the  impressive  Lesson  from-the  Firsl  Epistlt  to  the 
Corinthians  dealing  with-the  resurrection  of  the  dead,  and 
describing  what  shall-be  the  resurrection  of  the  body  and  how 
we-shall  rise  again.  My  dear  fellow-sinners,  I-might  cite 
much-more  from-the  Holy  Word  of  God  to  show  how  the 
coming  oi-our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  who-is  our  Saviour,  has 
brought  the  kingdom  of  the  world,  or-rather,  the  kingdom  of 
this  world,  under-the  influence  (of  the)  kingdom  of  heaven, 
which-is-the  kingdom  of  grace.  Hut,  my  brethren,  you-will 
admit  that  the  constant  and  extending  knowledge  of  Chris- 
tianity is  bringing  the  world  to-be,  in  the  words  of  the  text 
or-the  language  of  the  text,  the  "kingdom  of  God."  May 
God  in  His  goodness  basten  that  time  ! 

But,  my  dear  friends,  let-us  endeavor  to-extend  our  knowl- 
edge of  the  truth,  which-will  lead  us  to  a  fuller  knowledge  of 
God,  and  a  truer  idea  (of  the)  omnipoU  nee  of  God,  the  omni- 
presence of  God,  and-the  omniscience  of  God.    Believers  in- 


200  EXERCISE   ON    THEOLOGICAL   PHRASES. 

the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  will  for  Christ's  sake,  as  Christian 
brethren,  as  members  (of  the)  Church  of  Christ,  the  Episcopal 
Church,  or  any  other,  and  whether-they  belong  to-the  Church 
of  Ireland,  the  Church  of  Rome  or  Roman  Catholic  Church, 
the  New  Church  or  to-some  other  Protestant  Church  or  Re- 
formed Church,  endeavor  to  show  God's  glory  in-this-way 
and  prove  to-those  familiar  only  with-the  ways  of  the  world, 
not-only  the  wisdom  of  God.  but-that  God  is  good  and  Qod  is 
great.  God's  law  and  God's  justice  in  the  Divine  gov<  rnm<  nt 
of  the  universe,  are  clear  to  all  children  of  God,  and  every 
child  of  God  to- whom  the  things  of  men  are  known,  feels  that 
both  in  body  and  mind  each  fellow-creature  is,  in  tin  provi- 
dence of  God,  directed  through  life.  To  both  the  just  and  the 
unjust  their  daily  bread  is  vouchsafed  by  the  Divine  Being 
who  reigns  for  ever  and  ever,  the  Almighty  and  Everlasting 
God  who  at  the  last  day  shall  judge  the  heart  of  man.  Will 
that-day  be-one  of  eternal  condemnation  or  eternal  dam  nation 
to  each  one  of  us  ;  of  everlasting  misery  or  of  everlasting  life? 
May  the  blood  of  Christ,  who-is-now  at  the  right  hand  of  Qod, 
the  sacrifice  (of  the)  just  for  the  unjust,  be-found,  my  fellow- 
sinners,  a  perfect  plea  for-thc  quick  and  the  dead!  Oh,  my 
dear  friends,  seek  justification  by  faith,  lor  justification  by  the 
works  of  tin  law  will  not  avail.  Every  penitent  sinner  who 
casts  aside  love  of  self  may  hope,  at-the  resurrection  of  the 
just,  to-be  a  son  of  God  among-the  sons  of  God,  to  dwell  in 
the  city  of  God,  the  heavenly  Jerusalem,  and  through  Christ 
to  partake  (of  the)  tree  of  life  and-the  water  of  life,  and  to 
enjoy  everlasting  day,  I-have-now,  my  friends,  dwelt  on  my 
text  with-regard-to-the  Lord's  Kingdom  in  heaven  ami  earth. 
I-have  dwelt  on-the  forgiveness  of  sins  through  the  blood  of 
Jesus.  1-have-shown  the  fruits  of  the  Spirit,  and  pointed  out 
how-our  future  state  in  the  future  world  is  fixed  for  ever  in 
faith  in  JesUS  Christ,  now  at  tin;  right  hand  of  God  the 
"Father.  For  Christ's  sake  let  me  urge  again  on-every  Christian 
brother  who  believes  in  Christ  Jesus,  the  importance  (of  the) 
day  of  redemption  throagh-the  body  and  blood  of  Christ,  the 
blessed  Lord,  the  only  begotten  son  of  God,  who-is-the  image 
of  God,    and  at-the  right  hand  of  the  "Father.     May   we  all 


EXERCISE  ON   THEOLOGICAL   PHRASES.  201 

through  Christ,  who-is  our  God  and  Saviour  in-the  Trinity 
in  Unity  find  eternal  bliss  and  see  our  blessed  Lord  at-the 
right  hand  of  God.  God  is  faithful,  and-if-we  grow  in  grace 
and  see  that  others  are  growing  in  grace  in  the  sight  of  God, 
and-have-the  spirit  of  Christ  in  the  heart,  then-the  Scripture 
promises  found  in  the  Word  of  God,  not-only  in-the  Old 
Testament  bul  in-the  New  Testament  Scriptures,  which-have 
a  spiritual  meaning  and  a  spiritual  sense,  will-lie  fulfilled  in- 
fche  providence  of  God  through  the  Spirit  of  God. 

My  dear  friends,  as  &  minister  of  the  Gospel,  there-are-some 
subjects  which  affect  our  Christian  character  on  which  I-de- 
site  to-speak  in  the  Church,  as-//*  the  presence  of  God.  Jig 
reverend  brother  who  filled  t  his  place  1  lefore-me,  also  the  Sight 
Rev,  Bishop  of-this  diocese,  many  other  Eight  Reverend  prel- 
ates, and  also  a  distinguished  Elder  of  the  Church,  have,  in- 
the  sjiirit  of  Christ,  in  Christian  charity,  spoken  on-these- 
things  in  church  and-have  founded  their  remarks  on-the  sec- 
ond epistle  of  St  John  and  St  Paul's  Epistle  to  Titus.  They- 
liave  felt  that  in  the  midst  of  life  we-are  in  death,  and-that 
all  should-be  prepared  for-the  home  described  in  the  words 
of  our  text.  Our  Lord,  they  believe  blesses  all  true  work  in 
Christ,  whether  of  those-who  profess  the  Protestant  faith  or 
I'm!,  staut  religion,  or  those-who-are  (of  the)  Catholic  faith, 
belong  to-the  Catholic  Church  and  join  in  Catholic  worship 
in  Roman  Catholic  sanctuaries,  under  a  ( 'atholic  priest,  to  Al- 
mighty  Ghd,  to-the  Lord  and  Saviour,  to  the  H.o\y-Spvrit  of 
God,  and  invoke  the  Virgin  Mary.  Et-is-felt  by-these  that 
Church  principles,  articles  of  religion,  and-the  relations  of 
Church  and  state  are  valuable  only  when-they  promote  our 
Lord's  glory  and-the  study  (of  the)  WordofG-od.  This  study 
should-not-be  limited  to-the  Sabbath  Day,to-the  Sabbath  school 
or-the  Sunday  school.  Nor should-it be  limited  tc-theLord'i 
prayer,  participation  in-the  Lord's  supper  or  even  to  family 
prayer.  The  religion  of  Christ  Jesus  recognizes  no  holy  place 
but  should-be  practised  everywhere,  it  is  not  nan-owed  to-the 
works  of  the  law,  but  lor  Jesus  Christ's  sah  ,  and-in-t  he  strength 
(of  the)  cross  of  Christ,  Christians  euter  on  mission  work  to- 
make  known  the  everlasting  God. 


202  LATIN   QUOTATION'S. 


LATIN   QUOTATIONS.* 

A. 
A  fortiori.     From  stronger  reasoning      Ky^ 
A  priori.     From  the  former      *\/ 
Ab  initio.     From  the  beginning     .>^. 

Ad  interim.     For  the  meanwhile     jbrT! 

Ad  infinitum.     To  infinity     tA^. 

Ad  libitum.     At  pleasure      \£\.. 

Ad  litem.     To  (or  in)  the  suit      l.x^>„ 

Ad  valorem.     According  to  the  value     ..Q^. 

Alma  mater.     A  kind  mother     C^ — ^ 

Anno  Domini,  A.  D.     In  the  year  of  our  Lord     "|A^ 

Assumpsit.     He  engaged  to  pay      -H 

B. 

Bona1  tide.     In  good  faith     ^"""^S 
Bona  tides.     Good  faith  S 

C. 
Certiorari.     To  be  made  more  certain     ~//l^' 
Cestuique  trust.     Persons  for  whose  use  another      p 

has  title  to  hinds,   etc.      ~\ 
Cum  grano  salis.      With  a  grain  of  sail  \ ' 

D. 
De  bene  esse.     As  being  well  done  for  the  present     k.\ 
I  >e  facto.     Actually  so     lv_ 
De  jure     Legally  so  (by  law)      J 

Poi  .in  extended  list.  Bee  "Technical  Reporting."    By  T.  A.  Reed, 
en  pagea.     Pi  Ice  40c.;  cloth,  50c. 


I.  \n\   QUOTATIONS.  203 

De  novo.      Anew       ^~A£. 
Desideratum.     A  tiling  desired     4-^ 

i-:. 

El  alium.     And  another     \C^ 

El  alios  let  al.  ).      And  others      \f 

Ex  cathedra.     From  the  chair  (authoritatively)      ~7 

Ex  mero  motu.     From  a  mere  motion     __u  ^~y     L 

Ex  officio.     By  virtue  of  his  office 

Ex  parte.     Without  opposition         vj 

Ex  post  facto.     By  a  subsequent  act 

F. 
Far  simile.      An  exact  copy      v — ^-J^ 
Fieri  facias.      Cause  it  to  lie  done     Vy\_^ 
Fortiter  in  re.     With  firmness  in  acting        ""S-" 

II. 
Habeas  corpus.      You  are  to  bring  up  the  body     <5^ — 

I. 

In  esse.     In  actual  being        ") 

In  exteliso.       In   full         ^ — v 

In  futuro.      In  tut  in  e      "]/ 

In  medias  res.      Into  the  very  midst  of  things  J-*1* 

In  re.      In  the  matter  of  s* 

In  statu  (pio.      As  it  was       ? 

In  toto.      In  the  whole 

In  transitu.      On  the  passage  Lf 

Inter  alia.     Among  other  things      -p 

Inter  nos.     Between  ourselves 

Inter  se.      Among  themselves      J 

Ipso  facto.     In  the  fact  itself       y- — , 


204 


LATIN   QUOTATIONS. 


Laches.     Neglect     f]> 

Lis  pendens.     A  pending'  suit     t> 

M. 
Mens  sana  in  corpore  sano.     A  sound  mind 

in  a  sound  body 
Modus  operandi.     The  mode  of  operation       1/ — i 
Multum  in  parvo.     Much  in  little     '\/\. 

N. 
Ne  plus  ultra.     No  farther     ""VI 
Nolens  volens.     Whether  he  will  or  no      ^_ 
Nolle  prosequi.     To  be  unwilling  to  prosecute     T  ^V-^ 


X 


Non  compos  mentis.     Not  of  sound  mind 

Non  constat.     It  does  not  appear  p 

Non  est.      Not  to  be  found  ) 

Non  sequitur.     It  does  not  follow 

Nota  bene,  N.  B.     Marls  well     "V_^. 

Nulla  bona.     No  goods      /  \_^ 

Nunc  pro  tune.      Now  for  then     -^~^T 

P. 
Pendente  lite.     Pending  the  suit      ^"""J^l 
Per  annum.     By  the  year     \^ 

Per  Capita.      By  the  head  (share  and  share  alike)       \ 

Per  centum.     By  the  hundred     \/~  [^ 

I'cr  contra.      <  >n  the   other  side      'N'j 

Per  diem.     By  the  day      n  U^ 
Per  se.     By  itself    '  /\ 

I'cr  stirpes.      Adcording  to  I  be  original  stock      \/^ I 

Post  factum.     Aiter  the  deed        ^i 


LATIN    QUOTATIONS. 

I'o-t  mortem.     After  death     V-n/U^ 

Prima  facie.     At  first  view  or  appearance 

Pro  bono  publico.      For  the  public  good      ^^      v 

Pro  forma.      As  a  matter  of  form        \__^ 

Pro  rata.     In  proportion     N/j 

Pro  tanto.      For  so  much     ^   L, 

Pro  tempore.      For  the  time  being       \  l~~s 

Q- 

Quantum  meruit.     As  much  as  lie  deserved     '    ^i 
Quid  nunc.     What  now  '.     <~\^^ 

c 

Quid  pro  quo.     One  thing  for  another       k 
Quo  warranto.     By  what  warrant     c_t//'~] 

R. 
Pes  adjudicata.     A  thing  adjudged    ^>:  £~\ 
Res  gestte.     Things  done       -if 

S. 

Sine  die.      Without  a  day       ~^\' 
Sine  qua  tion.      Without  winch,  not     c~<~ ^-? 
Status  quo.      rl 'lie  state  in  which       <£_ 
Sub  rosa.     Under  the  rose,  secretly     *\/J 

T. 
Terra  tirma.      Drv  land      L^V- 


205 


Venue.     The  place  of  trial     ^_^ 

Nice  versa.     The  terms  being  reversed      ^m? 

Viva  voce.     By  the  living  voice     O^ 


206  FRENCH    WORDS    AND    PHRASES. 

FRENCH    WORDS   AND   PHRASES.* 

A  la  mode.     Fashionable     •'  ' 

Amende  honorable.      Honorable  apology  ^"X 

Amour  propre.     Self-love     .—^V^ 

A  outrance.     To  extremities     _j 

Au  courant.     Well  acquainted  with     -±s 

An  fait.     Expert     ^_ 

Au  revoir.      Adieu  until  we  meet  again    /Vt^-^' 

Au  serieux.      Seriously        <^n 

Beau  monde.     Tlie  fashionable  world      \  ^> 

Ce  n'est  que  le  premier  pas  <]iii  coute.                       v 
It  is  only  the  first  step  that  is  difficult     O— ' ^    / _"i 

Cela  va  sans  dire.      That  goes  without  saying  °~^-~. 

Chef  d'osuvre.      A  masterpiece       \ 
Comine  il  faut.     As  it  should  be     <—<  ^ 

Conseil  d'etat.      A  council  of  state      ~^~f  \ 

De  bonne  grace.      With  good  grace     |  .\.<_e 

Dernier  ressoi't.      A  last  resource   \sr 

Double  entendre.     A  double  meaning      J- — • 

Edition  de  luxe.     A  splendid  edition       L  I  (~ 

En  avant.     Forward      ^C^ 

Enfant   terrible.     A  terrible    child;   one   who 

makes  ill-timed  remarks  °  |/\ 

En  rapport.      In  relation     y-V 
I'.n   I'OUte,      <  >n  t  lie  way       *~r\ 
En  suite.      In  a  set 

Entente  cordiale.     A  cordial  understanding    '  S~V" 

*  Pot  an  extended  list,  see  "Technical  Reporting."    By  T.  A.  Reed. 
60  p  ige        Price  K)c;  cloth,  60c. 


FRENCH    WORDS   AMI    PHRASES.  207 

Entre  nous.     Between  ourselves  ' 

Facon  de  parler.     A  mode  of  speaking 
Fait,  accompli.     An  accomplished  fact     ^c-r. 

Fete  champetre.     A  country  festival     v./ — N 
Peu  de  joie.      Fireworks        j 

Hors  de  combat.     Out  of  condition  to  fight      ^  k 

Le  jcu  n'en  vaut  pas  las  chandelle.  The 

game  is  not  worth  the  candle       --/--— ^~-      <— y 

Mai  do  mer.     Seasickness     ^\^~y 
Mauvaise  sujet.      A  had  subject     ^~\p 

Noblesse  oblige.     Rank  imposes  obligations        V  \ 

Nona  de  guerre.     A  war  name;  an  assumed  „ 

travelling  name  ' 

Norn  de  plume.      A  pen  name     -— -^  |  \^ 
N"ous  avons  change  tons  cela.     We  have  / 

changed  all  that        ^^   ^7  " 


Nous  verrons.     "We  shall  see 


^/° 


On  «lit.     It  is  said      "1. 

Par  excellence.     By  the  way  of  eminence     \y    ° 
Pis  aller.     The  worst  or  last  shift      \^ 

liaison  d'etre.     The  reason  for  a  thing's  existence     ?~\ 
Ruse  de  guerre.     A  stratagem  of  war 


Sans  et  peur  sans  reproche.     "Without  fear  and 

without  reproach 
Sans  souci.     Without  care        ) 
Savoir  faire.     The  knowing  how  to  act  :  tact 

Tour  de  force.     A  feat  of  strength       -.  I  *v-^ 
Tout  le  monde.     All  the  world     ..1^-7 

Vive  lc  Roi.     Long  live  the  King    ^/..^l 


208 


WORDS    REQUIRING    VOWEL. 


251-252 


WORDS   REQUIRING   INSERTION   OF   VOWEL. 

251.   In   the  following  words,   the  vowels   marked   in 
italics  should  be  inserted  in  order  to  prevent  clashing  : — 


occept,  except 

abstract-ion,  obstract-ion 

achromatic,  chromatic 

acorn,  corn 

adamant,  demand 

adapt,  adopt 

address,  dress 

administration,  demonstration 

advance,  defence 

adventures  ulr  ntrs),  defenders 

advocate,  defect 

affluent,  fluent 

afore,  fore 

aliment,  element 

anomaly,  animal 

annual,  only 

anterior,  interior 

apathetic,  pathetic 

appurtenant,  pertinent 

apologue  1,  i  pilogue  2 

apportion,  portion 

apposite,  apposite 

apposition  2,  opposition  1,  po- 

appraiee,  praise  [sition,  :i 

approbation,  probation 

approximate,  proximate 

army,  arm 

ospi ration,  aspiration 

attempt,  tempi 

avocation,  vocation 


else,  less 

eflfi  ct,  fact 

endued,  endowed 

enemy,  name 

exorcise,  exercise 

extricate,  extract 

exalt  1.  ex'/lt  2 

failing,  feeling 

farrier,  farrier 

immigration,  emigration 

incautious,  noxious 

induction,  induction 

inefficacious,  infectious 

innovation,  invasion 

lad//,  lad 

liar,  lawyer 

lest,  last 

Maria,  Mary 

monarchy,  monarch 

monkey,  monk 

note,  nature,  (gram,  at) 

obsolete,  absolute 

pocket,  packet 

predict  (/a.  a",  iM),  predicate 

snow,  sun 

sulphite,  Bulphate 

test,  attest 

\ i ■  - 1  "i-r.  visitor 

voluble,  valuable,  available 

voracity,  veracity 


252.    The  student  will  meet  with  other  pairs  of  words 
in  which  there  is  a  Bpecial  liability  of  clashing,  unless  a 

vowel    is  inserted.      K\ perience  only   will    guide    him   in 
this  matter,  but  he  should  rat  I n  r  err  on  the   side   of    free 

vocalization  than  run  the  risk  of  illegibility  by  omitting 
all  rowels. 


LIST   OF   SIMILAR    WORDS.  209 

LIST   OF    SIMILAB    WORDS, 

DISTINGUISHED    r.Y     \    DIFFERENCE    OF   OUTLINE. 

mien  two  or  three  words  app  ar  unriU  r  one  outline,  tltey  are  distinguislu  d 
by  position,  marked  by  figures.  Vowels,  and  the  prefix  com  or  con, 
markedin  Italic,  should  in  inserted.,  even  in  Reporting. 

i>(hj        \j    l   compatible;      2  potable;      3  computable ; 
j     pitiable 

plk    s       optic ;      |      poetic 

plus   '\p   1  aptness;     j     pettiness 

jihj'  vA     petrify;    ^    putrefy 

plrj'kslia  n/V—j   petrifaction;      \_   putrefaction 

pirn    \    patron;    ^-"^  pattern 

pkr  \—  1  packer;   2  pecker;  3    ^ — >.  epicure 

pstr       ci    1  compositor  ;  2  pastry ;      j,  pasture,  posti  \re 

pshnt     iJ  passionate;      x/^  patient 

pnr  \_    2  opener;  pioneer;    \_x^  penury 

pljr     y  pledger;     /     plagiary;  \^7    pillager 

plsd  1     jP   placid;   N/"]    1  palsied;  2  palisade;  a  pellucid 

plsmn  \r^  placeman ;  \f       policeman 

jn-jis   x/\_,  l  porpoise;  2 purpose;  \Vi  perhaps,  propose 

prprt  \ appropriate;       \/|  property;    ^,   propriety; 

X/V  purport 
prprshn   \^  appropriation ;     \9  preparation 
prtk  CN —   partake  ;   \y —    1  operatic  ;  2  portico 
pr/r    \^  comparative;    N/^,   operativ<' 
prtnd    \    pretend ;  V-  portend 
prtr    ^    aperture ;      N     portray  ;     \/      operator 

**    X  porter;         *~n  parterre 

14 


210  LIST   OF   SIMILAR   WORDS. 

prch  y  2  approach ;  3  preach ;  \/f  1  parch ;  2  perch, 
porch 

Vrfr  ^\  proffer ;\s    prefer;  X/^X  porphyry,  periphery 
prvd    ^    provide ;   *\_  pervade 
prst  V.    poorest;  \A  purest;  \/]  pursuit 
prskt    v- prosecute;   X/~  persecute 
prshshn CV-3 prosecution ;  X/3  persecution 
prw     v^    oppressor ;     ^^/    piercer ;     \^r      peruser ; 
•S^  pursuer 

prsn,  c\j_^  2  person ;  3  prison ;  X/^"""'  1  parson,  compari- 
son ;  3  Parisian 

prsnt  C\L/  present,  personate ;  X/^  pursuant 

#»"*£     is     parcel,  parsley ;  X/6      parasol,  perusal 

prsh    \S  Prussia  ;  \/)  perish,  Persia 

prskn  ""Xj  oppression,  Prussian  ;  X/?  i>ortion,  appor- 
tion, Persian 

prmrvnt  c\^-^_^  1  prominent;  3  (rather  than  2,  to  pre- 
venl  clashing  with  the  previous  word)  perman- 
ent ;    X, ,  pre-eminent 

prns      >^  3  poorness ;  N/^^  3  pureness 
prnss    <•  princes ;V_^,  princess 

prls    \/        1  paralyze;  2  perilous 

/>'(/' \      beautify;   ^    beatify 

bltm  \     blossom;  N*'"^  balsam 

brb*\  bribe;  V\  barb 

brbr  ^<\briber;     n^/  bribery;   VvBarbary 

///■/•  \      2  break,  broke;  3  brick,  brook;    \/       bark 

brkr   \  -  breaker,  broker ;  \/~~  barker  [barrack 

brth   ^     1  broth;  2  breath;  VI  birth 


LIST  OF   SIMILAR    WORDS.  211 

brl    <"V"'    barley;    \y     barrel,    burial;    ^->y-    barely 

\y       barilla 
Tnr    |_^    1  tanner;  2  tenor;  3  tuner;  L-^v  tenure 
trtr    \    2  traitor;   3  treater ;   L-\    Tartar;    T-^  torture 

[/]/  territory,  Tartary 
trst  \  1  contrast;  2  traced,  trust;  3triste;   I   3  truest 
trshn     \,  attrition,    contrition ;    y>    contortion,    tertian 

\P  iteration 
l)tv\  1  daughter,  auditor ;  2  debtor ;  3  doubter ;  L^  editor  ; 

I        1  auditory,  dietary;  2  deter;  3  detour 
dlriiutfh    detriment-al ;     Vs determined 
dfns    \^_r,    advance,  defence,  deafness;    I         defiance, 

diaphanous 
dir  |  2  defray;  3  differ ;  (^  2  defer; 3 devour;  ^  defier 
dvrs  J  divers,  adverse ;  [^  diverse,  divorce 
dstn  I  destine;  \  destiny;  j>  destination;  [^  distinction 
dss  \  disease,  disuse  (v.);  A  disuse  («.) ;  I  1  diocese; 
dsst  j  diseased;  \  deceased;  b  desist  [3  decease 
(////•     \s      adultery  ;      \\     idolatry  ;      'j'  idolater 

V       adulator,  dilwter 
Jul  (^  giant;  /  agent;  jnts  /-  giants;  c_^  giantess 
jntl  y  genteel,  gentle,  gently ;    y~  Gentile 
Mrs      \  actors,  actress ;       \  cateress;       l^   cauterise 

kvlr    \- 1  caviler ;       V/A  cavalier 
Jcslcrt — a-  execrate;    — a-/ excoriate 

Jcshrshn  =   excursion,  execration;      n    ?  excoriation 

kips        \,  eclipse ;  __f\>  collapse 
Tcltr   *~~\  clatter  ;       U     culture. 


212  LIST   OF   SIMILAR   WORDS. 

JclJc  c 1  clock  ;  2  cloak,  click ;  — f      colic,  calico 

Mm  c_^-n  1  climb  ;  2  claim,  acclaim  ;    7^.    column,  culm 

Mmt  cs^  climate ;   7T    calumet ;    ^  calamity 

khnnt  =-^^^1  culminate ;     L—~- j  calumniate 

hrprl  c-\^"  corporal ;  cr_N^  corporeal 

Jcrt  c-    1  accord;    2   court;    /    1   carat;    2   accurate; 

3  curate  ;  — S\  charta ;         !    cruet 

Icrtr  <r~\     1  carter;    2   Creator,  crater;    _/^   curator; 
L    creature,  courtier ;       |/    criteria 

krdns   T  credence ;  ^       1  accordance 

hrj  ^1    courage  ;  — j  carriage 

grdn  c-s  1  garden  ;    ^"3  1  guardian,  Gordian ;  2  guerdon 

grnt  c — ~  1  granite  ;   — '      garnet 

Fktr^ — n  factor;  v — i     factory 

ford   V     favored;    Ve^  favorite 

fnrl  Wf  funereal ;   ^y-  funeral 

frtn  V/w  fortune  ;  ^  frighten  ;  V_/j  fourteen 

frm^^     1  farm,  form,  coaform;  2  firm,  confirm,  affirm; 
\y^~^  forum 

frns  v         ferns,  conference ;       ^      fairness 

frwrd  V^  forward;  "^X,  froward 

vlshn^J°l violation;  2 volition, evolution;  ^>    convulsion 
vltu  \j^  1  violence ;   V    vileness  [2  verity 

?•>•£    (l  convert;    ^    avert;  S  virtue;  v/J  l  variety; 
,s'/'/7  <x  spirit;    \/   support,  Buppurate ;    CNi  separate 

std    p2  .stead,    staid;    8    steed.    Stood;  steady,   study; 

P  l  sighted  ;  2  seated,  suited 
stshn  J  1  citation;  2 station;     J   situation 


LIST   OP  SIMILAR   WORDS.  213 

sfr  )  oyster,  Easter;  ^  austere,  astir;  \  astray, 
Austria  ;    V  estuary 

sdrt  [     considerate;  1  considered 

sst  )  assist;    ")  consist;    )  essayist;     <t    society,  siesta 

snt  ^  1  sent  (to  distinguish  it  from  the  present  tense 
o_,   sou?,    written   on   the    line) 

sii/r  Q  j   sentry ;    ^/    century 

sltr  b  ]/  solitary,  salutary,  conciliatory;  (T\  sultry; 
6"""^  psaltery 

Mpsli)it(rf)   s~S>  impassioned;  ^7"    impatient 

mn  s~^  1  many.  m\  own;  2  money  ♦ 

mnstr  y~^p  1  monster;  2  minster,  minister ;  '  '  min- 
istry ;  1/  monastery 

un-th-c; — --murder;    ^-~y\  marauder 

mrdrs  <r    b  murders;        '   murderous,  murderess 

ndfnt     (   indefinite;    "-Vo  undefined 

njns    I  .  ingenious;     *~*\  ingenuous 

nvdftjbl     \^    unavoidable;        ^inevitable 

IJni  laboured  (adj.)  •,    /^V  elaborate 

Ikl  C~  local ;  f~J'    1  likely  ;  2  luckily 

Irnd  I       learned  (verb)  •,    r^       learned  (adj.) 

rlstis     1       1  righteousness,  riot <<«sness;  2  reticence 

rgrt     r  regard;  regret 

rsm  /*~~*    resume;    ')-^    reassume 


rsrs  racers,  resource ;    ,-^f      racenorse 

rnst    -^  rinsed;    ~^    earnest 
Hmn    '-^    1  Bymen,  human  ;  2  humane 
hind  y  Holland  ;    %  Highland;    ■'"  Holy  Land 
hrn^  l   horn;    3  hereon;     >        l    horny;    :?   herein 
<r^ 'heron;  <f^      heroine 


214 

REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

i.  ^  *  —y\<r*     v-<  ^    ■  ^f)  \  ^  )r^ 
y^. '  s   ^  '  s  ~  -  c  ^  1^  n,,  JL  ^t  5  ,.f.. 

.  iC.o  ^  >  ^  ^  ^  \  \'  ~Al*  •  -V  o  A°V 
^  %  r  .^-  (.  V.  ^  ,  ,  l '  Af)  ■  |^\_,  Y  ^  sJI, '  \ 
J-;  **f   •  V_   i^   ~  *  *  -  '  ^  ~      *  l_^  x  A-( 

/     -V-  ..   )    V     n     x      *     .    ..    ^     VL    x     ov'      (      °-tp     /    ) 

v  ^^  x  r, .  ■>—  ^  ^tC^  v.  -^.  /^  \  y\  ./v. '  %  w  x 

-  i^~'40x  ..(,.  t7M»^  -v^  >  ^  /_ 

> .  ^  •'V,  )  ^  r*  f  ~ «-  v  ../..  ^    "  i  /  x  J. 

-=£ ;  t  /Co  o  vnx  i  rv  '  \.  c  •  \.° '  ^  ^ 

k  $  x^ '  ~\. N  •  --  ^y  «k  °  -  )  .  ^  r  s  -~ 
—    I  —  Sl'  ^.  /»•  r )  ^  ^  *\H* 

;  '\n  r\. ,  )_,  v ^  -  v_ h  *y  •  v.  ^  u 
Lo  i  •  \n\  fa  v '  ^.^..  a  f  o"  i^  :>-.  j-  /   ■> 

">-,  <s    Lsy«.«rv^'o  -A-  -  -)••■ s  /  ^  ^  C  y 


REPORTING    EXERCISES.  215 

REPOKTINc      EXERCISES. 


1.— SERMON    ON    THE    IMMORTALITY    OF   THE    SOUL. 

For  a',  know  that  if  our  earthly  hous<  of  this  tabemaclt  were  dis- 
tolved,  we  //arc  a  building  of  God,  a  housi  not  made  with  hands,  eternal 
in  the  heavens.— 2  Corinthians,  5.  1. 

This  passage  presents  to  us,  in  one  view,  the  nature  of  our  present 
earthly  stale,  and  the  future  object  of  the  Christian's  hope.  The  style 
is  figurative  ;  hut  the  figures  employed  are  both  obvious  and  expressive. 
The  body  is  represented  as  a  house  inhabited  by  the  soul,  or  the  think- 
ing part  of  man.  Bat  it  is  an  "earthly  house,"  a  "  tabernacle  "  erected 
only  for  passing  accommodation,  and  "to  be  dissolved  ;"  to  which  is 
to  succeed  the  future  dwelling  of  the  just  in  "a  building  of  God,  a 
house  not  made  with  hands,  eternal  in  the  heavens."  Here  then  are 
three  great  objects  presented  to  our  consideration.  First,  the  nature 
of  our  present  condition.  Secondly,  that  succeeding  state  which  is  the 
object  of  good  men's  hope.  Thirdly,  the  certain  foundation  of  their 
hope;  "we  know,  that  if  our  earthly  house  be  dissolved,  we  have  a 
building  of  God." 

Fir*/.  The  text  gives  a  full  description  of  our  present  embodied  state, 
as  an  "earthly  bouse."  atl  "earthly  house  of  this  tabernacle,"  and  a 
tabernacle  which  is  to  be  "dissolved." 

We  dwell  in  an  "earthly  house."  Within  this  cottage  of  earth  is 
lodged  that  spiritual,  immortal  substance,  into  which  God  breathed  the 
breath  of  life.  So  we  are  elsewhere  saiil  in  Scripture  to  have  "our 
foundation  in  the  dust,"  and  to  "dwell  in  houses  of  clay."  During  its 
continuance  in  this  humble  abode,  the  soul  may  be  justly  considered  as 
confined  and  imprisoned.  It  i-  restrained  from  the  full  exertion  of  its 
powers  by  many  obstructions.  It  can  perceive  and  act  only  by  very 
imperfect  organs.  It  looks  abroad  as  through  the  windowsof  the  senses; 
and  beholds  truth  as  "through  a  glass,  darkly."  It  is  besel  with  a  numer- 
ous train  of  temptations  to  evil,  which  arise  from  bodily  appetites.  It 
is  obliged  to  sympathize  with  the  body  in  its  wants:  and  it  i<  depressed 
with  infirmities  not  its  own.  For  it  suffers  from  the  frailty  of  those 
materials  of  which  its  earthly  house  is  compacted.  It  languishes  and 
droops  along  with  the  body ;  is  wounded  by  its  pains;  and  the  slightest 
discomposure  of  bodily  organs  is  sufficienl  to  derange  some  of  tin-  highest 

operations  of  the  soul. 
All  tlie--e  circumstances   bear  the   marks  of  a  fallen  and   degraded 

state  of  human  nature.  The  man-ion  in  which  the  soul  is  lodged 
corresponds  so  little  with  the  powers  and  capacities  of  a  rational  im- 
mortal spirit,  as  gives  ns  reason  to  think  that  the  souls  of  good  men 
were  not  designed  to  remain  always  thus  confined.  Such  a  state  was 
calculated  for  answering  tin'  ends  proposed  by  our  condition  of  trial 
and  probation  in  this  life,  but  was  not  intended  to  be  lasting  and 
tinal.  Accordingly,  the  Apostle,  in  his  description,  calls  it  the  earthly 
house  "of  this  tabernacle;"  alluding  to  a  wayfaring  or  sojourning 
state,  where  tabernacles  or  tents  are  occasionally  erected  for  the  ac 
commodation  of  passengers.    The  same  metaphor   is   here  made   nse 


216  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

•    -^     ^o    "     V,    ^   ^     ^     s    -U    x  "      <    M     (    .)_    ,    '    1_ 


rt    '    1       ~*      l\.U    ,1    ,CX       ^    (. 


M      <f 


«/' 


^  °  io  ~      V)  /  v  \  1 


rv 


r  ■  V>  V-  i     '  n,  /  )  ^v  ~-    ^  L,  \  {  -\ 

V-       •    '     I    -     .  v  •  *  (  -  i  '     ,  ?  N  — 


SERMON    BY   DR.    BLAIR.  217 

of.  which  is  employed  in  several  other  passages  of  Scripture,  where  we 
are  said  t<>  be  "strangers  and  sojourners  on  earth  before  (iod,  as  were 
all  our  fathers."    This  earth  may  be  compared  to  a  wide  field  spread 

With    tents,    where    tTOOpS    Of    pilgrims    appear  in    Succession    and    pass 

away.  They  enter  tor  a  little  while  into  the  tents  prepared  for  them; 
and  remain  there  to  undergo  their  appointed  probation.  When  that 
is  finished,  their  tents  are  taken  down,  and  they  retire  to  make  way 
tor  others  who  come  forward  in  their  allotted  order.  Thus  "one 
generation  passeth  away,  and  another  generation  cometh;"  and  the 
"earthly  house  "  is  to  all  no  other  than  the  "  house  of  their  pilgrimage." 
The  "earthly  house  of  this  taliernaele,"  the  Apo-tle,  proceeding  in 
his    description,    tells    us,    is    "to    lie    dissolved."     Close    as    the    union 

between  the  soul  and  the  hody  now  appears  to  he,  it  is  no  more  than 
a  temporary  union.  It.  snhsists  only  during  the  continuance  of  a 
tabernacle  of  dust,  which,  by  its  nature,  is  tending  towards  ruin.  The 
"dust"  must  s,i,,]i  "return  to  the  dust,  and  the  spirit,  to  God  who 
gave  it."  The  dissolution  of  the  "earthly  house  of  this  tabernacle," 
i-  an  event  full  of  dismay  to  wicked  men.  Beyond  that  period  they 
see  nothing  hut  a  dark  unknown,  which,  as  far  as  they  can  discern, 

is  peopled  with  objects  full  of  terror;  even  to  the  ju-t  this  dissolution 
is    a    BeriollS    and    awful    event.      Providence  has   wisely  appointed  that, 

burdened  as  our  present    state  i-  with   various  ills  and  frailties,  we 

should,   however,    he   naturally   attached   to  it.      lis  final   close   is  always 

attended  with  several  melancholy  ideas  Thou  who  now  flourishes! 
most  in  health  and  Strength,  must  then  have  thy  head  laid  low. 
From  thy  closing  eves  the  light  of  the  sun  shall  disappear  for  ever. 
That  light  -hall  continue  to  shine,  the  seasons  to  return,  and  the 
earth  to  flourish  ;  hut  to  thee  no  more:  separated  from  the  dwellings 
of  men.  and  cut  off  from  all  thou  wast  accustomed  to  love,  as  though 
thou  hadsl  never  been.  Such  is  the  fate  of  man  considered  merely 
as  mortal  :  a-  dwelling  in  an  earthly  house  which  is  about  to  be  dis- 
solved The  consolatory  corrective  of  those  bumbling  ideas,  the  ray 
thai  is  to  dissipate  this  gloom,  we  behold  in  the  subsequent  part  of 
the  text  ;  that  when  this  earthly  bouse  is  dissolved,  there  is  prepared 
for  the  righteous  "a  building  of  God,  a  house  not  mule  with  hind-." 
But.  before  proceeding  to  this  part  of  the  subject,  let  us  pause  and  make 
some  reflections  on  what  has  been  already  said. 

Let  the  distinction  between  the  soul  and  the  body,  which  is  so 
clearly  marked  in  the  text,  he  deeply  imprinted  on  our  minds.  Few 
things  in  religion  or  morals  are  entitled  to  make  a  Btronger  impression 
than  this  distinction  ;  and  yet.  with  the  hulk  of  men,  the   impression 

it   makes  appears  to   he  slight.     They   seem   to   think   and   art   as   if  they 

Consisted    of   no    more    than    mere    lle-h    and    h! 1.    and    had    no  other 

concerns  than  what  respect  their  embodied  -late.  If  their  health  he 
firm,  if  their  senses  he  gratified,  and  their  appetites  indulged,  all  i- 
well  with  them.  Is  not  this  to  forget  that  the  hody  is  no  more  than 
an  "earthly  house"  or  "  I  ■ihernacle  "  of  the  soul'.'  The  soul,  that 
thinking  part  which  they  feel  within  them,  and  which  it  i-  impossible 
for  them  to  confound  with  their  flesh  or  their  hones,  ie  certainly  far 
nobler  than  the  tenement  of  clay  which  it  inhabits.  The  soul  is  the 
principle  of  all  life,  and    knowledge,   and    action      The  body  is  no 


218  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

/I  -  -  ^  ~  x .  ^  n  ^j  l  <  v,  r  \  /.  v  —  iA 

V  •  rt  '  ^  "  C  *y  \^  W  ^  ^  ^  _  Y  ' 
j^  b  r*  -W  ^  \,  .  j>  *       v|,    \  V£ '  s  b 

i  v  i^ ,  r / ^  i  y^*  0  V  ~  —••  <o '%  i  ~ 
)  \  1/  x  i  /  ^r  '  r  \ '  u  -  ^  I_  \.  -,<>. « 
<L\/  \-       ^    /  ,     '.  .y  (  **°~S-»ub' 

<n  ( \  x  >~g  '  i^  /  v  nl  k»  ,. <  >>  k  *~.  fc  £  -V 

~n»  .  s  —   '  '        A.  '  \  "     /'  ~  ' 


SERMON   RY   DR.    RT.AIR.  219 

more  than  Its  instrument  or  organ  ;  and  as  nincli  nobler  as  is  the  part 
which  belongs  to  him  who  employs  an  instrument,  than  to  the  instru- 
ment which  is  employed,  so  much  is  the  soul  of  greater  dignity  than 
the  body.  The  one  is  only  a  frail  and  perishable  machine;  the  other 
survives  its  ruin,  and  lives  forever.  During  the  time  that  the  anion 
continues  between  those  two  very  different  parts  of  our  frame,  I  by 
no  means  say  thai  it  is  incumbent  upon  us  to  disregard  all  thai  relates 
to  the  body.  It  is  not  possible,  nor.  though  it  were  possible,  would 
it  be  requisite  or  tit  for  man  to  act  as  if  he  were  pure  immaterial 
spirit.  This  is  what  the  condition  and  laws  of  our  nature  permit  not. 
l'.ut  must  not  the  greatest  sensualist  admit  that,  if  the  soul  be  the 
chief  part  of  man.  it  must  have  interests  of  its  own,  which  require 
to  be  carefully  attended  to?  Can  he  imagine  that,  hi'  truly  consults 
either  his  interest  or  his  pleasure,  if  he  employs  the  thinking  part  of 
his  nature  only  to  serve,  and  to  minister,  to  the  bodily  part?  Mast 
not  this  infer,  not  merely  a  degradation  of  the  superior  part,  but  an 
entire  perversion  of  that  whole  constitution  of  nature  which  our 
Maker  has  given  us?  Be  assured,  toy  brethren,  that  the  soul  has  a 
health  and  a  sickness,  has  pleasures  and  pains  of  its  own.  quite  dis- 
tinct from  those  of  the  body,  and  which  have  a  powerful  influence  on 
the  happiness  or  misery  of  man.  He  who  pays  no  attention  to  these, 
and  neglects  all  care  of  preserving  the  health  and  soundness  of  his 
soul,  is  not  only  preparing  final  misery  for  himself  when  he  shall 
enter  into  a  disembodied  state,  but  is  laying,  even  for  his  present 
state,  the  foundation  of  many  a  bitter  distress.  By  folly  and  guilt  he 
is  wounding  his  spirit.  Its  wounds  will  often  bleed  when  his  body 
appears  sound,  and  will  give  rise  to  inward  pane's  which  no  animal 
comforts  shall  be  able  to  assuai'e  or  heal. 

When  we  impress  our  minds  with  the  sense  of  this  important 
distinction  between  the  body  and  the  soul,  let  us  not  forget,  that 
closely  united  as  they  now  are  in  our  frame,  their  union  is  soon  to 
terminate.  "The  earthly  house  of  this  tabernacle  is  to  be  dissolved;"' 
but  the  soul  which  inhabits  it.  remains.  Let  us  therefore  dwell  in  our 
earthly  house  with  the  sentiments  of  those  who  know  they  are  about 
to  dislodge.  The  endowments  anil  improvements  of  the  soul  are  the 
only  possessions  on  which  we  can  reckon  as  continuing  to  be  our 
own.  (in  every  possession  which  belongs  to  our  bodily  estate,  we 
ought  to  view  Ibis  inscription  as  written  by  God  :  "This  is  an  earthly 
house  which  is  tottering  to  its  fall  ;  this  is  a  tabernacle  which  is  about  to 
i>e  taken  down."    Let  us  with  pleasure  turn  our  thoughts  towards  those 

higher   prospects    that    are   set    before    us.   when   this    change   shall    have 
taken  place  in  the  human  condition  ;  which  naturally  brings  us  to  the 
Second    head    of    discourse,     the    great    object    of    thc>    hope    of    good 

men  in  a  succeeding  Mate.  The  "  earthly  bouse  "is  contrasted  by  the 
Apostle  with  a  "building  of   God;   a  house  not  made  with  hands'"; 

and  the  "tabernacle  which  is  to  be  dissolved."  with  a  "house  eternal 
in  the  heavens." 

The  expressions  here  employed  to  signify  what  is  promised  to  the 
righteous,  a  building  of  God,  a  house  not  made  with  hands,  are  ex- 
pressions of    a  mysterious  import      They  suggest    to    u-    thitiu's    which 


220  REPORTING   EXERCISES. 


h   v  ■  ^  -x  s       ,  j  , 


SERMON    BY    DR.    BLAIR.  221 

we  cannol  now  conceive,  far  less  describe.  A  sacred  veil  conceals  the 
mansions  of  glory.  But,  in  general,  these  expressions  of  the  text  plainly 
import  thai  the  spirits  of  good  1 1 1> ■  1 1  shall  npon  death,  be  translated  from 
an  imperfect  to  a  gloriOCS  stale.  This  earth,  on  which  we  dwell,  i-  no 
more  than  an  exterior  region  of  the  great  kingdom  of  God.  It  is  bat  an 
entrance  through  which,  after  suitable  preparation,  we  pass  into  tin- 
palace   of   an    Almighty   Sovereign.    Admitted    there,    we    may    hope 

ti>  behold  far  greater  objects  than  we  cai w  behold;  and  t<>  enjoy 

in  perfection  those  pleasures  which  we  here  view  from  afar,  and  pursue 
in  vain.  Such  degrees  of  pleasure  are  allowed  us  at  present  as  our 
state  admits.  But  a  state  of  trial  required  that  pains  should  be 
intermixed  with  our  pleasures,  and  that  infirmity  and  distress  should 
often  be  fell.  The  remains  of  our  fall  appear  everywhere  in  our 
condition.  The  ruins  of  human  nature  present  themselves  on  all  hands 
But  when  that  which  is  perfect  Is  come,  that  which  is  in  part  shall  be 
done  away.  Into  that  house  not  made  with  bands,  that  building  of  God, 
we  have  every  reason  to  believe  that  there  will  be  no  room  for  such  guests 
to  intrude  as  care  or  Borrow.  Nothing  can  be  admitted  to  enter  there, 
but  what  contributes  to  the  felicity  of  those  whom  the  Almighty  has 
allowed  to  dwell  in  his  presence,  .and  to  behold  bis  face  iii  righteousness. 
Besides  the  glory  and  perfection  of  this  future  state,  the  text  suggests 

its  permanency.    This  "I se  not    made  with   hands."  is    "a    house 

eternal  in  the  heavens."    The  tabernacle  which  we  now  inhabit,  is  every 

moment  liable  to  fall  :   above  is  the   fixed   man-ion.  the  seat   of  perpetual 

rest.  Beyond  doubt,  the  certain  prospect  of  death  renders  everything 
inconsiderable  which  we  here  possess  Everj  enjoyment  is  saddened 
when  we  think  of  its  end  approaching.  We  become  sensible  thai  we 
are  always  building  on  sand,  never  on  a  rock.  Fluctuation  and  change 
characterize  all   thai   is  around    us;    and   at    the   moment    when    our 

attachment   to  any  persons  or  objects  is  bee •  the  strongest,  they 

are   beginning   to  slide  away  from  our   hold.    But   in   the   man-ions 

above,  alteration  and  decay  ar known.     Everything  there  contii - 

in  a  steady  course.  No  Bchemes  are  there  begun  and  left  unfinished  ;  no 
pleasing  connection-  just  formed  and  then  broken  off.  The  treasures 
possessed  there  shall  never  be  diminished ;   the  friend- we  enjoy  there 

shall  never  die  and  lea\  e  us  to  m n.    In  those  celestial  regions  shines 

the  sun  thai  never  sets  ;  a  calm  reigns  which  is  never  disturbed  .  the 
river  of  life  flows  w  ith  a  stream  which  i<  always  unruffled  in  its  course. 

Such  are  the  prospects,  imperfectly  as  we  can  now  conceive  them. 
which  are  set  forth  to  good  men  in  a  future  world.  Bui  how.  it 
may  be  asked,  -hall  we  be  satisfied  that  -neb  prospects  are  not  mere 

illusions    with    which    our    fancy    Hatter-     nsj      Upon    what     foundation 

rests  this  mighty  edifice  of  hope,  which  the  Apostle  here  rears  up  for 
the  consolation  of  Christians,  and  of  which  he  speaks  so  confidently 

as  to  say,   "We   k/iOW  that   if  our  earthh   house   Of  this   tabernacle  were 

dissolved,  we  have  a  building  of  God."    To  inquire  into  this  was  the 

Third  proposed  head  of  discourse,  to  which  we  now  proceed.    And 

as  the  subject  is  in  itself  so  important,  and  so  pleasing  to  all  good  men. 

1  -hall  take  a  view  of  the  different  kinds  of  evidence  upon  which  our 
faith  of  a  happy  immortality  is  grounded. 


c  ' 


222  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

*  y     Y  v-^  -v  y  r  i.  i^  ^  .\  u^  *• 

,o  ^  *  V,  x  \  ~  '  <v,^  ,  1.  r   Y  .^..2^  /     I  x  Y'^l 

••)■  ^  k>-  ^VV  ^  *°  ^  N  •  K  ^x  V 

■  *^  ^  "M,   c-  u  •  r  rt  0-  L  -v^  <   \;  r  " c  -/ 
\      ■  ^  ^„  1. 1  ^  r  J  )  \.°  x  ^  (  \  >j 


SERMON   BY   DR.    BLAIR.  223 

We  must  observe  in  the  first  place,  that  the  dissolution  of  the  earthly 
tabernacle  at  death,  affords  no  ground  for  thinking  that  the  soul  at  the 
same  time  perishes,  or  is  extinguished.  1  begin  with  this  observation, 
because  the  strongest  prejudices  against  the  souls  immortality,  arise 
from  what  is  sometimes  found  to  happen  at  that  period.  The  soul  and 
the  body  are  at  present  united  by  the  closest  sympathy.  When  one 
suffers,  the  other  is  affected.  Both  seem  to  grow  up  together  to 
the  maturity  of  their  powers;  and  together  both  seem  often  to  decay. 
Such  a  shock  is  apparently  suffered  by  the  soul  at  death  as  at  first 
view  might  lead  us  to  suspect  that  it  was  sharing  the  same  fate 
with  the  body.  Notwithstanding  this,  there  are  clear  proofs  that 
the  body  and  the  soul,  though  at  present  closely  connected  by  Divine 
appointment  with  one  another,  are,  however,  substances  of  different 
and  dissimilar  natures.  Matter,  of  which  the  body  is  composed,  is 
a  substance  altogether  dead  and  passive,  and  cannot  be  put  in  motion 
without  some  external  impulse;  whereas  the  soul  has  within  itself 
a  principle  of  motion,  activity,  and  life.  Between  the  laws  of  matter 
and  the  action  of  thought,  there  is  so  little  resemblance,  or  rather 
so  much  opposition,  that  mankind  in  general  have  agreed  in  holding 
the  soul  to  he  an  immaterial  substance  ;  that  is,  a  substance  the 
nature  of  which  we  cannot  explain  or  define  farther  than  that  it  is 
a  substance  quite  distinct  from  matter.  This  being  once  admitted, 
it  clearly  follows  that,  since  thought  depends  not  on  matter,  from 
the  dissolution  of  the  material  part  we  have  no  ground  to  infer  the 
destruction  of  the  thinking  part  of  man.  As  long  as  by  the  ordination 
of  the  Creator  these  different  substances  remain  united,  there  is  no 
wouder  that  the  one  should  sutler  from  the  disorder  or  indisposition  of 
the  oilier. 

It  is  so  far  from  following,  that  the  soul  must  cease'  to  act  on  the 
dissolution  of  the  body,  that  it  seems  rather  to  follow,  that  it  will 
then  act  in  a  more  perfect  manner.  Ill  i  I  ~  present,  habitat  ion  it  is 
plainly  limited  and  confined  in  ils  operations.  When  it  is  let  loose 
from  that  earthly  house,  il  is  brought  forth  into  greater  liberty.  To 
illustrate  this  by  an  instance  which  may  be  conceived  as  analogous; 
let.  us  suppose  a  person  shut  up  in  an  apartment,  where  he  saw  light 
only  through  Borne  small  windows.  If  these  windows  were  foul  or 
dimmed,  he  would  see  less;  if  they  were  altogether  darkened,  he 
could  see  none  at  all.  But  were  he  let  out  from  this  confinement 
into  the  open  air.  he  would  he  so  far  from  being  deprived  of  sight, 
that  though  at  first  overpowered  by  a  sudden    glare,  he  would  soon 

sec'  around  him  more  completely  than  before.  The  Senses  are  as  80 
many  windows  or  apertures,  through  which  the  soul  at  present 
exercises  its  powers  of  perception.  If  the  senses  are  disordered,  the 
powers  of  the  soul  will  be  obstructed.    But  once  separated  from  its 

earthly  tenement,  the  soul  will  then  exercise  its  powers  without 
obstruction;  will  act  with  greater  liberty  and  in  a  wider 'sphere.  I 
admit  this  argument  only  goes  so  far  as  to  show,  that  although  the 
body  perish,  there  remains  with  the  soul  a  capacity  for  separate 
existence.  Whether  that  existence  shall  he  actually  continued  to  it 
alter  death,   must   depend  on   the  will   of   llim    who    gave   il     life,   and 


224  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

^'^^A«    ^My     /  o   - «  is  ^  ^3 

o    ~\  "~\  ~*      "^     /  o      -    *    V^    -^  ^  '  ^\    ^? 

MU(NAU   C  «-  '  ^  ^  ^  *  <,  I  \  T  ^ 

^  N    -f  ?     -   (    Y,  "  J...  ~  ~  o,  .^  '  -};  .  ~n    A^ 


V 


■V.  *v  VT  j     C 


>V      ■  "/•    >-*>*    ^ 


L 


V 


>  — '  x    ^_  y  £  x  ^  w  >  x?  ^  ii  >  ^ s  ^  >_ 


SERMON    BY    DR.    BLAIR.  225 

who  certainly,  at  hi*  pleasure,  can  take  that  life  away.    It  is  necessary, 

therefore,  to  inquire  into  what  we  have  any  reason  to  believe,  may  be  the 
intention  of  our  (  Ireator  concerning  a  future  life. 

I  argue  then,  in  the  next  place,  that  if  the  soul  were  to  perish  when  the 
body  dies,  the  state  of  man  would  be  altogether  unsuitable  to  the  wisdom 
and  perfection  of  the  Author  of  his  being.  Man  would  be  the  only 
creature  that  would  seem  to  have  been  made  in  vain.  All  tiie  other 
works  of  Ibid  arc  contrived  to  answer  exactly  the  purposes  for  which 
they  were  made.  They  arc  either  incapable  of  knowledge  at  all  ;  or 
they  know  nothing  higher  than  the  state  in  which  they  are  placed. 
Their  powers  are  perfectly  suited  and  adjusted  to  their  condition. 
But  It,  is  not  so  with  man.  lie  has  every  appearance  of  being 
framed  for  something  higher  and  greater  than  what  be  here  attains. 
He  sees  the  narrow  bounds  within  which  he  is  here  confined;  knows 
and  laments  all  the  imperfections  of  his  present  state.  His  thirst 
for  knowledge,  his  desires  of  happiness,  ail  stretch  beyond  his  earthly 
station.  Ho  searches  in  vain  for  adequate  objects  to  gratify  him. 
His  nature  is  perpetually  tending  and  aspiring  towards  the  enjoyment 
of  some  more  complete  felicity  than  this  world  can  afford.  In  the 
midst  of  all  his  searches  and  aspirations  he  is  suddenly  cut  off. 
He  is  but  of  yesterday,  and  to  morrow  is  gone.  Often  in  the  en- 
trance, often  in  the  bloom  of  life,  when  lie  had  just  begun  to  act 
his  part,  and  to  expand  his  powers,  darkness  is  made  to  cover  him. 
Can  we  believe  that,  when  this  period  is  come,  all  is  finally  over  with 
the  best  ami  worthiest  of  mankind'/  Endowed  with  so  noble  an 
apparatus  of  rational  powers,  taught  to  form  high  views  and  enlarged 
desires,  were  they  brought  forth  for  no  other  purpose  than  to  breathe 
this  gross  and  impure  air  for  a  short,  space,  and  then  to  be  cut  off' 
from  till  existence'/  All  his  other  works  God  had  made  in  "weight, 
number  and  measure;"  the  hand  of  the  Almighty  artificer  everywhere 
appears.  But  on  man,  his  chief  work  here  below,  he  would,  upon 
this  supposition,  appear  to  have  bestowed  no  attention;  and  after 
having  erected  a  stately  palace  in  this  universe,  framed  with  SO  much 
magnificence,  and  decorated  with  so  mucll  beauty,  to  have  introduced 
man,  in  the  guise  of  a  neglected  wanderer,  to  become  its  inhabitant. 

Let  us  further  consider  the  confused  and  promiscuous  distribution 
of  good  and  evil  in  this  life.  The  enjoyments  of  the  world,  such  as 
they  are,  are  far  from  being  always  bestowed  on  the  virtuous  and 
the   worthy.     On    the   contrary    the    bitterest    portion    is   often    their   lot. 

In  the  midsl  of  infirmities,  diseases  and  sorrows,  they  are  left  to 
drag  their  life,  while  ease  and  affluence  are  allowed  to  the  ungodly. 
I  must  ask  if  such  an  arrangement  of  things,  owing  to  the  ordina- 
tion, or  at  least  to  the  permission  of  Providence,  be  consonant  to 
any  ideas  we  can  form  of  the  wisdom  and  goodness  of  a  Supreme 
Ruler,  on  the  supposition  of  there  being  no  future  state.  Hut  as 
soon  as  the  immortality  of  the  soul  and  a  -tale  of  future  retribution 
are  established,  all  difficulties  vanish;  the  mystery  is  unraveled; 
supreme  wisdom,  justice  and  goodness  are  discovered  to  be  only  con- 
cealed for  a  little  while  behind  the  curtain.  If  that  curtain  were 
never  to  be  withdrawn,  and  immortality  never  to  appear,  the  ways 
15 


226  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

^^M'^iu^  .,  v  ~  s  t. '  x  ••••  ■" 

..4.^^  Vv^fc^\—  ~*^    -I-    L 
^  (t.L.-^A  IW,^  \^V  ^°~^  ^J^ 

t^r   <    ^  A^O.  <A,  A.  I;  ^  „-  \'  y  s   3  /Sj.  v  \     (x 

~  •  m  ^n s ) °  ^..  -f  ^  1  •  "-v _ c  v^'^ 


^\">^fWV/_5      0    \_p 


t 


t 


<T\ 


•  ^  r-s   ^    ,    ^_    *    L  .^  _A  '    V"    °  \_.  4. 


SERMON    UY    in;.    BLAIR.  227 

of  4 ; •  >■  l  would  be  utterly  inexplicable  to  num.  We  should  be  obliged 
to  conclude  that  either  a  God  did  nol  exist  ;  or  though  he  existed,  that 
he  was  not  possessed  of  such  perfections  as  we  now  ascribe  to  him,  if, 
when  a  worthy  and  pious  man  had  spent  his  whole  life  in  virtuous  deeds, 
and  perhaps  had  died  a  martyr  to  the  cause  of  religion  and  truth,  he 
should,  after  long  and  severe  Bufferings,  perish  finally,  unrewarded  and 
forgotten;  no  attention  shown  to  him  by  the  Almighty;  no  building 
of  God  erected  for  him  ;  no  house  eternal  prepared  in  the  Heavens  ! 

These  reasons  are  much  strengthened  by  the  belief  that  has  ever 
prevailed  among  mankind,  of  the  soul's  immortality.  It  is  not  an 
opinion  that  took  its  rise  from  the  thin-spun  speculations  of  some 
abstract  philosophers.  Never  has  any  nation  been  discovered  on  the 
face  of  the  earth,  so  rude  and  barbarous,  that  in  the  midst  of  their 
wildest  superstitions  there  was  not  cherished  among  them  some  expecta- 
tions of  a  slate  after  death,  in  which  the  virtuous  were  to  enjoy  happi- 
ness. So  universal  a  consent  in  this  belief,  affords  just  grounds  to 
ascribe  il  to  some  innate  principle  implanted  by  God  in  the  tinman 
breast,  Had  it  no  foundation  in  truth,  we  must  suppose  that  the 
Creator  found  it  necessary,  for  tin'  purposes  of  his  government,  to 
carry  on  a  principle  of  universal  deception  among  his  rational  subjects. 
Many  of  the  strongest  passions  of  our  nature  are  made  to  have  a  clear 
reference  to  the  future  existence  of  the  soul.  The  love  of  fame,  the  ardent 
concern  which  so  often  prevails  about  futurity,  all  allude  to  somewhat  in 
which  men  suppose  themselves  to  be  personally  concerned  after  death. 
The  conscience-,  both  of  the  good  and  the  bad,  bear  witness  to  a  world 
that  is  to  come.  .Seldom  do  men  leave  this  world  without  some  fears  or 
hopes  respecting  it  ;  some  secret  anticipations  and  presages  of  what  is 
hereafter  to  befall  them. 

l!ut  though  the  reasonings  which  have  been  adduced  to  prove  the 
immortality  of  the  soul  in  a  future  state,  are  certainly  of  great  weight,  yet 
reasonings  slid  they  arc,  and  no  more;  and  in  every  human  reasoning 
suspicious  may  arise  of  some  fallacy  or  error.  In  a  point  so  momentous 
to  us  as  our  existence  after  death  we  never  could  with  absolute  certainty 
and  full  satisfaction  have  rested  on  any  evidence  except  what  was  con- 
tinued by  the  declaration  of  God  himself.  For  many  and  high  blessings 
we  are  indebted  to  the  Christian  revelation  ;  lor  none  more  than  for  its 
having  ''brought  lib-  and  immortality  to  light."    The  revelations  made 

by  God  to  the  world  in  early  ages,  gave  the  lir.-t  opening  to  ibis  great 
article  of  faith  and  hope.  In  after  periods  the  light  dawned  more  and 
more;  but  it  was  not.  until  the  Sun  of  Righteousness  arose,  by  the 
appearance  of  Christ  on  earth,  thai  the  great  discovery  was  completed. 
Then,  indeed,  were  made  known  the  •'city  of  the  living  God,  the  new 
Jerusalem"  above,  the  "mansions"  prepared  for  the  " spirits  of  jusl 
men  made  perfect." 

The  first  and  most  natural  improvement  of  all  that  has  been  said, 
is  to  produce  in  our  hearts  the  most  lasting  gratitude,  love  anil 
reverence,  towards  that  great  Benefactor  of  mankind,  who  not  only 
has  made  known  and  published  the  blessings  of  a  future  Mate  to  the 
righteous,  but  by  his  great  undertaking  for  their  redemption  has 
erected  in  their  behalf  the  "house  eternal  in  the  heavens."    The  next 


228  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

c— 1  '  L  V"  ~  <L  J;      '  LTV,  *"  '  /^*  N  V  ^  V. 

-^  ~"  ^  >  v>l~  ^>«     V 


•/ 


'Ik 


1  V    s^(\ 


\ 


? 


<  ^      '  '< 


S 


%  ~t ^  ^  V.    U  N    *    V^,  ^  ~*  A.  >  ^/  ) 

W    '   )    ^  w   V  °    kx,x     ^  ~~)   1  .„\   1?   a 


3    "  %  A 


^_e 


Hh 


~\ 


Sermon  by  dr.  blair.  229 

Improvement  we  should  make,  is  to  conduct  our  own  life  and  behaviour 
as  becomes  those  who  have  an  Interest  in  this  happiness  and  this  hope. 
From  such  persons,  assuredly,  is  to  be  expected  a  pure,  correct,  and 
dignified  behaviour  in  every  situation ;  nol  a  con  tempi  of  the  employ- 
ments, nor  a  renunciation  of  all  the  comforts  <>r  their  present  life. 
Opinions  that  produce  such  effects  are  connected  only  with  the  spirit  of 
superstition  and  false  religion.  But  to  them  it  belongs,  in  the  midst, 
of  the  affairs,  enticements  and  temptations  of  the  world,  to  regulate 
their  conduct  as  becomes  the  heirs  of  a  divine  inheritance  ;  never  debas 
ing  themselves  among  what  is  mean,  nor  defiling  themselves  with  what 
is  corrupt,  in  the  present  state  ;  but  Berving  God  with  that  fidelity,  and 
behaving  to  men  with  that  steady  magnanimity  of  virtue,  that  generous 
beneficence  and  humanity,  which  suits  immortal  beings  who  are  aspiring 
to  rise  m  a  future  state  to  the  perfection  of  their  nature  in  the  presence 
of  God.    Blair.  

-.'.  CHARACTERISTICS   OK  THE  AGE. 

The  peculiar  and  distinguishing  characteristics  of  the  present  age 
are  in  every  respect  remarkable.  Unquestionably  an  extraordinary  and 
universal  change  has  commenced  in  the  internal  as  well  as  the  external 
world,  in  the  mind  of  man  as  well  as  in  the  habits  of  society,  the  one 
indeed  being  the  necessary  consequence  of  the  other.  A  rational  con- 
sideration of  the  circumstances  in  which  mankind  are  at  present  placed, 
must  Bhow  ns  that  influences  of  the  most  important  ami  wonderful  char- 
acter have  been  and  are  operating  in  such  a  manner  as  to  bring  about 

if  not  ;i  reformation,  a  thorough  rev  olution  in  the  Organization  of  society. 

Never  in  the  history  of  the  world  have  benevolent  and  philanthropic 
institutions  for  the  relief  of  domestic  and  public  affliction  ;  societies 
for  the  promotion  of  manufacturing,  commercial  and  agricultural  inter- 
ests; associations  for  the  instruction  of  the  masses,  the  advancement, 
of  literature  and  science,  tin-  development  of  true  political  principles; 
for  the  extension,  in  short,  of  every  description  of  knowledge,  and  the 
bringing  about  of  every  kind  of  reform,  been  so  numerous,  so  efficient, 
and  bo  indefatigable  in  their  operation  as  at  the  present  day.  We  do 
not.  say  that  many  of  the  objects  sought  by  these  associations  are  not 
extravagant  and  impracticable,  but  we  ,|0  gaj  that  it  is  impossible  that 
such  influences  can  exist  without  advancing,  in  some  degree,  the  inter- 

e-ts  of  humanity.      It    would   lie   idle   to   deny    that    notwithstanding   all 

these  beneficial  influences,  a  great  amount  of  misery  exists ;  but  this  is 
only  the  natural  consequence  of  great  and  sudden  changes.    Let  ii-  hope 

that  in  this  instance  at  least,  it  may  he  hut  the  indispensable  preliminary 
stai_'e  in  the  cure  of  a  deep  seated  disease. 


3.   A   SUPPOSED   REPLY  TO    \    REQUISITION. 

I  am  very  grateful  for  the  disinterested  and  uninterrupted  kind- 
ties*  you  have  shown  towards  me,  and  the  especial  Bervices  you  have 
rendered    me    on    all    occasions;     without    which    it    would    have    Keen 

Impossible  for  me  to  have  accomplished  a  single  object  1  had  in  view. 


230  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

\.~V     ^fc  V    <T\     ;T|.     s     ^        1_.    *        ^V    -1      W     Ve 


4     V 


'  -X «    .\r^-.  V^  >^ 


'/^-v* 


I.     A     )     (     \.d.  *  -     l-^-,.    >  :   •    ^  o    ^   "   ->     I-   -^ 

C '  v,  f   o   .^  v  -y  '    ^  ^  ^    *   4   ' 
\^j  /V  N  z^^1-  ^L  i  ...v..-v  i.  ~^\-\  -  -< 

-       ~       ^       I   ■  ^    j,    %>^    —      -     <^    ^    R^x 

<  ,]  .  ^v_  '  <  -  '  «—  '  -\  ■"**  -^^x  '  '->-  *  ,; 

^  .v.  >  lL»  • ' ,  i '  <  s  ~3 .  l=.  *  i_  ^  )  y  *> 

'b  s  ■'-  ^>  •  ■'-'--•• ' "  "  ^  a  u  °  -\  ^  ~  w  ° 

"       >    AvJa..Vfl„         «      ~        '    ./    I    /'    "    — 


SHORTHAND   WRITERS    AND    REPORTERS.  231 

Nothing  could  be  more  gratifying  in  me,  or  give  me  greater  satisfaction, 
than  [lie  proposition  yon  have  made.  I  shall  accede  t<>  it  with  the  great- 
est pleasure;  and  shall  endeavor,  as  far  as  possible,  to  carry  out  your 
plan.  The  fact  of  its  applicability  to  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  intended, 
and  tlic  slight  expenditure  it  involves,  mast  bring  it  before  the  attention 
of  the  public,  and  as  it,  is  admirably  subservient  to  the  general  objects 
contemplated  by  government,  no  doubt  Parliament  will  be  induced  to 
further  the  undertaking.  We  have  already  sufficient  funds  to  commence 
operations,  and  several  distinguished  individuals  have  promised  us  testi- 
monials in  favor  of  the  scheme,  as  well  as  subscriptions  tp  help  it.  for- 
ward. As  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  observe,  I  think  there  is  no  chance 
of  success  without  individual  exertion  on  our  part  ;  but,  with  this,  I  have 
every  reason  to  believe  that  our  object  will  be  attained. 


4.   SHORTHAND   WRITERS   AND   REPORTERS. 

By  many  persons  shorthand  writers  and  reporters  are  presumed  to 
be  one  and  the  same.  Be  jure  they  are,  as  they  both  write  short- 
hand :  but  de  facto  they  are  not:  the  one  is  merely  a  word  taker; 
while  the  other,  if  he  understands  his  business  properly,  is  not  only 
an  efficient  shorthand  writer,  and  consequently,  able  to  take  down 
the  words  of  a  speaker  when  his  importance  renders  it  necessary;  — 
but  whether  reporting  every  word,  or  simply  preparing  condensed 
reports  of  long  wordy  harangues  containing  but  few  principles,  he  is 
invariably  called  upon  to  exert  Ids  mental  powers  to  a  far  greater  extent. 
than  the  other.  For  instance,  a  man  may  make  an  indifferent  speech  so 
far  as  language  is  conc<  rued,  (and  i hat  is  a  nio.-t  important  element),  but 
replete  with  excellent,  matter,  which  it  is  the  province  of  the  reporter 
to  judiciously  condense,  to  improve,  and,  in  fact,  to  render  intelligible. 
In  short,  it  is  the  province  of  the  reporter  to  make  good  speeches  for 
bad  speakers. 

An  amusing  instance  of  the  inability  of  shorthand  writers  to  grasp 
the  essence  of  a  body  of  shorthand  notes— to  condense  them  without 
destroying  the  meaning  of  the  Speaker,  ami  without  omitting  a  single 
point,  may  be  here  mentioned.  .Many  years  auro,  when  the  late  Mr 
Barnes  was  the  editor  of  the  Times,  a  gentleman,  who  considered  that 
to  accomplish  the  task  of  taking  every  word  was  to  obtain  the  very 
acme  of  perfection  as  a  reporter,  was  engaged  to  take  a  trial  turn  in 
Parliament  for  that  influential  journal.  If-  did  so,  he  strained  his 
every  nerve  ;  and  although  the  speaker  was  an  unimportant  one,  every 
syllable  of  his  address  was  recorded  in  his  note-book;  and,  reeling 
satisfied  that  he  had  accomplished  his  task  in  a  satisfactory  manner, 
he  lost  no  time,  as  may  be  imagined,  in  Binding  his  way  to  the  re- 
porters1 room  of  the  Times  office.  Some  important  foreign  intelli- 
gence had  just  arrived,  and  in  order  to  make  room  for  it,  Mr.  Barnes 
hurried  into  (be  room,  and  desired  the  reporters  to  condense  the  par 
liaraentary  intelligence.  Of  course,  they  felt  no  disposition  to  quarrel 
with  the  instructions   they  had   received.    Turning  to  Mr.  ,  Mr. 

Panics    inquired    the    nature  of    his   "turn,"    and    the    length    to  which 

his  notes  would  extend.    "Three  columns  at  the  least,"  replied  the 


232 

REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

i 

^r  -A. 

^     c^         V           t  x            •> 

■v-l-A 

■^    <N    *r 

^ 1  v  u   ^    \y 

^  »     u.                        .  ^ 

I    ~    ~\ 

V  k^"  ^w^ 

Q  \- 

Y  x  .  ^  )  ~» 

,  ;   i     t 

-  -^L  ;  .  .L 

w 

—      1      J.     Vo      - 

■'U     t    ^ 
•    1 

^x    •  >'  '  — . 

•  r\o    ^ 

_v  u7 

-tU'-i 

-  -  A.  x  - 

V    «-*. 

->  5    U  ^    / 

.s-.  .  ,  ^  , 

o-     S       S        |/>     )      o        '' 

-     "  x 

^  ^  ^  "  ^  . 

"V 

1  ■      =*.  ) 

^    \ 

-7  au  <-  r. 

i_7  ^ 

il    "*"  'S,    >  H>  Sf.  ~^|    1  ..(..  x 

o7..U^l 

J\«       .  Y_~ 

-   -^  1^   b  ^    _ 

-V 

^V  '+ 

i    ^  "  V, 

_   ^  r  j£.  " 

N^> 

'     ,    w     V'    ) 

'V      '     >    x 

1    -=y    W     N   -y^rr-*" 

'■  ■  IAi  > v- 

-\  r: 

■  ~*-  3  t  ' 

v  ^  > 

1^»    .  *\ 

*-l      «"    'Vy 

~\_    C  Av  o  !  " 

'     W    x 

j  -v.  _,  '   b 

N  <r    s  r 

v^i          L^  °  ^ 

*  n~, 

^S.  x        ArVja.* 

6-->n 

^>x 

v  '  ■  ^L»  A 

— 6|       <^ 

'   L    ^    c   .. 

^v,   fc    ' 

>'■ 

?        X         "**     * 

-  -  "\  >  ^ 

\        '      X 

11  ■  ^ 

~  V  v~  ^  °  •  u  v  '  <■ 

'  \ 

•"     *^     -  X        1 

'  '  ^  .  N   ,  x 

v-  I  v   *        ; 

•  ^  L 

2  ^-"i-- 

>   JS-*  I   s 

w    "N   >    '    "*    / 

N  )  ^ 

"  ^  i  «  i  ' 

^   "    S  •).  - 

L  "^         v»  ''  > 

v  -  '-\  -vi-  °  y  ■ 

V    "^x 

I      ^    (  - 

^V,    ~    s     " "Ip    "     f 

*\S'*v 

SPEECH  P.V  DANIEL  WEBSTER.  233 

shorthand  writer.  "Good  heavens!  that  will  never  do.  You  must  not 
go  beyond  n  column  or  a  column  and  a  quarter.  You  must  certainly  not 
write  mure  ih  in  one-half  of  that."  The  gentleman  looked  iip  at  the  face 
ofthe  able  editor  of  the  most  powerful  journal  in  the  world,  to  assure 
himself  that  hewasreall]  to  destroy  one-half  of  liis  turn.  He  could  not 
understand  it.  Surely  the  editor  bad  gone  mad,  or  become  wholly 
insensible  of  the  value,  of  the  great  machine  placed  under  his  control. 
The  thing  was  impossible  without  completely  destroying  the  task,  in  the 
unabridged  condition  of  which  he  took  so  much  pride.  "Cut  it  down 
to  one-half,"  retorted  the  editor  rather  testily.  The  shorthand  writer 
counted  the  leaves  of  his  book,  over  which  his  turn  extended;  he  then 
divided  them,  and,  looking  again  into  the  lace  of  Mr.  Barnes,  inquired 
with  the  utmost  simplicity,  "  which  half  he  should  write."  We  heard 
that  the  turn  was  his  first  and  last.  So  much  simplicity  would  not  do  on 
the  Times. 

A  reporter  from  the  north,  not  many  years  ago,  was  engaged  by  the 
managing  reporter  of  the  Times,  Mr.  Neilson,  to  take  a  trial  turn.  He  did 
so;  and  went  off  to  the  Times  office  to  write  it  out.  His  courage  how- 
over  failed  him  at  the  Bight  of  the  establishment.  He  became  excessively 
terrified;  but  his  terror  increased  ten-fold  as  he  neared  the  reporters1 
room,  lie  stood  at  the  door  for  a  few  moments,  as  if  the  well  known 
line,  "All  hope  abandon  ye  who  enter  here."  was  emblazoned  on  tie1 
portal.  He  however  ventured  to  look  in.  The  Bight  of  the  reporters 
whose  fingers  were  flying  across  the  paper  like  an  express  train  down  an 
incline,  pinned  him  to  the  threshold,  lie  simply  articulated,  "What 
awfu'  work  this  reporting  is !  "  and  vanished,  lie  was  never  seen  again, 
audit  is  to  be  hoped  that  he  lost  no  time  in  retracing  his  steps  to  his 

native  hills.     ./.  /.  ScOtt. 


5.    SPEECH    BY   DANIEL   WEBSTER. 

I  owe  the  honor  of  this  occasion,  and  I  esteem  it  an  uncommon  and 
extraordinary  honor,  to  the  young  men  of  this  city  of  Albany  ;  and  it  is 
my  first  duty  to  express  10  these  young  men  my  grateful  thanks  for  the 
respect  they  have  manifested  towards  me.  Nevertheless,  I  do  not  mis- 
take \  on,  or  your  object,  or  your  purpose.  I  am  proud  to  lake  to  myself 
whatever  may  properly  belong  to  me,  a-  a  token  of  personal  and  political 
regard  from  you  to  me.  But  I  know,  young  men  of  Albany,  it  is  not 
I,  but  the  cause  ;  it  is  not  I,  but  your  own  generous  attachments  to  your 
country  ;  it  is  not  I.  but  the  Constitution  of  i he  l'n ion  which  has  hound 
together  your  ancestors  and  mine,  and  ali  of  us.  for  more  than  half  a 
century.  It  is  this  that  has  brought  you  here  to  day  to  testify  your  regard 
towards  one,  who,  to  the  best  of  his  humble  ability,  has  sustained  that 
cause  before  the  country. 

lam  requested  by  those  who  invited  me.  to  signify  my  sentiments  on 
the  state  of  public  affairs  in  this  country,  and  the  interesting  questions 


234  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

1   t   r^  Is  \  )x     (.  *,  J    (   v  ^  V    r~!  ^  ~^  /  y-f 

\  *  M.  ->  ^  '  %  '  t  s  Mx  '  • ^  ->  .^U  ^ 
v.. M  *~~  -•  6   ^  v^  v    V!  j>_  ^  '  v^  <  J 

?  '    v — " ^     I     /     — i  >         *-      -1     -     ^ 

\  G  ^ 

*C   ^   ..^..\    J     T     ^    f"     \c-X      (      ^     .     J    \"jx 

^  x    —  I  ">..  «  .^1  J^  x    ~v  )  ^  ~  ..,  14?  x     .  ~^_ 
'  <T   i  ~  <  /N*  x   .  v  x  Ld  )  \  e  >I^  M  •  "  <  ^ 

^_         i  ""-  -  ^ ( v    '  ^  *,  ~  '  I  ;  N  *»  { 
\    ■  ./. .  j  /  — p  .  j  s  ^  w  )  ,  e-  t  .>.. 

^-1  «  "  -  \  6  1  I  "^  ^  ^^;  •  ^  '   Lo    )  X/~ 

s  >  S  A    v   W  I  -  ~—  ■ ■  )  ^  \  4   '  •  \   '  C 

•  s  i;vg  Nj  £s.  -  i          <r     -  ^.  <   ^  t  ^ 

,   L  x-  s  •  1^  5  (  |  i  -\  x    )  )  <   -     ;     ^  l 

|,    -     ~4   *    L850  '   I   -    |.N    1-    t  -   ^       \ 

>  (/!~L    '    N  °^>  x 


srr.r.i  n   r.v   n\xiri,  WEBSTER.  23o 

which  are  before  us.  This  proves,  gentlemen,  thai  in  their  opinion  there 
are  questions  sometimes  arising  which  range  above  all  party,  and  all  the 
influences  and  considerations  and  interests  of  party.  What  are  the 
questions  which  are  overriding,  subdninsr,  and  overwhelming  party,  unit- 
ing honest,  well  meaning  persons  to  lay  parly  aside,  to  meet  and  confer 
for  the  genera]  public  weal?  I  shall,  of  course,  not  enter  at  large  into 
many  of  these  questions,  nor  into  any  lengthened  discussion  of  the  state 
of  public  affairs,  but  shall  endeavor  to  slate  what  that  condition  is,  what 
these  questions  are,  and  to  pronounce  a  conscientious  judgment  of  my 
own  upon  the  whole.  The  last  Congress  passed  laws  called  adjustment 
measures,  or  settlement  measures  ;  laws  intended  to  put  an  end  to  certain 
internal  and  domestic  controversies  which  existed  in  the  country,  and 
-.Hue  ui"  them  for  a  long  time.  These  laws  were  passed  by  the  constitu- 
tional majorities  of  both  Houses  of  Congress.  They  received  the  consti- 
tutional approbation  of  the  President.  They  are  the  laws  of  the  land. 
To  SOU r  all  of  them,  indeed  to  all  of  them,  at  the  time  of  their  pas- 
sage, there  existed  warm  and  violent  opposition.  None  of  them  passed 
without  heated  discussion.  Government  was  established  in  each  of  the 
territories  of  New  Mexico  and  Utah,  but  not  without  opposition.  The 
boundary  of  Texas  «  as  to  be  setl  led  by  compromise  with  that  state,  but 
not  without  determined  and  violent  opposition.  These  laws  all  passed  ; 
and  as  they  have  now  become,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  irrepealahle, 
it  is  not  necessary  that  I  should  detain  you  by  discussing  their  merits 
and  demerits.  Nevertheless,  gentlemen,  I  desire  on  this  and  on  all  pub- 
lic occasions,  in  the  most,  emphatic  and  clear  manner,  to  declare,  that  I 
hold  --iime  of  these  laws,  and  especially  that  which  provided  for  the 
adjustment  of  the  controversy  with  Texas,  to  have  been  essential  to  the 
preservation  of  the  public  peace.  Twill  not  now  argue  that  point,  nor 
lav  before  you  at  large  the  circumstances  which  existed  at  that  time, 
the  peculiar  situation  of  things  in  so  many  of  the  Southern  States  ;  or  the 
f.iei  that  many  of  those  States  had  adopted  measures  for  the  separation 
of  the  Union  ;  the  fad  that  Texas  was  preparing  to  assert  her  rights  to 
territory  which  New  Mexico  though!  was  hers  byrighl  ;  and  that  hun- 
dreds and  thousands  of  men.  tired  of  the  pursuits  of  private  life,  were 
ready  to  rise  and  unite  in  any  enterprise  that  might  open  itself  to  them, 
even  at  the  risk  of  a  direct  conllict  with  the  authority  of  this  Govern- 
ment. 1  say,  therefore,  without  going  into  the  argument  with  any  details, 
that  in  March  of  1850,  when  I  found  it  my  dut\  to  address  Congress  on 
these  important  topics,  it  was  my  conscientious  belief,  still  unshaken, 
ever  since  confirmed,  that  if  the  controversy  with  Texas  could  not  be 
amicably  adjusted,  there  must,  in  all  probability,  have  been  civil  war  and 
civil  bloodshed.  And  in  the  contemplation  of  such  a  prospect,  it  was  of 
little  consequence  on  which  standard  victory  Bhould  perch  :  although  in 
such  a  contest  we  took  it  for  granted  that  no  opposition  could  arise  to  the 
authority  of  the  United  states  that  would  not  be  suppressed. 

Hut  what  of  that  V     I  was  not  anxious  about   the  military  consequences 
of  things ;  I  looked  to  the  civil  and  political  state  of  things  and  their 


236  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

*  ^  o  ^;  *  -^  D ,  \>-/  ^  t,  /  f  ^  ^  v.  n  W 
7  .<  y  ^  v  ...k.  r  -  ,  v_..|..  '  5  ,  n  ^  -v, 
"  <~?  (  l^  ^  x  ^  "1   '    r  \  i.  \^  *-   '  L 

f   is*     V     '    -f    ^    ^    *     ""    ^    •-•    \    ^     -  >     " 

-f     n   A  '       v    \-  s*^  N,  ^  -°0       ~\  <l  3   °r 

~~>  x       _     y    r  .No..  *\    C     1?     j/^    "^    '      p  x      Cnq_/A-'     o^ 

-O    %j,    ^       ^    °     Px 

Y  "^  *  y  6  v  r  s  1830  „s.  .k?.  i)  s  .«_oX   -^  ""  s 

J  °>  ^  x  '  V  1  «'  x  -  ~  '  i  ^  '\  "'^  I  ^ 
'       ^  ^    ^   ^    V     '    '  '  '     •     "    '    *\ 

-rx    ~  </  ^^^  ^  r  .%.  —  >       r  .  ■  ^  « 

^-\  ~  x    t  -^?  <•■  ■    I  ,       ^  ■ '   x    ■     "—  v^  f\-  ")  "* 

°  6^xx  rr  >-  <  ~  ^  i  v,    ,  x    l  (  "  |^_,  ■  K 

i      A  ^  «  /.  -^  ~  \_  \     <  ^  M  ^  ~  M  U. 

D  v    ^  )  J\  °  '  i^_x  w  "      1    ■    L,  x  I 

v  >  «.  d  ■  •        ,  /  '      i  ■      x  -^-  ^  A?\  •  v.  v.. 

'  n,  ,  v   y^  *.s  -  Sy  '  ±?..  .  w,f  N 

-•x    7  \  _  /<s>  ^  -f  ^  O  p,  /  J.  -P  )  f 


SPEECH  I'.Y  DANIEL  WEBSTER.  237 

results  ;  and  I  inquired  what  would  be  the  condition  oi  the  country  if  in 

this  imitated  state  of  things,  if  in  this  vastly  extended  though  not  gen- 
erally pervading  feeling  at  the  South,  war  should  break  out,  and  blood- 
shed should  ensue  in  that  extreme  of  the  Union  ?  That  was  enough  for 
me  to  inquire  into  and  regard  ;  and,  if  the  chances  had  been  but  one  in  a 
thousand  that  such  would  have  been  the  result,  I  should  still  have  felt  that 
that  one-thousandth  chance  should  be  guarded  against  by  any  reasonable 
sacrifice  ;  because,  gentlemen,  sanguine  as  l  am  for  the  future  prosperity 
of  the  country,  Strongly  as  1  believe  now,  after  what  has  passed,  and  es- 
pecially after  those  measures  to  which  I  have  referred,  that  it  is  likely  to 
hold  together,  1  yet  believe  firmly  that  this  L'ninn,  once  broken,  is  utterly 
incapable,  according  to  till  human  experience,  of  being  reconstructed  in 
its  original  character,  of  being  re-cemented  by  any  chemistry  or  art  or 
effort  or  skill  of  man.  Now.  gentlemen,  let  us  pass  from  those  measures 
which  are  now  accomplished  and  settled.  California  is  in  the  Union,  and 
cannot  be  got  out  :  the  Texas  boundary  is  settled,  under  provision  of  law, 
according  to  accustomed  usage  in  former  cases  ;  and  these  things  may  be 
regarded  a-  settled. 

But  then  there  was  another  subject,  equally  agitating  and  equally  irri- 
tating, which,  in  its  nature,  must  always  be  subject  to  consideration  or 
proposed  amendment,  and  thai  is  the  fugitive  slave  law  of  1850,  passed  at 
the  same  Session  of  ( longress.  Allow  me  to  advert,  very  shortly,  to  what 
I  consider  the  ground  of  the  law.  Von  know,  and  I  know,  that  it  was 
very  much  opposed  in  the  Northern  stales:  sometimes  with  argument 
not  unfair,  often  by  those  whirlwinds  of  fanaticism  that  raise  adust  ami 
blind  the  eyes,  but  produce  nothing  else.  Now ,  gentlemen,  this  question 
of  the  propriety  of  the  fugitive  slave  law,  or  the  enactment  of  some  such 
law.  is  a  question  that  must  be  met.  Its  enemies  will  not  let  it  sleep  or 
slumber.  They  will  "give  neither  sleep  to  their  eves  nor  slumber  to 
their  eyelids  "  so  long  a-  they  can  agitate  il  before  the  people,  it  is  with 
them  a  topic,  a  desirable  topic,  and  all  know  who  have  much  experi- 
ence in  political  affairs,  that  for  party  men,  and  in  parly  times,  there  is 
hardly  anything  so  desirable  as  a  topic.  Now,  gentlemen,  I  am  read]  to 
meet  this  question,  I  am  ready  to  say  that  it  was  right,  proper,  expedi- 
ent, just,  licit  a  suitable  law  should  be  passed  for  the  restoration  of  the 
fugitive  sla\  es  found  in  free  Stales,  to  their  owners  in  the  sla\  e  States.  I 
am  ready  to  say  that,  because  I  only  repeal  the  words  of  the  Constitution 
itself,  and  am  not  afraid  of  being  considered  a  plagiarist,  nor  a  feehle  imita- 
tor of  other  men's  language  and  sent  imeiits.  when  1  repeat  and  announce 
to  every  part  of  the  country,  to  you  here,  and   at   all   times,  the  language 

of  the  Constitution  of  my  country.    Gentlemen,  before  the  Revolution 

slavery  existed   in   the   Southern   States,  and   had   existed   there  for  more 

than  a  hundred  years.  We  of  the  North  wen- not  guiltj  of  its  introduc- 
tion.   That  generation  of  men,  even  in  the  South,  were  not  guilty  of  it. 

It  had   been   introduced   according   to  the   policy  of   the  Mother  ( 'ountry, 

before  there  was  any  independence  in  the  United  stales ;  indeed,  before 
there  were  any  authorities  in  the  Colonies  competent  to  resist  it.     Why, 


2;fs 


1  1 


REPORTING    EXERCISES. 


'  V- .  ^  •  _  .  u  <j  n,  </-  v-  v  ;  .r  .r  «  i  ...v 


6.    /w°  '    -VV   .    ^  5,   n?-    A  -  -/I  '    I-  - 

Lwj  .   ^  *  V,°    ^    ^  ^-<    '  I  -  ^~  »    -i 

jl.  <S  /\  '  ?jz:.  /-^  >  _w^  '  s  "  ^  )  /^    x  )Vn  . 
•^    \     y>  \;      .  X  ^  V..  <f  _|_   >„  -    •  v^>  0   „  -v  % 

„\  ^  X  ^  <-  '  \  v-  X  o  v"^  \»   t  >  o 

VV  JL.i  A.)    I     '"»     a,    "  w  I  --°^ 


REPORTING    AS    \    MENTAL    EXERCISE.  239 

gentlemen,  men's  opinions  have  bo  changed  on  this  subject,  and  prop- 
erly, the  world  I  in*  come  to  so  much  juster  sentiments,  we  can  hardly  be- 
lieve, thai  which  is  certainly  true,  that  at  the  peace  of  Aix-la-Chapelle,  in 
17  is,  tin-  English  Government  insisted  on  the  fulfilment,  to  its  full  extent, 
of  a  condition  in  the  treaty  of  the  Assiento,  signed  at  Utrecht,  in  HIM.  by 
which  the  Spanish  Government  had  granted  the  unqualified  and  exclu 
she  privilege  t<>  the  British  Government  of  importing  slaves  into  the 
Spanish  Colonies  in  America!  That  was  not  then  repugnant  to  public 
sentiment  ;  happily,  it  would  be  now. 


6.  REPORTING   AS   A    MENTAL    EXERCISE. 

If  we  trace  the  operations  of  the  mind  which  are  carried  on  during 
the  act  of  taking  down  the  words  of  a  speaker  as  they  are  uttered  by 
him,  we  shall  not  be  surprised  that  a  considerable  amount  of  practice  is 

needed  hefore  the  art  of  verbatim  reporting  can  be  acquired ;  the  cause 
of  our  astonishment  will  rather  be  that  still  greater  labor  and  skiil  are 
not  necessary  to  the  carrying  on  of  a  process  so  rapid  and  yet  so  com- 
plicated. 

Let  ns  suppose  a  speaker  commencing  his  address.  lie  titters  two  or 
three  words,  perhaps,  in  a  deliberate  manner;  they  fall  on  the  report- 
er's ear,  and  are  thence  communicated  to  the  brain  as  the  organ  of  the 
mind  ;  the  writer  must,  then  recall  to  his  memory  the  sign  for  each  word 
he  has  heard  ;  the  proper  sign  having  suggested  itself  to  his  mind,  a 
communication  is  made  from  the  brain  to  the  fingers,  which,  obedient, 
to  the  will,  and  trained  perhaps  to  the  nicest  accuracy  of  form,  rapidly 
trace  the  mystic  lines  on  the  paper.  Some  portion  of  time  is  of  course 
required  for  each  of  these  operations  to  be  performed  after  the  words 
have  been  spoken;  yet.  Bee  1  the  writer  appears  to  stop  precisely  at  the 
same  time  with  the  speaker  !  The  orator  still  continues  in  his  deliberate 
style,  and  the  reporter  is  able  to  write  each  word  he  hears  before  the  next 
is  uttered.  Now.  however,  the  speaker  warms  with  his  subject,  and 
Changes  his  measured  pace  to  one  more  rapid  ;  the  writer  increases  his 
speed  accordingly,  and,  notwithstanding  the  many  operations  at  work  in 
his  mind,  scarcely  is  the  [asl  word  of  a  Sentence  uttered  before  he  lifts  his 
lien  from  the  paper,  as  if  for  an  instant's  pause,  not  a  syllable  having 
escaped  his  ear  or  pen.  This  surely  is  a  laborious  task  ;  much  more  so 
that  which  follows.  The  speaker  has  finished  his  exordium,  is  in  the  midst 
of  his  topics  of  discourse,  and  has  begun  his  flights  of  oratory.  Listen  to 
his  next  sentence,  lie  begins  in  a  low,  measured  tone  ;  after  a  few  words 
makes  a  sudden  pause  ;  then,  as  if  startled  with  the  brilliancy  of  his  ideas, 
and  fearful  lest  they  should  escape  before  lie  can  give  them  utterance,  he 
dashes  along  at  an  impetuous  rale  which  he  never  slackens  till  he  is  oul 
of  breath  with  exertion.  In  this  rapid  delivery  he  has  gained  ground  to 
the  extent  of  five  or  six  or  more  words  on  the  writer,  whom  probably 


240 


REPORTING    EXERCISES. 


°S» 


r^°i 


r  > 


p  N^ 


<J>     o 


-\s>>  *j>.(L.SC  -V  ~^-  '! 


■6-         ~\~        >* 


v->-x  W^VL 


V 


xn7 


V-  I 


•\ 


M  \ 


v 


o  ^  -j .  "  "  'As  (-U'  I  (  -1- 


o       ^ 


V  /'V 


"\      *T      \? 


■'  ^  c  vn^v^~'v^*  x 


/\> 


t---?     o^S 


v 


,  \V_\_r^ 


REPORTING    AS    a    MENTAL    EXERCISE.  241 

be  has  taken  by  surprise.  The  latter,  nevertheless,  lias  had  to  listen  to 
the  words  which  were,  so  to  speak,  in  advance  of  him,  recall  the  proper 
sign  for  each,  send  il  from  the  brain  to  the  fingers,. and  trace  it  on  his 
note-book;  while,  at  tin  sanu  time,  he  lias  had  to  attend  to  the  words 
which  follow,  so  as  to  he  able  to  dispose  of  them  in  the  same  way  when 
their  turn  arrives  ;  and  in  this  manner  are  his  mental  and  bodily  powers 
occupied  lor  an  hour,  or,  it  may  he,  several  hours  together. 

It  would  naturally  he  supposed  that,  with  all  this  to  attend  to,  it  wotdd 
he  impossible  for  the  writer  to  think  at  all  of  the  sense  conveyed  by  the 
words  which  he  is  at  such  pains  to  record;  but,  to  perform  his  work 
efficiently,  he  must  bring  liis  mind  to  hear  on  this  also,  and  not  only 
endeavor  to  understand  the  general  drift  of  what  he  is  reporting,  but  to 
catch  the  meaning  of  every  expression  :  for  where  this  is  neglected  literal 
accuracy  cannot  lie  attained.  The  probability  is  that  we  do  not  distinctly 
hear— hear,  that  is,  so  as  to  be  able  separately  to  identify  them  half  the 
sounds  that  compose  the  wurds  to  which  we  listen  ;  and  it  is  only,  there- 
fore, by  our  close  attention  to  the  context  that  we  are  enabled  to  supply 
imperceptibly— for  few  people  are  conscious  of  this  mental  act— the  sounds 
tilt  t  the  ear  lias  failed  to  convey  definitely  to  us.  Hence  the  necessity  for 
listening  to  the  sense,  as  well  as  to  the  sounds  of  words,  as  they  How  from 
a  speaker's  lips.  A  minister  once  told  us  that  in  a  report  of  a  senium 
delivered  by  him  the  phrase  "the  siege  of  Abimeleeh  "  was  written  and 
actually  printed  "  the  siege  of  Limerick!"  This  could  not  have  arisen 
from  a  mistake  in  the  written  characters,  for  the  forms  of  Abimeleeh  and 
Limerick  would,  in  any  system  of  shorthand,  be  palpably  distinct  ;  the  ear 
must,  in  such  a  case,  have  been  in  error,  and  the  sense  should  have  been 
sufficient  to  correct  it.  Every  experienced  reporter  musl  occasionally 
have  discovered  errors  of  this  description  while  transcribing  his  notes; 
his  inattention  to  the  sense,  while  following  the  speaker,  not  having  led 
him  to  correct  the  false  impression  which  ha-  been  made  on  the  ear. 

As  a  mental  exercise,  then,  reporting  may  be  regarded  as  of  the 
greatest  utility.  It  is  true  that  after  a  long  course  of  practice  the  art 
becomes  apparently  a  mechanical  one.  as  far  as  the  taking  down  is 
concerned  ;  yet  at  first  all  the  powers  of  the  mind  must  be  brought 
to  bear  on  its  attainment,  and  they  can  hardly  fail  to  be  materially 
strengthened  by  the  training  they  mnsl   undergo.    A  woni,  however, 

as  to  reporting  being  a  mechanical  operation,  as  some  have  termed 
it.  No  effort  put  forth  by  us  can  be  purely  mechanical,  since  the 
mind  is  necessary  to  it.  Walking  and  reading  (reading  aloud  without 
attending  to  the  sens,-i  seem  mechanical  acts,  but  the  mind  is  Indis- 
pensable lo  them.  After  long  practice  indeed,  a  comparatively  ex- 
ternal region  of  the  mind  is  concerned  in  thetn.  for  we  are  enabled 
to  think  and  plan  operations  of  more  interior  faculties  while  these 
outward  acts  are  being  attended  to:  but  at  ftrsl  both  walking  and 
reading  require,  in  order  to  their  attainment,  a  Strong  exercise,  in 
one  case,  of  all  the  powers  of  the  body,  and.  in  the  other,  of  all  the 
powers  of  the  mind  ;  both  having  been,  of  necessity,  improved  and 
strengthened  by  the  training.    It   i-  the  same  with  reporting,  but  in 

this    rase    the    exercise   i-    more   severe;   and  if  even   the  act    of  writing 
should,    by  practice,  become   little   more    than   a    mechanical    perform- 
10 


242  REPORTING    EXERCISES. 

^va..  J  '"V  w  7-  ^v  |  V*  ^\~  X  -^  >  ^ 
j£. s  _i_  ^-  ^  -  £^>  %  vi  5  3^  %  ^  -  y  N 


u-ri^s^ 


L>  >  e^j>  f\ 


*< 


>-/v 


"X 


n 


\VV  s  ""v  I  ^  r  -f  k  x  -^  ^°  i^  M ? 

<  ^  -i  -  r  \  ^N  .v_  " "  -i-  v  ;  ^  ^°  (.  Vp 

^  •  f  x  "^1    (,  I,   ~l  ^  ^  v,  x     D  '  •  >2L    n 


CHEMISTRY.  243 

ance,  the  constant  employment  of  the  mind  in  catching  the  meaning  of 
different  speakers,  and  the  bringing  before  the  writer  all  the  varied  styles 
of  diction  in  nse  among  them,  together  with  the  exercise  in  composition 
afforded  by  the  transcribing  of  what  has  been  written,  cannot  fail  to 
commend  the  art  to  all  who  are  interested  in  education,  and  in  the 
development  of  the  powers  of  the  human  mind.  Even  where  the  student 
of  shorthand  has  been  unable  to  acquire  sufficient  manual  dexterity  to 
follow  a  speaker  verbatim,  the  practice  of  reporting  will  still  be  beneficial  ; 
since  increased  attention  to  the  sense  will  be  required,  in  order  that, 
when  abridging  a  report,  nothing  material  may  he  omitted.  A  habit  is 
thus  cultivated  of  separating  mere  verbiage  from  the  solid  material, 
winnowing  the  chaff  from  the  wheat;  and  though  this  is  not  the 
particular  benefit  on  account  of  which  the  cultivation  of  shorthand  is 
recommended  in  this  article,  ii  is  one  whose  importance  onght  not  to  be 
overlooked  in  regarding  reporting  as  a  mental  exercise. — Thomas  Allen 
Reed. 

7.  CHEMISTRY. 
Chemistry  is  the  science  which  investigates  the  nature  of  bodies, 
and  teaches  ihe  composition  and  properties  of  material  substances, 
together  with  the  changes  they  undergo.  There  is  no  science  more 
extensive,  and  it  is  scarcely  possible  for  one  person  i<>  embrace  it  in 
its  whole  extent.  To  chemistry,  more  or  less  scientifically  pursued, 
numerous  arts  owe  their  birth  and  progress,  and  to  chemistry  the 
naturalist  must  resort  for  the  explanation  of  phenomena  that  without 
its  aid  can  only  be  spoken  of  by  conjecture,  and  on  a  true  knowledge 
Of  which  our  happiness  as  thinking  beings  eminently  depends.  To 
facilitate  the  study  of  this  important  science,  it  is  considered  in 
different  points  of  view,  and   thrown   into  divisions  and  subdivisions, 

so  thai  a  person  maj  devote  himself  t< e  department  of  it,  although 

the  method  of  observing,  analyzing  and  combining  is  the  same  in 
all,  and  although  all  the  phenomena  must  be  explained  by  the  general 
theory,  and  refer  to  certain   laws  of  which  a  previous  knowledge  is 

requisite.     These  laws  Constitute  what  is  called  philosophical   chemistry. 

which  explains  what  is  meant  by  the  affinity  id'  aggregation  or 
cohesion,  and  by  the  affinity  of  composition  or  chemical  affinity. 
It  also  considers  the  effects  of  light,  heat,  and  electricity;  the  nature 
of  the  simple  and  compound  inflammable  bodies;  of  air  and  water; 
the  composition  and  decomposition  of  acids;  tie'  nature  and  proper- 
ties of  the   salts;   their   relations  to   the  acids  ;   the'  calcination,  solution 

and  alloying  of  metals;  the  composition  and  nature  of  plants;  the 
characteristics    of  the   immediate  element-  of   vegetable   substances; 

the  phenomena  of  animali/alion  ;  the  properties  of  animal  com- 
pounds, and  the  decay  of  organic  suhstances.  These  are  its  general 
views,  but,  as  we  have  before  observed,  in  order  to  facilitate  the  study 
of  chemistry,  it  is  divided  into  several  separate  branches.  There  is 
a  meteorological  chemistry,  by  which  the  great  phenomena  observed 
in  the  atmosphere  are  explained;  and  a  geological  chemistry,  which 
seeks  to  account  for  the  various  combinations  of  nature  beneath  the 
earth's  surface,  which  produces  volcanoes,  veins  of  metal,  coals,  basalt, 


244  REPORTING   EXERCISES. 

s^ ^N  ^  ^  c^ ^ ^ N  *  5r c  Gx  (  -*  <  % 


°x 


Y'  -r 


£1  6°:    1  ^  < 


^l 


-    c^:    K^  ^   (    -  -f    <  ^    <  -\  V^^  x^  ^.  v       -s 

^    •    ^   r  •   \   /    f    N ;    k    *    ~  S  °1  (  o   "     lV    C     . 

^  /  )  "V  ^  <  ^  ^  '  ^    ^>    4    _^_  ^»  0 


CHEMISTRY.  245 

etc.    There  Is  also  a  chemistry  of  the  mineral  kingdom,  comprising  the 

examination  of  all  inorganic  substances:  a  chemistry  of  the  vegetable 
kingdom,  which  analyzes  plants  and  their  immediate  products  ;  a  chem- 
istry of  the  animal  kingdom,  which  studies  all  substances  derived  from 
living  or  dead  animals  ;  a  pathological  and  pharmaceutical  chemistry, 
which  traces  the  changes  produced  by  disease,  with  the  nature  and  prep- 
aration of  medicines;  an  agricultural  chemistry,  which  treats  of  the 
nature  of  plants  and  soils,  and  the  laws  of  production.  The  practical 
chemist  distinguishes  bodies  into  simple  and  compound  substances. 
Simple  substances  comprehend  such  as  have  hitherto  not  been  decom- 
pounded. Of  these  some  are  denominated  combustibles,  because  they 
can  undergo  combustion,  or  in  oilier  words  can  burn,  as  hydrogen,  car- 
bon, phosphorus  and  borax,  besides  the  alkalies,  earths  and  metals. 
Some  are  supporters  of  combustion,  which,  though  not  of  themselves 
capable  of  undergoing  combustion,  are  necessary  to  produce  this  effect  in 
other  bodies  ;  of  which  there  are  three,  namely,  the  three  gaseous  bodies, 
oxygen,  chlorine,  and  iodine.  Compound  substances  are  formed  by  the 
union  of  simple  substances  with  each  other,  or  by  that  of  compound  sub- 
stances with  others.  They  result,  first,  from  the  combination  of  oxygen, 
or  one  of  the  Other  simple  supporters  of  combustion,  with  one  of  the 
simple  combustibles  ;  such  are  the  acids:  second,  from  that  of  a  simple 
body  combined  with  oxygen,  with  another  similar  compound  ;  such  are 
the  salts  :  third,  from  that  of  two  or  three  simple  combustibles  with  one 
another;  fourth,  from  that  of  oxygen  wiih  hydrogen  and  carbon,  form- 
ing vegetable  matter  :  fifth,  from  that  of  oxygen  with  hydrogen,  carbon, 
and  azote,  forming  animal  matter.  When  the  constituent  parts  of  bodies 
air  separated  from  each  other,  the  bodies  are  said  to  be  decomposed,  and 
the  act  of  separating  them  is  called  decomposition  :  on  the  other  hand, 
when  bodies  are  so  intimately  united  as  to  form  new  and  distinct  sub- 
stances, this  chemical  union  i~  distinguished  by  the  name  of  combina- 
tion. The  chemical  investigation  of  bodies  therefore  proceeds  in  two 
ways,  namely,  by  analysis,  that  is,  the  separation  of  bodies  by  a  series  of 
decompositions  and  combinations,  to  come  at  the  knowledge  of  the  con- 
stituent parts  :  and  synthesis,  by  a  series  of  processes  to  form  new  com- 
pounds; and  these  two  forms  of  investigation  may  accompany  and  assist 
each  other.  The  commencement  of  the  19th  century  forms  a  brilliant 
era  in  the  progress  of  chemistry  ;  hut  great  as  have  been  the  discoveries, 
and  persevering  as  are  the  researches  of  the  most  profound  inquirers, 
every  step  that  is  taken,  confirms  more  strongly  the  fact,  that  chemistry 
is  a  progressive  Bcience,  and  that  the  discoveries  of  to-day  may  be 
eclipsed  by  tint  discoveries  of  to-morrow.  And  therefore  truly  has  it 
been  said,  that  "its  analysis  i<  indefinite."  Its  termination  will  have 
been  attained  only  when  the  real  elements  of  bodies  shall  have  been 
detect  i'd.  and  all  their  modifications  traced;  bat  how  remote  this  may 
be  from  its  present  state  we  cannot  judge.  Nor  can  we,  from  our  present 
knowledge,  form  any  just  conception  of  the  stages  ,,f  discovery  through 
which  it  has  yet  to  pa-s.    MaundU  rV  Scu  ntiftc  and  Literary  Treasury." 


246  APPLIED   PHONOGRAPHY.  253-254 


APPLIED   PHONOGRAPHY. 

253.  The  student  who  has  obtained  from  the  lessons 
given  in  these  pages  a  good  theoretical  knowledge  of 
Phonography,  and  has  also  had  the  practice  necessary  to 
acquire  a  fair  amount  of  proficiency  as  a  note-taker,  has, 
we  assume,  mastered  the  art  of  shorthand  writing  for 
some  practical  purpose.  It  is  his  intention  to  use  it  in 
the  office;  or  to  employ  it  in  connection  with  the  type- 
writer; or  for  note-taking  of  various  descriptions  (public 
or  private)  ;  or  for  reporting  for  the  press.  Many  works 
have  been  prepared  which  deal  with  what  may  be  termed 
Applied  Phonography,  that  is  the  employment  of  Pitman's 
Shorthand,  in  the  various  occupations  just  indicated.  In 
order  that  the  student  may  know  where  to  find  informa- 
tion of  value  to  him  in  his  individual  practice,  a  brief 
description  of  some  of  the  books  published  is  appended. 

254.  The  whole  subject  of  the  practical  uses  of  short- 
hand is  comprehensively  treated  in  "  The  Shorthand 
Writer  :  a  Complete  Guide  to  the  Commercial,  Profes- 
sional and  other  Uses  of  Shorthand,"  by  T.  A.  Peed  i  price 
$1.00).  This  work  may  be  studied  with  advantage  hy 
all  shorthand  writers  who  are  commencing  work,  or  who 
are  already  in  active  employment,  because  it  embodies 
Mr.  Weed's  pre-eminent  experience  for  half-a-ccntury  in 
every  description  of  shorthand  labor.  Anot  her  work  of 
.Mr.  Reed's  will  be  found  extremely  serviceable  to  short- 
hand writers  who  are  called  upon  to  deal  with  special 
subjects,  namely  "Technical  Reporting"  (40c),  which 
contains  the  best  phonographic  abbreviations  for  em- 
ployment in  mechanical,  medical,  legal  and  statistical 
note  taking,  with  valuable  notes;  and  phonographic 
phrases   for    Latin   and    French    quotations.     There   arc 


255-256  APPLIED   PHONOGRAPHY.  247 

three  other  phrase-books  by  Isaac  Pitman,  -which  are 
indispensable  for  thoroughly  efficient  verbatim  work, 
namely  the  '•Phonographic  Phrase  Book"  (35c),  con- 
taining an  extensive  list  of  phraseograms  which  may  be 
safely  employed;  the  "Legal  Phrase  Book"  (15c),  con- 
taining phrases  useful  to  the  law  reporter  and  lawyer's 
clerk;  the  "  Railway  Phrase  Book"  (15c),  an  adaptation 
of  Phonography  to  the  needs  of  railroad  correspondence. 

255.  Several  works  deal  witli  the  general  employment 
of  shorthand  in  office  work.  The  most  useful,  to  the 
American  stenographer,  being,  "Business  Correspondence 
in  Shorthand"  (30c),  containing  acbual  lmsiness  letters, 
with  forms  and  expressions  met  with  in  the  offices  of  rail- 
road, law,  banking  and  other  branches  of  business,  and 
especially  adapted  to  the  requirements  of  American  stu- 
dents ;  with  typed  key  and  matter  divided  for  speed 
practice.  Other  comprehensive  works  are  "  Phonog- 
raphy in  the  Office:  a  complete  Shorthand  Clerk's  Guide, 
with  chapters  on  special  preparation,  including  business 
phrases  and  contractions,  letters,  etc.";  by  A.  Kingston 
(40c)  The  book  treats  very  fully  on  office  work,  and 
includes  not  only  information  on  shorthand  subjects,  but 
abbreviations,  etc.,  used  in  longhand  writing.  The 
"Shorthand  Commercial  belter  Writer,"  and  "Office 
Work  in  Shorthand."  are  companion  volumes  printed  in 
shorthand  (35c  each),  and  '-Key,''  in  ordinary  type  (20c. 
each). 

256.  The  use  of  the  typewriter  in  association  with 
shorthand  has  become  indispensable,  and  the  following 
works  on  that  subject  will  be  found  of  much  practical 
value:  "A  Manual  of  the  Typewriter"  ($1.00);  "A 
.Manual  of  the  Remington  Typewriter,"  by  John  Harri- 
son (35c);  Instructions  on  the  "Remington,"  "  Cali- 
graph,"  "Yost,"  "  Bar-Eock  "  (20c.  each).  For  further 
particulars  see  catalogue  at  the  end  of  this  book. 


248  APPLIED    PHONOGRAPH V.  257-259 

257.  The  "  Reporters'  Assistant."'  by  Isaac  Pitman  (35c.) 
contains  classified  lists  comprising  every  outline  in  the 
language  which  stands  for  two  or  more  words,  and  is 
valuable,  not  to  reporters  only,  but  to  all  shorthand 
writers,  whenever  a  difficult}-  occurs  in  reading  un- 
vocalized  Phonography.  "Reporting  Hints,"  by  A.  Baker 
(40c),  contains  a  number  of  practical  hints  on  reporting 
and  the  preparation  of  copy  for  the  press,  with  speci- 
mens of  work,  and  the  "  Newspaper  World,"  by  A.  Baker 
(35c),  furnishes  an  historical  and  descriptive  account  of 
press  work,  which  will  be  of  value  to  the  novice. 

258.  .Many  shorthand  writers  turn  their  attention  to 
teaching,  and  there  is  a  constantly  increasing  demand 
for  additional  instructors  in  Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand. 
Very  comprehensive  information  on  the  best  methods  of 
procedure  will  be  found  in  "  A  Handbook  for  Shorthand 
Teachers:  a  Guide  to  the  Art  of  Teaching  Pitman's  Pho- 
nography, including  a  brief  History  of  Shorthand,  Obser- 
vations on  the  Origin  and  Development  of  Phonography, 
etc."  (00c). 

259.  The  student  who  desires  to  become  further  ac- 
quainted with  the  various  departments  of  Shorthand 
Literature,   is  referred  to  the  Catalogue  at  the  end  of  this 

volume,  and  to  the  Phonetic  Journal.  The  Journal  is  the 
oldest  and  largest  weekly  shorthand  periodical  in  exist- 
ence, and,  in  addition  to  articles  of  interest  and  value 
to  all  practical  shorthand  writers,  contains  every  week 
speeches  and  other  useful  reading  matter  in  engraved 
shorthand.  Pitman1  i  Shorthand  WeeMy  is  entirely  printed 
in  beautiful  shorthand,  with  choice  illustrations.  The 
reading  matter  is  thoroughly  entertaining,  and  the  reader 
will  find  its  perusal  an  extremely  pleasant  method  of 
improving  his  knowledge  of  Phonography. 


260-202  TYPEWRITING    AND    SHORTHAND.  249 


TYPEWRITING  AND    SHORTHAND. 

200.  Every  writer  of  shorthand,  who  proposes  to  make 
use  of  his  knowledge  of  the  art  in  professional  or  business 
life,  is  strongly  advised  to  make  himself  an  efficient 
operator  on  the  typewriter.  Without  doubt  the  use  of 
the  typewriter  for  the  transcription  of  shorthand  notes 
is  rapidly  becoming  the  usual  method.  There  are  several 
modes  by  which  the  typewriter  may  be  employed  for  pro- 
ducing a  transcript.  The  shorthand  writer  himself  may 
transcribe  his  own  notes  on  the  typewriter,  and,  provided 
that  lie  is  fairly  expert,  lie  will  accomplish  his  task  in 
much  less  time  and  with  less  fatigue  than  by  the  old 
method.  lie  may  dictate  his  notes  to  an  expert  typist, 
and  by  this  division  of  labor  produce  his  transcript  even 
more  quickly.  In  many  instances  it,  would  be  practicable 
to  divide  the  notes  among  several  operators  able  to  read 
the  shorthand  writer's  notes,  or  portions  might  be  dic- 
tated to  each.  Where  verbatim  transcripts  of  speeches 
or  evidence  arc  required,  either  as  "  copy  "  for  the  printer 
or  for  the  use  of  the  parties  interested,  the  employment  of 
the  typewriter  is  of  the  utmost  advantage,  on  account  of 
the  superior  legibility  of  the  transcript.  In  all  offices 
having  extensive  correspondence,  the  typewriter  is  of 
the  greatest  service,  documents  and  letters  being  dictated 
to  shorthand  writers,  who  are  also  typists. 

261.  The  ability  to  operate  a  typewriter  is  not  difficult 
of  acquirement,  and  at  nearly  all  the  shorthand  schools 
in  the  country,  at  most  of  the  typewrit  Jul;'  agencies  and 
offices,  and  in  connection  with  many  educational  institu- 
tions, instruction  is  given  in  the  art  on  moderate  terms. 

202.  The  publishers  <>f  this  book  have  issued  several 
manuals  on  the  use  of  the  typewriter,  which  will  be  found 


250  TYPEWRITING   AND   SHORTHAND.  262 

extremely  useful  to  those  taking  up   the   art.     Mention 
of  these  will  be  found  on  page  247. 


INDEX. 


(The  referenct  is  to  tJu  Paragraph,  except  where  the  page  «'■«  given.) 


Accent,  203 

Additional  sign  for  g  and  z,  51 

Advantages  of  Shorthand,  juii/r  110 

Affix  (/;•/  '.'.'.'/•'  1?4  -ahty  iltiy 
-ariiy,  175  ;  -ly,  176;  -mental,  -'/>>  n 
■tality,  177  ;  -self,  178;  -sAip,  179 

All,  joined  logogram  for,  156 

Alphabet,  the,  7 

Applied  Phonography,  253 

Approbation  anddissent.signsof, 241 

Aspirate,  10  :  representation  of,  ill 

Business  Letters,  pagi   166 

Basiness  Phrases  and  i  lontractions, 

/j(fr/f  lti.'i 

(  apital  letters,  to  mirk,  205 

Gh  and  upward  r,  rales  for  writing, 

28 
Chapter  and  verse,  how  to  indicate, 

2  IS 
Choosing  matter  for  dictation,  215 
<  lircle  8  at  ■•nil  of  half  sized  letters, 

ill:  u  hen  used, .".; 
Circles  and  limps  preceding  a  hook, 

pagi  I'' 
Coalescents,  10 
Compounds   of    Here,    There,  and 

Where,  249. 
Con  and  com,  omission  of,  '.'I  I 
( 'onsonants,  table  of,  pagi    I 
t  lontinuants,  9 
Contractions.  192  ;  pagi  101 
Derivative  words,  position  of,  229 
Diagrams  formed  from  consonants, 

18 
Dictation,  215 
Diphthongs,  IS;  places  of,  46;  joined 

initial.  165;   W  and  //  series,  152; 

dissyllabic,  181 
Directions  for  writing  (he  con  so 

pants,  1 1 
Directions  to  the  student,  1 
Dissyllabic  diphthongs,  isi 
Doable  consonants,  si 
Doable-length  adding  Ir,  dr,  or  thr, 

163;   position  of,  230;    vocaliza 

Hon  of.  168 
Doable  sized  g,  ">l 
Duplicate  signs  for//  and  thr,  SI  ; 

how  emploj cd.  S'.1 ' 
Emphasis,  204 
Bzplodents,  8 
Figures,  206  :  representation  of,  2-16 


Final  hook  and  final  vowel.  OS 

Pinal  /.  133  :  Ir,  134;  r,  129 

/•'or  r  hook  to  straight  letters,  95  ; 
used  medially,  96 

Foreign  consonants  and  vowels,  185 

Fountain  pens,  222 

/■'/■  and  thr,  duplicate  signs  fin-,  SI 

French  Words  and  phrases,  page  206 

Gold  pens.  222 

Grammalogaes,  49  ;  phonetically  ar- 
ranged, pagi  92;  alphabetically 
arranged,  pagi  94  ;  positions,  188; 
irregular,  190 

//  following  another  consonant,  119 

Half-length  curves.  138 

Halving  principle,  pagi  66 

Here,  '/'//<  re,  and  Where, compounds 

Of,  '.'111 

Horizontal    and   half-sized  letters, 

position  of,  231 
Initial  /.  132  ;  r,  126 
Insertion  of  vowel,  words  requiring, 

*-!.->  1 

Intersected  words,  245 
Irregular  double  consonants,  84 
i  n  I'gular  grammalogaes,  190 
Joined  consonants,   rules  for,  20: 
final    vowels,    ir>7 :    initial  diph- 
thongs, 155;  initial  vowel-.   155; 
VOWel  sign  for  ir  and  y,  154 
Junction  of  half  length  strokes,  14< 

/.  added  tO  curved  letters.  83 

Large  circle,  medial  and  final,  5S 

Latin  Quotations,  pagi  202 

Law  Phrases,  pagi  170 

Leaves  of  note  hook,  method  id' 
turning,  224 

Legal  Correspondence,  pagi  174 

Liquids,  10 

Logograms,  49 ;  halved  for  past 
tense,  235 

Longhand  writing,  242 

L<uiLr  vowels,  30;  between  conso- 
nants..",."!: places,  36;  sounds  of,  31 

Long  and  short  vowels'  places  com 
pared,  44 

I  '  w  ritten  upward.  140 

Method  of  holding  the  pen,  8  :  of 
practice,  207  :  oftnrning  leaves  of 

note  hook,  'J'.M 

A  added  to  straight  letters,  93 ;  to 
carves,  94 


252 


Nasals,  10 

Nominal  consonant,  184 

Note-books,  222 

Note-taking  in  public,  217 

Of  the,  195 

Omission  of  con  and  com,  244 

Outlines,  size  of,  218 

Past  tense  ending  in  /  or  d,  145  ;  of 
verb  expressed  by  logogram,  235  ; 
of  verb  written  by  double-length, 
167 

Pen,  method  of  holding,  3 

Phonetic  spelling,  34 

Phraseogram  or  logogram  employed 
to  express  com  or  am,  200 

Phraseograms,  197;  general  list  of, 
250  ;  position  of  first  word,  199  ; 
vocalization  of,  198 

Phraseography,  225 

PI  and  Pr,  vocalization  of,  158 

Places  of  long  vowels,  32 

Pocket  inkstand,  222 

Positions  of  grammalogucs,  188 

Position  of  words  having  outlines  of 
their  own,  232 

Position,  writing  in,  227 

Positive  and  negative  words,  213 

Pr  and  pi  mnemonics,  73,  74 

Practical  Hints  in  Legal  Work,  page 
176 

Prefix  com  or  am,  169  ;  inter,  intro, 
enter,  170;  magna,  magni,  171  ; 
s<lf.  172  ;  in,  173 

Principle  of  phrasing,  250 

R  hook  added  to  imj,  SO 

11  and  /  hooks  to  straight  letters,  69  ; 
vocalization  of,  75  ;  medial  and 
final,  75 ;  when  generally  em- 
ployed, 77  ;  to  carves,  79 

Rapid  longhand  writing,  342 

Rapid  writing,  secret  of,  212 

Relation  <>f  the  consonants,  11 

Reporting  contractions,  list  of,  p.  I  IS 

Reporting  Exercises  :  sermon  on  the 
immortality  of  the  sou], pagt  815  ; 
characteristics  of  the  age,  p.  239  ; 
supposed  reply  to  a  requisition,  /'. 
229 ;  shorthand  writers  and  re- 
porters, //.  381  :  speech  by  Daniel 
Webster,  //.   233;    reporting  as  a 

mental  exercise,  p.  239;  chemis- 
try, p.  248 
Reporting  grammalognes,  234  ;  pho 

Helically   arranged.  pagt    128  [    :>\ 

phabetically  arranged,  pagi  180 

Reporting  witnesses.  239 

Representation  <>f  figures,  246 

# added  to  hooked  consonants,  <nii  ; 

to  pr  Series,  H7 

5 and  z,  additional  sign  for,  51 


8  between  two  straight  lines,  53 ; 
joined  to  straight  strokes,  51  ;  to 
curves,  52  :  to  /,  and  /'hooks,  99 

St  loop,  59  ;  medial,  61  ;  after  -lion 
hook,  150  ;  prefixed  xopr  series,  91 

St  and  Str  loops  combined  with  // 
hook,  103 

Str  loop,  62;  s  added,  63 

Stv  circle,  67  ;  prefixed  to  pr  series, 
92 

Secret  of  rapid  writing,  212 

Shorthand  Teachers,  258 

Short  vowels,  37  ;  representation  of, 
38  ;  between  two  consonants,  42 

Significant  marks,  236 

Signs  of  approbation  and  dissent, 
etc.,  241 

Similar  words,  list  of,  page  209 

Single  and  double  consonants,  table 
of,  page  72 

Size  of  the  consonants,  12 ;  of  out- 
lines, 218 

Speed  practice,  212 

Stops,  etc.,  202 

Stroke  s  or  .:.  when  used,  56 

7' or  d  added  by  halving,  135,  143 

Table  of  consonants,  page  A  ;  single 
and  double  consonants,  page  72. 

The,  tick,  194. 

Theological  phrases,  page  193 

There  or  their,  expression  of  by 
doubling,  201 

Tick  the,  194 

Time  required  to  learn  Phonogra- 
phy, 2 

Timi  hook,  104  ;  following  a  curve, 
105  ;  after  a  straight  letter,  inti; 
after  /.  it,  or  ./,  107  ;  on  opposite 
side  to  vowel,  108  ;  used  medially, 
110  ;  following  circle  8  or  ns,  111 

Transcription,  342 

Typewriting  manuals,  256 

Typewri  ting  and  shorthand,  260 

Vocalization  of  double  length.  168  I 
of  half  sized  consonants,  186  ;  of 
words  containing  6  or  z,  55 

Vowels  to  be  inserted,  233 

Vowels,  joined  final,  157;  joined 
inii  ial,  155 

ir  and  i/  diphthongs,  152 

Words 'containing  s  or  z,  vocaliza- 
tion of.  55;  ending  in  netiim, 
■ection,  omission  of  /',  pafft  146  : 
ending  in  tire,  omission  of  /  and  /', 
piu/i    115:     requiring  insertion  of 

vowel,  251 
Writing  by  sound,  84;  in  position, 

Writing  materials,  221 

Writing  on  the  knee,  223 


ISAAC     PITMAN    &    SONS' 
CATALOGUE 

OF 

Shorthand   and   Educational 
Works  and  Supplies. 


THIS    SYSTEM    HAS     BEEN     ADOPTED     BY    THE 

BOARD    OF     EDUCATION     OF    THE 

FOLLOWING    CITIES: 

NEW  YORK  CITY  ;  ST.  LOUIS,  MO.;  TRENTON,  N.  J.r 

LOWELL,  MASS.;    LYNN,  MASS.; 

MARSHALLTOWN,  lA., 

ETC.,  ETC. 


NEW    YORK  : 

ISAAC     PITMAN     &    SONS, 

THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  DEPOT. 
33    Union  Square. 


2 

Publishers'  Notes  and  Comments. 


HOW    TO    GET    OUR     BOOKS: 

Booksellers  who  do  not  have  them  in  stock  will  procure  them  to 
order  at  the  regular  price.  In  giving  your  orders,  specify  distinctly 
that  you  want  the  editions  bearing  the  imprint  of  Isaac  Pitman  & 
Sons  on  the  title  page,  as  the  publishers,  and  that  all  other  editions 
will  be  refused.  This  is  especially  important  in  regard  to  the  text- 
books, if  you  wish  for  the  latest  and  revised  editions.  Or, 
You  May  Order  Direct.  The  recently  improved  facilities  for 
sending  books  by  mail  or  express  are  such,  that  il  is  almost  as  easy 
to  get  a  book  from  New  York  as  to  buy  it  at  your  own  home.  Then 
you  have  the  additional  advantage  of  always  receiving  the  latest 
editions  and  a  perfect  copy.  The  express  companies  now  take 
books  at  the  same  rates  as  they  would  cost  by  mail  :  and  as  they 
give  a  receipt  safe  delivery  is  insured.  All' orders  must  be  accom- 
panied by  a  remittance.  Goods  G,  O.  D.  if  one-fourth  of  price  is 
sent  with  order. 
HOW    TO    SEND     MONEY     BY     MAIL: 

Money  may  be  sent  by  Post-office  Money  Order,  Express  Money 
Order,  Postal  Note,  Draft  on  a  New  York  Bank,  Registered  Letter,  or 
Postage  Stamps  (of  any  denomination).  Make  remittances  payable 
to  Isaac  Pitman  >fc  Sons,  New  York.  All  postmasters  are  required 
to  register  letters  ou  application. 

BOOKS    AS    PRESENTS: 

When  you  wish  to  make  a  present  of  a  book  (and  there  are  many 
excellently  adapted  for  that  purpose  in  this  catalogue),  enclose  a 

card  in  your  letter  on  which  is  written  "  Presented  to by " 

We  will  place  this  in  the  book  and  send  it  to  such  address  as  you 

may  indicate. 

TEACHERS    AND    THE    TRADE 

Are  supplied  at  a  very  liberal  discount.  Pates  on  application. 
TEACHERS  OF  Shorthand,  who  desire  to  keep  Up  with  the  progress 
of  the  Art,  and  give  their  pupils  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from 
the  latest  Improvements  and  best  arranged  instruction  books  and 
aids,  should  scud  to  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons  for  sample  copies,  at 
teachers'  reduced  rules.  Applications  may  lie  written  in  Phonog- 
raphy, All  Teachers  are  Invited  to  send  their  names  and 
addresses  to  us  for  registration.  We  have  already  hundreds  of 
names  of  those  now  teaching  the  system  in  public  and  private 

schools,  and  wish  to  make  the  list  Still  more  complete,      It  is  to  the 

mutual  advantage  of  teachers  and  ourselves  to  be  known  to  each 
other.  Teachers  should  keep  us  Informed  of  their  preseul  address, 
and  when  at  liberty  for  positions.  Special  Certificates  granted  to 
teachers  of  phonography.  Full  particulars  on  application. 
*  .„*  Any  of  the  winks  mentioned  In  this  Catalogue  will  be  sent  securely 
packed  and  posl  paid  to  any  pari  of  the  United  States,  Canada,  or 
Mexico,  on  receipt  of  price  i>\  the  Publishers. 

■  t*  For  particulars  Of  New    Works    Issued    since   this  Catalogue,  see   the 
"  Phonetic  Journal,"  published  weekly. 

NEW    YORK  : 
ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  the  Phonographic  Depot, 

33   UNION    SQUARE. 
Canada  :     The  Copp,   Clark  Co.,   Limited,  Toronto. 

Boston  :     W.   E.   Hickox,   Pierce  Building. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  WORKS. 

By   ISAAC    PITMAN 

(The  Inventor  of  Phonography). 


ONE  ADVANTAGE  in  taking  np  the  [saac  Pitman  system  is.  that 
the  text-books  are  issued  in  such  a  variety  of  forms  and  bindings, 
that  intending  students  and  others  are  enabled  to  select  that  which  best 
suits  their  fancy  and  pocket. 

A  complete  expositi f  the  system,  in  one  handy-sized  volume,  will 

be  found  iii  ••  Isaac  Pitman's  ( lomplete  Phonographic  Instructor,"  which 
presents  the  entire  system  in  a  clear  and  concise  manner,  from  the  lirst 
principles  to  the  reporting  style.  Price  $1.50.  For  particulars,  see 
below.  The  "Instructor  is  also  published  in  two  parts,  and  those 
wishing  to  obtain  the  system  in  a  less  expensive  form  are  recommended 
to  obtain  Part  [.,  or,  "  The  New  Manual  of  Phonography,"  price  (inc. 

***  Isaac.  Pitman  &  Sous  will  be  pleased  t<>  recommend  competent 
shorthand  teachers,  ami  schools.  All  advice  is  freely  given,  and  corre- 
spondence solicited. 

ISAAC  PITMAN'S  COMPLETE  PHONOGRAPHIC 
INSTRUCTOR.     A  New  and  Complete  Exposition  of 

Isaac  Pitman's  System  of  Phonography  or  Phonetic  Shorthand. 
Containing  instruction  in  both  the  Corresponding  and  Reporting 
Styles,  with  copious  lists  of  Phrases  and  Exercises,  Business  Let- 
ters, and  Specimens  of  Legal  Forms.  The  plan  of  the"  Instructor" 
makes  it  equal lv  acceptable  for  se^f-tutlion  and  for  class-use. 
A  chapter  entitled  "  Practical  Hint-  in*  Legal  Work,"  from  the  pen 
of  Mr.  \V.  L.  Mason,  Principal  of  the  Metropolitan  School  of  Isaac 
Pitman  Shorthand.  95  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York,  is  a  prominent 
feature  of  the  book.  This  presentation  of  Phonography,  embody- 
ing, as  it  does,  the  accumulatt  d  < xpi  rii  nee  ofovt  r fifty  //-  ars,  is  tin; 
MOST  I  lOMPLBTE  and  PERFECT  Shorthand  Text -book  that  has  K\  en 
Be]  n  Issued.  The  chosen  text-book  for  the  public  schools  of  New 
York.    Elegantly  bound  in  cloth,  gilt  lettered,  250  pages. 

Price,  SI -50 
Isaac  Pitman's  Complete  Phonographic  Instructor,  Part 
I.,  or,  The  New  Manual  of  Phonography.     Contain- 
ing a  complete  exposition  of  the  system  from  its  simplest  principles 
to  the  fid  I  or  Corresponding  style,    in  pages,  stiff  cover. 

Price,  60  cents 

Isaac  Pitman's  Complete  Phonographic  Instructor,  Part 
II.,  or,  The  New  Phonographic  Reporter.  Contain- 
ing the  Abbreviated  or  Reporting  Style  of  Phonography.    137  pages, 

Stiff  cover Price.  ',:>  cents 

"The  -complete  Phonographic  Instructor'  gives  a  complete  ex- 
position of  Phonography,  explaining  every  feature  in  the  clearest 
manner,  and  presents  the  accumulated  experience  of  the  most  ex- 
pert teachers  and  writers  of  the  art.  It  is  undoubtedly  one  of  the 
most  perfect  shorthand  text  books  that  has  ever  been  issued." 

./  tut  mil  qf  Education,  Boston. 
KEY  to   "  Isaac    Pitman's    Complete   Phonographic    In- 
structor."   Contains  a    Key  to  till   the  Exercises,  and 
nl<o  furnishes  Answers  to  the  Review  Questions.    Uniform  with 
the  Instructor,  cloth Price,  50  cents 


4 

The    Phonographic   Teacher.     A    Guide  to   a   Practical 

Acquaintance  with  the  Art  of  Phonography  or  Phonetic  Short- 
hand, containing  a  Series  of  Progressive  Lessons.  Eacli  principle 
is  clearly  and  fully  explained,  and  the  knowledge  learned  is  applied 
in  the  shorthand  and  type  exercises,  following  each  principle. 
This  work  has  recently  been  entirely  revised  and  remodel;'  '  nil 
the  whole  re-set  in  bold,  clear  type.  Over  one  million-anl  ..-naif 
copies  of  this  work  have  been  sold,  which  fact  sufficiently  attests 
with  what  ease  Phonography  can  be  learned.  48  pages,"  in  stiff 
paper  covers Price,  16  cents 

Key  to    the    Phonographic  Teacher.     Of  <  value  to 

the  private  student ,,  r^  cents 

Progressive    Studies    in   Phonography.     A    simple    and 

extended  exposition  of  the  Art  of  Phonetic  Shorthand,  as  set  forth 
in  the  '•Phonographic  Teacher,"  the  "Manual  of  Phonography," 
and  the  ''Reporter;"  intended  as  a  supplementary  book  to  these 
three,  and  for  the  use,  principally,  of  students  who  are  teaching 
themselves Price,  35  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 

The  "Fono"  Headline  Shorthand  Copy  Books,  Nos.  1, 
2,  and  3,  containing  a  series  of  beautifully  engraved  graduated 
copies,  to  be  written  in  Shorthand,  in  conjunction  with  the  study 
of  the  "  Phonographic  Teacher."    Size  8*4  by  t%. 

Price,  each,  10  cents 

"The  great  surprise  that  strikes  one  on  first  seeing  these  copy 
books  is,  that  such  an  excellent  idea  has  not  been  utilized  before. 
Teachers  of  large  classes  and  schools  should  be  thankful  to  Mr. 
Pitman  for  having  come  to  their  rescue  with  so  valuable  a  series  of 
books." — Frank  Harrison's  Shorthand  Magazine. 

The  Phonographic   Exercise    Book.     Made   of  the   best 

quality  paper,  in  single  or  double  lines,  as  ordered. 

Price,  10  cents  ;  post  price,  14  cents 

Exercises  in  Phonography.      A  series  of  graduated  sen- 

tence  exercises,  illustrating  the  system  as  developed  in  the  "Pho- 
nographic Teacher." Price,  2  cents ;  post-paid,  8  cents 

These  Exercises  on  cards  (It!)  in  wrapper  for  class-use.    Price,  10  cents 

iEsop's  Fables.  In  the  Learner's  Style.  A  valuable 
reading  book  in  words  of  one  syllable,  to  be  used  in  conjunction 
with  the  "  Phonographic  Teacher." Price,  rC  cents 

Easy  Readings.  In  the  Learner's  Style  of  Shorthand, 
with  Key  at  the  end  of  the  book Price,  IScents 

A  Compend  of  Phonography.     Containing  the  Alpliabet, 

Grammalogues,  and  principal  Rules  for  Writing.    200th  thousand. 

Price,  2 cents  j  post  paid,  Scents 

A  Manual  of  Phonography.  (800th  thousand.)  Contain- 
ing a  complete  Exposition  Of  the  system,  With  numerous  engraved 
shorthand  examples  Interspersed  with  the  text,  and  exercises  In 
reading  and  writing,    Many  pages  of  engraved  reading  matter  are 

included  in  the  book.      IK7  pages..    .  Price,  10  cenls  ;    cloth,  50  Cents 

"The  [saac  Pitman  'Phonographic  Teacher'  and  'Manual  of 
Phonography'  have  been  added  to  the  list  of  text  books  adopted 
i>v  tin-  New  York  Board  of  Education,  for  use  in  the  evening  high 

BChOOls,    Teachers  will  do  well  to  examine  these  works  seeing  lln  ir 

moderate  price— quite  an  important  point    ami  the  admirable  way 


5 

In  which  they  are  arranged.  Many  teachers  have  already  made  a 
change  from  the  high-priced  and  complicated  text-books  to  the 
above."    .V.  Y.  School  Journal. 

"States  In  a  clear  and  comprehensive  manner  the  principles  ol 

an  excellent  system  of  shorthand.    The  exercises  are  plentiful  and 

ll  adapted  for  practical  application  of  the  knowledge  previously 

g  Lhered.    The  improvements  have  kept  up  with  the  needs  of  the 

time,  ami  this  text-book  lias  many  fine  qualities  to  recommend  it." 

— Public  Opinion.  Washington  and  New  York. 

"  itelligent  person  can  learn  shorthand  from  this  book 

will'  er instruction." —  Teacher's  World,  New  York. 

"  Teacl.  and  "  Manual."     In  1  vol.,  roan,  gilt  edges. 

Price,  80  cents 

Key  to  Exercises  in  Manual  of  Phonography. 

Price,  "Hicents 

The  "  Fono  "  Headline  Shorthand  Copy  Books.     Nos.  4, 

5,  and  6.    Graduated  exercises  on  "  Manual. "...Price,  each,  10  cents 

The  Phonographic  Reader.  A  course  of  Reading  Exer- 
cises in  Phonography,  with  a  Key  in  ordinary  type. .  ..Price,  IS  cents 

Questions  on  the  Manual  of  Phonography.  A  series  of 
questions  on  the  ••  Manual." Price,  10  cents 

The  Phonographic  Reporter;  or,  Reporter's  Companion. 
An  adaptation  of  Phonography  to  Verbatim  Reporting  for  profes- 
sional reporters  and  others  who  desire  to  become  such.    112  pages. 

Trice,  CO  cents  ;  cloth,  75  cents 

Reporting  Exercises.  Intended  as  a  Companion  to  the 
"Phonographic  Reporter,"  containing  exercises  mi  all  the  rules 
and  contracted  words  in  this  hook Price.  T5-ceuts 

Key  to  the  "Reporting  Exercises,"  in  winch  all  the  Ex- 
ercises are  presented  in  Shorthand,  in  Reporting  style. 

Price.  ; HO  cents  ;  cloth,  40 cents 

The  Acquisition  of  Speed  in  Phonography.  By  E.  A. 
Cope,    lti  pages Price, 2 cents ;  post-paid.  .Scents 

The  Grammalogues  and  Contractions  of  Pitman's  "  Pho- 
nographic Reporter,"  for  use  in  classes   Price,  5 cen is 

The  Phonographic  Phrase  Book.  (New  and  enlarged 
edition).  Containing  above  two  thousand  useful  phrases  in  Pho- 
nography, with  a  Key  In  the  ordinary  type,  and  an  exercise  occu- 
pying 43  pages,  containing  all  the  phrases  as  they  occur  in  the 
book Price,  35  cents  ;  clot  h,  SO  cents 

Phonography  :    The  Manual,  Reporter  and  Phrase  Book, 

in  one  volume Price,  cloth,  $  1 .50 

A  Phonographic  Dictionary  of  the  English  Language. 
Containing  the  Shorthand  forms  for  55,000  words,  and  5.000 
proper  names;  also  blank  pages  fur  additional  words.  The 
most  comprehensive  Shorthand  Dictionary  published.  sixth 
edition.    3iio  pages  crown  s\  o,  handsome  cloth  binding,    specimen 

pages  on  application        Price,  $lr85  i.J* 

"Library  Edition,"  half  roan,  beveled  board.-,  lt  i .  t .  colored  edges.       j 

Price.  jlrfW  hr 


The  Reporter's  Assistant.     (New  edition.)     A  Key  to  the 

Reading  of  the  Reporting  Style  of  Phonography.  The  "  Reporter's 
Assistant"  is  the  fruit  of  much  labor.  All  the  words  in  the  dic- 
tionary, not  exceeding  three  consonants,  were  written  in  Short- 
hand, and,  from  this  extensive  list  of  outlines  has  been  drawn  all 
words  that  contain  the  same  outline,  and  they  have  been  classified 
according  to  their  forms Price,  35  cents;  cloth,  50  cents 

Technical  Reporting.  Comprising  Phonographic  Abbre- 
viations for  words  and  phrases  commonly  met  with  in  reporting 
Legal,  Medical,  Scientific  and  other  Technical  Subjects.  By  T.  A. 
Reed.    60  pages Price,  40  cents;  cloth,  50  cents 

Business  Correspondence  in  Shorthand,  No.  1.  Contain- 
ing actual  business  letters  as  dictated  to  stenographers  in  American 
business  offices.  The  following  subjects  are  treated  :  Railroad, 
Law,  Banking,  Stocks,  etc.,  etc.  The  work  is  Keyed  in  ordinary 
type,  and  the  matter  counted  off  into  sections  for  speed-testing  in 
either  shorthand  or  typewriting.  Of  value  to  writers  of  any  system 
and  indispensable  in  the  class  room  and  business  college.  48  pages 
in  attractive  cover Price,  30  cents 

"An  excellent  work.  I  like  it  very  much  indeed,  and  have  felt 
the  want  of  such  a  book  for  a  long  time." — Miss  Mary  E.  Bbal, 
Teacher  of  Isaac  Pitman's  Shorthand  in  the  Bangor  (Me.)  Business 
College. 

"  Our  shorthand  teachers  pronounce  it  excellent."— J.  G.  Bohmek, 
Jones  Commercial  College,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

Business  Correspondence  in  Shorthand,  No.  2.    Similar 

in  character  to  above,  but  different  letters.    40  pages  in  cover. 

Price,  SS-cents 

Phonography  in  the  Office.  A  Complete  Shorthand 
Clerk's  Guide.  A  book  for  everyone  who  desires  to  make  use  of 
Shorthand  in  the  Office.    By  A.  Kingston.     130  pages,  fcp  8vo. 

Price,  40  cents;  cloth,  50  cents 

Graduated  Dictation  Books,  for  acquiring  Speed  in 
Shorthand  and  Typewriting.  Adapted  to  any  system.  The  reading 
matter  is  divided  on  a  new  and  improved  plan.  Divided  for  speeds 
of  50,  80,  100  and  ItiO  words  per  minute.  1"  pages,  crown  8vo.  No. 
1.— Political  Speeches.    No.  2.--Sermons Price,  each,  10  cents 

Key,  in  Shorthand,  to    the  Graduated    Dictation  Book. 

Nos.  1  and  S Price,  each,  20  cents 

The  Shorthand  Commercial  Letter  Writer.     A  Guide  to 

Commercial  Correspondence  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  Phonography; 

presents  specimens  of  the  kind  of  correspondence  used  in  business. 

so  that  tlir  Student  can  train   himself  in  the  art   of  writing  business 

let  t  ns  from  die!  at  ion.     M  pages  IV  p. .  Price,  86  cents;  cloth,  50  cents 

Key  to  the  Shorthand  Commercial  Letter  Writer. 
Containing  all  the  letters  of  the  "Shorthand  Commercial  Letter 
Writer"  in  ordinary  type Price,  20  cents;  cloth,  86  nuts 

The  Shorthand  Commercial  Letter  Writer  and  Key. 
[none  volume Cloth,  price,  60  cents 

Office  Work  in  Shorthand.  Being  Specimens  of  Miscel- 
laneous Work  commonly  dictated  to  shorthand  clerks,  in  Reporting 

Style,     (to  pages Price,  35  cents;  cloth,  50  cents 


7 

Key  to  Office  Work  in  Shorthand.  Containing  all  the 
Specimens,  Documents,  etc..  of  "Office  Work  in  Shorthand,"  in 
ordinary  type  Price,  20  cents;  cloth,  35  cents 

Office  Work  in  Shorthand  and  Key.     In  one  volume. 

Cloth,  price,  60  cents 

The  Phonographic  Railway  Phrase  Book.  An  adapta- 
tion of  Phonography  to  the  Requirements  of  Railway  Business  and 
Correspondence.. — Price,  K  cents 

The  Phonographic  Legal  Phrase  Book.  An  adaptation 
of  Phonography  to  the  Requirements  of  Legal  Business  and  Corres- 
pondence Price,  rScents 

List  of  the  Phonetic  Society  for  the  current  year.  ^Pub- 
lished  end  of  March Price,  5  cents 


ADAPTATIONS     OF      ISAAC      PITMAN'S      PHO- 
NOGRAPHY   TO    FOREIGN    LANGUAGES. 

French  Phonography.     An  adaptation  of  Phonography  to 

the  French  language.    By  T.  A.  Reed Price,  35  cents 

f  German  Phonography.     An  adaptation  of  Phonography 

to  the  German  language Cloth,  price,  $1.25 

f  Spanish  Phonography.     An  adaptation  of  Phonography 

to  the  Spanish  language.    In  the  press.    Particulars  hereafter. 
fManuale    di    Fonografia    Italiana.       An   adaptation   of 

Phonography  to  the  Italian  language.    By  Giuseppe  ETrancini. 

Price,  50  cents 

f  Dutch  Phonography.  An  adaptation  of  Phonography 
to  the  Dutch  language.    By  P.  DeHaan Price,  $1.00 

f  Phonographia  Sef  Llaw  Fer  yn  ol  Trefn  Mr.  Isaac 
Pitman.    An  adaptation  of  Phonography  to  the  Welsh  language. 

By  Rev.  R.  ll.  Morgan,  M.A Price,  50 cents 

SHORTHAND    READING    BOOKS. 
(Printed  in  Phonography  from  engraved  metal  characters.) 

There  is  to  better  way  to  Secure  speed  and  accuracy  in  writing, 
that  bj  the  constant  reading  of  well-engraved  shorthand.  One  advan- 
tage of  Studying  the  Isaac  Pitman  system  and  one  which  cannot  well 
be  over  estimated— is,  that  the  Shorthand  literature  in  that  system  is  far 
in  excess  of  all  other  systems  combined. 

The  Journal  of  Education,  Boston,  remarks:  "The  Isaac  Pitman 
system  is  the  only  one  having  a  Shorthand  literature  of  its  own,  from 
n  li'cli  students  quickly  and  easily  learn  the  •  best  forms.'  " 

Frank  Harrison?  s  Shorthand  Magazim  says:    "It  must  he  admitted 

on  every  hand  that  the  wealth  of  literature  in  the  Isaac  Pitman  system 
Becuresfor  its  students  and  writers  an  immense  benefit,  not  available  in 
any  other  system." 

The  Penman's  Art  Journal  says:  "Wearewell  aware  of  the  advan- 
tages of  the  Isaac  Pitman  system  on  account  of  its  complete  literature." 


8 

IN   THE  CORRESPONDING  STYLE. 


Extracts  No.  1.  Containing  the  following  Tales:  "Ten 
Pounds,1'  '-The  First  Offence,"  and  "The  Broken  Chess  Pawn." 

Price,  T§  cents 
Extracts  No.  2.     Containing  "  That  Which  Money  Cannot 
Buy,"  "The  Deaf  Musician,"  "How    to  Prosper  in    Business," 
"Woman:  her  Position  and  Power,"  and  "Kindness." 

Price,  TScents 

Extracts  No.  3.     Containing  "  Being  and  Seeming,'       My 

Donkey,"  and  "  A  Parish  Clerk's  Tale  " Price,  IS  cents 

'ym 

The  Book  of  Psalms Price,  35  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 

The  Narrative  of  the  Pilgrim's  Progress. 

Price,  40  cents  ;  cloth,  60  cents 
Self-Culture.     By  Prof.   Blackie.  .Price,  35 cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 

Gulliver's  Voyage  to  Lilliput.     By  Dean  Swift. 

Price,  35  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 

Select  Poetry Price,  "K>  cents 

Tales    and    Sketches.      By   Washington    Irving.    vWith 

printed  Key  at  foot  of  each  page Price,  35  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 

Gleanings   from   Popular  Authors.     With  a  Key  at  the 

foot  of  each  page.    175  pages Price,  40  cents  ;  cloth.  50  cents 

"This  work  is  another  valuable  addition  to  the  varied  literature 
of  this  system."—  Penman's  Art  Journal. 

The  Vicar  of  Wakefield.     Illustrated.     280  pages. 

Price,  50  cents  ;  cloth,  00  cents 

"A  more  interesting  and  instructive  work  in  Phonography  can 
hardly  be  imagined."    Evening  Telegram.  New  York. 

"An  excellent  reading  book  to  familiarize  oneself  with  the  forms 
and  characters." — Cincinnati  Times-Star. 

"Is  of  convenient  size,  finely  engraved,  well  printed,  and  the 
illustrations,  which  are  numerous,  add  to  the  general  attractiveness 
of  the  work.  A  book  that  the  students  of  the  Isaac  Pi  I  man  system 
should  be  proud  of." — The  Office,  New  York. 

The  Shorthand  Birthday  Book  of  Poetical  Selections. 
Contains  selection-  from  Horace  to  poete  of  the  present  day.  Each 
opening  bason  the  left  page  selections  for  three  days,  and  on  the 
right  page  blanks  for  the  insertion  of  names.  The  Phonography  is 
printed  from  shorthand  specially  engraved  for  the  work,  and  the 
cover  has  o  floral  design  printed  in  gold  and  colors.  Eminently 
adapted  as  a  gift  booh  from  teacher  to  pupil.    A  unique  book. 

I'i  ice,  75  cents 

"A  beautiful  present    to  a   friend   who   writes  Shorthand.     The 

selections  are  in  excellent    taste   and    the   Shorthand  rendering   is 

exquisitely  done." — The  Stenographer. 
•■  A  particularly  dainty  little  volume,    Altogether  unique." 

—Penman's  Art  Journal. 

IN  THE   REPORTING   STYLE. 

Selections  No.  1.  Containing  "Character  of  Washington," 
"Speech of  George  Canning  at  Plymouth,"  "The  Irish  church," 
"Calvin.  Galileo,  and  Shakspeare."  etc.,  »  ill'  printed  Key. 

Price,  t6  cents 


9 

Selections  No.  2.  Containing  "Address  of  the  Earl  of 
Derby  on  being  installed  Lord  Rector  of  the  University  of  Edin- 
burgh," "  The  Civilizing  Influence  <  >f  Music."  etc. .  ..Price,  I&cents 

Selections  No.  3.  Containing  "  Prof.  Max  Miiller  on^Na 
tional  Education,"  •'Sermon  by  Rev.  H.  B.  Browning,  M.A  ," 
"The Eastern  Question,"  etc Price,  &  cents 

Leaves  from  the  Note-Book  of  Thomas  Allen  Reed,  with 
printed  Key  at  the  foot  of  each  pare,  in  two  volumes,  fep.  8vo. 
Vol.  I.  contains  a  portrait  of  Mr.  Reed.  Each  volume  is  complete  in 
itself Price,  eacb  vol.,  50  cents  ;  cloth.  GO  cents 

Two  Trips  to  India.  By  T.  A.  Reed.   64  pages.  Price,  35  cents 

The  Legend  of  Sleepy  Hollow.  By  Washington  Irving, 
with  printed  Key  at  the  foot  of  each  page  Price  fs  cents 

yd 

The  Bible  in  Shorthand.  Containing  the  old  and  New  Tes- 
tament-, large  8vo.  (8J4  in*.  by  5%  ins.).  Price,  cloth,  beveled 
boards,  red  edges,  $3  .  roan,  gilt  edges,  $3.50;  morocco,  gilt  edges, 
g4  50.    specimen  page  on  application. 

"  Is  very  attractive;  in  style  and  is  published  at  a  reasonable  price. 
Despite  the  delicacy  of  the  characters,  every  line,  point  or  dash  is 
as  clear  as  print.    Quite  a  curiosity." — N.  Y.  Recorder. 

"  There  is  not  a  defective  page  in  the  volume,  and  it  is  so  plainly 
written  that  a  writer  of  any  of  the  Pitmanic  systems  may  read  it 
with  ease."— National  S/>  tugrapht  r. 

Representative  British  Orations.  With  Introductions  by 
Charles  Kendall  Adams.  Printed  in  an  Easy  Reporting  Style  of 
Phonography,  with  Key  at  the  fool  of  each  page. 

Vol.  I.,  329  pages,  fcp.  Svo  .  contains  speeches  by  Sir  J.  Eliot, 
John  Pym,  Lord  Chatham,  Lord  Mansfield,  and  Edmund  Burke. 

Price,  60  cents  ;  cloth,  7.")  cents 

Vol.  II.  contains  speech,-   by  William   Pitt,   Charles  James   Fox 

and  Lord  Erskine Price,  60  cents ;  cloth,  75  cents 

The  Reporter's  Reader.  A  Series  of  Beading  Books  in  the 
Reporting  Style,  with  a  Key  at  the  fool  of  each  page.  Each  num- 
ber, of  which  ten  are  now  published,  contains 32  pages  in  a  wrapper. 

Price,  15  cents  each 
No.  1  — Ruth  and  Naomi  ;   a   Sermon  by  the  Rev,   Dr.   Lyman  Abbott. 

Wealth  and   Poverty  ;  a  Sermon  by  the  Rev.  Alfred  Rowland, 

L.L.B.,  P.. A. 
No.  2— Punishment  of   Death;    Rt.    Bon.   John   Bright.    How  I  Got 

Married  Without  "  Popping  the  Question." 
No.  3— Mr.  Gladstone  on    Mental   Culture.     Lord  Palmerston   and    the 

Reporters.    Looks. 
No.  4  —  Tne  House  of  Lords;  by  Lord  Salisbury.    The  Rejected  Bribe. 
No.  5 — On    Food;    a    Lecture   by    Prof.    Henry    E.    Armstrong,    Ph.D., 

Sec.  C.S. 
No.  6— Friendship ;  a  Sermon  by  Geo.  Dawson,  M  A.    The  Valley  of 

the  Shadow  of  Death  ;   Forgiveness  Ol  Sili-  .  Sermons  by  the 

Rev.  II.  P.  Browning,  M.A. 
No.  7— The  Commercial  Value  of  Idea-   and    Physical  Facts;    an  Ad 

dres-  by  Chauncey  Smith,  Esq.    The  study  of   Literature; 

an  Address  by  theRt.  Hon.  John  Morley,  M.P. 
No.  8— Law  Reports :  Bcresford    Hope  v.   Lady  Sandhurst    (Election 

Law);  Maiton  b.  Gorrill  (Election  Law);  Attorney-General  V. 

Mayor,  etc..  of  Croydon  (Free  Libraries' Acts);  In  re  P.rock- 

lebank  (Bankruptcy  >. 


10 

No.  9 — Home  Rule  :   Speech    by  Mr.  John    Morley.    Lord   Derby  on 

Evening  Schools. 
No.  10— The  Royal  Academy  Banquet. 

The  New  Testament,  in  an  Easy  Reporting  Style  of  Pho- 
nography. 368  pages.  Size  of  page,  634  ins.  by  4  ins.  Price,  roan, 
red  edges,  $1.50  ;  Turkey  Morocco,  gilt  edges,  $2.00. 

The  Book  of  Common  Prayer,  in  an  Easy  Reporting  Style 
of  Phonography.  296  pages.  Size  of  page,  6J4  ins.  by  4  ins.  Price, 
roan,  red  edges",  SI. 50:  Turkey  morocco,  gilt  edges,  $2.00.  Speci- 
men page  on  applicatton. 

The  Church  Services  (entire),  in  an  Easy  Reporting  Style 
of  Phonography.     960  pages Roan,  price.  $3.00  ;  morocco,  $4.00 

NATIONAL    PHONOGRAPHIC    LIBRARY. 

(Reporting  Style,  freely  vocalized). 

The  Autobiography  of  Benjamin  Franklin.    160  pages. 

Price,  35  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 
Thankful  Blossom.     By  Bret  Harte. 

Price,  paper,  35  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 
A  Christmas  Carol.     By  Charles  Dickens. 

Price,  35  cents  ;  cloth.  50centB 

The  Pickwick  Papers.    By  Charles  Dickens.    In  two  vols., 

fcp.  8vo,  cloth Price,  $1.00  each 

Tom  Brown's  Schooldays.     288  pages. 

Price,  60  rents  ;  cloth,  75  cents 
"  The  practice  which  ran  lie  secured  through  reading  this  volume 
should  be  <>f  the  greatest  value  to  t hose  wishing  to  master  the  sys- 
tem."   Journal  of  Education,  Boston. 

Hamlet,  in  the  Easy  Reporting  Style,  freely  vocalized. 
112  pages,  fcp.  8vo Price,  85  cents  ;  cloth,  B0  cents 

The  Merchant  of  Venice,  in  the  Easy  Reporting  Style. 
freely  vocalized.  80  pages,  fcp  8vo.  In  schools  and  colleges  these 
plays  w ill  prove  a  very  useful  aid  in  the  shorthand  studies. 

Price,  85  cents  ;  cloth,  5llrents 

Selections  from  American  Authors.  Containing  selections 
from  Mark  Twain.  E.  A.  Poe,  R.  II  Dana,  Mas  Adeler,  Nathaniel 
Hawthorne,  I'.ret  I  larte.  .lames  M  .  Bailey,  R.  Waldo  Kmerson.  P.  T. 
Itanium,  II.  D.  Thoreau,  -).  Penimore  Cooper,  Artemus  Ward,  O. 
\\  Holmes,  the  author  Of  "A  Had  Hoy's  Diary,"  ami  Col.  R.  G. 
[ngersoll,  This  unique  volume  forms  excellent  reading  practice 
in  conjunction  with  the  text-book  and  should  be  on  every  student1* 

and  teacher's  de-k Pi  Ice,  35  rents  ;  cloth,  5(1  rents 

"  A  most  beautiful  and  inviting  specimen  of  Isaac  Pitman's  Pho- 
nography, as  well  as  a  most  excellent  manual  of  American  litera- 
ture."—A.  D.  'WILT,  Prin.  Miami  (  'mil.  Coll.,  Dayton,  O. 

THE     PHONETIC    JOURNAL. 

Established  1812,  edited  by  the  inventor  of  Phonography,  21  pages. 
Specimen  copy  free.  <  lirculatlon  24,000  weekly.  Bach  issue  con- 
tains lOto  12  columns  of  the  Isaac  Pitman  Engraved  Shorthand,  in 
the  Learner's,  Corresponding,  and  Reporting  styles,  with   Key; 


11 

occasional  pages  of  Fac-simile  Notes  of  rapid  writing,  and  other 
matter  of  ureal  interest  to  writers  of  all  systems;  typewriting 
column,  special  column  "  American  Notes  and  News,"  etc.,  etc. 
No  phonographer  can  afford  to  be  without  it.  Terms  of  subscrip- 
tion, payable  in  advance  : — 

12  months,  weekly  issues  $1  GO 

6         ■  "  80 

8       "  "  50 

Special  rates  to  teachers  and  clubs. 

tBound  volumes  from  1848  to  1875  are  out  of  print.  Volumes  from 
1870  to  present  date,  $2.00  each,  post  free.  Handsome  covers  for 
binding  the  present  or  past  yearly  volumes  50  cents  each 

Cloth  Reading  Cases 50  cents  each 

The  Plwnographic  World,  the  leading  shorthand  periodical  in 
America,  says:  "The  shorthand  student  or  young  writer  is  not 
safe  when  he  leaves  the  schoolroom  and  the  text-book.  He  should, 
by  all  means,  subscribe  to  the  journal  published  in  the  direct  in- 
terests of  his  system,  and  he  should  continue  to  subscribe  until  by 
careful  comparison,  every  OV&im  he  makes,  agrees  exactly  with  that 
laid  down  by  his  author.  Every  student  and  young  writer  of  Isaac 
l'ii  man's  Phonography  should  subscribe  for  the  Phonetic  Journal." 

Frank  Harrison's  Shorthand  Magazine  (Boston)  remarks:  "Every 
one  should  subscribe  for  the  Phom  /<<■  Journal,  It  has  a  circulation 
of  24.000  copies  weekly,  and  contains  much  to  interest  all  stenog- 
rapher-." 

PITMAN'S    SHORTHAND    WEEKLY. 

Twelve  pages,  crown  Ito.  same  size  as  the  Phonetic  Journal.  Speci- 
men copy  free.  The  Wnkly  is  beautifully  printed  in  the  Re- 
porting, Corresponding,  and  Learner's  Styles  of  the  Isaac  Pitman 
Phonography,  profusely  illustrated,  and  printed  on  good  toned 
paper.  The  contents  consist  ol  stories  and  tales,  serial  and  com- 
plete ;  interesting  extracts;  amusing  paragraphs;  phonographic 
jokes  and  anecdote-.  It  aims  at  providing  reading  practice  in 
Phonography  of  a  light,  interesting,  entertaining  and  amusing  char- 
acter for  every  phonographer.  Terms  of  subscription  same  as  the 
Phonetic  Journal.  Half  yearly  volumes  containing  250  pages  of 
beautifully  printed  shorthand,  profusely  illustrated  by  the  best, 
artists,  and  elegantly  bound  in  cloth,  gilt,  pictorial  cover,     t  Vols.  I 

to  V  now  ready  Price,  each  $1.25 

Handsome  covers  for  binding  the  present  or  past,  volumes. 

Price,  5U  cent-  each 

f  Carte  de  Visite  of  Mr.  Isaac  Pitman. 

Price,  15  cents  ;  Cabinet,  30  cents 

f  Permanent  Woodburytype  Photograph  of  Mr.  Isaac 
Pitman,  Inventor  of  Phonography.  10x12  ins. 

Price,  post  -paid.  10  rents 

|  Permanent  Woodburytype  Cabinet  Photograph  of 
Mr.  T.  A.  Ueed     Price,  80  cents 

PHONOGRAPHIC    STATIONERY    AND 
SUPPLIES. 

Lead  Pencils.  The  ordinary  pencil  is  not  suitable  for 
Shorthand  writing  any  more  than  for  artists1  work.  These  pencils 
are  specially  manufactured  of  the  linest  grade  of  black  lead,  and 
every  pencil'  bears  the  name  of  "  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons."  and  without 
which  none  are  genuine.     Made  in  two  qualities. 


12 

No.  1.— Per  dozen,  50  cents  ;  per  half  gross,  $2.50  ;  per  gross,  $4.50. 

Sample  of  six,  post-paid,  25  cents  ;  rhree,  15  cents. 
No.  2.— Per  dozen,  $1.00;  per  half  gross,  $5.00;  per  gross,  $0.00. 

Sample  of  six,  post-paid,  50  cents  :  three,  30  cents. 

"The  pencils  are  all  and  more  than  you  claim  for  them:  in  fact, 
they  are  the  best  we  have  ever  used." — The  Birdett  Business 
College,  Boston,  Mass. 

"  I  always  use  the  Isaac  Pitman  pencil,  and  prefer  it  to  any  other 
— and  I  have  tried  many."— W.  W.  Kunton,  Official  Court  Reporter, 
Corning,  Iowa. 

Steel  Pens.  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons'  Steel  Pens  have  a  world- 
wide reputation  for  their  excellence  of  finish,  durability,  and 
uniformity.    Every  pen  bears  the  name  of  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons. 

The  Shorthand  Pen Per  box  of  12  dozen,  75  cents 

The  Reporting  Pen J4  gross  in  box,  50  cents 

The  Reservoir  Pen J4  gross  in  box,  50  cents 

The  Phonographic  Pen 2  dozen  in  box,  35  cents 

Sample  dozen,  assorted,  post-paid,  15  cents. 

Reporters'  Note-Books.  Made  of  superior  quality  paper 
and  suitable  for  pen  or  pencil.  No.  5  Note  Book  is  used  in  the  < 'di- 
ces of  the  Manhattan  Railway  Co.,  New  York,  and  other  large  cor- 
porations. 

No.  1.    80  pages,  4  xfiU;,  red  lines 5  cents  ;  post-paid,  8  cents 

No.  3.    200  pages,  4^x7^4,  blue  lines..  12  cents  ;  post-paid,  18  cents 
No.  5.    200  pages,  5x8,  blue  lines,  ruled  single  or  double,  elastic. 

bound 20  cents  ;  post  paid,  25  cents 

Note  Books  should  be  ordered  in  quantities  to  warrant  sending 
by  express  and  thus  savin-  extravagant  postage  required  on  this 
class  of  matter.  Wholesale  rates  on  application.  Neat  cloth  covers 
for  holding  Nos.  1  and  3  and  forminga  knee-rest.  Price,  SO  cents; 
post  paid.  2")  cents.  Ditto,  No.  5,  price,  SOcents;  post-paid,  85  cents. 
"We  use  your  notebooks  entirely  in  our  school,  and.  in  spile  of 
the  heavy  transportation  fees, prefer  them  to  any  other  make.'1 
The  Din -tan  Si  hool  of  Shorthand,  New  <  Orleans,  La. 

r.\  far  the  besl  reporting  l ks  we  have  seen,    our  scholars 

will   "ust.    mi    other. " — F.    R.     RUSCOE,    College    of    Commerce. 
Norwalk,  Conn. 

Reporting  Paper,  blue  lines,  for  pen  or  pencil. 

Per  quire,  10  cents;    post -tree,  it  cents.    Five  quires,  50  cents: 

post-free.  60  cents. 

Reporting  Covers,  to  bold  <>i r  more  quires  of  reporting 

paper,    which   call    be  removed    When    UBed.      These    covers    can    be 

used  for  an  indefinite  time. 

Cloth,  20  cents;  solid  leather,  60  cents;  solid  morocco,  leather 
lined,  $1  00. 
Phonographic  Writing  Paper,  ruled  blue,  packet   of  live 
quires 85 cents;  post-paid, 40 cents 

The  "  Fono  "  Stationery  Box,  equally  suitable  for  short- 
hand and  ordinary  correspondence,  containing  25  envelopes  and  25 
-hiei- or  paper,  specially  ruled  for  shorthand,  with  portrait  of  Mr. 
Isaac  Pitman,  and  ornamental  design  ;  Ruperior  cream  wove  paper. 

Price,  50  cents  ;    post-paid,  (ill  cents 


13 

Typewriting  Paper.     List  and  samples  on  application. 

Fountain  Pens.  The  Waterman  "  Ideal  "  is  the  most 
perfect  fountain  pen  made,  and  is  unequalled  for  shorthand  or 
longhand  writing.  The  gold  pens  arc  of  the  finest  quality,  and  arc 
warranted  for  live  years.  A  pen  selected  and  not  found  suitable 
will  be  exchanged  Full  descriptive  catalogue  on  application.  In 
ordering,  mention  whether  coarse,  medium,  or  fine  nib  is  required. 

No.  2,  88.50;  No.  4,  $4.00 
Bent  carefully  packed  and  post-paid  on  receipt  of  amount. 

"  Fono "  Pencil  Case  and  Fountain  Pen  Holder.  De- 
signed to  supply  a  demand  for  a  cheap  and  reliable  holder  for 
pencils  and  fountain  pens.  Made  of  the  very  best  roan,  leather 
lined.  The  case  folds  up,  and  occupies  less  space  than  an  ordinary 
pocket-book,  aud  is  secured  by  a  nickel-plated  clasp. 

Price.  ;")0  cents  ;    post-paid,  CO  cents 
Price    with   six  of    our    celebrated    Reporting    Pencils. 

7.">  cents:  post-paid,  85  cents 

"Fono"  Pencil  Sharpener.  A  perfect  peucil  sharpener, 
made  of  solid  brass,  with  Steel  cutter,  and  should  he  in  the  posses- 
sion of  every  stenographer Price,  35  cents 

Reporter's    Folding   Inkstand   for  the   pocket,    morocco 

covered,  wil  h  pen  rest. 

Price,  50c ;  post-paid,  55c  ;  large  size,  75c ;  post-paid,  85c 
The  "Safety  "  Patent  Inkstand,  nickel-plated  throughout, 

with  pen  rest Price,  75  cents  ;  post-paid,  85  cents 

WORKS    ON    SHORTHAND. 
IN    ORDINARY    TYPE. 

The  Shorthand  Writer.  A  complete  Guide  to  Commer- 
cial, Professional,  and  other  uses  of  Shorthand.  By  Thomas 
Allen  Heed.  This  volume  contains  Mr.  Reed's  accumulated  experi- 
ence of  half-a-century's  study  and  practice  of  the  Art  of  Snort- 
band,  as  a  reporter,  professional  shorthand  writer,  teacher,  lecturer. 
and  examiner.  In  ibis  work  Mr.  Reed  sums  up  the  experiences  of 
a  lifetime,  which  are  of  inestimable  value  to  writers  of  ail  Bystems. 
240  pages Cloth,  gilt,  price,  $1  00 

History  of  Shorthand.  By  Isaac  Pitman,  third  edition. 
228  pages Price,  75  cents  ;  cloth,  $1.00 

f  A  Biography  of  Isaac  Pitman.  By  Thomas  Allen  Heed. 
Illustrated  with  woodcuts  and  lac-simile  pages,  in  handsome  cloth 
binding,  on  specially  made  thick  paper,  cr.  8vo.    cloth,  price   $1  00 

The  Newspaper  World.  Essays  on  Press  History,  Past 
and  Present.    By  Alfred  Baker Price,  35  cents  :  cloth,  50 cents 

Reporting  Hints  and  Practice.  Designed  for  student- 
reporters  and  Others  qualifying  for  newspaper  work.  By  A. 
Baker,  Member  Institute  of  Journalists Cloth,  price,  35  ecu  is 

fPitman's   Shorthand   and  Typewriting  Year  Book  and 
Diary.     Ready  Dec.  1st.    Strongly  bound  in  boards. 
Price, 35 cents  ;  post  paid,  (Scents;  cloth,  interleaved  with 

blotting,  60  cents  ;  post-paid.  70  cents 

A  Chapter  in  the  Early  History  of  Phonography.  By 
Thomas  Allen  Rued.    With  a  Preface  by  Isaac  Pitman. 

Cloth,  price,  3.">  I 


14 

fThe  Bibliography  of  Shorthand.     By  Dr.   Westby-Gib- 

son,  Past-president  of  the  Shorthand  Society.  Comprising  a  list  of 
all  known  printed  Works  and  Manuscripts  on  Stenography  and 
Phonography,  by  English,  Colonial  and  American  authors  (includ- 
ing periodicals,  works  in  character,  and  the  best  magazine  articles), 
with  Introduction.    256  pages,  double  columns,  demy  8vo. 

Cloth,  price,  $2.00 

WORKS,    ETC.,    FOR    TEACHERS    OF 
PHONOGRAPHY. 

All  Teachers  of  Isaac  Pitman's  Phonography  are  requested  to  send 
their  address  for  registration  to  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons,  33  Union  Square. 
New  York.  Special  certificates  for  teachers.  Particulars  on  applica- 
tion. 

(Handbook  for  Shorthand  Teachers.  Containing  In- 
structions to  Teachers,  Lessons  on  the  Text-books,  etc. 

Price,  GO  cents  ;  cloth,  75  cents 
"  Goes  very  fully  into  the    method  of    teaching,  and  gives  an 
array  of  hints  which  should  enable  a  teacher  to  manage  his  class 
with  ease,  and  to  the  benefit  of  the  student." 

—National  Stenographer. 
Chart  of  the  Phonetic  Alphabet,  containing  the   Short- 
hand and  Printing  letters,  20  x  30  ins Price,  5  cents 

f  Charts  on  the  "  Phonographic  Teacher."  A  series  of  12 
large  Charts  35  by  S3  inches),  illustrating  the  principles  of  Phono- 
graphy as  developed  in  the  "Teacher.  Ready  for  hanging  on 
wall,  $2.00  the  complete  set ;  or  mounted  on  stout  cardboard,  2 on 

a  board Price,  $2.50 

Tracts  (in  common  spelling),  explanatory  and  recom- 
mendatory of  the  principles  and  practice  of  Phonetic  Shorthand. 

Free. 

A  Persuasive  to  the  Study  and  Practice  of  Phonography. 

10  pages,  royal  32mo,  in  attractive  tinted  cover,   and  space   being 

reserved  for  Teachers' terms.    By  a  judicious  distribution  of  this 

pamphlet,  pupils  can  be  secured,  and  publications  sold. 

Price,  25  cents  per  1(>0  ;  $i.00  per  1000 

WORKS  ON  TYPEWRITING. 

■|A  Manual  of  the  Typewriter.  A  Practical  Guide  to 
Commercial,  Literary,  Legal,  Dramatic,  and  all  classes  of  type- 
writing work.    Cloth, 96 pp., and 84 plates Price,  $i.iio 

A  Manual  of  the  Remington  Typewriter.  By  John  Har- 
rison, With  Exercises  and  Illustrations,  New  and  revised  edition. 
Adopted    by  the   Marshalltown  (Iowa),  and  other  High  Schools. 

186  pp.,  fcp.  Bvo Price.  85  cents ;  cloth,  60  cents 

"  No  learner  should  be  without  it."    .v.  F.  Evening  Telegram. 

Instructions  on  the  Remington  Standard  Typewriter. 
By  A.  I-:.  Morton.    Illustrated.    88  pp.,  8vo 80  cents 

Instructions  on  the  Caligraph  Typewriter.  Invaluable 
to  every  user  of  a  Caligraph,  or  to  those  who  wish  to  know  all 
abont  the  machine,    88  pages Price,  SO  cents 


15 

Instructions  on    the    Bar-Lock    Typewriter.     The   best 

work  mi  (his  machine  published,     Concise,  clear  and  practical. 

:>•„'  pages Price,  20  cents 

Instructions    on    the    Yost    Typewriter.      Contains    full 

directions  for  working  the  i  ost.    32  pages Price,  20  cents 

Typewriting    and   Typewriters;     And  How  to  Choose   a 

Machine.    Numerous  illustrations.    By  A.  E.Morton. 

Price,  •'!.")  cents 

EDUCATION   AND   OTHER   WORKS. 

f Pitman's  Pocket  Dictionary  of  the  English  Language. 
An  invaluable  companion  to  everyone  who  has  occasion  to  talk. 
read  or  write,  and  especially  valuable  to  every  Student  and  Btenog 
rapher.  It  is  complete,  practical,  accurate  and  convenient.  Shows 
all  irregular  participial  endings  of  verbs,  irregular  plural  forms  of 
nouns  etc.  8H2  pp.,  size  only  '  X  :!  \  .">  inches.  Weight  '■'>'  ounces. 
Primed  on  opaque  paper  of  superior  quality,  and  elegantly  bound 

in  lea!  her.  with  L'ilt  edges I 'rice.  "0  cents 

"Your  -Tocket   Dictionary'   is   an   exceedingly  handy  and   useful 

little  work,  and  should  lie  in  the  vest  | ket  ol  everybody." -W.  L. 

Mason,  Prin.  Metropolitan  School  of  Isaac  Pitman  Shorthand,  95 
Fifth  Avenue,  New  York. 

A  Complete  Guide  to  the  Improvement  of  the  Memory; 
or,  The  Science  of  Memory  Simplified,  with.  Applications  to  Lan- 
guages, History,  Geography,  Prose,  Poetry,etc.  By  the  Rev.  J.  II. 
Bacon,    136  pp.,  fcp.  8vo    .  Price,  paper,  85  cents ;  cloth,  SO  cents 

A  Guide  to  English  Composition.  With  Progressive 
Exercises.    By  the  Rev.  J,  ll.  Bacon,  author  of  "  A  Complete  Guide 

to  lie  improvement  of  the  .Memory."  etc.      11'.'  paires. 

Price, 85  cent-;  cloth, gilt, 50 cents 
Papers  on  Penmanship.     By  F.  C.  Cleaver      ..Price,  10 cents 
Book-keeping.      A    Learner's  Guide   to  its   Theory   and 
Practice.    By  David  Tolmie,  l.  S.  Sc. 

Price,  3.")  cents  ;  cloth,  50  cents 

PHONETIC    BOOKS. 

The   New  Testament  of  our    Lord    and    Saviour  Jesus 

Christ.      Crown  8V0,  lar^e  type Trice,  cloth,  $1.0(1 

Sheet  Lessons  (ll!)  for  use  in  classes,  for  teaching1  phonetic 

reading Price,  85  cents 

Tablets;  or.  The  Letters  of  the  Phonetic  Alphabet,  printed 
on  stiff  cardboard,  to  be  used  in  teaching  the  Alphabet,  and  ex- 
plaining it  at   lectures Trice.  15  cents 

First  Book  in  Phonetic  Reading.    With  "  Directions  to 

Teachers "  how  to  use  it.    Printed  in  large  type Price,  Scents 

Second    Book   in   Phonetic   Reading.     Large    type    and 

illustrated      Price,  10  cents 

Third  Book  in  Phonetic  Reading Price.  10  cents 

Fourth  Book  in  Phonetic  Reading      Price,  10  cent- 
Fifth  or  Transition  Book  ...  Price,  10  cents 


16 

WHY 

THE  ISAAC  PITMAN  PHONOGRAPHY 

HAS  REACHED  THE  FOREMOST  RANK. 

BECAUSE  it  is  the  ORIGINAL  and  STANDARD,  and  for  58  years 
has  been  thoroughly  tested  for  rapid  writing  and  reading,  and 
has  proved  its  capacity  for  every  kind  of  reporting. 

BECAUSE  it  has  been  undergoing  a  process  of  gradual  improve- 
ment down  to  the  present  day,  and  that  system  which  possesses 
the  greatest  facilities  for  improvements  has  a  very  decided  advan- 
tage over  those  that  have  not  these  facilities.  Notwithstanding 
these  improvements,  uniformity  of  writing  has  been  preserved, 
and  at  the  same  time,  there  lias  been  steady  advancement.  While 
it  is  the  oldest  system,  it  is  also  the  newest. 

BECAUSE,  "Not  to  progress,  is  to  retrograde."  No  one  for  a 
moment  supposes  that  shorthand  writing  is  yet  perfect,  any  more 
than  our  means  of  locomotion,  of  lighting  and  heating,  or  any 
other  mechanical  or  educational  works  are.  Why  should  the  in- 
vention of  any  shorthand  system  be  regarded  as  perfect  a.t  the  Jlrst 
attempt,  any  more  than  that  of  any  other  invention  f 

BECAUSE  thesechanges  have  not  been,  as  in  most  other  systems, 
the  creation  of  a  single  mind,  but  the  united  deliberation  of  an 
army  of  expert  writers  and  teachers  throughout  the  world;  the 
result  being  that  the  Isaac  I'iiinan  system  has  expedients  for 
brevity  and  legibility  that  no  other  Bystem  possesses. 

BECAUSE  the  Isaac  Finnan  system  has  more  periodical  literature 
and  books  by  one  hundred  percent,  than  all  other  systems  com 
bined.  and  is  the  only  phonography  that  supplies  sufficient  reading 
mailer  to  meet  the  growing  requirements  of  the  student  ami  the 
professional  shorthand  writer.  The  readingof  accurate  shorthand 
familiarizes  the  mind  with  the  "best  forms,"  and  is  of  valuable 
assistance  in  acquiring  a  high  rate  of  speed. 

BECAUSE,  owing  to  the  immense  foil  owing  of  this  system,  new  and 
improvt  a  editions  of  the  text  honks  are  issued  from  time  to  time, 

whereas  in  other  systems  such  a  course  is  impossible  owing  to 
their  limited  sale. 


\  n\  one  wishing  to  pee  the  statements  here  made  more  fully  illus- 
I  rated  are  referred  to  a  82-page  booklet  entitled 

"WHICH  SYSTEM  OF  SHORTHAND  SHOULD  WE  LEARN?" 
ByE.  Barker.    Gratis  and  post-paid. 

The  Journal  of  Education  (Boston),  speaking  of  this  brochure,  says  ■ 
"Contains  a  remarkably  clear  statement  of  the  principles  of  the  different 
systems,  is  carefully  written  and  based  upon  clear  reasoning.    Every 

one  should  see n re  this  es-ay  before  deciding  whieh  system  to  study." 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


OCT  2  61349 

KB  5      1955 

•   N 3  0 1956 
UAH  S      m 

NOV  211961 
SEP     9  1964 


R  EC  E  I 

MAIN  LOAN 


AUG  ^4 


L 


A.M. 

7|8|9jlO|U|12l  1 


ROM  \m  w 

!!Ri        W    ***^^ 

APR  1  7 


CD 


S£P« 


URL    SFP  3  11.^'i. 

6EP24 

REC'D  LD-UR 


A 


WAY  2 1  1< 


DES 


964 


P* 


wec 


DCT  0  9 

<-/ 


0l)EF2"WkS  FROM  drtlL  R£*.      i 
"'•'  KBB10-UR1 

NOV  2  7   1991 


•  ••»*»•     «W 


wf 


[•'..rni  L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)44  I 


'JWIVERSJTY  ot  CAUrO«Ml» 

AT 

-      ,  ANGFJLKS 


.  .  •  i  >   A  DV 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    001  168  635    9 


